2100 Ca001 - en P

MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
CATALOG
• CENTERLINE® 2100
Motor Control Centers
CENTERLINE®, CenterONE®, ControlLogix®, DeviceLogix™, IntelliCENTER®, PowerFlex®, Product Selection Toolbox™, Rockwell Automation®,
RSView®, SMC™, SMC™ 3, SMC™ Dialog Plus, SMC™ Flex, Powermonitor™, ArcShield™, Allen-Bradley® are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Publication 2100-CA001F-EN-P – August 2008 Copyright ©2008 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Printed in USA.
Supersedes Publication 2100-CA001E-EN-P – August 2007
Quick Index
Bulletin Page Bulletin Page Bulletin Page Bulletin Page

Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number
2102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 2123F . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 2162T . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 2183J. . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
2103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 2126E . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 2163Q . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 2183L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Sections with Full Cabinet Mounting
2106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 2126F . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 2163R . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 2190 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Plates, SCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2106 Space Saving
2126J . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 2163T . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 2191F . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 IntelliCENTER Technology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
NEMA. . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 2126K . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 2164Q . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 2191M . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Miscellaneous Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
2107 Space Saving Sections with Full Cabinet Mounting
2127E . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 2164R . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 2192F . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
NEMA. . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Plates, SCII. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
2112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 2127F . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 2165Q . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 2192M . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Unpopulated Plug-in Units . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
DeviceNet Power Supplies and Network
2112 Vacuum. . . . . . 44 2127J . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 2165R . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 2193F . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Linking Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
2112 Space Saving
2127K . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 2180E . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 2193LE. . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Configuration Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
NEMA. . . . . . . . . . . . 46
2113. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 2154H. . . . . . . . . . . . .130 2180J . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 2193M . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Hardware Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
2113 Vacuum. . . . . . 45 2154J . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 2180L . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 2193PP . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Appendix
2113 Space Saving 2155H. . . . . . . . . . . . .130 2181B . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 2195 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
NEMA. . . . . . . . . . . . 46 2155J . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 2182E . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 2196 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Heater Element Selection Tables . . . . 227
2122E . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 2160R . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 2182J . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 2197 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Full Load Currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
2122F. . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 2162Q. . . . . . . . . . . . .149 2182L . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 2196Z. . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Interrupting Capacity Ratings . . . . . . . 234
2123E . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 2162R . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 2183E . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 2197Z. . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Short Circuit Withstand Ratings . . . . . 235
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Table of Contents
General Information 1
Vertical Sections and IntelliCENTER® Technology 2
Units 3
Contactor and Starter Units 4
Metering Units 5
Main and Feeder Units 6
Lighting and Power Panel Units 7
Transformer Units 8
Miscellaneous Units 9
Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and
10
Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, Transformer and Miscellaneous Units
Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Space Saving NEMA Starter Units 11
Combination Soft Starter (SMC) Units 12
Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Combination Soft Starter (SMC) Units 13
Variable Frequency AC Motor Drive Units 14
Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor Drive
15
Units
Programmable Controller Units and Marshalling Panels 16
Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Programmable Controllers and Marshalling Panels 17
Configuration Tables 18
Hardware and Kits 19
Appendix 20
15
Index 21
i
1 General Information
2 Vertical Sections and IntelliCENTER® Technology
3 Units
4 Contactor and Starter Units
5 Metering Units
6 Main and Feeder Units
7 Lighting and Power Panel Units
8 Transformer Units
9 Miscellaneous Units
10
11 Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Space Saving NEMA Starter Units
12 Combination Soft Starter (SMC) Units
13 Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Combination Soft Starter (SMC) Units
14 Variable Frequency AC Motor Drive Units
15
Units
16 Programmable Controller Units and Marshalling Panels
17 Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Programmable Controllers and Marshalling Panels
18 Configuration Tables
19 Hardware and Kits
20 Appendix
15
21 Index
ii
CENTERLINE® 2100 Motor Control Center CENTERLINE® 2100 Motor Control Center
with IntelliCENTER Technology
Service and Storage Conditions
Publication Overview CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs conform to NEMA standard ICS
Publication 2100-CA001x-EN-P is a catalog used for 1-1993 for service and storage conditions. All MCCs should
CENTERLINE® 2100 Motor Control Centers (MCCs). have an ambient operating temperature above 0oC but
o
shall not exceed 40 C with up to 95% non-condensing
humidity. If the equipment is stored, the ambient
Footnotes temperature
o
shall be above -30oC but shall not exceed
65 C. In addition, MCCs have an altitude class of 2km. The
While using this publication, please read all footnotes altitude class of 2 km designates equipment for installation
throughout the publication. Footnotes contain necessary where the altitude does not exceed 2000 meters (6600
information about the configuration and limitations of feet). For installation above 2000 meters, Contact your
sections, units and options being offered. local Rockwell Automation Sales Office for derating
requirements.
Other Resource Publications for
CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers UL/cUL/CSA Marking
1
CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs are listed by Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. (file number E49289) as complying with
Publication Title Standard Safety UL 845 (UL) and either listed by
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or certified by Canadian
2100-SR012x-EN-P CENTERLINE 2100 MCC Specification Guide Standards Association (CSA) as complying with standard
2100-SR003x-EN-P CENTERLINE 2100 MCC Specification Checklist C22-2, No. 254-05 (cUL or CSA). CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs
2100-4.2 Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension
also meet the requirements in Mexican standard for MCCs,
NMXJ-353-ANCE-2006. The MCC product, sections and
2100-IN012x-EN-P CENTERLINE 2100 User Manual units will therefore carry the respective marking unless
2100-6.0.2 Renewal Parts Publication otherwise indicated in the footnotes on the various pages
in this publication.
Power System Configuration Considerations for
2100-AT003x-EN-P Selection of CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs ISO 9001 Certification
2100-SR008x-EN-P DeviceNet Specification Guide The facilities that develop and manufacture CENTERLINE
2100 MCCs are located in Milwaukee and Richland Center,
2100-TD019x-EN-P DeviceNet Hardware Manual Wisconsin, Cambridge, Ontario, Canada, Tecate, Mexico
Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales and Guadalupe, Mexico. All facilities have been certified
representative, Allen-Bradley distributor or visit to be in conformance to the requirements of Quality
www.rockwellautomation.com/literature. Management System ISO 9001. These facilities presently
are certified by Det Norske Veritas to ISO 9001: 2000,
CENTERLINE 2100 MCC Applications certificate number CERT-9379-2004-AQ-HOU ANAB,
CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs are suitable for use on 3-phase, effective May 30, 2007.
3-wire or 4-wire, Wye connected power systems, rated 600
V or less, 50 or 60 hertz, which have a solidly grounded
neutral. CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs may also be used on
other power system configurations, however, some units
and options may not be available. Refer to Appendix page
247 for additional information.
Discount Schedule A6 1
CE Marking NEMA/IEC Enclosure Comparison
2 The European Union (EU) has established a program The following table is a comparison of Allen-Bradley
whereby products are tested and qualified to meet its CENTERLINE 2100 MCC NEMA enclosure type numbers to
harmonized standards and to fulfill the EN Directives. IEC Standard 60529, Classification of Degrees of Protection
3 Upon completion of this testing and qualification, special
documentation is required so the products may bear CE
Provided by Enclosures. The comparison is based on data
from tests conducted on the CENTERLINE 2100 MCC
marking. Included with this program is the requirement enclosures and the NEMA enclosure type test
for special instruction literature, product labeling, quality requirements, which meet or exceed the IEC enclosure
programs, special design requirements, etc. Generally, the classification designation test requirements
CENTERLINE 2100 MCC product can fulfill these 2
requirements, but due to the customization that is
5 required, the CE marking of the product is available only NEMA Type 1 vented (with or without gasketed doors) IP20
on the Engineered delivery program. In case of variable NEMA Type 1 vented with filters (with or without gasketed doors) IP30
frequency drives (as well as other solid-state devices), the NEMA Type 1 non-vented (without gasketed doors) IP40
EU deemed it necessary to add an EMC directive NEMA Type 1 with drip hood = NEMA Type 2 (with or without
(2004/108/EC). This directive requires more stringent RF IP41
gasketed doors)
emission and immunity standards than normal. To meet
these requirements and carry the CE mark, the NEMA Type 3R IP44
CENTERLINE 2100 drive packages can be adapted with NEMA Type 12 without bottom plates IP53
EMC tested RFI filters and additional shielding hardware. NEMA Type 12 with bottom plates IP54
These special packages may require larger MCC
enclosures. Note: The CE requirement is for the European NEMA Type 4 IP65
Union/Community and is not a mandate for other parts of
the world. For more information, visit NEMA Enclosure Type Descriptions
http://www.ab.com/certification/#cemark.
NEMA Type 1:
IEC 60439 Type 1 units and sections are intended for indoor use,
The CENTERLINE 2100 structures and many units fulfill primarily to provide a degree of protection against
IEC 60439 type tested assembly (TTA) and unit contact with the enclosed equipment in locations
requirements. Should custom designs and modifications where unusual service conditions do not exist. The
be required, these can be qualified to IEC 60439 as enclosures are designed to meet the rod entry and
partially pre-tested assembly (PTTA) and unit rust resistance design tests. The enclosure is sheet
requirements. steel, treated to resist corrosion.
American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) NEMA Type 1 with gasketed doors (sometimes referred to as 1G):
CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs have fulfilled the requirements Type 1 with gasketed unit doors are completely
and are approved by the American Bureau of Shipping gasketed around the perimeter of the unit doors. All
(certificate 99-SB55875-X). CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs do gasketing is closed cell neoprene.
meet ABS shipping requirements, but due to required
customization, ABS maritime shipping is available only on NEMA Type 3R:
the Engineered program. Non-walk-in front mounted only. Door-within-a-door
NEMA Defined construction. Type 3R units and sections are intended
for outdoor use, primarily to provide a degree of
NEMA—National Electrical Manufacturers Association. protection against falling rain and to avoid damage
from the formation of ice on the enclosure. They are
NEMA Class designed to meet rod entry, rain, external icing and
The following is a description of Class I, as paraphrased rust resistance design tests. They are not intended to
from NEMA standard ICS 18-2001: Class I motor control provide protection against conditions such as dust,
centers shall consist of mechanical groupings of internal condensation or internal icing.
combination motor control units, feeder tap units, other
units and electrical devices arranged in a convenient NEMA Type 4:
assembly. They include connections from the common Non-walk-in front mounted only. Door-within-a-door
horizontal power bus to the units. They do not include construction. Type 4 units and sections are designed
interwiring or interlocking between units or to remotely for indoor and outdoor use, primarily to provide
mounted devices, nor do they include control system protection against windblown dust and rain,
engineering. Only diagrams of the individual units are splashing water and hose-directed water. They are
supplied. also designed to remain undamaged by the formation
NEMA Class II interwiring offers the addition of of ice on the enclosure. They are designed to meet
interlocking and wiring between units as specifically hosedown, external icing, rod entry and
described in overall control system diagrams supplied by rust-resistance design tests. The enclosures are not
the purchaser. Contact your local Rockwell Automation designed to protect against internal condensation or
Sales Office for availability. internal icing.
NEMA Type NEMA Type 12 [1]:
Class I motor control centers can be provided in NEMA Type 12 enclosures are intended for indoor use,
Type A or B construction: primarily to provide a degree of protection against
• Type A—User’s power and control connections are dust, falling dirt and non-corrosive dripping liquids.
made directly to the device within the unit. They are designed to meet drip, dust and rust
• Type B—Terminal blocks are supplied for user’s resistance tests. They are not intended to provide
control termination within unit insert. On NEMA size 1 protection against conditions such as internal
through 3 starter units and 30 A to 100 A contactors condensation.
units, terminal blocks are also supplied for user’s load
terminations (NEMA Type BT). NEMA Space Saving [1] This publication refers to standard NEMA Type 12 design (i.e., standard sheet
units do not include power terminal blocks (NEMA steel). For stainless steel NEMA Type 12 enclosures, Contact your local Rockwell
Type BD). Automation Sales Office.
2 Discount Schedule A6
Delivery Programs DeviceNet™ Products
CENTERLINE 2100 MCC products are available on Look for DeviceNet capable devices throughout this 2
several quick delivery programs and limited to publication to find units and options that are DeviceNet
equipment described in this publication. ready to use in CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs with
IntelliCENTER technology. The components used in these
units are DeviceNet compatible and ODVA certified. Also,
3
SC and PE:
the installation conforms to the rules and guidelines of
Products indicating SC or PE delivery provide SC-I and PE-I The Planning and Installation Manual for DeviceNet.
delivery. When options are added or specified for a section, IntelliCENTER technology (power supply unit, built-in
time of delivery is determined by the longest lead time. cabling system, unit cables, etc.) is UL and cUL listed and
SC-I: meets the requirements of a Class 1 power limited circuit
(in Canada, Class 1 extra-low-voltage power circuit). Per 5
This program offers stock-supported, individual plug-in units NEC, this circuit is supplied from a source that has a rated
as well as vertical sections with field installed plug-in units. output of not more than 30 Volts and 1000 Volt-Amperes.
This program applies to all plug-in units and vertical sections The power supply unit has an 8A, 24V output and the
unless they are labeled SC-II. The SC-I program provides the DeviceNet cabling is rated 8A, 600V. See NEC Article 725
quickest delivery. for more detailed information.
SC-II:
This program offers stock-supported vertical sections, with
Type 2 Protection
factory-installed units for a completely assembled MCC. This is Short circuit coordination is defined in IEC 60947-4-1.
either SC or SC-II. Units specifically labeled SC-II must be Type 2 protection (also referred to as Type 2
factory installed and are not for plug-in installation in the field. coordination) is obtainable when the fuses are specified
and sized according to publication 100-2.8, Certified Type
PE-I and PE-II: 2 Short Circuit Coordination with Allen-Bradley Motor
Shading indicates equipment that is offered on the PE-I or Starters. Only Type 1 coordination is available, other than
PE-II program. These programs offer a broad range of on specified fuses and circuit breaker units.
pre-engineered units and sections and a slightly longer lead
time than our SC programs. While PE-I units are available for Motor Applications
plug-in installation in the field, units specifically labeled PE-II The Motor Control Center Business has made engineering
must be factory installed. evaluations for the protective device (circuit breaker or
Engineered: fuse) selection, sizing and setting range based on the
protection rules/requirements and motor criteria as
Equipment or modifications not available on the above stipulated in NEC, NEMA and UL standards (e.g., motor
delivery programs may be available on the Engineered full load currents [FLCs], X/R ratios, lock rotor currents,
program. This program offers the complete line of assembled nominal utilization voltages, etc.). Should the motor
motor control equipment, custom wired for the customer’s application have criteria that deviate from those stated in
needs. Additionally, a wide range of special control and bus the aforementioned standards, higher FLC and/or motor
options are offered, making this our most versatile delivery inrush currents (greater than 1300% of the nominal FLC)
program. Contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office may be experienced (e.g., special motors, non-standard
or Allen-Bradley distributor for more information. NEMA motors, energy efficient motors, Design E motors,
IEC Type N motors, etc.). To address these cases, consult
Delivery Time will be based on the equipment with the longest publications 2100-TD001x-EN-P and 2100-TD002x-EN-P
lead time. Quicker delivery is possible when equipment is (for circuit breaker applications), publication
separated and ordered according to the delivery category. For 2100-TD003x-EN-P (for power fuse applications) and the
example, if an order has one engineered plug-in unit and the NEC for selection guidance. For further assistance or
remaining units and sections are SC-II - order the engineered information, contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales
unit as a separate item. The SC-II units and sections will ship on Office.
the SC-II delivery program and only the engineered unit will
have a longer delivery time. Documentation
Delivery Program Indications For assembled motor control centers, the customer is
supplied with a copy of the motor control center layout
Delivery programs are indicated in the right column on all and specification (Form 385) and publication
pages. PE delivery program is indicated by shaded cells. 2100-IN012x-EN-P, CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control
3 Centers User Manual. Publication 2100-IN040x-EN-P,
Receiving, Handling and Storing Motor Control Centers, is
Catalog Number attached to the outside packaging of each shipping block.
Delivery
Wiring Type B—Class 1 Information on bus torquing is located on the inside of
Program
NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ gasket each vertical wireway door. Documentation for individual
2112B-FA_-__ SC units consists of a copy of the unit wiring diagram and
installation instructions. Field termination and torquing
2112BB-GA_-__ PE-II requirements for units are included on the unit wiring
diagrams. This documentation may be located in a
Seismic Applications centralized wiring diagram holder or other location
depending on configuration. Manuals for SMC units, AC
CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs meet the requirements for drive units, PLC units, etc. are included in a centralized
Uniform Building Code (UBC) Zone 4 seismic applications location in each MCC containing these products.
and comply with IBC 2000 & 2006 seismic criteria. See
Appendix page 246 for more information.
Up to three electronic documentation CDs can be also be
provided at no additional cost for each MCC. The CD
2 contains the following:
• Equipment list (elevation, layout specification)
drawings
3 • One-line diagrams (if requested)
• Unit wiring diagrams
• Spare parts list
• User and installation manuals for Rockwell
Automation products, supplied in the specific motor
control center
5 • Test reporting
For other documentation, refer to publication
2100-CA003x-EN-E, Low Voltage Motor Control Centers
Documentation Catalog. For more information, contact
your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office.
Post Shipment Support
• Field Service • Field Complaints
• Repair & Modifications • Technical Issues
• Code 10 Authorization • Warranty Issues
• Domestic and International Renewal Parts Order
Services
CENTERLINE 2100 MCC:
Email: RAMCCSupport@ra.rockwell.com
Fax: 1-414-382-4045
Phone: 1-440-646-5800
Select Options 2, 5, 4 for Allen-Bradley Brand Products,
Motor Control Centers, Hardware Support
CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs with IntelliCENTER technology:
Email: RAICTechSupport@ra.rockwell.com
Fax: 1-414-382-0505
Phone: 1-440-646-5800
Select Options 2, 5, 3 for Allen-Bradley Brand Products,
Motor Control Centers, IntelliCENTER Support
General Terms and Conditions of Sale
A copy of the general terms and conditions of sale for
CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers can be obtained
at www.rockwellautomation.com/termsofsale.
Serial Number and Series Letter Information
• From 1980 to 1996, only numbers 600000 to 999999 were used. 2
• Refer to Series Identification for the implementation date of series letters on sections and units.
• The serial numbers of sections are on the serial plate on the wireway door, for special width sections, the nameplate
is located on the section door. On special width sections, the nameplate is located on the section door. 3
• The serial numbers of units are on the nameplate on the bottom of the units.
• SC-I sections or units will have a series letter after the unit or section catalog number.
• In late 1995, some SC, SC-II and PE orders were entered on PASSPORT.
4
CENTERLINE 2100
Bulletin 2400 5
Year Factory Order No. Serial Numbers Series Series Units
Start End Start End Section Unit
1971 704403 807499 959060 971209 A A None
1972 807500 121409 971210 983266 A A None
1973 121500 346999 983267 996532 A A None
996535 999946
1974 347000 539999 A A None
A128502 A483339
1975 540000 719199 A483344 B677442 A A None
1976 719200 933199 B677452 C933199 A-B A-B None
1977 933200 268699 D933200 D268699 B B None
1978 268700 526199 E268700 E526199 B B None
1979 526200 748699 F526200 F748699 B-C B-C None
1980 748700 898049 G748700 G898049 C C None
1981 898050 661299 H898050 H661299 C-D C-D-E None
1982 661300 804249 J661300 [1] J804249 [1] D-E D-E-F-G None
1983 804250 948440 K804250 K948440 E-F F-G None
1984 948441 693587 L948441 L693587 F F-G-H-J None
1985 693588 849069 M693588 M849069 G H-J None
1986 849070 612263 N849070 N612263 G-H-J H-J-K None
1987 612264 791331 P612264 [1] P791331 [1] J K None
1988 791332 991197 R791332 [1] R991197 [1] J K None
1989 991198 834534 T991198 [1] T834534 [1] J K None
1990 834535 704948 W834535 [1] W704948 [1] J-K K-M None
1991 704949 995816 X704949 X995816 K M A
1992 995817 732348 Y995817 Y732348 K M A-B-C
1993 732349 773410 Z932349 Z773410 K N A-C
1994 773411 795559 A773411 A795559 K N-P A-C
1995 795560 818971 B795560 B818971 K N-P A-C
818972 824311 C818972 C824311 A-C
1996 K-L P-Q
NPR624 QBH320 CNPR624 CQBH320 D
824312 N/A D824312 N/A
1997 L Q D
QBH321 RPH250 DQBH321 DRPH250
1998 RPH251 TDQ341 ERPH251 ETDQ341 L R D
1999 TDQ342 VZM602 FTDQ342 FVZM602 L R D
2000 VZM603 XWY931 GVZM603 GXWY931 L T D
2001 XWY932 BDPW81 HXWY932 HBDPW81 M U D
2002 BDPW82 CBJD56 JBDPW82 JCBJD56 M U-V D
2003 CBJD57 CYMV52 KCBJD57 KCYMV52 M U-V D
2004 CYNR34 DXSK68 LCYNR34 LDXSK68 M U-V D
2005 DXSK69 FYFW68 MDXSK69 MFYFW68 M X D
2006 FYFW69 GYTT25 NFYFW69 NGYTT25 M X-Y D
2007 GYTT26 JDKT40 PGYTT26 PJDKT40 M X-Y D
2008 JDKT41 RJDKT41 M X-Y D
[1] Prefix letters I, O, Q, S, U and V are not used.
Series Identification for Sections
2 This table gives a brief explanation of the series letter changes that have taken place since the original design of the
CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Center.
5
3 Sections
Series Scope Description of Change Date Implemented in U.S.
Letter
A [1] — Original design February 1971
5 B [1] All Changed terminal blocks November 1976

C [1] All Elimination of external mounting channels June 1979
D [1] All Reverse fed 2192 and 2193 April 1981
[1] All Redesign gasketing October 1982
E
Modified top horizontal wireway pan to accept units with handle interlock in topmost
F [1] All space factor October 1983
G [1] 42K 42K bracing—incorporates new bus support and cover January 1985
G [1] 65K 65K bracing—incorporates new bus support and cover July 1985
H All New hinge design January 1986
Changed handle, operating mechanism and circuit breaker to Cutler-Hammer Series
J All October 1986
C, 150A, 250A and 400A frame
K All Changed to new unit grounding system May 1990
L All Changed to new 600A-1200A circuit breaker operating mechanism May 1996
M All Changed to serpentine DeviceNet cabling system May 2001
[1] Replacement and renewal parts are no longer supported. Consult MCC Technical Support.
Complete new series units with comparable features and options can be retrofitted into any series of structures
as shown in the table on 8.
Section Nameplate Data
When communicating with Rockwell Automation about a particular Allen-Bradley motor control center, the catalog
number or serial number and series letter are required to properly identify the equipment. Refer to publication
2100-IN012x-EN-P, CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers User Manual, for more information.
Each vertical section has a nameplate (see the figure below)

located on the vertical wireway door. On special width
sections, the nameplate is located on the section door.
Information on the section nameplate includes:)
• Catalog number (serial number
• Series letter of the section
• Maximum bus bar voltage and current rating
• Section location number
Unit Label Data

When communicating with Rockwell Automation about a particular Allen-Bradley motor control center, the catalog
number or serial number and series letter are required to properly identify the equipment. Refer to publication
2100-IN012x-EN-P, CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers User Manual, for more information.
Each unit has a unit label located inside the unit on the bottom plate. See the figure below. Information on the unit
nameplate includes:
• Serial number Unit Label Data for units shipped on the SC or PE Delivery Programs
• Series letter
• Factory order number
• Catalog string number
• Unit location
• System voltage
NOTE: CAT number for
units supplied on the
Engineered Delivery Program will have a unique catalog number based on the factory order number. e.g.
YULDBCN99/1AF (assembled MCCs) or 2100U-LDBCN99/1 (individually ordered units).
Series Identification for Units
This table gives a brief explanation of the series letter changes that have taken place since the original design of the 2
CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Center.
6
Units 3
Series Scope Description of Change Date Implemented in U.S.
Letter
A [1] — Original design February 1971
B [1] All sizes Changed terminal blocks November 1976
5
C [1] All sizes Changed handle mechanism to Cutler-Hammer MCPs June 1979
D [1] Size 5 Changed from ITE to A-B 400A disconnect April 1981
E [1] All sizes Changed from Bulletin 709 series K starters to Bul. 500 line starters April 1981
F [1] All sizes Redesign of gasketing, wraparound and unit support pan for Bulletin 700 line October 1982
G [1] All sizes Redesign of gasketing, wraparound and unit support pan for Bulletin 500 line October 1982
H [1] All sizes Changed to new door, CB mechanism and control station April 1984
Size 5 Changed to Bulletin 500 series L October 1984
J [1] Size 3 Changed to new PCP 100A disconnect December 1988
Size 6 Changed to Bulletin 500 series B starters October 1988
Size 1-5 CB units and size 1-2 Changed handle, operating mechanism and circuit breaker to Cutler-Hammer Series C, 150A,
K disc units 250A and 400A frame October 1986
L 21A through 54A Changed to Bulletin 100 line contactors in 21A, 30A and 45A SMC units and original design November 1989
24A, 35A and 54A SMC units
M All sizes Changed to new unit grounding system and 600A, 800A and 1200A bolted pressure switch May 1990
Changed to PCP 200A and 400A disconnect, rerated vacuum Bulletin 2112 and 2113 and new
N All sizes pilot device offerings January 1993
0.5 SF CB units 2103L, 2113,
P External auxiliary on circuit breakers April 1994
2193
Q All sizes and ratings New disconnect external auxiliary contacts and new 600A-1200A circuit breaker operating May 1996
mechanism
Redesign and upgrade of ratings for 24A-500A SMC-2 and SMC-PLUS units. Original design
SMC units of SMC Dialog Plus units. August 1997
R 1200A 2193 Redesign of 1200A, 2193F and 2193M units November 1997
800A 2193 Changed circuit breakers to MDL Frame November 1998
225A 2193F Changed circuit breakers from J Frame to F Frame October 1999
2000A 2193 Changed to Flange Mounted Operating Handle
T All sizes Changed the Bulletin 800MR and Bul. 800T-PS pilot devices to Bulletin 800Es November 2000
All 1.5 space factor units Changed unit bottom plate
All except 2100-SD1 Changed to new Bulletin 1497 control circuit transformer July 2001
U
2100-SD1 Changed smoke detector head and base components November 2001
2162Q, 2163Q, 2164Q, 2165Q Redesign of 240-480V PowerFlex 70 and release of 600V PowerFlex 70 April 2002
2162R, 2163R, 2164R, 2165R Original release of PowerFlex 700 Beginning July 2002
2154H, 2155H Original release of SMC-3 Beginning November 2002
V 2154J, 2155J Original release of SMC-Flex Beginning April 2004
2112, sizes 3, 4 and 5 Redesign to reduced space factor with Class J fuse clip April 2004
2162T, 2163T Original release of PowerFlex 40 September 2004
2107, 2113, size 3 Reduced space factor April 2005
2162Q, 2163Q Reduced space factor, changed CCT with integral fuses April 2005
X
All sizes 800F Pilot Devices August 2005
Y 2154J, 2155J, 108 A and 135 A Redesign to change units from frame mounted to plug-in design March 2006
Complete new series units with comparable features and options can be retrofitted for any series of structures as shown in the table on
page 8.
Series Lettering—Units and Sections
2 When using sections in conjunction with units of different series letters, consult the MCC Modifications for Unit and
Structure Compatibility table below. All sections in this publication are series letter L; all units are series letter Q and later.
In 1982, modifications were made to improve the integrity of the gasketing between the unit door and structure of NEMA
3 Type 1 with gasket and Type 12 sections. This has been accomplished by gasketing the structure instead of the unit door.
The change applies to all CENTERLINE 2100 units with series letter F and later and all sections series letter E and later.
Also, when series H and later units are installed in a series A through E section in the topmost unit location, a new top
horizontal wireway pan is required.
MCC Modifications for Unit and Structure Compatibility 7
Requires
5 No Requires Style 3 Requires Requires Requires Requires Requires
Additional Style Style 3 Unit Alternate Top Door Retrofit Ground
Plug-In Units 1 Unit Unit
Parts Support Pan Horizontal Gasketing
If Mounted in Required Support Pan Support w/ Bushing Wireway Pan Kit Kit [3] Bus Kit [4]
this Type of Pan
2100H-NA4A1
Section [1],[2] 2100H-UA1 2100H-NA4J1 2100-GJ10 2100H-R1
2100H-UAJ1 2100H-UJ1 2100H-USPA1 2100H-GS1
Space Series — page 2100H-R2
See page 216 See page See page 216 2100H-NA4J2 See213
2100H-USPJ1 2100H-NA4A2 See page See214
page
Factor
216 217
See page 213
A-E [5] 9 — — — — — — —
NEMA Type 1
1.0 or larger F-L [5] — 9 — — 9 [6] — — —
Series A-D [5]
M or later [7] — 9 — — 9 [6] — — 9
0.5 [2] N or later — — — 9 — — 9 ¸
NEMA Type 1 A-E [5] — — 9 — — — — [4]
Series E-J [5],[8] 1.0 or larger F-L [5] 9 — — — — — — —

M or later [7] — — — — — — — 9
0.5 [2] N or later 9 — — — — — — —
NEMA Type 1
Series K or later A-L [5] — — 9 — — — — [4]
1.0 or larger
M or later 9 — — — — — — —
A-E [5] 9 — — — — — — —
NEMA Type 1 w/
gasket or Type 12 1.0 or larger F-L [5] — 9 — — 9 [6] 9 — —
Series A-D
M or later — 9 — — 9 [6] 9 — 9
0.5 [2] N or later — — — 9 — — 9 9
NEMA Type 1 w/
gasket or Type 12 A-E [5] — — 9 — — — — [4]
Series E-J [8] 1.0 or larger F-L [5] 9 — — — — — — —

M or later — — — — — — — 9
NEMA Type 1 w/ 0.5 [2] N or later 9 — — — — — —
gasket or Type 12 A-L [5] — — 9 — — — — [4]
Series K or later 1.0 or larger
M or later 9 — — — — — — —
[1] When installing unit in topmost location in vertical section, care must be taken to comply with the National Electrical Code 6'7” (2.0 m) unit handle-to-floor height limitation. A
unit operating handle extender (2100H-NE1) is available which provides 3” (76.2 mm) added height flexibility. See page 213 for catalog number.
[2] When CENTERLINE 2100, 0.5 space factor or Space Saving NEMA Starter plug-in units are ordered unassembled or ordered for existing sections, a centralized wiring diagram
holder kit (2100H-WDH) should be ordered. See page 214.
[3] Permits installation of 0.5 space factor or Space Saving NEMA Starter plug-in units in existing series E through J CENTERLINE 2100 vertical sections. Refer to page 217 for
information.
[4] A ground strap can be used to ground units rather than installing a ground bus. See publication 2100-IN014x-EN-P.
[6] Required only if series F or later 1.0 space factor or larger CENTERLINE 2100 unit is installed in topmost location of series A through E vertical sections.
[7] Consult MCC Technical Support for assistance with possible door hinge requirements.
[8] Series E-J sections cannot accommodate 0.5 space factor or Space Saving NEMA Starter plug-in units in bottom-most unit location.
Circuit Breaker Suffix Letter Designation
8 2
Catalog
Number Circuit Breaker Frame Type
Type of Circuit Breaker Designation 3
Old New 63A 150A [1] 225A 250A 400A [2] [2] [2] [2]
225A 600A 800A 1200A 2000A
Standard I.C. Instantaneous Trip Only W — — — — — — — — — —
Standard I.C. Instantaneous Trip Only WG — GMCP — — — — — — — — —
High I.C. Instantaneous Trip Only — CA — HMCP
MCP — — HMCP
MCP
HMCP
MCP
HMCP
MCP — — — 5
Instantaneous Trip Only with Current Limiter WC — — — — — — — — — — —
HMCP-EL
High I.C. Instantaneous Trip with Current Limiter — CC — MCP-EL — — — — — — — —
Standard I.C. Inverse Time JD JD KD
WT CT — FDB FD LD MDL — —
(Thermal Magnetic or Electronic) JD3D JD3D K3D
Standard I.C. Inverse Time WT, — — — — — — — — MDS — —
(Thermal Magnetic or Electronic) CF
Medium I.C. Inverse Time FD
WB CB — — — — — — — ND —
(Thermal Magnetic or Electronic) I3C
High I.C. Inverse Time HFD HJD HJD HKD
— CM — HFD HLD HMDL HND RD
(Thermal Magnetic or Electronic) I6C JD6D JD6D K6D
Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) with Current FDB-LFD
WD CD — — — — — — — — —
Limiter I3C-CL
Extra High I.C. Inverse Time FDC JDC KDC
— CX — — — LDC NDC NDC —
(Thermal Magnetic or Electronic) I0C JD0D K0D
[1] Unit Series R only.
[2] 600A-2000A electronic trip circuit breakers.
10
Vertical Sections and IntelliCENTER® Technology
Parts Illustration 2
Typical 15” Deep Section Construction
Lift angle 3
Top horizontal wireway baffles
Top horizontal wireway pan

Removable top plate
5
Top horizontal wireway cover
Left hand top end closing plate

(Two on 20” deep sections)
Right hand unit support assembly

Horizontal and vertical bus support (vertical wireway)
Bus splice access cover

Vertical power bus
Horizontal power bus
Section nameplate
Left hand center end closing plate
Vertical to horizontal bus

connection access cover
Vertical bus covers

Vertical plug-in steel ground bus (Three piece assembly)
Vertical wireway door
Unit support pan
Left hand side plate assembly
Vertical Wireway Sealing Strap

(top and bottom)
Horizontal ground bus, Bottom support angle
top or bottom
Bottom horizontal wireway cover
Left hand bottom end
closing plate
(Two on 20” deep sections)
Discount Schedule A6 For Options, Modifications and Accessories, see pages 23 11

Catalog Number Explanation for Vertical Sections
2 • Maximum SC shipping block is three (3) vertical sections.
• End closing plates are supplied on each of the shipping blocks containing incoming line or main breaker sections.
9
3 Position
First Second Third Fourth Fifth Sixth Seventh Eighth Ninth
2100 - A A T 06 - A 1 B - ABC - AAA - ANE
Horizontal
Bulletin Bus Bar Bus Bar Bus Bar Section Section
Bus Bar Ground Bus Section Location and Type
5 Number Bracing
Material
Plating Amperes NEMA Type Depth
9A 9D 9F
Code Type Bus Bar Section
CENTERLINE Code Plating Code NEMA Type See page 13 for description of
2100 Motor Control T Tin A 1 Ninth Position
Center B 1 with gasket
9C
J 12
Bus Bar
Code Material
A [1] Aluminum 9G
[1] Aluminum with Code Section Depth
B
NO-OX-ID® 1 15”
C Copper 2 20”
Copper with
D
NO-OX-ID®
[1] Vertical bus will be
supplied as Tin plated
Copper
9E
9B
Code Bus Bar Amperes
Code Bus Bar Bracing
06 600
A 42 kA Bus Bar Bracing
08 800
B 65 kA Bus Bar Bracing
12 1200
42 kA Bus Bar Bracing
C with automatic shutters 9H
65 kA Bus Bar Bracing
D Code Horizontal Ground Bus Vertical Plug-In Ground Bus Unit Load Ground Bus
with automatic shutters
42 kA Bus Bar Bracing B Unplated copper 0.25” x 1” Zinc plated steel 0.188” x 0.75” -
E C Unplated copper 0.25” x 2” Zinc plated steel 0.188” x 0.75” -
with manual shutters
65 kA Bus Bar Bracing D Unplated copper 0.25” x 1” Unplated copper 0.188” x 0.75” -
F E Unplated copper 0.25” x 2” Unplated copper 0.188” x 0.75” -
with manual shutters
F Unplated copper 0.25” x 1” Zinc plated steel 0.188” x 0.75” Unplated copper 0.188” x 0.75”
G Unplated copper 0.25” x 2” Zinc plated steel 0.188” x 0.75” Unplated copper 0.188” x 0.75”
H Unplated copper 0.25” x 1” Unplated copper 0.188” x 0.75” Unplated copper 0.188” x 0.75”
K Unplated copper 0.25” x 2” Unplated copper 0.188” x 0.75” Unplated copper 0.188” x 0.75”
N Tin plated copper 0.25” x 1” Tin plated copper 0.188” x 0.75” -
P Tin plated copper 0.25” x 2” Tin plated copper 0.188” x 0.75” -
S Tin plated copper 0.25” x 1” Tin plated copper 0.188” x 0.75” Tin plated copper 0.188” x 0.75”
T Tin plated copper 0.25” x 2” Tin plated copper 0.188” x 0.75” Tin plated copper 0.188” x 0.75”
12 For Options, Modifications and Accessories, see pages 23 Discount Schedule A6

The NINTH POSITION consists of three (3) groups of three (3) letters each.
Catalog Number Explanation for Vertical Sections (SC)
• Each group of three (3) letters represents one (1) section. Select one (1) letter from each column to specify one (1) section. 2
• Separate each section with a dash (e.g., 2100-AAT06-A1B-ABC-AAA-ANE).
• If only one (1) section is selected, only one (1) group of three (3) letters is needed.
• If two (2) sections are selected, two (2) groups of three (3) letters are needed, separated by a dash.
• If three (3) sections are selected, three (3) groups of three (3) letters are needed, with each group of letters separated by a dash.. 3
Position
continued from page 12 Ninth
- ABC - AAA - ANE
Section Location and Type
10 5
A 20” Wide Section A Standard Section A For plug-in units
6.0 Space Factor, Full mounting plate, 8.5” working depth,
A 20” Wide Section Z without vertical bus and without vertical wireway X No plug-in units
J 300A, 1.0 Space Factor
A 600A, 1.0 Space Factor
B 600A, 1.5 Space Factor
C 600A, Top - in horizontal wireway with pullbox
B Incoming Line Lugs - Top
D 800A, 1.5 Space Factor
C Incoming Line Lugs - Bottom
E 800A, 2.0 Space Factor
F 800A, Top, 1.0 Space Factor with pullbox
G 1200A, 2.0 Space Factor
H 1200A, Top - 1.0 Space Factor with pullbox
A 200A, R-Clips (Available as main only)
B 200A, J-Clips (Available as main only)
C 400A, R-Clips
D 400A, J-Clips
D Main FDS - Top, 600V E 600A, R-Clips
E Main FDS - Bottom, 600V F 600A, J-Clips
F Feeder FDS - Top, 600V
G Feeder FDS - Bottom, 600V G 600A, Non-fused (Available as main only)
H 800A, L-Clips
J 800A, Non-fused (Available as main only)
K 1200A, L-Clips
L 1200A, Non-fused (Available as main only)
A 225A, JD3D (Available as main only)
B 225A, JD6D (Available as main only)
C 225A, JD0D (Available as main only)
D 400A, K3D
E 400A, K6D
A 20” Wide Section H Main Circuit Breaker - Top F 400A, K0D
J Main Circuit Breaker - Bottom G 600A, LD
K Feeder Circuit Breaker - Top H 600A, HLD
L Feeder Circuit Breaker - Bottom J 600A, LDC
See Appendix for circuit breaker interrupting
K 800A, MDL
capacity
L 800A, MDLG (Available as main only)
M 800A, HMDL
N 800A, HMDLG (Available as main only)
P 1200A, ND
Q 1200A, HND
R 1200A, NDG (Available as main only)
S 1200A, HNDG (Available as main only)
A 3 kVA (1.5 kVA)[2],[3], 120V Sec.
B 5 kVA (2.5 kVA)[2],[3], 120/240V Sec.
Single
Phase, C 7.5 kVA (3.7 kVA)[2],[3], 120/240V Sec.
Bottom D 10 kVA (5 kVA)[2],[3], 120/240V Sec.
Mounted
M Transformer - 480V Primary E 15 kVA (7.5 kVA)[2],[3], 120/240V Sec.
N Transformer - 600V Primary F 25 kVA (12.5 kVA)[2],[3], 120/240V Sec.
J 10 kVA (5 kVA)[2],[3], 120/208V Sec.
Three
Phase, K 15 kVA (7.5 kVA)[2],[3], 120/208V Sec.
Bottom L 25 kVA (12.5 kVA)[2],[3], 120/208V Sec.
Mounted
M 30 kVA (15 kVA)[2],[3], 120/208V Sec.
B 25” Wide Section with 9” vertical wireway[1] A Standard Section A For Plug-in Units
7 Corner Section (supplied as a single shipping block only) X No Modifications X No Modifications
[1] Shipping block maximum is two (2) sections. Cannot ship 20” and 25” wide sections in the same shipping block.
[2] For NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 1 with gasket applications 3kVA and larger, a vented door is provided.
[3] In NEMA Type 12 applications (non-ventilated 3kVA and larger transformers), to maximize the transformer’s life, it is recommended that the transformer not be loaded greater
than 50% of its nameplate rating.

11
3
POSITION Catalog Delivery
Number Description Program
Description Character
A 42kA bus bar bracing
B 65kA bus bar bracing
5 SECOND C 42kA bus bar bracing with automatic shutters
Bus Bar Bracing D 65kA bus bar bracing with automatic shutters
E 42kA bus bar bracing with manual shutters
F 65kA bus bar bracing with manual shutters
AT06 600A aluminum bus with tin plating [1]
BT06 600A aluminum bus with tin plating and NO-OX-ID [1]
THIRD, FOURTH
and FIFTH CT06 600A copper bus with tin plating
CT08 800A copper bus with tin plating
Bus Bar CT12 1200A copper bus with tin plating
Material and
Plating DT06 600A copper bus with tin plating and NO-OX-ID
DT08 800A copper bus with tin plating and NO-OX-ID
DT12 1200A copper bus with tin plating and NO-OX-ID
SIXTH A NEMA Type 1
B NEMA Type 1 with gasket
NEMA
Enclosure Type J NEMA Type 12 SC
SEVENTH 1 15” cabinet depth
Section Depth 2 20” cabinet depth

B 0.25” × 1”
Unplated copper horizontal ground bus and vertical plug-in steel ground bus
C 0.25” × 2”
D 0.25” × 1”
Unplated copper horizontal ground bus and vertical plug-in unplated copper ground bus
E 0.25” × 2”
EIGHTH F 0.25” × 1”
Unplated copper horizontal ground bus, unit load ground bus and vertical plug-in steel ground
Ground Bus G bus. If required, select unit load ground connectors on plug-in units. See page 116. 0.25” × 2”
(Horizontal H Unplated copper horizontal ground bus, unit load ground bus and vertical plug-in unplated 0.25” × 1”
ground bus is copper ground bus. If required, select unit load ground connectors on plug-in units. See page
mounted at the K 116. 0.25” × 2”
bottom of
vertical section.) N Tin plated copper horizontal ground bus and vertical plug-in tin plated copper ground bus. Select 0.25” × 1”
P tin-plated unit ground stabs on all plug-in units. See page 116. 0.25” × 2”
S Tin plated copper horizontal ground bus, tin plated copper unit load ground bus and vertical 0.25” × 1”
plug-in tin plated copper ground bus. Select tin plated unit ground stabs on all plug-in units. See
T page 116. If required, select unit load ground connectors on plug-in units. See page 116. 0.25” × 2”
NINTH POSITION (On next page)
[1] Vertical bus will be supplied as Tin plated copper

• Maximum SC shipping block is three (3) vertical sections. 2
12
POSITION Space
3
Catalog Number Description Factors Delivery
Character Program
Description Used
AAA 20” wide section, for plug-in units
AZX 20” wide section, full mounting plate, 8.5” working depth, with
Basic Section Supplied as a single horizontal bus, no vertical bus and no vertical wireway 6.0 5
section block only.
25” wide section with 9” wireway, for plug-in units. Maximum
BAA shipping block is two sections.
Bottom
Top Entry Entry
ABJ ACJ 300A 1.0
ABA ACA 600A 1.0

Incoming Line Section ABB ACB 600A 1.5
AB_ (top entry) 600A—Top entry with 12” pullbox with lug pad in horizontal wireway
or ABC — 0.0
(pullbox shipped separately)
AC_ (bottom entry)
ABD ACD 800A 1.5
See page 215 for optional lug
selections. ABE ACE 800A 2.0
ABF — 800A—Top entry with 12” pullbox (pullbox shipped separately) 1.0
ABG ACG 1200A 2.0

NINTH
ABH — 1200A—Top entry with 12” pullbox (pullbox shipped separately) 1.0
Section SC
Location ADA AEA 200A R-Clips #6-4/0 AWG, 1/phase CU 2.0
and Type ADB AEB 200A J-Clips #6-4/0 AWG, 1/phase CU 2.0
ADC AEC 400A R-Clips #1/0-250 kcmil, 2/phase CU 2.5
Main Fusible Disconnect
Section 600V ADD AED 400A J-Clips #1/0-250 kcmil, 2/phase CU 2.5
ADE AEE 600A R-Clips #2-600 kcmil, 2/phase CU/AL 3.5
AD_ (top entry) ADF AEF 600A J-Clips #2-600 kcmil, 2/phase CU/AL 3.5
or
AE_ (bottom entry) ADG AEG 600A Non-fused #2-600 kcmil, 2/phase CU/AL 3.5
See page 70 for short circuit ADH AEH 800A L-Clips #6-350 kcmil, 3/phase CU/AL 3.5
withstand ratings.
ADJ AEJ 800A Non-fused #6-350 kcmil, 3/phase CU/AL 3.5
ADK AEK 1200A L-Clips #6-350 kcmil, 3/phase CU/AL 3.5
ADL AEL 1200A Non-fused #6-350 kcmil, 3/phase CU/AL 3.5
AFC AGC 400A R-Clips #1/0-250 kcmil, 2/phase CU 2.5
Feeder Fusible Disconnect AFD AGD 400A J-Clips #1/0-250 kcmil, 2/phase CU 2.5
Section 600V
AFE AGE 600A R-Clips #2-600 kcmil, 2/phase CU/AL 3.5
AF_ (top entry)
or AFF AGF 600A J-Clips #2-600 kcmil, 2/phase CU/AL 3.5
AG_ (bottom entry)
See page 70 for short circuit AFH AGH 800A L-Clips #6-350 kcmil, 3/phase CU/AL 3.5
withstand ratings.
AFK AGK 1200A L-Clips #6-350 kcmil, 3/phase CU/AL 3.5
NINTH POSITION (Continued on next page)

Ninth position—continued from previous page.
3 13
Catalog Number
POSITION Character Space Delivery
Description Factors
Bottom Program
Description Top Entry Used
Entry
5 AHA AJA 225A JD3D #4-350 kcmil, 1/phase CU 1.5
AHB AJB 225A JD6D #4-350 kcmil, 1/phase CU 1.5
AHC AJC 225A JD0D #4-350 kcmil, 1/phase CU 1.5
AHD AJD 400A K3D #3/0-250 kcmil, 2/phase CU 2.0
AHE AJE 400A K6D #3/0-250 kcmil, 2/phase CU 2.0
AHF AJF 400A K0D #3/0-250 kcmil, 2/phase CU 2.0
Main Circuit Breaker AHG AJG 600A LD 250-350 kcmil, 2/phase CU 2.0
Section AHH AJH 600A HLD 250-350 kcmil, 2/phase CU 2.0
AH_ (top entry) AHJ AJJ 600A LDC 250-350 kcmil, 2/phase CU 2.0
or AHK AJK 800A MDL #3/0-300 kcmil, 3/phase CU 2.5
AJ_ (bottom entry) #3/0-300 kcmil, 3/phase, with
AHL AJL 800A MDLG CU 2.5
ground fault
See page 236 for
circuit breaker AHM AJM 800A HMDL #3/0-300 kcmil, 3/phase CU 2.5
interrupting capacity #3/0-300 kcmil, 3/phase, with
NINTH AHN AJN 800A HMDLG CU 2.5
ground fault
Section AHP AJP 1200A ND #4/0-400 kcmil, 4/phase CU 3.5 SC
Location AHQ AJQ 1200A HND #4/0-400 kcmil, 4/phase CU 3.5
and Type
#4/0-400 kcmil, 4/phase, with
AHR AJR 1200A NDG CU 3.5
ground fault
#4/0-400 kcmil, 4/phase, with
AHS AJS 1200A HNDG CU 3.5
ground fault
AKD ALD 400A K3D #3/0-250 kcmil, 2/phase CU 2.0
AKE ALE 400A K6D #3/0-250 kcmil, 2/phase CU 2.0
Feeder Circuit Breaker
Section AKF ALF 400A K0D #3/0-250 kcmil, 2/phase CU 2.0
AKG ALG 600A LD 250-350 kcmil, 2/phase CU 2.0
AK_ (top entry)
or AKH ALH 600A HLD 250-350 kcmil, 2/phase CU 2.0
AL_ (bottom entry) AKJ ALJ 600A LDC 250-350 kcmil, 2/phase CU 2.0
See page 236 for AKK ALK 800A MDL #3/0-300 kcmil, 3/phase CU 2.5
circuit breaker AKM ALM 800A HMDL #3/0-300 kcmil, 3/phase CU 2.5
interrupting capacity
AKP ALP 1200A ND #4/0-400 kcmil, 4/phase CU 3.5
AKQ ALQ 1200A HND #4/0-400 kcmil, 4/phase CU 3.5
NINTH POSITION
(Continued on next page)

• Maximum SC shipping block is three (3) vertical sections. 2
Ninth position—continued from previous page
14 3
Catalog Number
Character Space
Position Delivery
Description Factors
Description 480V 600V Program
Used
Primary Primary
3kVA (1.5kVA), 120V sec. without tap (secondary fused to
5
AMA ANA 1.5
120V)
5kVA (2.5kVA), 120/240V sec. without tap (secondary
AMB — 1.5
fused to 240V)
AMC ANC Single 7.5kVA (3.7kVA), 120/240V sec. without tap (secondary 1.5
Phase fused to 240V)
Bottom 10kVA (5kVA), 120/240V sec. without tap (secondary
Transformer AMD AND Mounted fused to 240V) 1.5
Section [1],[2]
15kVA (7.5kVA), 120/240 sec. with (2) 2.5% taps FCAN,
NINTH AME ANE 2.0
AM_ (4) 2.5% taps FCBN (secondary fused for 240V)
(480V PRIMARY) 25kVA (12.5kVA), 120/240 sec. with (2) 2.5% taps FCAN,
Section or AMF ANF 2.0 SC
Location and (4) 2.5% taps FCBN (secondary fused for 240V)
AN_
Type (600V PRIMARY) AMJ ANJ 10kVA (5kVA), 120/208V sec. with (2) 2.5% taps FCAN, 1.5
(2) 2.5% taps FCBN (secondary fused to 208V)
AMK ANK Three 15kVA (7.5kVA), 120/208V sec. with (2) 2.5% taps FCAN, 2.0
Phase (2) 2.5% taps FCBN (secondary fused to 208V)
Bottom 25kVA (12.5kVA), 120/208V sec. with (2) 2.5% taps
AML ANL Mounted FCAN, (2) 2.5% taps FCBN (secondary fused to 208V) 2.0
30kVA (15kVA), 120/208V sec. with (2) 2.5% taps FCAN,
AMM ANM 2.0
(2) 2.5% taps FCBN (secondary fused to 208V)
Single section shipping split only. 15” or 20” deep enclosure without
Corner Section 7XX 6.0
lugs. See page 223 for dimensions.
[1] For NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 1 with gasket applications, a vented door is provided.
[2] In NEMA Type 12 applications (non-ventilated 3kVA and larger transformers), to maximize the transformer’s life, it is recommended that the transformer not be loaded to greater
than 50% of its nameplate rating.

Vertical Sections (SC) (Without Vertical Wireway)
2 • Maximum SC shipping block is one (1) vertical section.
• End closing plates are supplied.
• Splice kits are not included.
3 • Enclosures without horizontal bus are UL listed under the UL Standard for Safety UL 508 unless otherwise indicated.
15
Section NEMA Type 1 NEMA Type 12

Description Working Depth Delivery
(Inches) Depth Width Program
Catalog Number Catalog Number
(Inches) (Inches)
5 20 2100-EKC1_1D-_ _ [1] 2100-EJC1_1D-_ _ [1]
25 2100-EKC1_2D-_ _ [1] 2100-EJC1_2D-_ _ [1]
15
30 2100-EKC1_3D-_ _ [1] 2100-EJC1_3D-_ _ [1]
8.5 35 2100-EKC1_4D-_ _ [1] 2100-EJC1_4D-_ _ [1]
(with horizontal bus) 20 2100-EKC2_1D-_ _ [1] 2100-EJC2_1D-_ _ [1]
25 2100-EKC2_2D-_ _ [1] 2100-EJC2_2D-_ _ [1]
20
30 2100-EKC2_3D-_ _ [1] 2100-EJC2_3D-_ _ [1]
35 2100-EKC2_4D-_ _ [1] 2100-EJC2_4D-_ _ [1]
20 2100-EKC2_1A-_ _ [1] 2100-EJC2_1A-_ _ [1]
11.5 25 2100-EKC2_2A-_ _ [1] 2100-EJC2_2A-_ _ [1]
(with horizontal bus) 20
[2] 30 2100-EKC2_3A-_ _ [1] 2100-EJC2_3A-_ _ [1]
35 2100-EKC2_4A-_ _ [1] 2100-EJC2_4A-_ _ [1]
20 2100-EKC2_1B-_ _ [1] 2100-EJC2_1B-_ _ [1]
Vertical 14 25 2100-EKC2_2B-_ _ [1] 2100-EJC2_2B-_ _ [1]
Section (with horizontal bus) 20
[2] 30 2100-EKC2_3B-_ _ [1] 2100-EJC2_3B-_ _ [1]
Includes full six (6.0) space
factor door and mounting
35 2100-EKC2_4B-_ _ [1] 2100-EJC2_4B-_ _ [1] SC
plate. 20 2100-EKC1_1A [3] 2100-EJC1_1A [3]
No vertical
wireway. 11.5 (without 25 2100-EKC1_2A [3] 2100-EJC1_2A [3]
horizontal bus) 15 30 2100-EKC1_3A [3] 2100-EJC1_3A [3]
35 2100-EKC1_4A [3] 2100-EJC1_4A [3]
40 [4] 2100-EKC1_5A [3] 2100-EJC1_5A [3]
20 2100-EKC1_1B [3] 2100-EJC1_1B [3]
14
25 2100-EKC1_2B [3] 2100-EJC1_2B [3]
(without horizontal
bus) 15 30 2100-EKC1_3B [3] 2100-EJC1_3B [3]
35 2100-EKC1_4B [3] 2100-EJC1_4B [3]
40 [4] 2100-EKC1_5B [3] 2100-EJC1_5B [3]
20 2100-EKC2_1C [3] 2100-EJC2_1C [3]
25 2100-EKC2_2C [3] 2100-EJC2_2C [3]
19
(without horizontal 20 30 2100-EKC2_3C [3] 2100-EJC2_3C [3]
bus)
35 2100-EKC2_4C [3] 2100-EJC2_4C [3]
40 [4] 2100-EKC2_5C [3] 2100-EJC2_5C [3]
[1] The catalog numbers listed are not complete:
• Select ground bus option B, C, N, or D from table on 14 (only horizontal ground bus is supplied; e.g., 2100-EKC1B).
• Select bus bar bracing, A or B, from table on 14 (horizontal bus is provided in vertical section; e.g., 2100-EKC1B1D-A).
• Select bus bar material and plating from table on 14 (e.g., 2100-EKC1B1D-AAT06).
[2] Horizontal bus is 5” deeper than standard.
[3] The catalog numbers listed are not complete. Select ground bus option B, C, N, or P from table on 14 (only horizontal ground bus is supplied; e.g., 2100-EKC1B1A).
[4] 40” wide vertical section is a two-door section with a 3-point latch.

Vertical Sections With Fusible Disconnect (SC) (Without Vertical Wireway)
• Maximum SC shipping block is one (1) vertical section. 2
• Line side of disconnect is connected to horizontal bus for sections with horizontal bus. 3
16
Section Disconnect NEMA Type 1 NEMA Type 12

Description Working Depth Rating Delivery
(Inches) Depth Width Program
(Inches) (Inches) (Amperes)
[1] Catalog Number [2] Catalog Number [2]
30, 60 5
100
20 2100-FK_1_1D-_ _-_ 2100-FJ_1_1D-_ _-_
200
400
30,60
100
25 2100-FK_1_2D-_ _-_ 2100-FJ_1_2D-_ _-_
200
400
15
30, 60
Vertical 100
Section 30 2100-FK_1_3D-_ _-_ 2100-FJ_1_3D-_ _-_
200
Includes full six 400
(6.0) space factor 30, 60
door and
mounting plate. 100
With 35 2100-FK_1_4D-_ _-_ 2100-FJ_1_4D-_ _-_
200
disconnecting 8.5 400
means. (with SC
No vertical 30, 60
horizontal bus)
wireway.
See page 75 for 100
20 2100-FK_2_1D-_ _-_ 2100-FJ_2_1D-_ _-_
short circuit 200
withstand ratings.
Adding equipment 400
to these sections 30, 60
may void UL and 100
C-UL/CSA 25 2100-FK_2_2D-_ _-_ 2100-FJ_2_2D-_ _-_
certification. 200
400
20
30, 60
100
30 2100-FK_2_3D-_ _-_ 2100-FJ_2_3D-_ _-_
200
400
30, 60
100
35 2100-FK_2_4D-_ _-_ 2100-FJ_2_4D-_ _-_
200
400
[1] Disconnect rating must match fuse clip size. Oversizing or undersizing of fuse clips is not permitted.
• Select voltage code from page 23 (e.g., 2100-FKC).
• Select ground bus option B, C, N, or P from table on 14 (only horizontal ground bus is supplied; e.g., 2100-FKC1B).
• Select bus bar bracing, A or B, from table on 14 (horizontal bus is provided in vertical section; e.g., 2100-FKC1B1D-A).
• Select bus bar material and plating from table on 14 (e.g., 2100-FKC1B1D-AAT06).
• Select fuse clip designator from page 23 (e.g., 2100-FKC1B1D-AAT06-24J).

3 • Enclosures without horizontal bus are UL listed to the UL Standard for Safety UL 508 unless otherwise indicated, short
circuit withstand rating marking do not apply.
• Line side of disconnect is connected to horizontal bus for sections with horizontal bus.
• Customer cables connect to line side of disconnect for sections without horizontal bus.
17
Working Section Disconnect NEMA Type 1 NEMA Type 12

Rating Delivery
Description Depth Depth Width
Catalog Number Catalog Number Program
5 (Inches) (Inches) (Inches) (Amperes) [1]
30, 60
100
20
200 2100-FK_2_1A-_ _ - _[3] 2100-FJ_2_1A-_ _ - _ [3]
400
30, 60
100
25
200 2100-FK_2_2A-_ _ - _ [3] 2100-FJ_2_2A-_ _ - _ [3]
11.5
(with 400
horizontal bus) 20
30, 60
[2]
100
30
200 2100-FK_2_3A-_ _ - _ [3] 2100-FJ_2_3A-_ _ - _ [3]
400
30, 60
100
35
200 2100-FK_2_4A-_ _ - _ [3] 2100-FJ_2_4A-_ _ - _ [3]
Vertical 400
Section 30, 60
100
200 2100-FK_2_1B-_ _ - _ [3] 2100-FJ_2_1B-_ _ - _ [3]
(6.0) space factor
door and 400
mounting plate. 30, 60
With 100
25
200 2100-FK_2_2B-_ _ - _ [3] 2100-FJ_2-_2B-_ _ - _ [3]
disconnecting 14
means. (with
20
400
SC
No vertical horizontal 30, 60
wireway. bus) [2] 100
See page 75 for 30
200 2100-FK_2_3B-_ _ - _ [3] 2100-FJ_2_3B-_ _ - _ [3]
short circuit 400
withstand ratings. 30, 60
to these sections 35
200 2100-FK_2_4B-_ _ - _ [3] 2100-FJ_2_4B-_ _ - _ [3]
may void UL and
C-UL/CSA 400
certification. 30, 60
100
20
200 2100-FK_1_1A-_ [4] 2100-FJ_1_1A-_ [4]
400
30, 60
100
25
200 2100-FK_1_2A-_ [4] 2100-FJ_1_2A-_ [4]
11.5
(without 400
15
horizontal 30, 60
bus) 100
30
200 2100-FK_1_3A-_ [4] 2100-FJ_1_3A-_ [4]
400
30, 60
100
35
200 2100-FK_1_4A-_ [4] 2100-FJ_1_4A-_ [4]
400
• Select voltage code on page 23 (e.g., 2100-FKC).
• Select ground bus option B, C, N, or P from table on 14 (only horizontal ground bus is supplied; e.g. 2100-FKC2B).
• Select bus bar bracing, A or B, from table on 14 (horizontal bus is provided in vertical section; e.g., 2100-FKC2B1B-A).
• Select bus bar material and plating from table on 14 (e.g., 2100-FKC2B1B-AAT06).
• Select fuse clip designator on page 23 (e.g., 2100-FKC2B1A-AAT06-24J).
• Select voltage code on page 23 (e.g., 2100-FKC).
• Select ground bus option B, C, N, or P from table on 14 (only horizontal ground bus is supplied; e.g., 2100-FKC1B).
• Select fuse clip designator from on page 23 (e.g., 2100-FKC1B1A-24J).

• Maximum SC shipping block is one (1) vertical section. 2
• Enclosures without horizontal bus are UL listed to the UL Standard for Safety UL 508 unless otherwise indicated, short
circuit withstand rating marking does not apply.
• Line side of disconnect is connected to horizontal bus for sections with horizontal bus. 3
• Customer cables connect to line side of disconnect for sections without horizontal bus.
18
Working Section Disconnect NEMA Type 1 NEMA Type 12

Rating Delivery
Description Depth Depth Width Program
(Inches) [1] Catalog Number Catalog Number
(Inches) (Inches) (Amperes)
30, 60
5
100
20 2100-FK_2_1A-_ [2] 2100-FJ_2_1A-_ [2]
200
400
30, 60
100
25 2100-FK_2_2A-_ [2] 2100-FJ_2_2A-_ [2]
200
11.5 (without 400
horizontal bus) 20
30, 60
100
30 2100-FK_2_3A-_ [2] 2100-FJ_2_3A-_ [2]
200
400
30, 60
100
35 2100-FK_2_4A-_ [2] 2100-FJ_2_4A-_ [2]
200
400
30, 60
Vertical Section
100
20 2100-FK_1_1B-_ [2] 2100-FJ_1_1B-_ [2]
(6.0) space factor 400
door and 30, 60
mounting plate. 100
With 25 2100-FK_1_2B-_ [2] 2100-FJ_1_2B-_ [2]
200
disconnecting 400
14 (without
means. horizontal bus)
15 SC
30, 60
No vertical
wireway. 100
30 2100-FK_1_3B-_ [2] 2100-FJ_1_3B-_ [2]
200
to these sections 30, 60
may void UL and 100
C-UL/CSA 35 2100-FK_1_4B-_ [2] 2100-FJ_1_4B-_ [2]
200
certification.
400
30, 60
100
20 2100-FK_2_1C-_ [2] 2100-FJ_2_1C-_ [2]
200
400
30, 60
100
25 2100-FK_2_2C-_ [2] 2100-FJ_2_2C-_ [2]
200
19 (without 400
horizontal 20
bus) 30, 60
100
30 2100-FK_2_3C-_ [2] 2100-FJ_2_3C-_ [2]
200
400
30, 60
100
35 2100-FK_2_4C-_ [2] 2100-FJ_2_4C-_ [2]
200
400
• Select voltage code from on page 23 (e.g., 2100-FKC).
• Select ground bus option B, C, N, or P from 14 (only horizontal ground bus is supplied; e.g., 2100-FKC1B).
• Select fuse clip designator from on page 23 (e.g., 2100-FKC1B1B-24J).

Vertical Sections With Circuit Breaker (SC) (Without Vertical Wireway)
3 • Enclosures without horizontal bus are UL listed to the UL Standard for Safety UL 508 unless otherwise indicated, short
circuit interrupting capacity marking does not apply.
• Line side of circuit breaker is connected to horizontal bus for sections with horizontal bus.
• Customer cables connect to line side of circuit breaker for sections without horizontal bus.
19
Working Depth Section NEMA Type 1 NEMA Type 12 Delivery
5 Description
(Inches) Depth (Inches) Width (Inches) Catalog Number Catalog Number Program
20 2100-GKC1_1D-_ _-_ _ [1] 2100-GJC1_1D-_ _-_ _ [1]
[1]
25 2100-GKC1_2D-_ _-_ _ 2100-GJC1_2D-_ _-_ _ [1]
15
30 2100-GKC1_3D-_ _-_ _ [1] 2100-GJC1_3D-_ _-_ _ [1]
8.5 35 2100-GKC1_4D-_ _-_ _ [1] 2100-GJC1_4D-_ _-_ _ [1]
(with
horizontal bus) 20 2100-GKC2_1D-_ _-_ _ [1] 2100-GJC2_1D-_ _-_ _ [1]
25 2100-GKC2_2D-_ _-_ _ [1] 2100-GJC2_2D-_ _-_ _ [1]
20
[1]
30 2100-GKC2_3D-_ _-_ _ 2100-GJC2_3D-_ _-_ _ [1]
35 2100-GKC2_4D-_ _-_ _ [1] 2100-GJC2_4D-_ _-_ _ [1]
[1]
20 2100-GKC2_1A-_ _-_ _ 2100-GJC2_1A-_ _-_ _ [1]
11.5 25 2100-GKC2_2A-_ _-_ _ [1] 2100-GJC2_2A-_ _-_ _ [1]
(with 20
[1]
horizontal bus) [2] 30 2100-GKC2_3A-_ _-_ _ 2100-GJC2_3A-_ _-_ _ [1]
Vertical Section 35 2100-GKC2_4A-_ _-_ _ [1] 2100-GJC2_4A-_ _-_ _ [1]
[1]
Includes full six (6.0) 20 2100-GKC2_1B-_ _-_ _ 2100-GJC2_1B-_ _-_ _ [1]
space factor door and 14
mounting plate. 25 2100-GKC2_2B-_ _-_ _ [1] 2100-GJC2_2B-_ _-_ _ [1]
(with 20
With disconnecting horizontal bus) [2] 30 2100-GKC2_3B-_ _-_ _ [1]
2100-GJC2_3B-_ _-_ _ [1]
means.
No vertical wireway. 35 2100-GKC2_4B-_ _-_ _ [1] 2100-GJC2_4B-_ _-_ _ [1]
SC
See page 236 for 20 2100-GKC1_1A-_ _ [3] 2100-GJC1_1A-_ _ [3]
circuit breaker
interrupting capacity 25 2100-GKC1_2A-_ _ [3] 2100-GJC1_2A-_ _ [3]
Adding equipment to 15
30 2100-GKC1_3A-_ _ [3] 2100-GJC1_3A-_ _ [3]
these sections may
[3]
void UL and 11.5 35 2100-GKC1_4A-_ _ 2100-GJC1_4A-_ _ [3]
C-UL/CSA (without horizontal
certification. bus) 20 2100-GKC2_1A-_ _ [3] 2100-GJC2_1A-_ _ [3]
[3]
25 2100-GKC2_2A-_ _ 2100-GJC2_2A-_ _ [3]
20
30 2100-GKC2_3A-_ _ [3] 2100-GJC2_3A-_ _ [3]
35 2100-GKC2_4A-_ _ [3] 2100-GJC2_4A-_ _ [3]
20 2100-GKC1_1B-_ _ [3] 2100-GJC1_1B-_ _ [3]
14 25 2100-GKC1_2B-_ _ [3] 2100-GJC1_2B-_ _ [3]
(without 15
horizontal bus) 30 2100-GKC1_3B-_ _ [3] 2100-GJC1_3B-_ _ [3]
35 2100-GKC1_4B-_ _ [3] 2100-GJC1_4B-_ _ [3]
20 2100-GKC2_1C-_ _ [3] 2100-GJC2_1C-_ _ [3]
19 25 [3] 2100-GJC2_2C-_ _ [3]
2100-GKC2_2C-_ _
(without 20
horizontal bus) 30 2100-GKC2_3C-_ _ [3] 2100-GJC2_3C-_ _ [3]
[3]
35 2100-GKC2_4C-_ _ 2100-GJC2_4C-_ _ [3]
• Select ground bus option B, C, N, or P from table on 14 (only horizontal ground bus is supplied; e.g., 2100-GKC1B).
• Select bus bar bracing, A or B, from table on 14 (horizontal bus is provided in vertical sections; e.g., 2100-GKC1B1D-A).
• Select bus bar material and plating from table on 14 (e.g., 2100-GKC1B1D-AAT06).
• Select trip current number from table on page 23 (e.g., 2100-GKC1B1D-AAT06-30).
• Select circuit breaker type on page 23 (e.g., 2100-GKC1B1D-AAT06-30CB).
• Select ground bus option B, C, N, or P from table on 14 (only horizontal ground bus is supplied; e.g., 2100-GKC1B).
• Select trip current number from table on page 23 (e.g., 2100-GKC1B1A-30).
• Select circuit breaker type from table on page 23 (e.g., 2100-GKC1B1A-30CB).

SC and PE-I Section Modification
20
Option 2100-E 2100-F Vertical 2100-G Vertical Delivery

2
Option Description Vertical Section with Section with
Number Section Disconnect Circuit Breaker program
Grounded -79GD
Hinge mounted ground strap mounted on bottom hinge of unit door. Unit door
9 9 9 3
Unit Door hinge grounding strap required for IEC applications.
NORMALLY OPEN: One (1) N.O. auxiliary contact (operated with movement of
-98 [2] external handle only)
— 9 9
NORMALLY OPEN: One (1) N.O. auxiliary contact mounted internally in circuit
Auxiliary -98X [3] breaker
— — 9
Contacts [1] NORMALLY CLOSED: One (1) N.C. auxiliary contact (operates with movement of SC
— 9 9 5
NORMALLY CLOSED: One (1) N.C. auxiliary contact mounted internally in circuit
-99X [3] breaker
— — 9
T-Handle -111 T-handle latch on unit door 9 [4] 9 9
Shunt Trip -754 For tripping circuit breaker from remote 120V, 60Hz source — — 9
Maximum 1-section shipping block. Shipping block is skid mounted and packaged
Export in clear plastic. Packing is not watertight or waterproof. Skid is 2” × 8”
Packing construction according to shipping block size. Top is 2” × 4” frame with 1” pine
Below Deck
—
boards. Ends and sides covered with 0.4375” chipboard with 2” × 4” cross Available on all SC and PE-I vertical sections. SC [5]
for Sections members. Two steel bands around outside of container. Extended storage may
require space heaters and other considerations.
[1] Multiple auxiliary contacts must be group coded by adding the second and third digit of the special feature number to the base digit “9” (e.g., 90-91-98X-99, when group coded,
reads 9018X9).
[2] The maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be supplied is two (2), in any combination. Contacts actuate with the movement of unit handle to ON or OFF position only.
Contacts are not designed to actuate as a result of a circuit breaker trip. For such applications, auxiliary contacts “mounted internally” (98X or 99X) must be selected. Internal
auxiliary contacts (98X or 99X) are wired to a 3-point unmounted terminal block.
[3] The maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be supplied internally is two (2) N.O. and two (2) N.C. (form C) contacts on F-frame, J-frame, and K-frame circuit breakers.
[4] Not available in 40” wide sections.
[5] Additional time required for export packing of SC and PE sections.
Tables for Configuring Vertical Section Catalog Numbers

Voltage Code 21
Fuse Clip Voltage Voltage Code
250 A
600 C
Fuse Clip Designator 22 Trip Current 23

Disconnect Rating and Short Circuit Withstand Fuse Clip
Fuse Clip Size Fuse Clip Class Trip Current (Amperes) Number
(Amperes) Rating through 600V Designator
J 100 kA 24J 15 30
30 R 100 kA 24R 20 31
H 10 kA 24 30 32
J 100 kA 25J 40 34
60 R 100 kA 25R 50 35
H 10 kA 25 60 36
J 100 kA 26J 70 37
100 R 100 kA 26R 80 38
H 10 kA 26 90 39
J 100 kA 27J 100 40
200 R 100 kA 27R 125 41
H 10 kA 27 150 42
J 100 kA 28J 175 43
400 R 100 kA 28R 200 44
H 10 kA 28 225 45
250 46
300 48
350 49
400 50
Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Breaker Option * 24
Medium Interrupting Capacity
Standard Interrupting Capacity Medium Interrupting Capacity High Interrupting Capacity
Rating (Amperes) w/ Current Limiter
Suffix Frame Suffix Frame Suffix Frame Suffix Frame
15-50 — — CD I3C-CL CB I3C CM I6C
175-225 CT JD3D — — — — CM JD6D
250-400 CT K3D — — — — CM K6D
* Refer to page 234 for circuit breaker interrupting capacity ratings.

Basic Sections and Structure Features/Modifications (SC-II and PE-II)
25
2
Delivery
Basic Sections Program
3 Basic 20” Wide
Section Includes standard features indicated in the tables below and on following pages. Maximum three (3) 20” wide sections per shipping block.
25”, 30”, 35”
Wide Section These sections do not have a vertical wireway. These sections require individual shipping blocks.
25” Wide Section Section width is 25.” Section has a 9” wireway. Maximum of two (2) 25” wide sections with 9” wireway per shipping block. Maximum of one (1) 25”
with 9” Wireway wide section with 9” wireway per shipping block with export packing, or NEMA Type 3R or NEMA Type 4 enclosure.
There is no additional charge for assembling 15” or 20” deep sections back-to-back. Back-to-back construction consists of two (2) separate sections SC-II
5 Back-to-Back mounted together, each with separate bus. Front and rear sections must be equal in width. Six (6) 20” wide sections per shipping block is maximum.
Section A front-to-rear horizontal bus link will be provided only when an incoming line lug compartment, main breaker, or main disconnect is selected. This
splice link will be located at the opposite end of the MCC from the incoming line section.
Inside corner configuration is either 15” deep by 25.125” wide or 20” deep by 30.125” wide and is designed to contain power bus rated 600A-2000A
only. There is no available space for the installation of units. Section does not have vertical wireway. See page 105 to select.
Corner Section Corner sections may be selected with an incoming line lug provision (see Bul. 2191M or 2191F, page 64), but are not available in either NEMA Type
3R, Type 4, or back-to-back construction.
This section must be selected as part of a 2-section shipping block, shipped attached to a 20,” 25” or 30” wide section. It cannot be selected as
10” Wide Incoming free standing or attached to a section with 9” vertical wireway, any 35” wide drive unit, full-section programmable controller, 1600A and 2000A PE-II
Lug Compartment 2192M, or 2000A 2193M, and is not available in NEMA Type 3R, Type 4, or back-to-back construction.
For selection information, refer to page 64.
This 70.48” high × 15” or 20” deep section will accommodate standard plug-in units up to and including 4.5 space factors. Standard height bus (45”
center point) and lower height bus (25.5” center point) are available.
Please note the following restrictions for 71” high sections:
• If top incoming (unless a full section incoming main lug is used) or top frame mounted device is required, select lower height bus.
• If bottom incoming (unless full section incoming main lug is used) or bottom frame mounted device is required, select standard bus height.
• If frame mounted transformer is required, select standard bus height.
• If frame mounted transformer with top incoming main lug is required, select standard height bus and use a full section incoming main lug.
71” High Section • Two frame mounted units cannot be used in a single section.
• Top frame mounted units and bottom frame mounted units cannot be mixed in the same line up (e.g., Bulletin 2191, 2192, 2193, 2195, 2196,
and 2197 units). SC-II
• Only the following incoming main lug compartments are available pre-engineered:
300A and 600A in 1.0 space factors, 800A in 1.5 space factors, 1200A in 2.0 space factors,
600A-2000A full section 4.5 space factors.
• 6.0 space factor, frame mounted units are not available.
See publication 2100-TD024x-EN-P for more information.
71” High There is no additional charge for assembling 15” or 20” deep sections back-to-back. Back-to-back construction consists of two (2) separate sections
mounted together, each with separate bus. Front and rear sections must be equal in width. Six (6) 20” wide sections per shipping block is maximum.
Back-to-Back A front-to-rear horizontal bus link will be provided only when an incoming line lug compartment, main breaker or main disconnect is selected. This
Section
splice link will be located at the opposite end of the MCC from the incoming line section.
26
Delivery
Section Features/Modifications Program
15” deep
Cabinet Depth
20” deep
NEMA Type 1 SC-II
NEMA Type 1 with gasket (gasketed unit door areas)
NEMA Type 12 (totally gasketed enclosure with bottom closing plates)
NEMA Type 3R (non-walk-in) front mounted only. Available for internal sections, 30” wide maximum. The external dimension of each NEMA Type 3R
cabinet is 5” wider than its internal section and 30” deep (with 20” deep internal section). Not available in back-to-back construction. Refer to
Enclosure Type publication 2100-TD025x-EN-P. Contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office for solid-state equipment (i.e., variable frequency drives, SMCs
and PLCs).
PE-II
NEMA Type 4 (non-walk-in) stainless steel, front mounted only. Available for internal sections, 30” wide maximum. The external dimension of each
NEMA Type 4 section is 5” wider than its internal section and 30” deep (with 20” deep internal section). Not available in back-to-back construction.
Available in Canada only. Refer to publication 2100-TD026x-EN-P. Contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office for solid-state equipment
(i.e., variable frequency drives, SMCs and PLCs).
Bottom Closing For NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 with gasket. Bottom closing plates are standard on NEMA Type 12.
Plates For corner section NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 with gasket. Bottom closing plates are standard on NEMA Type 12.
Drip hood for NEMA Enclosure Type 1, Type 1 with gasket, and Type 12 only. (Not required for NEMA Type 3R or Type 4.) Drip hood is an overhang on SC-II
Drip Hood top of a section, providing protection from limited amounts of liquid or dirt dripping and/or running down the front of a section. Select one drip hood
per section.
27 2
Delivery
Section Features/Modifications, continued Program
0.125” × 4” 600A 3
Aluminum with tin plating [1] 0.188” × 4” 800A
0.125” × 3” 600A
0.125” × 4” 800A SC-II
Power Bus Rating and Copper with tin plating 0.250” × 4” 1200A
Material[1] 0.500” × 4” 1600A
0.625” × 4” 2000A
5
(For 3-phase,
3-wire systems) 0.125” × 3” 600A
0.125” × 4” 800A
Copper with silver plating 0.250” × 4” 1200A PE-II
0.500” × 4” 1600A
0.625” × 4” 2000A
[1] Vertical bus will be supplied as tin plated copper
28
Half-Rated Full-Rated Main Power Delivery

Section Features/Modifications Neutral Neutral Bus Rating Program
0.125” x 4” 0.125” × 4” 600A
Aluminum with tin plating [2] 0.125” x 4” 0.188” × 4” 800A
Power Bus Rating and 0.125” × 3” 0.125” × 3” 600A
Material with Neutral
0.125” × 3” 0.125” × 4” 800A
Bus [1] Copper with tin plating 0.125” x 4” 0.250” × 4” 1200A
(For 3-phase, 0.188” x 4” 0.500” × 4” 1600A
PE-II
4-wire systems) 0.250” x 4” 0.625” × 4” 2000A
0.125” × 3” 0.125” × 3” 600A
Neutral bus mounts 0.125” × 3” 0.125” × 4” 800A
above or below main
power bus. Copper with silver plating 0.125” x 4” 0.250” × 4” 1200A
0.188” x 4” 0.500” × 4” 1600A
0.250” x 4” 0.625” × 4” 2000A
[1] When used with main incoming line (Bulletin 2191M), Main Switch (Bulletin 2192M) and Main Circuit Breaker (Bulletin 2193M) requires the selection of incoming neutral option
(88HN or 88FN). Refer to Appendix, page 247, for neutral bus configuration information. Refer to page 117 for incoming neutral option selection.
[2] Vertical bus will be supplied as tin plated copper
29
Delivery
Section Features/Modifications Program
300A tin plated copper vertical bus—0.75” O.D., 0.625” I.D. tube
SC-II
600A tin plated copper vertical bus—0.75” O.D. rod
Vertical Bus Rating [1] 300A silver plated vertical bus—0.75” O.D., 0.625” I.D. tube
600A silver plated vertical bus—0.75” O.D. rod
Tin plated copper bus. Mounted in and insulated from 9” vertical Rated 200A (0.1875” × 0.75”). For connection of control power
Vertical Neutral Bus [2] wireway. Mechanically connected to horizontal neutral bus. Isolated neutral. PE-II
Requires 25” wide section
from the rest of vertical wireway with barriers. To be used for Rated 300A (0.25” × 1”). For connection of neutral loads.
connecting neutral loads or can be used for control voltages that
with 9” wireway require a connection to the neutral. Rated 600A (0.25” × 1” qty. 2). For connection of neutral loads.
0.25” × 2” × 12” copper tin plated bus plate with #6-250 kcmil lug (280A capacity). Insulated from and mounted to either top or
bottom horizontal wireway. SC-II
0.25” × 2” × 12” copper tin plated bus plate with #6-250 kcmil lug (280A capacity). Insulated from and mounted to either top or
bottom horizontal wireway. Cable connection provided to horizontal neutral bus. [2]
Neutral Connection Plate [3] 0.25” x 2” x 12” copper silver plated bus plate with #6-250 kcmil lug (280A capacity). Insulated from and mounted to either top or
PE-II
bottom horizontal wireway.
0.25” x 2” x 12” copper silver plated bus plate with #6-250 kcmil lug (280A capacity). Insulated from and mounted to either top or
bottom horizontal wireway. Cable connection provided to horizontal neutral bus. [2]
[1] Plating of horizontal bus and vertical bus must be the same.
[2] Requires horizontal neutral bus. See Power Bus Rating and Material with Neutral Bus in table above.
[3] A neutral connection plate can be used only in sections with a vertical wireway. Not available in sections with 6.0 space factor frame mounted units.
Not available in top of section with frame mounted unit mounted at top of section.
Not available in bottom of section with frame mounted unit mounted at bottom of section.
2 30
Delivery
Section Features/Modifications, continued Program
3
42kA (rms symmetrical)
65kA (rms symmetrical)
100kA series coordinated. Provides 65kA (rms symmetrical) bracing in each section. Must be used in coordination
with 600A-2000A horizontal bus and one of the following main incoming devices:
100, 200, 400, or 600A, 2192M with Class R or J fusing
5 600, 800, 1200, 1600, or 2000A, 2192M with Class L fusing
Bracing [1] JD0 250A Frame 2193M, 480V or less
K0 400A Frame 2193M, 480V or less
LDC 600A Frame 2193M, 480V or less
NDC 800A Frame 2193M, 480V or less
NDC 1200A Frame 2193M, 480V or less
All starters, feeder units, etc. must have a short circuit withstand rating capable of interrupting the available fault
current to the MCC.
0.25” × 1” horizontal ground bus
Ground Bus 0.25” × 2” horizontal ground bus
Unplated copper[2] Two (2) 0.25” × 1” horizontal ground bus top and bottom (cable interconnected)
Two (2) 0.25” × 2” horizontal ground bus top and bottom (cable interconnected)
0.25” × 1” horizontal ground bus
SC-II
Ground Bus 0.25” × 2” horizontal ground bus
Tin Plated copper[2] Two (2) 0.25” × 1” horizontal ground bus top and bottom (cable interconnected)
Two (2) 0.25” × 2” horizontal ground bus top and bottom (cable interconnected)
0.188” × 0.75” vertical plug-in steel ground bus Steel
0.188” × 0.75” vertical plug-in ground bus
Unplated copper
Vertical Ground Bus 0.188” × 0.75” vertical ground bus for grounding unit load
0.188” × 0.75” vertical plug-in ground bus
Tin plated copper
0.188” × 0.75” vertical ground bus for grounding unit load
Aluminum tin 600A
plated bus 800A
600A
800A
Copper tin plated
bus 1200A
Horizontal Splice bars, hardware, and installation instructions for 3-phase splicing. One 1600A
Power Bus (1) kit required per shipping split on front mounted lineups. Two (2) kits
Splice Kit required per shipping split for back-to-back construction. 2000A
600A
800A
Copper silver 1200A PE-II
plated bus
1600A
2000A
[1] Contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office when specifying 100kA series coordinated bracing for “Add to existing” sections.
[2] Standard ground bus lugs provided for horizontal ground bus options are: no main = no lug, 2191M = 1 lug, 2192M or 2193M = 2 lugs. Lugs accept one, #6AWG-250kcmil cable.
31 2
Main Power Bus (Phase A, B, C) Rating Delivery
Section Features/Modifications, continued and Material Program
3
600A Aluminum with Tin Plating
800A Aluminum with Tin Plating
600A Copper with Tin Plating
1200A Copper with Tin Plating 5
Splice bar hardware (installation instructions included in power bus
Horizontal Neutral Bus splice kit). One (1) kit required per shipping split on front mounted 1600A Copper with Tin Plating
Splice Kit lineups. Two (2) kits required per shipping split for back-to-back PE-II
construction.
600A Copper with Silver Plating
2
32
3 Section Features/Modifications, continued Delivery

Program
One (1)—0.25” × 1” (unplated copper) For applications utilizing
ground bus mounted on
Two (2)—0.25” × 1” (unplated copper) both top and bottom or
5 Horizontal Ground Bus Splice Kit from back-to-back line ups,
One (1)—0.25” × 1” (tin plated copper) two (2) ground bus splice
kits are required for joining
Two (2)—0.25” × 1” (tin plated copper) each shipping block.
NO-OX-ID® NO-OX-ID compound on bus

Pullbox [1] 12” high × 15” deep or 20” deep (except corner sections)
For isolation of plug-in stab openings—automatic
Shutters
For isolation of plug-in stab openings—manual SC-II
Protective Caps For unused plug-in stab openings
Unit Isolating Barriers For closing the wire opening between unit and vertical wireway
DeviceNet Connector Covers For covering the unused DeviceNet connectors in the vertical wireway of a DeviceNet MCC
Wireway Tie Bars Five (5) cable tie bars in vertical wireway
Outgoing Equipment Ground Lug One (1) #6-250 kcmil lug mounted on horizontal ground bus in addition to lug provided
T-Handle T-handle latch on vertical wireway door
Master Nameplates Located on top horizontal wireway cover of the second vertical section in lineup, 2”× 6”
Stainless Steel Nameplate Screws Stainless steel nameplate screws for master nameplate (2 per nameplate)
Two (2) 1.5” × 3” mounting channels
External Mounting Channel [2] NOTE: Adding an external mounting channel will add 1.5” to height of section
Optional lifting angle for NEMA Type 3R cabinets only. This angle is not removable.
NEMA Type 3R Lifting Angle PE-II
NOTE: Adding the lifting angle will add 3.63” to the height of the section
Space heater with thermostat in each section

200 watt, 120 volt strip
For two-section shipping block, one space heater is supplied in each section heater.
with a single thermostat control located in right-hand section Thermostat set at 21° C
(70° F).
For three-section shipping block, one space heater is supplied in each
Space Heaters and Thermostat section with a single thermostat control located in center section
(Requires user supplied source of SC-II
power)
Space heater with thermostat in each section
200 watt, 240 volt strip
For two-section shipping block, one space heater is supplied in each section heater.
with a single thermostat control located in right-hand section Thermostat set at 21° C
(70° F).
For three-section shipping block, one space heater is supplied in each
section with a single thermostat control located in center section
Maximum 3-section shipping block. Shipping block is skid mounted and packaged in clear plastic.
Packing is not watertight or waterproof. Skid is 2” × 8” construction according to shipping block size.
Export Packing Below Deck for Sections Top is 2” × 4” frame with 0.438” orientated strand board (OSB). Ends and sides covered with 0.438” SC-II [3]
orientated strand board (OSB) with 2” × 4” cross members. Two steel bands around outside of
container. Extended storage may require space heaters and other considerations.
[1] Available on NEMA Enclosure Type 1, Type 1 with gasket and Type 12 sections only.
[2] External mounting channel is shipped attached to MCC section(s).
[3] Additional time required for export packing of SC-II and PE-II sections.
CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Center with IntelliCENTER® Technology
• CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Center with IntelliCENTER technology provides CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs with 2
sections having integrated DeviceNet cabling and CENTERLINE 2100 units with DeviceNet capable components. The
DeviceNet cabling, consisting of trunk line and drop lines, is routed through the sections and into the individual
units, allowing the devices to communicate via DeviceNet. A complete DeviceNet system includes cabling, power
supply, scanner module and the necessary DeviceNet components in the MCC units. 3
• The trunk line is built in to the sections and routed behind barriers. The drop lines are routed from each unit to the
DeviceNet connectors in the vertical wireway of each vertical section. The DeviceNet cable is rated 8 amperes, 600
volts for use with a Class 1 power limited circuit. Six (6) DeviceNet connectors built into the back of the vertical
wireway of each standard section provide a convenient method for the MCC units to connect to the trunk line.
• Units may communicate over DeviceNet via components such as an E3 solid-state overload relay, DeviceNet Starter
Auxiliary (DSA) or DeviceNet communication module such as 20-COMM-D. These units are supplied with a 5
DeviceNet cable for connecting to a DeviceNet connector in the vertical wireway. DeviceNet nodes are addressed
per factory standards or per customer specified information. Electronic Data Sheets (EDS) files on CD are shipped
with the MCC.
• For more information on DeviceNet, refer to publication DNET-BR002x-EN-P, DeviceNet Brochure, publication
DNET-UM072x-EN-P, DeviceNet Media Design and Installation Manual and publication 2100-TD019x-EN-P,
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers.
The CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Center with IntelliCENTER technology can consist of integrated hardware,
software and communication in one centralized package. The available IntelliCENTER software provides
pre-configured screens which provide real-time data, trending, component history, wiring diagrams, user
manuals and spare parts. See page 30 for selection.
33
Delivery
Section Features Description Program
Includes DeviceNet trunk line, drop cable from each unit to DeviceNet port in vertical wireway and plug-in
terminating resistor kit. Includes DeviceNet node addressing per factory standards or per customer specified
information. A single MCC is allowed to be configured to contain up to five independent networks. Maximum
IntelliCENTER technology SC-II
of 17 sections per network for MCCs on the SC or PE delivery program.
IntelliCENTER software and documentation CD available, see description on page 30.
Available only for sections which contain horizontal power bus.
IntelliCENTER Software
2 NOTE: All IntelliCENTER software is copyright protected and for installation on one personal computer only.
34
3 Delivery
Description Program
The IntelliCENTER software replicates the MCC lineup on a computer screen, complete with nameplates and indicators on
each door to show status (on, off, warning, fault, communication failure). Graphical views of individual MCC units display
IntelliCENTER [1] device data allowing users to quickly view critical amperes, time-to-trip, trip cause, ground fault amperes and on/off
Full Version status. Each screen is preconfigured to show the parameters typically of greatest interest, and users easily can customize
5 parameters. Many screens feature trending graphs and analog dials. The software also provides spare parts information,
Catalog Number: AutoCAD documentation and event logging. Requires Documentation CD; see below.
2101A-INTLCNTR
The IntelliCENTER software also contains ActiveX controls. This allows key views of the software to be displayed inside
Human Machine Interfaces (HMIs) such as RSView.
Documentation CD [1][2] Per MCC lineup SC
The Documentation CD is the second component of the IntelliCENTER software. The CD contains data
files specific to a particular MCC. This information includes unit nameplates, unit details, wiring
Catalog Number: diagrams, user manuals, spare parts and other details. Per unit
2101A-INTLDOC
IntelliCENTER [1] The IntelliCENTER ActiveX Only Version software contains only the ActiveX controls necessary to include the
ActiveX Only Version IntelliCENTER views (elevation, monitor, electronic documentation, CAD diagrams, event log and spreadsheet) within an
HMI.
Catalog Number: Note: At least one copy of IntelliCENTER Full Version is required to perform maintenance tasks such as
2101A-INTLCNTR-X moving units, adding units and changing units in the IntelliCENTER software.
[1] Must be ordered separately from MCC.
[2] For MCCs ordered prior to September 1, 2006, please contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office for availability.
Minimum PC Requirements for running IntelliCENTER Software:
• Operating System: Windows 2000 SP4 or XP (English/Western European Versions)
• Processor: Pentium IV processor, 1.4 GHz minimum *
• Video Resolution: 1024 x 768 resolution with true color (24 bit or better)
• CD-ROM drive: 4X (16X recommended)
• Hard Disk space: 600 MB free disk space
• Mouse: Microsoft compatible
• RAM: 256 MB—Windows 2000 SP4 or XP (512 MB recommended)
Equipment Necessary for Connection of a Computer via DeviceNet, ControlNet or Ethernet:
DeviceNet
• Laptop computer: 1784-PCD DeviceNet PC interface card and 1784-PCD1 cable
• Desktop computer: 1784-PCIDS
• RS-232 interface (reduced performance): 1770-KFD DeviceNet interface module
NOTE: 2100H-ICPC120 patch cable is necessary for connecting interface (laptop, desktop, RS-232) to
IntelliCENTER MCC wireway
ControlNet
• Laptop computer: 1784-PCC ControlNet PC interface card and 1784-C1 cable
• Desktop computer: 1784-PCIC ControlNet PC interface card and 1786-TPR ControlNet tap
NOTE: Consult publication CNET-IN002x-EN-P, ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide, for
configuration and installation of ControlNet cable
Ethernet
• Laptop or desktop computer: consult local computer support personnel for Ethernet interface requirements
Recommended Additional Software
• RSNetWorx for DeviceNet—used for configuring DeviceNet nodes, saving parameters, and communicating to all
types of DeviceNet components (sensors, non-Allen-Bradley products and other products not found in MCCs)
• RSNetWorx for ControlNet—used for configuring ControlNet devices including ControlNet to DeviceNet bridge
* The IntelliCENTER software is a monitoring/communication software package requiring a very large amount of processor speed to function efficiently and quickly. The processor
speeds listed will allow the software to function correctly. However, for speed and efficiency, it is recommended to use the fastest Pentium IV class (or better) processor
available.
Units
Please read this important information for ordering units 2
Select sections separately from units
Units having DeviceNet options, ordered separately from vertical sections, will be supplied with a 48” DeviceNet drop cable for connecting 3
the DeviceNet device to a DeviceNet port in the vertical wireway of the existing CENTERLINE 2100 MCC with IntelliCENTER technology
Wiring Type
Units are available with either Type A or Type B wiring. Catalog numbers are for Type B wiring. To order Type A wired units, substitute the
letter B in the catalog number with the letter A. For example, change 2103LB-BKBD-30CB to 2103LA-BKBD-30CB
Units include door, unit support pan, hinges and hinge pins
Overload Relays
Starter units include a Bulletin 592 eutectic alloy overload relay as standard. See Options section for electronic overload relays
Heater Elements
Heater elements are offered on pages 227 through 231.
Power Fuses
Factory installed power fuses are available for most fusible units. See pages 207-208 for selection
Delivery Programs
Delivery programs are listed in all tables under the column marked “Delivery Program.” See page 3 for more delivery program information
71” High Sections
71” high sections will accommodate 4.5 space factor (maximum) units. For 71” high section restrictions, see page 24.
Bulletin 2113, Size 1, with Control Transformer Shown
Starter or Contactor Captive Latch Diagram Pocket Unit Stab Assembly
Control Circuit
Fuses and Unit Handle Interlock
Fuse Block
Circuit Breaker (shown)
or Fusible Disconnect
Auxiliary
Contacts
Disconnect Handle
Overload
Control Transformer
Fusing and Fuse Block
Control Circuit Transformer
(not shown) Defeater Mechanism
Power and Control Short Circuit Rating Label

Terminal Blocks Unit Identification Nameplate Captive Latch UL Label
Control Station
Unit Nameplate
Handle Cutout
Unit Door
Pilot Devices
Unit Support Pan Plastic Retaining Pin
Units
Contactor and Starter Units
Bulletin 2102L and 2103L 2
Combination Full-Voltage Lighting Contactor Units (FVLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
These combination lighting contactor units are supplied with an
Allen-Bradley 500L AC contactor and either a fusible disconnect or circuit 3
breaker. They are rated 30A through 300A. Each unit is provided as a
NEMA Class I, Type B-T unit with terminals mounted in the unit for 4
connection to remote devices.
5
Bulletin 2106 and 2107

Combination Full Voltage Reversing Starter Units (FVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
These combination full voltage reversing starter units are supplied with
an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 505 reversing starter and either a fusible
disconnect or a circuit breaker. The Bulletin 2106 and 2107 starters are
rated for NEMA sizes 1 through 5 and are mechanically and electrically
interlocked to avoid both contactors being closed simultaneously. Each
unit is provided as a NEMA Class I, Type B-T unit with terminals
mounted in the unit for connection to remote devices. Full voltage
reversing starter units are available with a eutectic alloy, E1 Plus or E3
Plus electronic overload relay.
Bulletin 2106 and 2107 Space Saving NEMA

Combination Full Voltage Reversing Starter Units (FVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
These combination full voltage reversing starter units offer a space saving
alternative while utilizing an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 300 reversing starter
and either a fused disconnect or a circuit breaker. The Bulletin 2106
Space Saving NEMA reversing starters are rated for NEMA Size 1
applications and the Bulletin 2107 Space Saving NEMA reversing starters
are rated for NEMA Size 1-3 applications. The contactors are
mechanically and electrically interlocked to avoid both contactors being
closed simultaneously. Each unit is provided as a NEMA Class I, Type
B-D unit with terminals mounted in the unit for connections to remote
devices. These full voltage reversing units are available with E1 Plus or
E3 Plus electronic overload relays.
Bulletin 2112, 2112 Vacuum, 2113, and 2113 Vacuum

Combination Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Units (FVNR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
These combination full voltage non-reversing starter units are supplied
with an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 509 starter (starter units with vacuum
contactors use Allen-Bradley Bulletin 1102C contactors) and either a
fusible disconnect or a circuit breaker. The full voltage non-reversing
starters are rated for NEMA sizes 1 through 6 (starter units with vacuum
contactors are rated 200A, 400A, or 600A). Each unit is provided as a
NEMA Class I, Type B-T unit, with terminals mounted in the unit for
connection to remote devices. Full voltage non-reversing starter units are
available with a eutectic alloy, E1 Plus or E3 electronic overload relay.
For more details on Bulletin 500 contactors and starters, see publication 500-BR010x-EN-P, NEMA Power Components, and
publication A116-CA001x-EN-P Allen-Bradley Industrial Controls Catalog. For more details on Bulletin 300 starters, see
publication 300-SG001x-EN-P, Bulletin 300 Starters Selection Guide. For more details on Bulletin 1102C vacuum contactors, see
publication 500-SG005x-EN-P, Bulletin 512V, 513V, 1102C, 1109, 1232V, 1233V Selection Guide.
Discount Schedule A6 For Options, Modifications and Accessories, see pages 107-123 33
Bulletin 2112 and 2113 Space Saving NEMA
2 Combination Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Units (FVNR) . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
These combination full voltage non-reversing starter units offer a space
3 saving alternative while utilizing an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 300 starter and
either a fused disconnect or a circuit breaker. The Bulletin 2112 Space
Saving NEMA non-reversing starter units are rated for NEMA Size 1
4 applications and the Bulletin 2113 Space Saving NEMA non-reversing
starter units are rated for NEMA Size 1-4 applications. Each unit is
provided as a NEMA Class I, Type B-D unit with terminals mounted in
5 the unit for connections to remote devices. These full voltage
non-reversing units are available with E1 Plus or E3 electronic overload
relays.
Bulletin 2122E, 2123E, 2122F and 2123F
Combination 2-Speed Starter Units (TS2W and TS1W). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
These combination two-speed starter units are supplied with an
Allen-Bradley Bulletin 520 starter and either a fusible disconnect or a
circuit breaker. The 2122 and 2123 starter units are designed for use with
motors having separate windings or consequent pole windings. The
2122E, 2123E, 2122F and 2123F are rated for NEMA sizes 1 through 5.
Each unit is provided as a NEMA Class I, Type B-T unit, with terminals
mounted in the unit for connection of remote devices. Two-speed starter
units are available with a eutectic alloy or E1 Plus overload relay.
Bulletin 2126E, 2127E, 2126F, 2127F, 2126J, 2127J, 2126K and 2127K
Combination 2-Speed Reversing Starter Units (TSR2W and TSR1W) . . . . . . . 52
These combination two-speed starter units are supplied with
Allen-Bradley Bulletin 505 and 520 starters and either a fusible
disconnect or a circuit breaker. The Bulletin 2126 and 2127 starter units
are designed for use with motors having separate windings or
consequent pole windings. Each unit is provided as a NEMA Class I,
Type B-T unit, with terminals mounted in the unit for connection of
remote devices.
• The 2126E and 2127E are two-speed reversing 2-winding starter units and
are rated for NEMA sizes 1 and 2.
• The 2126F and 2127F are two-speed reversing 1-winding starter units and
are rated for NEMA sizes 1 and 2.
• The 2126J and 2127J are two-speed reversing in low only 2-winding
starter units rated for NEMA sizes 1 and 2.
• The 2126K and 2127K are two-speed reversing in low only 1-winding
starter units rated for NEMA sizes 1 and 2.
Two speed reversing starter units are available with a eutectic alloy or E1
Plus overload relay.
For more details on Bulletin 500 contactors and starters, see publication 500-BR010x-EN-P, NEMA Power Components, and
publication A116-CA001x-EN-P Allen-Bradley Industrial Controls Catalog. For more details on Bulletin 300 starters, see
publication 300-SG001x-EN-P, Bulletin 300 Starters Selection Guide.
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2102L and 2103L
Full Voltage Lighting Contactors (FVLC) 2
• Allen-Bradley Bulletin 500L AC contactor with a fusible disconnect or circuit breaker
• Rated 30A - 300A 3
• NEMA Class I, Type B with terminals mounted on the unit
4
5
35
2102L B - B K B - 24J - 6P
2103L B - B K B - 30CB - 6P
Fuse Clip Ratings and Class or Trip Current
Bulletin Number Wiring Type Rating Amperes NEMA Enclosure Type Control Voltage Type Option
and Circuit Breaker Type
35C 35G
35E
35A
Code Rating Amperes Code Option
Code Control Voltage Type
Code Type Z 30A (0.5 Space Factor) See Options section
See Table on Page 205 beginning on Page 107.
Full Voltage Lighting B 30A
2102L Contactor (FVLC) with C 60A
Fusible Disconnect 35F
D 100A
Full Voltage Lighting Fuse Clip Ratings and
2103L Contactor (FVLC) with E 200A
F 300A Class or Trip Current
Circuit Breaker Code Circuit Breaker Type
2102L - “24J” Fuse
35D
Clip Rating and Class.
35B
See Table on Page 208
Code NEMA Enclosure Type Trip Current and Circuit
Code Wiring Type NEMA Type 1 or Type 1
2103L - “30CB” Breaker
K Type.
A Type A with gasket See Table on page 209 and
B Type B J NEMA Type 12 table on page 210.
Discount Schedule A6 For Options, Modifications, and Accessories, see pages 107–123 35
Bulletin 2102L
2 Full Voltage Lighting Contactor Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (FVLC)
• See page 33 for product description.
• For unit sizing, select unit rating based on 125% of actual load amperes.
3 • Unit includes three (3) power poles and one (1) hold-in contact.
NOTE: In order to address the heating effects from loads containing a high degree of harmonic content, it may be necessary to
oversize the field conductors (especially neutrals), use k-factor lighting transformers and oversize the lighting contactor units
4 (increase by 50%); for high harmonic load applications, Contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office.
36
5 Fuse Clip Catalog Number [3]
Transformer Primary Switching kVA [2] (See Appendix for
Rating Wiring Type B—Class I
short circuit Space Delivery
(Amperes) 208V 240V 380V- 415V 480V 600V withstand ratings.) Factor NEMA Type 1 Program
[1]
Rating and Type 1 w/ NEMA Type 12
1∅ 3∅ 1∅ 3∅ 1∅ 3∅ 1∅ 3∅ 1∅ 3∅ (Amperes)
Class gasket
30 [4] 1.2 3.6 2.4 4.3 2.8 7.1 4.9 8.5 6.2 11 30 CC, J 0.5 2102LB-ZK_-__ 2102LB-ZJ_-__
CC, J,
30 1.2 3.6 2.4 4.3 2.8 7.1 4.9 8.5 6.2 11 30 R, H 1.0 2102LB-BK_-__ 2102LB-BJ_-__
30 SC
60 2.1 6.3 4.1 7.2 6.8 11.8 8.3 14 10 18 60 1.0 2102LB-CK_-__ 2102LB-CJ_-__
100 4.1 12 8.1 14 60

13.3 23.3 16 28 20 35 2.5 2102LB-DK_-__ 2102LB-DJ_-__
100
J, R, H
100
200 6.8 20 14 23 22.5 39 27 47 34 59 200 3.0 2102LB-EK_-__ 2102LB-EJ_-__
PE
200
300 14 41 27 47 45 78.3 54 94 68 117 400 4.0 2102LB-FK_-__ 2102LB-FJ_-__
[1] Ampere ratings apply to non-motor loads such as fluorescent ballasts, mercury vapor lamps and resistive heating. Tungsten lamp current ratings are limited to applications 480
volts line-to-line (277 volts line-to-neutral) maximum.
[2] Ratings are based on the contactor being used to switch transformers having an inrush of not more than 20 times their rated full load current, regardless of the nature of the
secondary load. Ratings do not apply to transformers used in resistance welder service.
• Select control voltage type from table on page 205 (e.g., 2102LB-BKBD).
• Refer to table above to select fuse clip. Then select designator from table on page 208 (e.g., 2102LB-BKBD-24J).
• To select optional power fuse, and select from table on page 208 (e.g., 2102LB-BKBD-24J-607G).
• For fuse rating, based on disconnect rating see publication 2100-TD003x-EN-P.
[4] Separate or transformer control only, except 208V (where separate control only). These units have horizontal handles, Bulletin 194R fused disconnect switch, up to four (4)
Bulletin 800F pilot devices and one (1) 10-pt. pull-apart control terminal block with #16 AWG control wire only. One (1) 3-pole power terminal block is supplied as standard.
36 For Options, Modifications and Accessories, see pages 107–123 Discount Schedule A6
Bulletin 2103L
Full Voltage Lighting Contactor Unit with Circuit Breaker (FVLC) 2
• For unit sizing, select unit rating based on 125% of actual load amperes.
• Unit includes three (3) power poles and one (1) hold-in contact. 3
NOTE: In order to address the heating effects from loads containing a high degree of harmonic content, it may be necessary to
oversize the field conductors (especially neutrals), use k-factor lighting transformers and oversize the lighting contactor units
(increase by 50%). 4
37
Transformer Primary Switching kVA [2]

5
Catalog Number [3]
Rating Space Wiring Type B—Class I Delivery
(Amperes) 208V 240V 380V–415V 480V 600V
[1] Factor Program
NEMA Type 1 and
1∅ 3∅ 1∅ 3∅ 1∅ 3∅ 1∅ 3∅ 1∅ 3∅ NEMA Type 12
Type 1 w/ gasket
30 [4] 1.2 3.6 2.4 4.3 2.8 7.1 4.9 8.5 6.2 11 0.5 2103LB-ZK_-__ 2103LB-ZJ_-__
30 1.2 3.6 2.4 4.3 2.8 7.1 4.9 8.5 6.2 11 1.0 2103LB-BK_-__ 2103LB-BJ_-__
DUAL
1.2 3.6 2.4 4.3 2.8 7.1 4.9 8.5 6.2 11 1.5 2103LB-BK_-__[6] 2103LB-BJ_-__ [6]
30 [5]
SC
60 2.1 6.3 4.1 7.2 6.8 11.8 8.3 14 10 18 1.0 2103LB-CK_-__ 2103LB-CJ_-__
DUAL
2.1 6.3 4.1 7.2 6.8 11.8 8.3 14 10 18 1.5 2103LB-CK_-__ [6] 2103LB-CJ_-__ [6]
60 [5]
100 4.1 12 8.1 14 13.3 23.3 16 28 20 35 1.5 2103LB-DK_-__ 2103LB-DJ_-__
200 6.8 20 14 23 22.5 39 27 47 34 59 2.5 2103LB-EK_-__ 2103LB-EJ_-__
PE
300 14 41 27 47 45 78.3 54 94 68 117 3.5 2103LB-FK_-__ 2103LB-FJ_-__
[1] Ampere ratings apply to non-motor loads such as fluorescent ballasts, mercury vapor lamps and resistive heating. Tungsten lamp current ratings are limited to applications 480
volts line-to-line (277 volts line-to-neutral) maximum.
[2] Ratings are based on the contactor being used to switch transformers having an inrush of not more than 20 times their rated full load current, regardless of the nature of the
secondary load. Ratings do not apply to transformers used in resistance welder service.
• Select control voltage type from table on page 205 (e.g., 2103LB-BKBD).
• Select trip current from table on page 209 (e.g., 2103LB-BKBD-30).
• Select circuit breaker from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 210 (e.g., 2103LB-BKBD-30CB).
[4] Separate or transformer control only, except 208V (where separate control only). These units have horizontal handles, up to four (4) Bulletin 800F pilot devices and one (1) 10-pt.
pull-apart control terminal block with #16 AWG control wire only. One (1) 3-pole power terminal block is supplied as standard.
[5] Dual mounted unit supplied without power terminal blocks.
[6] To dual mount combination lighting contactors in one unit:
• Select two trip current numbers from table on page 209 (e.g., 2103LB-BKBD-3032).
• Then select circuit breaker from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 209 (e.g., 2103LB-BKBD-3032CB).
Discount Schedule A6 For Options, Modifications and Accessories, see pages 107–123 37
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2106 and 2107
2 Full Voltage Reversing Starters (FVR)
• Allen-Bradley Bulletin 505 reversing starter with a fusible disconnect or circuit breaker
3 • NEMA Sizes 1-5
• NEMA Class I, Type B wiring with terminals mounted in the unit
4 • Available with eutectic alloy, E1 Plus or E3 Plus electronic overload relays
5
38
2106 B - B A B - 41-24J - 6P
2107 B - B A B - 41CA - 6P
Horsepower and Disconnecting
Bulletin Number Wiring Type NEMA Size NEMA Enclosure Type Control Voltage Type Options
Means
38A 38C 38E 38G
Code Type Code NEMA Size Code Control Voltage Type Code Options
Full Voltage Reversing B 1 See Table on Page 205 See Options section
2106 (FVR) with Fusible C 2 beginning on Page 107.
Disconnect D 3 38F
Full Voltage Reversing E 4
2107 (FVR)) with Circuit Fuse Clip Ratings and Class or Trip
F 5 Code Current Circuit Breaker Type
Breaker
“41” Horsepower Code. See Horsepower
2106 - “41-24J” Table on Page 206.
38B “24J” Fuse Clip Rating and Class
Code Wiring Type See Fuse Clip Designator table on page 207
A Type A “41_” Horsepower Code. See Horsepower
B Type B Table on page 206
2107 - “41CA” “_CA” Circuit Breaker Type. See Table on
Circuit Breaker Type Table on page 211.
38D
Code NEMA Enclosure Type
NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with
A gasket with external reset
button
K gasket without external reset
button
NEMA Type 12 with external
D reset button
NEMA Type 12 without
J external reset button
Bulletin 2106
Full Voltage Reversing Starter Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (FVR) 2
See page 33 for product description.
39
3
Fuse Clip [1]
Catalog Number
Horsepower (See Appendix for short
NEMA circuit withstand ratings.) Space Wiring Type B—Class I Delivery 4
Size Factor NEMA Type 1 Program
Rating
208V 240V 380V–415V 480V/600V (Amperes)
Class and Type 1 w/ NEMA Type 12
gasket
5
CC, J, R, H,
30
1 0.125-7.5 0.125-7.5 0.125-10 0.125-10 HRCII-C 1.5 2106B-BA_-__ 2106B-BD_-__
60 J, R, H, HRCII-C
30 [2] J, R, H, HRCII-C
60 J, R, H, HRCII-C 1.5
2 10 10-15 15-25 15-25 100 J 2106B-CA_-__ 2106B-CD_-__
100 R, H, HRCII-C 2.0 [3] SC
60 [2] J, R, H, HRCII-C
3 15-25 20-30 30-50 30-50 100 J, R, H, HRCII-C 3.0 2106B-DA_-__ 2106B-DD_-__
200 J, R, H, HRCII-C
100 [2] J, R, H, HRCII-C
4 30-40 40-50 60-75 60-100 200 J, R, H, HRCII-C 4.0 2106B-EA_-__ 2106B-ED_-__
400 J
200 [2] J, R, H, HRCII-C
5 50-75 60-100 100-150 125-200 J, R, H, HRCII-C 6.0 [4], 2106B-FA_-__ 2106B-FD_-__ PE-II
400
J 20”W
600
• Select control voltage type from table on page 205 (e.g., 2106B-BABD).
• Select horsepower from table on page 206 (e.g., 2106B-BABD-31).
• If power fuse will NOT be selected, select fuse clip from table above. Then select clip designator from table on page 207 (e.g., 2106B-BABD-31-24J).
• If power fuse WILL be selected, first select clip designator from table on page 207 (e.g., 2106B-BABD-31__-20J). Then select power fuse from table on page 207 (e.g.,
2106B-BABD-31GT-20J).
• For fuse rating based on load horsepower, see publication 2100-TD003x-EN-P.
• The catalog numbers listed include an external reset button for the overload relay. To order catalog numbers without the external reset button, replace the letter “A” with
the letter “K” (e.g., 2106B-BK_-__) or replace the letter “D” with the letter “J” (e.g., 2106B-BJ_-___).
[2] Available on 480V and 600V applications only.
[3] For 208V and 240V applications with Class R or H fuses, unit only requires 1.5 space factors.
[4] Frame mounted unit, section does not have vertical wireway.
Bulletin 2107
Full Voltage Reversing Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (FVR)
40
Horsepower Catalog Number [1]

NEMA Space Wiring Type B—Class I Delivery
Size Factor NEMA Type 1 and Program
208V 240V 380V–415V 480V/600V NEMA Type 12
Type 1 w/ gasket
1 0.125-7.5 0.125-7.5 0.125-10 0.125-10 1.5 2107B-BA_-__ 2107B-BD_-__
2 10 10-15 15-25 15-25 1.5 2107B-CA_-__ 2107B-CD_-__
SC
3 15-25 20-30 30-50 30-50 2.5 2107B-DA_-__ 2107B-DD_-__
4 30-40 40-50 60-75 60-100 4.0 2107B-EA_-__ 2107B-ED_-__
5 50-75 60-100 100-150 125-200 6.0 [2], 2107B-FA_-__ 2107B-FD_-__ PE-II

20”W
• Select circuit breaker type from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 211 (e.g., 2107B-BABD-30CA).
• For circuit breaker size based on load horsepower, refer to publications 2100-TD001x-EN-P and 2100-TD002x-EN-P.
• The catalog numbers listed include an external reset button for the overload relay. To order catalog numbers without the external reset button, substitute the letter “A” with
the letter “K” (e.g., 2107B-BK_-__) or replace the letter “D” with the letter “J” (e.g., 2107B-BJ_-___).
Catalog Number Explanation - Space Saving NEMA Bulletin 2106 and 2107
2 Full Voltage Reversing Starters (FVR)
• Allen-Bradley Bulletin 300 starter with fused disconnect or circuit breaker
3 • NEMA Class 1, Type B-D unit with terminals mounted in unit
• Available with E1 Plus or E3 Plus electronic overload relay
4 • Space saving alternative to traditional NEMA starter units
5
41
2106 B - 3B A B - 38-24J - **
2107 B - 3B A B - 38CA - **
Bulletin Number Wiring Type NEMA Size NEMA Enclosure Type Control Voltage Type Option
Means
41C 41E 41G

41A
Code NEMA Size Code Control Voltage Type Code Option
Code Type See Options section
3B 1 See Table on page 205.
Full Voltage Reversing beginning on page 125.
2106 (FVR) with Fused 3C 2
Disconnect 3D 3 41F
Full Voltage Reversing Horsepower Code and
2107 (FVR) with Circuit 41D Code Disconnecting Means
Breaker
“38” Horsepower Code. See Table on
Code NEMA Enclosure Type page 206.
NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with 2106 - “38-24J”
41B A “24J” Fuse Clip Rating and Class. See
gasket with external reset button Table on page 207.
Code Wiring Type NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with “38_” Horsepower Code. See Table
B Type B-D K gasket without external reset on page 206.
button 2107 - “38CA” “_CA” Circuit Breaker Type. See
NEMA Type 12 with external reset Table on page 211.
D button
NEMA Type 12 without external
J reset button
Bulletin 2106
Space Saving NEMA Full Voltage Reversing Starter Unit with Fused Disconnect Switch (FVR) 2
• Units are cUL US listed, unless otherwise indicated.
42 3
Fuse Clip
Catalog Number [1]
Horsepower (See Appendix for short circuit
Space Wiring Type B—Class I Delivery
4
NEMA Size withstand ratings.)
Factor Program
Rating NEMA Type 1 and Type 1
480V 600V Class NEMA Type 12
(Amperes) w/ gasket 5
1 0.5 - 10 0.75 - 10 30 CC, J, HRCII-C 0.5[2] 2106B-3BA_-__ 2106B-3BD_-__ SC
• Select control voltage type from table on page 205 (e.g., 2106B-3BABD).
• Select horsepower from table on page 206 (e.g., 2106B-3BABD-38).
• Select fuse class from above. Then select clip designator from table on page 207 (e.g., 2106B-3BABD-38-24J).
The catalog numbers listed include an external reset button for the overload relay. To order catalog numbers without the external reset button, substitute the letter “A” with
the letter “K” (e.g. 2106B-3BK_-__) or replace the letter “D” with the letter “J” (e.g., 2106B-3BJ_-__)
[2] These units have horizontal operating handles, Bulletin 194R fused disconnect, up to four (4) Bulletin 800F pilot devices, #16 AWG control wire and one (1) 10-point control
terminal block (Type B-D only in Type B units). See page 8 or information on installation into series E-J sections.
Bulletin 2107
Space Saving NEMA Full Voltage Reversing Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (FVR)
• Units are cUL US listed, unless otherwise indicated.
43

NEMA Size Factor NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ Program
480V 600V NEMA Type 12
gasket
1 0.5 - 10 0.75 - 10 0.5[2] 2107B-3BA_-__ 2107B-3BD_-__
2 15 - 25 15 - 25 1.0[3] 2107B-3CA_-__ 2107B-3CD_-__ SC
3 30 - 50 30 - 50 1.5[3] 2107B-3DA_-__ 2107B-3DD_-__
• Select circuit breaker type from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 211 (e.g., 2107B-3BABD-38CA).
the letter “K” (e.g. 2107B-3BK_-__) or replace the letter “D” with the letter “J” (e.g., 2107B-3BJ_-__).
[2] These units have horizontal operating handles, up to four (4) Bulletin 800F pilot devices, #16 AWG control wire and one (1) 10-point control terminal block (Type B-D only in Type
B units). See page 8 for information on installation into series E-J sections.
[3] These units have horizontal operating handles, up to six (6) Bulletin 800F pilot devices, #16 AWG control wire and one (1) 10-point control terminal block (Type B-D only in Type B
units). See page 8 for information on installation into series E-J sections.
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2112, 2112 Vacuum, 2113, and
2 2113 Vacuum
Combination Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Units (FVNR)
3 • Allen-Bradley Bulletin 509 starter with a fusible disconnect or circuit breaker
(Bulletin 2112 and 2113 Vacuum use Allen-Bradley Bulletin 1102C vacuum contactors)
4 • NEMA Class I, Type B unit with terminals mounted in the unit
• Available with eutectic alloy, E1 Plus or E3 electronic overload relays.
5
44
2112 B - B A B - 41-24J - 6P
2113 B - B A B - 41CA - 6P
Bulletin Number Wiring Type NEMA Size NEMA Enclosure Type Control Voltage Type Options
Means
44A 44C 44F 44H
Code Type Code NEMA Size Code Control Voltage Type Code Options
Full Voltage Z 1 (0.5 Space Factor) See Table on Page 205 See Options section
2112 Non-Reversing (FVNR) beginning on Page 107.
B 1
with Fusible Disconnect C 2 44G
Full Voltage D 3
2113 Non-Reversing (FVNR)) Fuse Clip Ratings and Class or Trip
with Circuit Breaker E 4 Code Current Circuit Breaker Type
F 5 “41” Horsepower Code. See Table on
G 6 Page 206
2112 - “41-24J” “24J” Fuse Clip Rating and Class. See
44D
Fuse Clip Designator table on page 207
Vacuum Horsepower Code. See Table on page
Code Rating 206
44B 2113 - “41CA”
VB 200A “_CA” Circuit Breaker Type. See Circuit
Code Wiring Type VC 400A Breaker Type Table on page 211.
A Type A VD 600A
B Type B
44E
A gasket with external reset
button
K gasket without external reset
button
D reset button
J external reset button
Bulletin 2112
Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Units with Fusible Disconnect Switch (FVNR) 2
45
3
Fuse Clip [1]
Horsepower (See Appendix for short Catalog Number
NEMA circuit withstand ratings.) Space Wiring Type B—Class
Delivery 4
Rating
208V 240V 380V–415V 480V/600V (Amperes) Class and Type 1 w/ NEMA Type 12
gasket 5
1 [2] 0.125-5 0.125-5 0.125-10 0.125-10 30 CC, J, HRCII-C 0.5 2112B-ZA_-__ 2112B-ZD_-__
CC, J, R, H,
30
1 0.125-7.5 0.125-7.5 0.125-10 0.125-10 HRCII-C, 1.0 2112B-BA_-__ 2112B-BD_-__
60 J, R, H, HRCII-C
30 [3] J, R, H, HRCII-C
60 J, R, H, HRCII-C 1.0
2 10 10-15 15-25 15-25 100 J, HRCII-C 2112B-CA_-__ 2112B-CD_-__
100 R, H 1.5
60 [3] J
100 J 2.0
200 J
3 15-25 20-30 30-50 30-50 2112B-DA_-__ 2112B-DD_-__
60 [3] R, H, HRCII-C SC
100 R, H, HRCII-C 2.5
200 R, H, HRCII-C
100 [3] J, HRCII-C
200 J, HRCII-C 2.5
4 30-40 40-50 60-75 60-100 400 J 2112B-EA_-__ 2112B-ED_-__
100 [3] R, H 3.0
200 R, H
200 [3] J
400 J 3.5
5 50-75 60-100 100-150 125-200 600 J 2112B-FA_-__ 2112B-FD_-__
200 [3] R, H, HRCII-C 4.0
400 R, H, HRCII-C
400 [3] R, H
600 J, R, HRCII-C 2112BB-GA_-__ 2112BB-GD_-__
800 L 6.0 [5]
[4] 100-150 125-200 200-300 250-400 PE-II
6 25” W
400 [3] R, H
600 J, R, HRCII-C 2112BT-GA_-__ 2112BT-GD_-__
800 L
• If power fuse will NOT be selected, select fuse clip from table above. Then select clip designator from table on page 207 (e.g., 2112B-BABD-31-24J).
• If power fuse WILL be selected, first select clip designator from table on page 207 (e.g., 2112B-BABD-31__-20J). Then select power fuse from table on page 207 (e.g.,
2112B-BABD-31GT-20J).
The catalog numbers listed include an external reset button for the overload relay. To order catalog numbers without the external reset button, replace the letter “A” with the
letter “K” (e.g., 2112B-BK_-__) or replace the letter “D” with the letter “J” (e.g., 2112B-BJ_-___).
[2] Separate or transformer control only, except 208V (where separate control only). These units have horizontal operating handles, Bulletin 194R fused disconnect switch, up to four
(4) Bulletin 800F pilot devices and one (1) 10-pt. pull-apart control terminal block (Type B-D only in Type B units), with #16 AWG control wire only. See page 8 for information on
installation into series E-J sections.
[3] Available on 480 and 600 Volt applications only.
[4] For NEMA size 6, select either top cable entry (2112BT-) or bottom cable entry (2112BB-).
Bulletin 2112 Vacuum
2 Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Unit with Vacuum Contactor and Fusible Disconnect Switch (FVNR)
3 • Starters are supplied with one (1) normally open and one (1) normally closed auxiliary contacts as standard.
Note: option code 91 is required to indicate the normally closed contact is being supplied.
Additional auxiliary contacts (two [2] normally open and two [2] normally closed) can be added (option code 90011)
4 With optional auxiliary contacts, the complete option code (including the standard normally closed contact) is 900111.
Refer to Options section on page 124.
5 • Units are NOT UL listed or CSA certified
45A
Fuse Clip
Horsepower (See Appendix for Catalog Number [1]
Disconnect short circuit Wiring Type B—Class
Rating Space Switch withstand ratings.) Delivery
(Amperes) Factor Rating Program
(Amperes) Rating NEMA Type 1
380V–
208V 240V 480V 600V (Amperes) Fuse Class and Type 1 w/ NEMA Type 12
415V gasket
J, R, H,
100[2] HRCII-C
40 - 50 40 - 60 60 - 60 - 60 - 3.5 200
100 125 150 J, R, H,
200 HRCII-C
200 2112B-VBA_-__ 2112B-VBD_-__
400 J
J, R, H,
200[2] HRCII-C
60 75 - 150 200 4 400 SC
400 J
J, R, H,
200[2] HRCII-C
75 - 125 - 250 -
100 200 4.5 400 J, R, H,
100 200 300 400 HRCII-C
400 2112B-VCA_-__ 2112B-VCD_-__
600 J
J, R, H,
125 - 250 - 350 - 6.0 400
125 250 600 HRCII-C
150 300 400 20”W[3]
600 J
SC-II
J, R, H,
6.0 400
600 150 - 300 350 - 600 HRCII-C 2112B-VDA_-__ 2112B-VDD_-__
20”W[3]
600 J
• Select the control voltage type from table on page 205 (e.g., 2112B-VBABD).
• Select the horsepower from table on page 206 (e.g., 2112B-VBABD-51).
• If power fuse will NOT be selected, select fuse clip from table above. Then select clip designator from table on page 207 (e.g., 2112B-VBABD-51-26J).
• If power fuse WILL be selected, first select clip designator from table on page 207 (e.g., 2112B-VBABD-51__-20J).
Then select power fuse from table on page 207 (e.g., 2112B-VBABD-51GT-20J).
The catalog numbers listed include an external reset button for the overload relay. To order catalog numbers without the external reset button,
replace the letter “A” with the letter “K” (e.g., 2112B-VBK_-__) or replace the letter “D” with the letter “J” (e.g., 2112B-VBJ_-___).
Bulletin 2113
Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (FVNR) 2
46
3
NEMA Size
208V 240V 380V–415V 480V/600V
Factor NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 12
Program 4
Type 1 w/ gasket
1 [2] 0.125-5 0.125-5 0.125-10 0.125-10 0.5 2113B-ZA_-__ 2113B-ZD_-__
1 0.125-7.5 0.125-7.5 0.125-10 0.125-10 1.0 2113B-BA_-__ 2113B-BD_-__ 5
DUAL 1 [3] 0.125-7.5 0.125-7.5 0.125-10 0.125-10 1.5 2113B-BA_-__ [4]
2113B-BD_-__ [4]
2 10 10-15 15-25 15-25 1.0 2113B-CA_-__ 2113B-CD_-__ SC
DUAL 2 [3] 10 10-15 15-25 15-25 1.5 2113B-CA_-__ [4] 2113B-CD_-__ [4]
3 15-25 20-30 30-50 30-50 1.5 2113B-DA_-__ 2113B-DD_-__
4 30-40 40-50 60-75 60-100 2.0 2113B-EA_-__ 2113B-ED_-__
5 50-75 60-100 100-150 125-200 3.5 2113B-FA_-__ 2113B-FD_-__
6.0 [6] 2113BT-GA_-__ 2113BT-GD_-__
6 [5] 100-150 125-200 200-300 250-400 PE-II
25″ W 2113BB-GA_-__ 2113BB-GD_-__
• Select the control voltage type from table on page 205 (e.g., 2113B-BABD).
• Select circuit breaker from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 211 (e.g., 2113B-BABD-30CA).
letter “K” (e.g., 2113B-BK_-__) or replace the letter “D” with the letter “J” (e.g., 2113B-BJ_-___).
[2] Separate or transformer control only, except 208V (where separate control only). These units have horizontal operating handles, up to four (4) Bulletin 800F pilot devices and one
(1) 10-pt. pull-apart control terminal block (Type BD only in Type B units), with #16 AWG control wire only. See page 8 for information on installation into series E-J sections.
[3] Dual mounted units supplied without power terminal blocks.
[4] Dual mounting of combination starters in one unit. Add two numbers from table on page 206 to identify the horsepower and add the suffix letter from table on page 211 to
identify the circuit breaker type (e.g., 2113B-BABD-3941CA).
[5] For 200HP at 240V or 400HP at 480V, suffix letter identifying circuit breaker must be CT or CM only. For NEMA size 6, select either top cable entry (2113BT-) or bottom entry
(2113BB-) of motor load cables.
Bulletin 2113 Vacuum

Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Unit with Vacuum Contactor and Circuit Breaker (FVNR)
• Starters are supplied with one (1) normally open and one (1) normally closed auxiliary contacts as standard.
Note: option code 91 is required to indicate the normally closed contact is being supplied.
Additional auxiliary contacts (two [2] normally open and two [2] normally closed) can be added (option code 90011)
With optional auxiliary contacts, the complete option code (including the standard normally closed contact) is 900111.
Refer to Options section on page 120.
• Units are NOT UL listed or CSA certified
46A

Circuit Breaker Wiring Type B—Class
Rating Space Delivery
(Amperes) Factor Frame Program
208V 240V 380V–415V 480V 600V (Amperes) NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 12
Type 1 w/ gasket
40 40 - 50 60 - 75 60 - 100 60 - 100
200 3.5 250AF 2113B-VBA_-__ 2113B-VBD_-__
50 - 60 60 - 75 100 125 - 150 125 - 200
- - 125 - - 3.5 250AF 2113B-VCA_-__ 2113B-VCD_-__ SC
75 100 150 200 - 3.5 400AF 2113B-VCA_-__ 2113B-VCD_-__
400
100 - 200 - 250 - 300 4 600AF 2113B-VCA_-__ 2113B-VCD_-__
125 125 - 150 250 250 - 300 350 - 400 6.0, 20”W[2] 600AF 2113B-VCA_-__ 2113B-VCD_-__
SC-II
600 150 - 300 350 - 6.0, 20”W[2] 600AF 2113B-VDA_-_ 2113B-VDD_-_
• Select the control voltage type from table on page 205 (e.g., 2113B-VBABD).
• Select the horsepower from table on page 206 (e.g., 2113B-VBABD-52).
• Select the circuit breaker from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 211 (e.g., 2113B-VBABD-52CT).
• The catalog numbers listed include an external reset button for the overload relay. To order catalog numbers without the external reset button, replace the letter “A” with the
letter “K” (e.g., 2113B-VBK_-__) or replace the letter “D” with the letter “J” (e.g., 2113B-VBJ_-___).
Catalog Number Explanation - Space Saving NEMA Bulletin 2112 and 2113
2 Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starters (FVNR)
• Allen-Bradley Bulletin 300 starter with fused disconnect or circuit breaker
3 • NEMA Class 1, Type B unit with terminals mounted in unit
• Available with E1 Plus or E3 electronic overload relay
4 • Space saving alternative to traditional NEMA starter units
47
2112 B - 3B A B - 38-24J - **
2113 B - 3B A B - 38CA - **
Means
47C 47G
47E
47A Code NEMA Size Code Control Voltage Type Code Option
Code Type 3B 1 See Table on page 205. See Options section
Full Voltage 3C 2 beginning on page 125.
2112 Non-Reversing (FVNR) 3D 3 47F
with Fused Disconnect 3E 4 Horsepower Code and
Full Voltage Code Disconnecting Means
2113 Non-Reversing (FVNR) 47D “38” Horsepower Code. See Table on
with Circuit Breaker page 206.
Code NEMA Enclosure Type 2112 - “38-24J” “24J” Fuse Clip Rating and Class. See
NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with Table on page 207.
A
47B gasket with external reset button
“38_” Horsepower Code. See Table
Code Wiring Type NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with on page 206.
K gasket without external reset 2113 - “38CA”
B Type B-D “_CA” Circuit Breaker Type. See
button Table on page 211.
NEMA Type 12 with external reset
D button
J reset button
Bulletin 2112
Space Saving NEMA Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Unit with Fused Disconnect Switch (FVNR) 2
• Units are cUL US listed unless otherwise indicated.
48 3
Fuse Clip
Catalog Number [1]
NEMA
Horsepower (See Appendix for short circuit
4
withstand ratings.)
Size Factor Program
Rating NEMA Type 1 and Type 1
480V 600V Class NEMA Type 12
(Amperes) w/ gasket 5
1 0.5 - 10 0.75 - 10 30 CC, J, HRCII-C 0.5[2] 2112B-3BA_-__ 2112B-3BD_-__ SC
• Select fuse class from above. Then select clip designator from table on page 207 (e.g., 2112B-3BABD-38-24J)
[2] These units have horizontal operating handles, Bulletin 194R fused disconnect, up to four (4) Bulletin 800F pilot devices, #16 AWG control wire and one (1) 10-point control
terminal block (Type B-D only in Type B units). See page 8 for information on installation into series E-J sections.
Bulletin 2113
Space Saving NEMA Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (FVNR)
• Units are cUL US listed unless otherwise indicated.
49

NEMA Size Factor NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ Program
480V 600V NEMA Type 12
gasket
1 0.5 - 10 0.75 - 10 0.5[2] 2113B-3BA_-__ 2113B-3BD_-__
2 15 - 25 15 - 25 0.5[2],[3] 2113B-3CA_-__ 2113B-3CD_-__
SC
3 30 - 50 30 - 50 1.0[4] 2113B-3DA_-__ 2113B-3DD_-__
4 60 - 100 60 - 100 1.0[4],[5] 2113B-3EA_-__ 2113B-3ED_-__
• Select circuit breaker type from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 211 (e.g., 2113B-3BABD-38CA)
[2] These units have horizontal operating handles, up to four (4) Bulletin 800F pilot devices, #16AWG control wire and one (1) 10-point control terminal block (Type B-D only in Type B
[3] 1.0 space factor required for Size 2, Bulletin 2113 units with pilot devices and external reset button for overload relay.
[4] These units have horizontal operating handles, up to six (6) Bulletin 800F pilot devices, #16 AWG control wire and one (1) 10-point control terminal block (Type B-D only in Type B
[5] 1.0 space factor for unit with E1 Plus overload relay (option 7FEE_, 7FEE_D, or 7FEE_J)
1.5 space factor for unit with E3 overload relay (option 7FEC1_ or 7FEC2_)
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2122E, 2123E, 2122F and 2123F
2 Combination 2-Speed Starter Units (TS2W and TS1W)
• Allen-Bradley Bulletin 520 starter with a fusible disconnect or circuit breaker
3 • Designed with separate windings or consequent pole windings
4 • Two-Speed units available with eutectic alloy or E1 Plus overload relays
• NEMA Sizes 1 - 5
5
50
2122E B - B A B - 41-24J - 6P
2123F B - B A B - 41CA - 6P
Means
50C 50E 50G
50A
Code Type
B 1 See Table on Page 205 See Options section
Two-Speed, beginning on Page 107.
2-Winding Starter C 2
2122E D 3
(TS2W) with Fusible 50F
Disconnect E 4
Two-Speed, F 5 Fuse Clip Ratings and Class or Trip
2123E 2-Winding (TS2W) Code Current Circuit Breaker Type
with Circuit Breaker “41” Horsepower Code. See Table on Page
2122 - “41-24J” 206
Two-Speed, 50D
1-Winding Starter Code NEMA Enclosure Type “24J” Fuse Clip Rating and Class. See
2122F Fuse Clip Designator table on page 207
(TS1W) with Fusible NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with
Disconnect A gasket with external reset Horsepower Code. See Table on page 206
Two-Speed, button 2123 - “41CA” “_CA” Circuit Breaker Type. See Circuit
2123F 1-Winding (TS1W) Breaker Type Table on page 211.
with Circuit Breaker K gasket without external reset
button
D
50B reset button
Code Wiring Type J external reset button
A Type A
B Type B
Bulletin 2122E
Two Speed 2-Winding Starter Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (TS2W) 2
• Unit includes one set of 3-pole fuse clips.
NOTE: A two-speed 2-winding motor (TS2W) requires a mechanically and electrically interlocked assembly of two 3-pole contactors. A 3
two-speed 1-winding motor (TS1W) requires a mechanically and electrically interlocked assembly of 3-pole and 5-pole
contactors. Consult your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office for application assistance.
51
4
Fuse Clip
Constant or Variable Torque (See Appendix for short Catalog Number [1] 5
NEMA Horsepower Space Wiring Type B—Class I Delivery
circuit withstand ratings.)
Size Factor Program
Rating NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 12
208V 240V 380V–415V 480V/600V (Amperes) Class Type 1 w/ gasket
CC, J, R, H,
30
1 0.125-7.5 0.125- 7.5 0.125-10 0.125-10 HRCII-C 2.0 2122EB-BA_-__ 2122EB-BD_-__
60 J, R, H, HRCII-C
30 [2] J, R, H, HRCII-C
2 10 10-15 15-25 15-25 60 J, R, H, HRCII-C 2.0 2122EB-CA_-__ 2122EB-CD_-__ SC
60 [2] J, R, H, HRCII-C
3 15-25 20-30 30-50 30-50 100 J, R, H, HRCII-C 3.0 2122EB-DA_-__ 2122EB-DD_-__
100 [2] J, R, H, HRCII-C
4 30-40 40-50 60-75 60-100 200 J, R, H, HRCII-C 4.5 2122EB-EA_-__ 2122EB-ED_-__ PE
400 J
200 [2] J, R, H, HRCII-C
6.0 [4], 2122EB-FA_-__
5 [3] 50-75 60-100 100-150 125-200 400 J, R, H, HRCII-C
20” W
2122EB-FD_-__ PE-II
600 J
• Select the control voltage type from table on page 205 (e.g., 2122EB-BABD).
• Select horsepower from table on page 206 (e.g., 2122EB-BABD-31).
• If power fuse will NOT be selected, select fuse clip from table above. Then select clip designator from table on page 207 (e.g., 2122EB-BABD-31-24J).
• If power fuse WILL be selected, first select clip designator from table on page 207 (e.g., 2122EB-BABD-31__-20J). Then select power fuse from table on page 207 (e.g.,
2122EB-BABD-31GT-20J).
letter “K” (e.g., 2122EB-BK_-__) or replace the letter “D” with the letter “J” (e.g., 2122EB-BJ_-___).
[3] If low speed full load current is below 77A, a special starter is required. Contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office.
Bulletin 2122F
2 Two Speed 1-Winding Starter Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (TS1W)
3 NOTE: A two-speed 1-winding motor (TS1W) requires a mechanically and electrically interlocked assembly of 3-pole and 5-pole
contactors. A two-speed 2-winding motor (TS2W) requires a mechanically and electrically interlocked assembly of two 3-pole
4 52
Fuse Clip
5 Constant or Variable Torque (See Appendix for short Catalog Number [1]
Horsepower Wiring Type B—Class I
NEMA circuit withstand ratings.) Space Delivery
208V 240V Rating
380V- 415V 480V/600V (Amperes) Class and Type 1 w/ NEMA Type 12
gasket
CC, J, R, H,
30
1 0.125-7.5 0.125-7.5 0.125-10 0.125-10 HRCII-C 2.0 2122FB-BA_-__ 2122FB-BD_-__
60 J, R, H, HRCII-C
30 [2] J, R, H, HRCII-C
2 10 10-15 15-25 15-25 60 J, R, H, HRCII-C 2.0 2122FB-CA_-__ 2122FB-CD_-__ SC
60 [2] J, R, H, HRCII-C
3 15-25 20-30 30-50 30-50 100 J, R, H, HRCII-C 4.0 2122FB-DA_-__ 2122FB-DD_-__
100 [2] J, R, H, HRCII-C
4 30-40 40-50 60-75 60-100 200 J, R, H, HRCII-C 4.5 2122FB-EA_-__ 2122FB-ED_-__ PE
400 J
200 [2] J, R, H, HRCII-C
6.0 [4] 2122FB-FA_-__
5 [3] 50-75 60-100 100-150 125-200 400 J, R, H, HRCII-C
25” W
2122FB-FD_-__ PE-II
600 J
• Select the control voltage type from table on page 205 (e.g., 2122FB-BABD).
• Select the horsepower from table on page 206 (e.g., 2122FB-BABD-31).
• If power fuse will NOT be selected, select fuse clip from table above. Then select clip designator from table on page 207 (e.g., 2122FB-BABD-31-24J).
• If power fuse WILL be selected, first select clip designator from table on page 207 (e.g., 2122FB-BABD-31__-20J). Then select power fuse from table on page 207 (e.g.,
2122FB-BABD-31GT-20J).
letter “K” (e.g., 2122FB-BK_-__) or replace the letter “D” with the letter “J” (e.g., 2122FB-BJ_-___).
Bulletin 2123E
Two Speed 2-Winding Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (TS2W) 2
NOTE: A two-speed 2-winding motor (TS2W) requires a mechanically and electrically interlocked assembly of two 3-pole contactors. A
3
53 4
Constant or Variable Torque [1]
Catalog Number
Horsepower
NEMA
Size
Space
Factor
Wiring Type B—Class I Delivery
Program
5
NEMA Type 1 and
208V 240V 380V-415V 480V/600V NEMA Type 12
Type 1 w/ gasket
1 0.125-7.5 0.125-7.5 0.125-10 0.125-10 2.0 2123EB-BA_-__ 2123EB-BD_-__
2 10 10-15 15-25 15-25 2.0 2123EB-CA_-__ 2123EB-CD_-__ SC
3 15-25 20-30 30-50 30-50 3.0 2123EB-DA_-__ 2123EB-DD_-__
4 30-40 40-50 60-75 60-100 4.5 2123EB-EA_-__ 2123EB-ED_-__ PE
[3]
6.0 , 20” 2123EB-FA_-__
5 [2] 50-75 60-100 100-150 125-200
W
2123EB-FD_-__ PE-II

• Select the horsepower from table on page 206 (e.g., 2123EB-BABD-30).
• Select the circuit breaker from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 211 (e.g., 2123EB-BABD-30CA).
Bulletin 2123F
Two Speed 1-Winding Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (TS1W)
NOTE: A two-speed 1-winding motor (TS1W) requires a mechanically and electrically interlocked assembly of 3-pole and 5-pole
contactors. A two-speed 2-winding motor (TS2W) requires a mechanically and electrically interlocked assembly of two 3-pole
54
Constant or Variable Torque Catalog Number [1]

Size Factor NEMA Type 1 and Program
208V 240V 380V-415V 480V/600V NEMA Type 12
Type 1 w/ gasket
1 0.125-7.5 0.125-7.5 0.125-10 0.125-10 2.0 2123FB-BA_-__ 2123FB-BD_-__
2 10 10-15 15-25 15-25 2.0 2123FB-CA_-__ 2123FB-CD_-__ SC
3 15-25 20-30 30-50 30-50 3.5 2123FB-DA_-__ 2123FB-DD_-__
4 30-40 40-50 60-75 60-100 4.5 2123FB-EA_-__ 2123FB-ED_-__ PE
6.0 [3]
5 [2] 50-75 60-100 100-150 125-200 2123FB-FA_-__ 2123FB-FD_-__ PE-II
25” W
• Select the circuit breaker from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 211 (e.g., 2123FB-BABD-30CA).
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2126E, 2127E, 2126F, 2127F, 2126J,
2 2127J, 2126K and 2127K
Combination 2-Speed Reversing Starter Units (TSR2W and TSR1W)
3 • Allen-Bradley Bulletin 505, Reversing and Bulletin 520, 2-speed starter with a fusible disconnect or circuit
breaker
4 • Designed with separate windings or consequent pole windings
• NEMA sizes 1 and 2
5 • NEMA Class I, Type B wiring with terminals mounted in the unit
• Two-Speed, Reversing units available with eutectic alloy or E1 Plus overload relays
55
2126E B - B A B - 41-24J - 6P
2127E B - B A A - 41CA - 6P
Horsepower and
Disconnecting Means
55C 55G
55E
55B
Code Wiring Type B 1 See Options section
See Table on Page 205
A Type A C 2 beginning on Page 107.
B Type B 55F
Fuse Clip Ratings and Class or
55A
Code Trip Current Circuit Breaker Type
“41”Horsepower Code. See
Code Type Horsepower Table on page 206.
Two-Speed, Reversing 2-Winding Starter 2126 - “41-24J” “24J” Fuse Clip Rating and Class.
2126E (TSR2W) with Fusible Disconnect See Fuse Clip Designator table on
Two-Speed, Reversing 2-Winding Starter page 207.
2127E (TSR2W) with Circuit Breaker “41_” Horsepower Code.
Two-Speed, Reversing 1-Winding Starter See Horsepower Table on page 206.
2126F 2127 - “41CA” “_CA” Circuit Breaker Type.
(TSR1W) with Fusible Disconnect
Two-Speed, Reversing 1-Winding Starter See Circuit Breaker Type Table on
2127F page 211.
(TSR1W) with Circuit Breaker
Two-Speed, Reversing in Low Speed Only
2126J 2-Winding Starter (TSR2W) with Fusible
Disconnect
Two-Speed, Reversing in Low Speed Only 55D
2127J 2-Winding Starter (TSR2W) with Circuit
Breaker Code NEMA Enclosure Type
Two-Speed, Reversing in Low Speed Only NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with
A
2126K 1-Winding Starter (TSR1W) with Fusible gasket with external reset button
Disconnect NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with
Two-Speed, Reversing in Low Speed Only K gasket without external reset
2127K 1-Winding Starter (TSR1W) with Circuit button
Breaker D NEMA Type 12 with external
reset button
J reset button
Bulletin 2126E
Two Speed Reversing 2-Winding Starter Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (TSR2W) 2
NOTE: A two-speed 2-winding motor (TS2W) requires a mechanically and electrically interlocked assembly of two 3-pole contactors. A 3
56
4
Fuse Clip
Constant or Variable Torque (See Appendix for short Catalog Number [1] 5
circuit withstand ratings.)
Size Factor Program
Rating NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 12
208V 240V 380V–415V 480V/600V (Amperes) Class Type 1 w/ gasket
CC, J, R, H,
30
1 0.125-7.5 0.125-7.5 0.125-10 0.125-10 HRCII-C 3.0 2126EB-BA_-__ 2126EB-BD_-__
60 J, R, H, HRCII-C
PE
30 [2] J, R, H, HRCII-C
2 10 10-15 15-25 15-25 60 J, R, H, HRCII-C 3.0 2126EB-CA_-__ 2126EB-CD_-__
100 J, HRCII-C
• Select control voltage type from table on page 205 (e.g., 2126EB-BABD).
• Select horsepower from table on page 206 (e.g., 2126EB-BABD-31).
• If power fuse will NOT be selected, select fuse clip from table above. Then select clip designator from table on page 207 (e.g., 2126EB-BABD-31-24J).
• If power fuse WILL be selected, first select clip designator from table on page 207 (e.g., 2126EB-BABD-31__-20J). Then select power fuse from table on page 207 (e.g.,
2126EB-BABD-31GT-20J).
letter “K” (e.g., 2126EB-BK_-__) or replace the letter “D” with the letter “J”(e.g., 2126EB-BJ_-___).
Bulletin 2126F
Two Speed Reversing 1-Winding Starter Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (TSR1W)
NOTE: A two-speed 2-winding motor (TSR2W) requires a mechanically and electrically interlocked assembly of two 3-pole contactors.
A two-speed 1-winding motor (TSR1W) requires a mechanically and electrically interlocked assembly of 3-pole and 5-pole
57
Fuse Clip
Constant or Variable Torque (See Appendix for short Catalog Number [1]
Horsepower Wiring Type B—Class I
NEMA circuit withstand ratings.) Space Delivery
208V 240V 380V- 415V Rating
480V/600V (Amperes) Class and Type 1 w/ NEMA Type 12
gasket
CC, J, R, H,
30
1 0.125-7.5 0.125- 7.5 0.125-10 0.125-10 HRCII-C, 3.0 2126FB-BA_-__ 2126FB-BD_-__
60 J, R, H, HRCII-C
PE
30 [2] J, R, H, HRCII-C
2 10 10-15 15-25 15-25 60 J, R, H, HRCII-C 3.0 2126FB-CA_-__ 2126FB-CD_-__
100 J, HRCII-C
• If power fuse will NOT be selected, select fuse clip from table above. Then select clip designator from table on page 207 (e.g., 2126FB-BABD-31-24J).
• If power fuse WILL be selected, first select clip designator from table on page 207 (e.g., 2126FB-BABD-31__-20J). Then select power fuse from table on page 207 (e.g.,
2126FB-BABD-31GT-20J).
Bulletin 2126J
2 Two Speed Reversing in Low Speed Only 2-Winding Starter Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (TSR2W)
3 NOTE: A two-speed 2-winding motor (TS2W) requires a mechanically and electrically interlocked assembly of two 3-pole contactors. A
4 58
Fuse Clip
5 Constant or Variable Torque (See Appendix for short Catalog Number [1]
NEMA Horsepower circuit withstand Space Wiring Type B—Class I Delivery
Size ratings.) Factor Program
Rating NEMA Type 1 and
208V 240V 380V- 415V 480V/600V Class NEMA Type 12
(Amperes) Type 1 w/ gasket
CC, J, R, H,
1 0.125-7.5 0.125-7.5 0.125-10 0.125-10 30 HRCII-C 3.0 2126JB-BA_-__ 2126JB-BD_-__
60 J, R, H, HRCII-C
PE
30 [2] J, R, H, HRCII-C
2 10 10-15 15-25 15-25 60 J, R, H, HRCII-C 3.0 2126JB-CA_-__ 2126JB-CD_-__
100 J, HRCII-C
• Select the control voltage type from table on page 205 (e.g., 2126JB-BABD).
• Select the horsepower from table on page 206 (e.g., 2126JB-BABD-31).
• If power fuse will NOT be selected, select fuse clip from table above. Then select clip designator from table on page 207 (e.g., 2126JB-BABD-31-24J).
• If power fuse WILL be selected, first select clip designator from table on page 207 (e.g., 2126JB-BABD-31__-20J). Then select power fuse from table on page 207 (e.g.,
2126JB-BABD-31GT-20J).
letter “K” (e.g., 2126JB-BK_-__) or replace the letter “D” with the letter “J” (e.g., 2126JB-BJ_-___).
Bulletin 2126K
Two Speed Reversing in Low Speed Only 1-Winding Starter Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (TSR1W)
59
Fuse Clip
Constant or Variable Torque (See Appendix for short Catalog Number [1]
NEMA Horsepower circuit withstand Space Wiring Type B—Class I Delivery
Size ratings.) Factor Program
Rating NEMA Type 1 and
208V 240V 380V-415V 480V/600V (Amperes) Class NEMA Type 12
Type 1 w/ gasket
CC, J, R, H,
30
1 0.125-7.5 0.125-7.5 0.125-10 0.125-10 HRCII-C 3.0 2126KB-BA_-__ 2126KB-BD_-__
60 J, R, H, HRCII-C
PE
30 [2] J, R, H, HRCII-C
2 10 10-15 15-25 15-25 60 J, R, H, HRCII-C 3.0 2126KB-CA_-__ 2126KB-CD_-__
100 J, HRCII-C
• Select the control voltage type from table on page 205 (e.g., 2126KB-BABD).
• Select the horsepower from table on page 206 (e.g., 2126KB-BABD-31).
• If power fuse will NOT be selected, select fuse clip from table above. Then select clip designator from table on page 207 (e.g., 2126KB-BABD-31-24J).
• If power fuse WILL be selected, first select clip designator from table on page 207 (e.g., 2126KB-BABD-31__-20J). Then select power fuse from table on page 207 (e.g.,
2126KB-BABD-31GT-20J).
letter “K” (e.g., 2126KB-BK_-__) or replace the letter “D” with the letter “J” (e.g., 2126KB-BJ_-___).
Bulletin 2127E
Two Speed Reversing 2-Winding Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (TSR2W) 2
3
60 4
Catalog Number
NEMA Horsepower Space Wiring Type B—Class I Delivery 5
Size Factor NEMA Type 1 and Type Program
208V 240V 380V-415V 480V/600V NEMA Type 12
1 w/ gasket
1 0.125- 7.5 0.125-7.5 0.125-10 0.125-10 3.0 2127EB-BA_-__ 2127EB-BD_-__
PE
2 10 10-15 15-25 15-25 3.0 2127EB-CA_-__ 2127EB-CD_-__
• Select the horsepower from table on page 206 (e.g., 2127EB-BABD- 31).
• Select the circuit breaker from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 211 (e.g., 2127EB-BABD-31CA).
Bulletin 2127F
Two Speed Reversing 1-Winding Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (TSR1W)
61

208V 240V 380V-415V 480V/600V NEMA Type 12
1 w/ gasket
1 0.125-7.5 0.125-7.5 0.125-10 0.125-10 3.0 2127FB-BA_-__ 2127FB-BD_-__
PE
2 10 10-15 15-25 15-25 3.0 2127FB-CA_-__ 2127FB-CD_-__
• Select the circuit breaker from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 211 (e.g., 2127FB-BABD-30CA).
Bulletin 2127J
2 Two Speed Reversing in Low Speed Only 2-Winding Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (TSR2W)
3 NOTE: A two-speed 2-winding motor (TSR2W) requires a mechanically and electrically interlocked assembly of two 3-pole contactors.
4 62

Catalog Number
5 NEMA Horsepower Space Wiring Type B—Class I Delivery
208V 240V 380V-415V 480V/600V NEMA Type 12
1 w/ gasket
1 0.125-7.5 0.125- 7.5 0.125-10 0.125-10 3.0 2127JB-BA_-__ 2127JB-BD_-__
PE
2 10 10-15 15-25 15-25 3.0 2127JB-CA_-__ 2127JB-CD_-__
• Select the control voltage type from table on page 205 (e.g., 2127JB-BABD).
• Select the horsepower from table on page 206 (e.g., 2127JB-BABD-30).
• Select the circuit breaker from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 211 (e.g., 2127JB-BABD-30CA).
letter “K” (e.g., 2127JB-BK_-__) or replace the letter “D” with the letter “J” (e.g., 2127JB-BJ_-___).
Bulletin 2127K
Two Speed Reversing in Low Speed Only 1-Winding Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker (TSR1W)
63

208V 240V 380V-415V 480V/600V NEMA Type 12
1 w/ gasket
1 0.125-7.5 0.125-7.5 0.125-10 0.125-10 3.0 2127KB-BA_-__ 2127KB-BD_-__
PE
2 10 10-15 15-25 15-25 3.0 2127KB-CA_-__ 2127KB-CD_-__
• Select the control voltage type from table on page 205 (e.g., 2127KB-BABD).
• Select the horsepower from table on page 206 (e.g., 2127KB-BABD-30).
• Select the circuit breaker type from Circuit Breaker Type table on page 211 (e.g., 2127KB-BABD-30CA).
letter “K” (e.g., 2127KB-BK_-__) or replace the letter “D” with the letter “J” (e.g., 2127KB-BJ_-___).
Metering Units
Bulletin 2190 2
Metering Compartments (METER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Bulletin 2190 metering compartments are used for power management of
three-phase systems and include analog ammeter and voltmeter, 3
Powermonitor II, and Powermonitor 3000. The ammeter, voltmeter,
digital meter and Powermoniter 3000 include a 30A fused disconnect 4
switch.
5
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2190

Metering Compartments (METER)
• Analog Voltmeter and/or Ammeter or Digital Metering
System
• Current Transformers (CT’s) shipped loose for field mounting
• Potential transformers (PT’s) included as needed
• Field mountable in 0.5 or 1.0 space factor location
• Control Transformers included as needed
67
2190 - B K B - 54M - 86UCCXB - **

Bulletin Number Space Factor Enclosure Type Line Voltage Ammeter Scale Meter Designation Options
67C 67E 67G
67A
Code Enclose Type Code Ammeter Scale Code Options
Code Type NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 See Options section
K 48M 300A
2190 Metering Unit (METER) with gasket beginning on Page 107.
50M 400A
J NEMA Type 12
52M 600A
54M 800A
56M 1200A
67D 58M 1600A
Code Line Voltage 60M 2000A
67B H 208V
Code Space Factor P 220 - 230V 67F
A 0.5 Space Factor A 240V Code Meter Designation
B 1.0 Space Factor N 380V 85AAXX Analog ammeter
KN 400V 85BBXX Analog ammeter with ammeter switch (2 CT’s)
I 415V 85BCXX Analog ammeter with ammeter switch (3 CT’s)
B 480V 85EBB_ Analog ammeter and voltmeter with switches (2 CT’s)
C 600V 85ECB_ Analog ammeter and voltmeter with switches (3 CT’s)
86UDX_ Bulletin 1405-M5 Powermonitor 3000
86TDX_ Bulletin 1405-M6 Powermonitor 3000
86VCX_ Bulletin 1405-M610 Digital Volt/Ammeter
Metering Units
Bulletin 2190
2 Metering Compartments (METER)
3 Ammeter:
Panel type (not switchboard type) with 5A movement, 3.5” scale, 102° deflection, and 2% of full scale accuracy.
4 Voltmeter:
Phase-to-phase voltage measurement only. Panel type (not switchboard type) with 120V movement, 3.5” scale, 102°
5 deflection, and 2% of full scale accuracy.
Powermonitor 3000, Bulletin 1404-M5:
1404-DM highly visible LED display. The monitor can display 64 real-time parameters, including current (Ia, Ib, Ic, In,
I3) avg, ±0.2% full-scale accuracy, voltage (Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vab, Vbc, Vca ±0.2% full-scale accuracy), current, and voltage
imbalance. There are four (4) forms of power (real, reactive, apparent, and true, ±0.4% full-scale accuracy), kWh,
KVARh, kVAHnet, true RMS to the 45th harmonic, frequency (±0.05%), and power factor (±0.4%). The Powermonitor
3000 includes min./max, event logs, trend log (up to 45,867 data points), and distortion analysis with THD, crest factor
(I, V), and distortion power factor. Every Powermonitor 3000 includes RS-485 communications as standard and has
options for RS-232, DeviceNet, and Remote I/O. Also included are two form-C relays. The 1404-M5 can be flash
upgraded to M6, and M8 PM3000 master modules. See your local Rockwell Automation representative for details.
Powermonitor 3000, Bulletin 1404-M6:
Same functionality as the Bulletin 1404-M5 except for the addition of harmonic analysis with TIF, Crest Factor, IEEE
519, and % THD and multiple channel and cycle oscillographic recordings. In addition, the same communication
platforms are available.
Digital Volt/Ammeter, Bulletin 1405-M610:
The 1405-M610 measures and displays line-neutral and line-line voltages and the instantaneous, 15 minute averaged
peak values of the measured phase currents are displayed sequentially. The features of the M610 include a 3-line
display simultaneously showing all 3 phases, peak value storage and display, automatic sequencing of displayed
parameters. The M610 also includes 35 pre-programmed standard current transformer ratios. A disconnect and current
transformers are included in all 2190 metering units.
58 For Options, Modifications and Accessories, see pages 107-123 Discount Schedule A6
Metering Units
Analog Metering Compartments 68
Catalog Number [1] 2

Line Wiring Type A Only—Class I
Space Delivery
Meter Type Description Voltage Factor Program
(Volts) NEMA Type 1 and Type 1
w/ gasket
NEMA Type 12 3
Analog One (1) current transformer and 0.5 2190-AKC-__-85AAXX 2190-AJC-__-85AAXX
Ammeter panel type ammeter.
Current transformers
1.0 2190-BKC-__-85AAXX 2190-BJC-__-85AAXX
4
Two (2) current transformers, panel shipped loose with 0.5 2190-AKC-__-85BBXX 2190-AJC-__-85BBXX
type ammeter, and ammeter switch. hardware and mounting
Analog Use on 3-phase, 3-wire systems
Ammeter only.
instructions. Metering
mounted in door, no
600 Max. 1.0 2190-BKC-__-85BBXX 2190-BJC-__-85BBXX 5
with disconnect means, no unit
Ammeter Three (3) current transformers, 0.5 2190-AKC-__-85BCXX 2190-AJC-__-85BCXX
Switch panel type ammeter, and ammeter insert.
switch. Use on 3-phase, 3-wire 1.0 2190-BKC-__-85BCXX 2190-BJC-__-85BCXX
systems only.
208 2190-BKH-__-85EBBH 2190-BJH-__-85EBBH
220/230 2190-BKP-__-85EBBP 2190-BJP-__-85EBBP
Two (2) current transformers, panel
type ammeter with ammeter switch, 240 2190-BKA-__-85EBBA 2190-BJA-__-85EBBA
two (2) fused potential 380 2190-BKN-__-85EBBN 2190-BJN-__-85EBBN
transformers, and panel type 1.0 SC
Voltmeter with Voltmeter switch. 400 2190-BKKN-__-85EBBKN 2190-BJKN-__-85EBBKN
Use on 3-phase, 3-wire systems 415 2190-BKI-__-85EBBI 2190-BJI-__-85EBBI
only. Plug-in metering units with
Analog 480 2190-BKB-__-85EBBB 2190-BJB-__-85EBBB
Ammeter and disconnect and fuses.
Current transformers 600 2190-BKC-__-85EBBC 2190-BJC-__-85EBBC
Voltmeter shipped loose with
with 208 2190-BKH-__-85ECBH 2190-BJH-__-85ECBH
Switches hardware and mounting
instructions. 220/230 2190-BKP-__-85ECBP 2190-BJP-__-85ECBP
Three (3) current transformers,
panel type ammeter with ammeter 240 2190-BKA-__-85ECBA 2190-BJA-__-85ECBA
switch, two (2) fused potential 380 2190-BKN-__-85ECBN 2190-BJN-__-85ECBN
transformers, and panel type 1.0
Voltmeter with Voltmeter switch. 400 2190-BKKN-__-85ECBKN 2190-BJKN-__-85ECBKN
Use on 3-phase, 3-wire systems 415 2190-BKI-__-85ECBI 2190-BJI-__-85ECBI
only.
480 2190-BKB-__-85ECBB 2190-BJB-__-85ECBB
600 2190-BKC-__-85ECBC 2190-BJC-__-85ECBC
[1] The catalog numbers listed are not complete. Select the appropriate catalog string number from table on page 60 to identify the ammeter scale and current transformer primary
ratio (e.g., 2190-AKC-52M-85AAXX).
Metering Units
Bulletin 2190
2 Metering Compartments (METER), continued
Digital Metering Compartments 69
3 Catalog Number [1]

Space Wiring Type A Only—Class I Delivery
Meter Type Description
Factor NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ Program
4 gasket
NEMA Type 12
Bulletin 1404-M5 [2] Plug-in unit with disconnect, fuses, and control circuit
Powermonitor 3000 with transformer. For 3-phase, 3-wire systems, three (3) current 1.0 2190-BK__-__-86U_ _X_ 2190-BJ__-__-86U_ _X_
5 RS-485 Communications transformers are shipped loose with hardware and
mounting instructions. For 3-phase, 4-wire systems, four
SC
(4) current transformers are shipped loose with hardware
Bulletin 1404-M6 [2] and mounting instructions.
Powermonitor 3000 with 1.0 2190-BK__-__-86T_ _X_ 2190-BJ__-__-86T_ _X_
Fused potential transformers are self-contained in the
RS-485 Communication meter’s power module.
For use on 3-phase, 3-wire systems only. Plug-in metering
Bulletin 1405-M610 unit with disconnect and fuses. Current transformers
Digital Volt/Ammeter shipped loose with hardware and mounting instructions. 0.5 2190-AK__-__-86VCX_ 2190-AJ__-__-86VCX_ SC
Potential transformers are internal to the device.
• Select the appropriate voltage code from Line Voltage table to identify the line voltage code. The voltage code must be in two places in the catalog string (e.g.,
2190-BKB-54M-86UCCXB).
• Select the appropriate catalog string number from Ammeter Scales table to identify the current transformer primary ratio (e.g., 2190-BKB-54M-86UCCXB).
• For Powermonitor 3000 units, select the appropriate letter from Powermonitor 3000 Communication Options table to identify the communication platform (e.g.,
2190-BKB-54M-86UCCXB).
• Select the appropriate letter from System Wiring table to identify the system wiring (e.g., 2190-BKB-54M-86UCCXB).
[2] For 3-wire power systems where L1-N, L1-G, L2-N, L2-G, L3-N, or L3-G may exceed 347V, consult factory.
Line Voltage 70 Powermonitor 3000 Communication Options 72
Line Voltage Voltage Code Platform Letter Code

208 H RS-485 A
220/230 P RS-232 [1] B
240 A
DeviceNet [1] C
380 N
Remote I/O [1] D
400 KN
[1] E
415 I Ethernet
480 B [1] These communication platforms are in addition to the
native RS-485.
600 C
System Wiring 73
Ammeter Scales 71
System Wiring Letter Code
Ammeter Scale Catalog String
3-phase, 3-wire C
300A 48M
3-phase, 4-wire D
400A 50M
600A 52M
800A 54M
1200A 56M
1600A 58M
2000A 60M
Main and Feeder Units
Bulletin 2191F and 2191M 2
Outgoing Feeder Lug Compartment (FLUG) and Incoming Main Lug
Compartment (MLUG). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
The Bulletin 2191M and 2191F are line lug compartments that provide a 3
lug connection for incoming lines (2191M) to distribute power to the
motor control center or for outgoing cables (2191F) to feed power from
the MCC to an external load. These line lug compartments are available
with ratings from 300 to 2000A. Optional mechanical or crimp lugs can
be supplied with the lug compartments. 5
Bulletin 2192F and 2192M

Feeder and Main Fusible Disconnect Switch Units (FDS, MFDS). . . . . . . . . . . 69
Bulletin 2192M and 2192F are fusible disconnect switches. These
switches are available with ratings from 30A to 2000A. The 2192F is a
plug-in unit for ratings up to 200A and frame mounted for ratings 400A
and above. The 2192M is frame mounted (rigidly mounted and
hardwired) in the structure for all ratings. The bolted pressure switch
design is used for 2192 units rated 600A through 2000A.
Bulletin 2193F and 2193M

Feeder and Main Circuit Breaker Units (FCB, MCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Bulletin 2193M and 2193F are circuit breaker units with trip ratings
available from 15A to 2000A. These units are available with thermal
magnetic trips up to 400A and electronic trips 600A and above. The
2193F is a plug-in unit for ratings up to 225A and is a frame mounted unit
for ratings 400A and above. The 2193M is frame mounted for all ratings.
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2191F and 2191M
2 Incoming and Outgoing Lug Compartment Units
• Line Lug Compartments
3 • Rated from 300 - 2000A
• Mechanical or crimp lugs are available
5
74
6
2191M T - C K C - 54 - 83D500-86UCCXB - **
Bulletin Number Mounting Space Factor Enclosure Type Line Voltage Amperes Lug and Meter Options Options
74C 74E 74G
Code Space Factor Code Line Voltage Lug and Meter

Code
C Up to 600V Options
74A 0 (mounted in top
A See tables on page 64-66.
horizontal wireway)
Code Type
B 1.0 74F 74H
2191F Outgoing Feeder Lug
Compartment (FLUG) C 1.5 Code Amperes Code Options
Incoming Main Lug D 2.0 48 300A See Options section
2191M Compartment J 4.5 (71” High Sections) 52 600A beginning on page 107.
(MLUG) M 6.0 54 800A
N 6.0 (Corner Section) 56 1200A
P 6.0 (10” Wide Section) 58 1600A
60 2000A
74D
74B Code NEMA Enclosure Type
Code Mounting NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with
K
T Top gasket
B Bottom J NEMA Type 12
Bulletin 2191M and 2191F
Lug Compartments—Provisions for Basic Sections/Incoming Lines (MLUG) and Outgoing Feeders (FLUG) 2
• All lugs compartments are frame mounted and must be located at top or bottom of section.
3
• Unit includes door, unit support pan, lug pads, and hardware.
• For metering options, refer to page 66.
• For 4-wire applications. Incoming neutral bus (see page 117) or neutral connection plates (see pages 25, 105, 117
and 214) are available for Bulletins 2191MT and 2191MB.
• For 71” high sections, see restrictions on page 24.
2191FT—Top mounted feeder 5
2191FB—Bottom mounted feeder
2191MT—Top mounted main
2191MB—Bottom mounted main 6
• Top- and bottom-mounted mains are designed with adequate space to route cables to lugs. Special consideration
may need to be given to the mounting of the CT’s for a metering device. Addition of a pull box might be considered.
• Refer to Appendix for wire size conversion table.
75
Cable Provisions
Maximum Number Per Phase Catalog Number [2]
Wiring Type A Only—Class I
Rating and Maximum Cable Size [1] Space Delivery
(Amperes) Factor Program
Mechanical Type Lugs NEMA Type 1 and Type
Crimp Type Lugs 1 w/ gasket NEMA Type 12
Single Cable Lug Multiple Cable Lug
PROVISIONS FOR BASIC SECTIONS
1.0 [5],[3] 2191F_-BKC-48 2191F_-BJC-48
300 (2) 400 kcmil — (2) 350 kcmil
[5],[7] 2191M_-BKC-48 2191M_-BJC-48
1.0
1.0 [4],[5] 2191F_-BKC-52 2191F_-BJC-52
(2) 400 kcmil (4) 250 kcmil (2) 350 kcmil
1.0 [5] 2191M_-BKC-52 2191M_-BJC-52
In top, horizontal
(1) 500 kcmil (2) 300 kcmil (2) 350 kcmil 2191MT-AKC-52 2191MT-AJC-52
600 wireway [6],[7]
(1) 750 kcmil
(2) 750 kcmil (4) 500 kcmil
(2) 500 kcmil 1.5 [5] 2191M_-CKC-52 2191M_-CJC-52
(4) 800 kcmil — (4) 750 kcmil [8],[9],

6.0 20” W 2191_ _-MKC-52 2191_ _-MJC-52
(2) 800 kcmil (2) 750 kcmil [5],[6]
— 1.0 2191_ T-BKC-54 2191_ T-BJC-54
(4) 600 kcmil (4) 500 kcmil
(1) 750 kcmil (3) 500 kcmil
(2) 600 kcmil — 1.5 [5] 2191_ _-CKC-54 2191_ _-CJC-54 SC-II
800 [10] (4) 500 kcmil (4) 350 kcmil
(1) 800 kcmil

(2) 750 kcmil
(2) 750 kcmil — (4) 500 kcmil 2.0 [5] 2191_ _-DKC-54 2191_ _-DJC-54
(4) 600 kcmil
800 (4) 800 kcmil — (4) 750 kcmil 6.0 [8],[9], 20” W 2191_ _-MKC-54 2191_ _-MJC-54
(2) 800 kcmil (2) 750 kcmil
(4) 600 kcmil
—
(4) 500 kcmil 1.0 [5],[6] 2191_ T-BKC-56 2191_ T-BJC-56
[10]
1200 (1) 800 kcmil (2) 750 kcmil
(2) 750 kcmil —
(4) 500 kcmil 2.0 [5] 2191_ _-DKC-56 2191_ _-DJC-56
(4) 600 kcmil
1200 — 2191_ _-MKC-56 2191_ _-MJC-56
(4) 800 kcmil (4) 750 kcmil [8],[9]
1600 — 6.0 , 20” W 2191_ _-MKC-58 2191_ _-MJC-58
2000 (6) 800 kcmil — (6) 750 kcmil 2191_ _-MKC-60 2191_ _-MJC-60
[1] Using a larger wire/lug size than is listed violates bend radius guidelines as listed in NEC/UL/cUL wire bending tables and voids UL/cUL listing and CSA certification.
• If required, insert M for main or F for feeder (e.g., 2191M or 2191F).
• If required, insert T for top mounted or B for bottom mounted (e.g., 2191MT or 2191MB).
• If using optional lugs, select from table on page 65. Then add catalog string number to base catalog number (e.g., 2191MT-CKC-52-82B500).
[3] The maximum possible rating of this unit is 300A. The rating of this unit can be determined by subtracting the current requirements of the units in the 3.0 space factors above or
below this unit. Review NEC/CEC for further information.
[4] The maximum possible rating of this unit is 600A. The rating of this unit can be determined by subtracting the current requirements of the units in the 3.0 space factors above or
below this unit. Review NEC/CEC for further information.
[5] Cannot be mounted in section containing other frame mounted units (transformer units excluded). Unit compartments 1.0 through 2.0 space factors must be located at top or
bottom of section.
[6] Pullbox required. Must be mounted at top of vertical section. Cannot be mounted in section containing other frame mounted units (transformer units excluded).
[7] Not available with incoming neutral bus.
[8] Shipped in single shipping split only. Frame mounted unit, section does not have vertical wireway.
[9] Unit is 4.5 space factors in a 71” high section. The catalog number must be changed from 2191_ _ - M to 2191_ _-J (e.g., 2191MT-JKC-52).
[10] Main and feeder rating must match horizontal bus rating. Full-rated neutral bus for 1200A, 2191M units requires a 6.0 space factor lug compartment.
Lug Compartments
2 Provisions for Inside Corner, 10” Wide Sections, and Neutrals/Incoming Line and Outgoing Feeders
• See page 24 for section descriptions. • Refer to Appendix for wire size conversion table.
• Metering options not available. 2191FT—Top mounted feeder
3 • For 71” high sections, see restrictions on page 24. 2191FB—Bottom mounted feeder
2191MT—Top mounted main
2191MB—Bottom mounted main
76
[1]
5 Cable Provisions
Maximum Number Per Phase Catalog Number [2]
Rating Space Wiring Type A—Class I Delivery
and Maximum Cable Size
(Amperes) Factor Program
Mechanical Type Lugs
6 Crimp Type Lugs NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 NEMA Type 12
Single Cable Lug w/ gasket
PROVISIONS FOR INSIDE CORNER SECTION
600 2191_ _-NKC-52 2191_ _-NJC-52
800 2191_ _-NKC-54 2191_ _-NJC-54
1200 (4) 800 kcmil (4) 750 kcmil 6.0 [3] 2191_ _-NKC-56 2191_ _-NJC-56 PE-II
1600 2191_ _-NKC-58 2191_ _-NJC-58
2000 2191_ _-NKC-60 2191_ _-NJC-60
PROVISIONS FOR 10” WIDE SECTION [4]
600 2191_ _-PKC-52 2191_ _-PJC-52
800 (2) 750 kcmil [3]
Not Applicable 6.0 2191_ _-PKC-54 2191_ _-PJC-54 PE-II
(4) 500 kcmil
1200 2191_ _-PKC-56 2191_ _-PJC-56
[1] Using a larger wire/lug size than is listed violates bend radius guidelines as listed in NEC/UL/cUL wire bending tables and voids UL/cUL listing and CSA certification.
• Insert M for main or F for feeder (e.g., 2191M or 2191F).
• Insert T for top mounted or B for bottom mounted (e.g., 2191MT or 2191MB).
• If optional lugs will be selected, select from Lug Selection table on page 65. Then add catalog string number to base catalog number (e.g., 2191MT-CKC-52-82B500).
[3] Not available in 71” high sections, NEMA Type 3R, or Type 4.
[4] This section must be selected as part of a 2-section shipping block and shipped attached to a 20” wide section with standard depth horizontal power bus. It cannot be selected as
free standing or attached to a 25" wide section with a 9” vertical wireway or any 6 space factor, frame-mounted unit. It is not available in NEMA Type 3R, Type 4, or back-to-back
construction.
Lug Dimensions for Bulletin 2191F and 2191M 77
Number of Refer to
Lug Size Cables Per Lug Dimension “A” Figure
MECHANICAL TYPE LUGS
#6-350 kcmil 1 2.13” (54 mm) 1
[1] 1 2.31” (59 mm) 1
#4/0-600 kcmil
[2] 1 2.25” (57 mm) 1
350-800 kcmil
[3] 2 2.13” (54 mm) 2
#6-350 kcmil
[3] 2 2.13” (54 mm) 2
#4/0-600 kcmil
CRIMP TYPE LUGS (Panduit Type LCC)
250 kcmil 2.94” (75 mm)
350 kcmil 3.38” (86 mm)
1 3
500 kcmil 3.78” (96 mm)
750 kcmil 4.63” (118 mm)
CRIMP TYPE LUGS (Burndy YA-A Series)
250 kcmil 2.91” (74 mm)
350 kcmil 3.69” (94 mm)
1 3
500 kcmil 4.44” (113 mm)
750 kcmil 4.94” (125 mm)
[1] Recommended lug for 1600A and 2000A lug compartments.
[2] Two (2) lugs per phase only when used on 1200A lug compartment.
[3] Used in a wireway when more than 2 cables per phase are specified in a 1.0 or
1.5 space factor 600A lug compartment.
Lug Compartments, continued
• CENTERLINE 2100 motor control centers are rated for use with 75° C wire. Wire must be sized using the 75° C column 2
in NEC/UL/cUL. The actual temperature rating of the lug is not relevant.
• Refer to the Appendix for a wire size conversion table.
Lug Selection 78 3
Catalog
Wire/Cable Size Wire Range
String No. [1]
MECHANICAL TYPE LUGS FOR ALUMINUM/COPPER WIRE [2]
#6 AWG -80_006
5
#4 AWG -80_004
#2 AWG -80_002
#1 AWG -80_001 6
#1/0 AWG -80_1X0
#2/0 AWG -80_2X0 #6-350 kcmil
#3/0 AWG -80_3X0
#4/0 AWG -80_4X0
250 kcmil -80_250
300 kcmil -80_300
350 kcmil -80_350
400 kcmil -80_400
500 kcmil -80_500 #4/0-600 kcmil
600 kcmil -80_600
700 kcmil -80_700
750 kcmil -80_750 350-800 kcmil
800 kcmil -80_800
CRIMP TYPE LUGS (Panduit Type LCC) FOR COPPER WIRE
250 kcmil -82_250
350 kcmil -82_350
—
500 kcmil -82_500
750 kcmil -82_750
CRIMP TYPE LUGS (Burndy YA-A Series) FOR ALUMINUM or COPPER WIRE
250 kcmil -83_250
350 kcmil -83_350
—
500 kcmil -83_500
750 kcmil -83_750
[1] Catalog string numbers listed are not complete. Select the appropriate letter from Lug
Quantity table to identify the number of cables per phase desired (e.g.,
2191MT-AAC-52-80B4X0). When optional neutral incoming bus is desired, optional neutral
lugs will be the same type as those for 3-phase cable. Only one option code is needed.
[2] Mechanical lugs are available for use with 42kA bus bracing. For applications requiring over
42kA bus bracing, use crimp type lugs only.
Lug Quantity 79
Letter [1]
Number of Cables per Phase
A 1
B 2
C 3
D 4
E 5
F 6
[1] If optional full-rated incoming neutral bus (see page 117) is specified,
the quantity and size/type of the lug(s) on neutral lug pad will be the
same as the 3-phase lugs. When optional half-rated incoming neutral
bus (see page 117) is specified and (1) or (2) lugs per phase are
specified, (1) lug will be provided on the half-rated neutral riser. When
(3) or (4) lugs are specified, (2) lugs will be provided. When (5) or (6)
lugs are specified, (3) lugs will be provided on half-rated neutral riser.
Bulletin 2191M
2 Lug Compartments/Incoming Lines Metering Options
• Metering options may not be used on units specified with ground • Top- and bottom-mounted mains are designed with adequate space to
detection lights. See page 116. route cables to lugs. Special consideration may need to be given to the
3 • Metering options on 6.0 space factor bottom entry units will be mounted
22” (554 mm) from the floor. A separate metering unit may be preferred.
mounting of the CT’s for a metering device. Addition of a pull box might
be considered.
• See page 57 for meter specifications.
80
Catalog String Number for Metering Option
Delivery
Meter Type [1] Description Line Voltage [2] Program
208V 220/230V 240V 380V 400V 415V 480V 600V
5 Analog Ammeter
Includes one (1) current
transformer and panel type -_-85AAXX -_-85AAXX -_-85AAXX -_-85AAXX -_-85AAXX -_-85AAXX -_-85AAXX -_-85AAXX
ammeter
Includes two (2) current Current
transformers, panel type
6 ammeter, and ammeter
switch. Use on 3-phase,
transformers
shipped loose -_-85BBXX -_-85BBXX -_-85BBXX -_-85BBXX -_-85BBXX -_-85BBXX -_-85BBXX -_-85BBXX
with hardware
Analog Ammeter 3-wire systems only.
and mounting
with Ammeter Switch Includes three (3) current instructions
transformers, panel type
ammeter, and ammeter -_-85BCXX -_-85BCXX -_-85BCXX -_-85BCXX -_-85BCXX -_-85BCXX -_-85BCXX -_-85BCXX
switch. Use on 3-phase,
3-wire systems only.
Includes one (1) fused potential transformer
Analog Voltmeter (mounted in compartment) and panel type -_-85CXAH -_-85CXAP -_-85CXAA -_-85CXAN -_-85CXAKN -_-85CXAI -_-85CXAB -_-85CXAC
Voltmeter
Includes two (2) fused potential transformers SC-II
Analog Voltmeter
with Voltmeter (mounted in compartment), panel type -_-85HXBH -_-85HXBP -_-85HXBA -85HXBN -85HXBKN -85HXBI -_-85HXBB -_-85HXBC
Voltmeter, and Voltmeter switch. For 3-phase,
Switch
3-wire systems only.
Two (2) current transformers,
panel type ammeter with
ammeter switch, two (2) Current
-_-85EBBH -_-85EBBP -_-85EBBA -_-85EBBN -_-85EBBKN -_-85EBBI -_-85EBBB -_-85EBBC
fused potential transformers, transformers
and panel type Voltmeter shipped loose
with hardware
Analog Ammeter and with Voltmeter switch
Voltmeter with and mounting
Three (3) current instructions.
Switches transformers, panel type Use on
ammeter with ammeter 3-phase,
switch, two (2) fused 3-wire systems -_-85ECBH -_-85ECBP -_-85ECBA -_-85ECBN -_-85ECBKN -_-85ECBI -_-85ECBB -_-85ECBC
potential transformers, and only.
panel type Voltmeter with
Voltmeter switch
Bul. 1404-M5 Display module mounted on door. Includes
Powermonitor 3000 control circuit transformer. For 3-phase,
with RS-485 3-wire systems, three (3) current -_-86U_ _XH -_-86U_ _XP -_-86U_ _XA -_-86U_ _XN -_-86U_ _XKN -_-86U_ _XI -_-86U_ _XB -_-86U_ _XC
Communication [3] transformers ship loose with hardware and
mounting instructions. For 3-phase, 4-wire SC-II
Bul. 1404-M6[3] systems, four (4) current transformers ship
Powermonitor 3000 loose with hardware and mounting -_-86T_ _XH -_-86T_ _XP -_-86T_ _XA -_-86T_ _XN -_-86T_ _XKN -_-86T_ _XI -_-86T_ _XB -_-86T_ _XC
with RS-485 instructions. Disconnect switch is not
Communication included.
For use on 3-phase, 3-wire systems only.
Plug-in metering unit with disconnect and
Bulletin 1405-M610 fuses. Current transformers shipped loose
Digital Volt/Ammeter with hardware and mounting instructions. -_-86VCXH -_-86VCXP -_-86VCXA -_-86VCXN -_-86VCXKN -_-86VCXI -_-86VCXB -_-86VCXC SC-II
Potential transformers are internal to the
device.
[1] Metering not available in 2191M 600A main lugs in horizontal wireway.
[2] The option numbers listed are not complete:
• Select the appropriate catalog string number from Ammeter Scale and Current Transformer Primary Ratio table to identify the current transformer primary ratio (e.g.,
-54M-86UCCXB).
• Select the appropriate letter from the Powermonitor 3000 Communication Options table to identify the communication platform for Powermonitor 3000 units (e.g.,
-54M-86UCCXB).
• Where applicable, select the appropriate letter from System Wiring table to identify the system wiring (e.g., -54M-86UCCXB).
[3] For 3-wire power systems where L1-N, L1-G, L2-N, L2-G, L3-N, or L3-G may exceed 347V, consult factory.
Ammeter Scale and Current Transformer Primary Ratio 81 System Wiring 82
Amperes Catalog String Number System Cat. String
300A 48M 3-phase, 3-wire C
600A 52M 3 phase, 4 wire D
800A 54M
1200A 56M
1600A 58M
2000 60M
Powermonitor 3000 Communication Options 83

Platform Letter Code
RS-485 A
RS-232 [1] B
DeviceNet [1] C
Remote I/O [1] D
Ethernet [1] E
[1] These communication platforms are in addition to the native RS-485.
Bulletin 2191M
Lug Compartments/Incoming Line—Dimensions 2
• Lug pads shown on page 68 are drilled for 2-hole NEMA 1.75” spacing.
may need to be given to the mounting of the CT’s for a metering device. Addition of a pull box might be considered. 3
84
Maximum
Dimensions A Dimension B Maximum Number of Lugs
Compartment Refer to per Phase
Ratings Figure No. of
Size (Amperes) Cables per
(Space Factor) [1]
L1 L2 L3
Total Available
Space with Phase Single Double 5
Cable Cable
Pullbox
In horiz. WW
600 1 — — — 13.19” (335 mm) 2 1 1
(pullbox required) 6
1.0 300 2 12.81” (325 mm) 12.81” (325 mm) 12.81” (325 mm) 24.81” (630 mm) 2 2 —
1.0 600 2 12.81” (325 mm) 12.81” (325 mm) 12.81” (325 mm) 24.81” (630 mm) 4 2 2
1.0 800
(pullbox required) 1200 3 — — — 21.56” (548 mm) 4 4 N/A
600 2 19.31” (490 mm) 19.31” (490 mm) 19.31” (490 mm) 31.31” (795 mm) 4 2 2
1.5 15.75” (400 mm) 15.75” (400 mm) 15.75” (400 mm) 27.75” (705 mm) 4 4
800 3
16.63” (422 mm) [3] 16.63” (422 mm) [3] 16.63” (422 mm) [3] 28.63” (727 mm) 2 2
800 20.00” (508 mm) 20.00” (508 mm) 20.00” (508 mm) 32.00” (813 mm) 4 4
2.0 3
Top 1200 20.88” (530 mm) [3] 20.88” (530 mm) [3] 20.88” (530 mm) [3] 32.88” (835 mm) 2 2
Entry
[2] 600
800
6.0 1200 4 37.63” (956 mm) 44.13” (1121 mm) 50.63” (1286 mm) — 4 4
(20” wide) 1600
2000 4 37.63” (956 mm) 44.13” (1121 mm) 50.63” (1286 mm) — 6 6 N/A
600
800
6.0 1200 5 37.63” (956 mm) 44.13” (1121 mm) 50.63” (1286 mm) — 4 4
(corner section) 1600
2000
600
6.0 800 6 35.88” (911 mm) 42.38” (1076 mm) 48.88” (1242 mm) — 4 4
(10” wide)
1200
[1] See page 68 for figures.
[2] Depending on wire size and wires per phase, pullbox may be required to meet wire bending radius as specified by NEC/UL/cUL.
[3] When cable size selected limits the user to two (2) single lugs per phase, Dimension A is measured from center set of holes in lug pad. See Figure 3 on page 68.
85
Dimensions A Maximum Number of

Compartment Refer to Lugs per Phase
Ratings Figure Maximum No. of
Size (Amperes) Cables per Phase
(Space Factor) [1]
L1 L2 L3 Single Double
Cable Cable
1.0 300 2 12.81” (325 mm) 12.81” (325 mm) 12.81” (325 mm) 2 2 N/A
1.0 600 2 12.81” (325 mm) 12.81” (325 mm) 12.81” (325 mm) 4 2 2
600 2 19.31” (490 mm) 19.31” (490 mm) 19.31” (490 mm) 4 2 2
1.5 15.75” (400 mm) 15.75” (400 mm) 15.75” (400 mm) 4 4
800 3 [2]
16.63” (422 mm) 16.63” (422 mm) [2] 16.63” (422 mm) [2] 2 2
800 20.00” (508 mm) 20.00” (508 mm) 20.00” (508 mm) 4 4
2.0 3
1200 20.88” (530 mm) [2]
20.88” (530 mm) [2] 20.88” (530 mm) [2] 2 2
600
Bottom 800
Entry 6.0 4 50.63” (1286 mm) 44.13” (1121 mm) 37.63” (956 mm) 4 4
1200
(20” wide) 1600
N/A
2000 4 50.63” (1286 mm) 44.13” (1121 mm) 37.63” (956 mm) 6 6
600
800
6.0 1200 5 50.63” (1286 mm) 44.13” (1121 mm) 37.63” (956 mm) 4 4
(corner section)
1600
2000
600
6.0 800 6 48.88” (1242 mm) 42.38” (1076 mm) 35.88” (911 mm) 4 4
(10” wide)
1200
[1] See page 68 for figures.
[2] When cable size selected limits the user to two (2) single lugs per phase, Dimension A is measured from center set of holes in lug pad. See Figure 3 on page 68.
Bulletin 2191M
2 Lug Compartments/Incoming Line—Dimensions
Dimensions for drawings are provided on page 67.
3
"B"
5 "B" "B"
6 "A1" "A"
"A"
FIGURE 1 FIGURE 2 FIGURE 3
Phase A vertical bus on top incoming

2.0 space factors and Phase C vertical
bus on bottom incoming 2.0 space
factors are not required or supplied
"A"
"A" "A"
(L1)
(L1) (L1)
"A"
"A" "A" (L2)
(L2) (L2) "A"
"A" (L3)
"A"
(L3)
(L3)
FIGURE 4 FIGURE 5 FIGURE 6
NOTE: All lug pads shown accept NEMA standard 2-hole lugs 1.75” on center using .5” hardware.
Fusible Disconnect Feeders and Mains 2
• 30 - 200A Feeders are available as Plug-in Units
• 400 - 1200A Feeders and all Mains are Frame Mounted 3
• 600 - 2000A units have Visual Blade Bolted Pressure Switches
86
2192F T - B K C - 24J - **
Bulletin Number Mounting Maximum Trip Ratings NEMA Enclosure Type Line Voltage Fuse, Clip Rating and Class Options
86C 86E
86A 86F
Maximum Trip Code Line Voltage Fuse, Clip Rating
Code Type Code Ratings P 220/230V Code and Class
2192F Fusible Disconnect B 30A
Switch Feeder (FDS) A Up to 250V See Fuse Clip Sizes/Type
C 60A N 380V on page 70.
Main Fusible
2192M Disconnect Switch D 100A KN 400V 86G
(MFDS) E 200A I 415V Code Options
F 400A B 480V See Options section
G 600A C Up to 600V beginning on page 107.
86B
H 800A
J 1200A
Code Mounting
K 1600A 86D
T [1] Top L 2000A Code NEMA Enclosure Type
B [1] Bottom NEMA Type 1 or Type 1
K
Z 0.5 Space Factor with gasket
[1] A “T” or “B” is required for all J NEMA Type 12
2192M units and only 400A and
above 2192F units.
Bulletin 2192F
2 Fusible Disconnect Switch—Feeders (FDS)
• Select disconnect switch rating based upon 125% of actual load amperes. Refer to NEC/CEC.
3 2192FZ—Plug-in unit, 0.5 space factor, 30A only.
2192F—Plug-in unit, 30A-200A.
2192FT—Top-mounted feeder, 400A are top-fed, connect load to bottom of switch.
2192FT—Top-mounted feeder, 600A-1200A are reverse-fed, connect load to top of switch.
2192FB—Bottom-mounted feeder, 400A-1200A are top-fed, connect load to bottom of switch.
• Refer to Appendix for horsepower ratings.
5 • Refer to Appendix for wire size conversion table.
87
6 Switch Rating
Fuse Clip Load Lugs Provided
Space
Catalog Number [1]
Wiring Type A Only—Class I Delivery
(Amperes) Rating Cables/ Cable/Wire Wire Factor NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 Program
Class NEMA Type 12
(Amperes) Phase Size Range Type w/ gasket
These units have horizontal operating handles and
Bulletin 194R fused disconnect switch. See page 9
30 for information on installation into series E-J 30 CC, J 1 #14-#8 AWG CU 0.5 2192FZ-BKC-__ 2192FZ-BJC-__
sections.
Wired to pull-apart terminal blocks as standard. CC, J, R,
30 For unit without power terminal blocks, add 110 to 30
H
1 1.0 2192F-BK_-__ 2192F-BJ_-__
the catalog number string (N/C). Unit will then be
60 supplied with a separately mounted disconnect 60 2192F-CK_-__ 2192F-CJ_-__
switch and fuse block.
[2] 30 #14-#4 AWG 2192F-BK_-2424__ 2192F-BJ_-2424__
Dual 30
Dual disconnects use Cutler-Hammer fusible 1 CU 1.0
Dual switches. Duals must have identical fuse clip 60/30 2192F-CK_-2524__ 2192F-CJ_-2524__ SC
60/30 [2] types. Only 30A and 60A disconnects with 600V
Class H and R fuse clips are wired to pull-apart
Dual 60 [2] terminal blocks. 60 2192F-CK_-2525__ 2192F-CJ_-2525__
Dual Dual units require two (2) sets of fuses. The fuse
size code must correspond to the respective fuse 100/30 J, R, H 2192F-DK_-2624__ 2192F-DJ_-2624__
100/30 [2] clip designator code. The fuse manufacturer for #14-1/0 AWG
1 CU
Dual both fuses must be the same (e.g., #14-4 AWG
100/60 1.5 2192F-DK_-2625__ 2192F-DJ_-2625__
100/60 [2] 2192F-CAC-2524J-609602G).
Larger switch must be mounted on the left side.
Dual 100 [2] 100 1 #14-1/0 AWG CU 2192F-DK_-2626__ 2192F-DJ_-2626__
100 100 1 #8-1/0 AWG CU 2192F-DK_-__ 2192F-DJ_-__
200 200 1 #6-4/0 AWG CU 2.0 2192F-EK_-__ 2192F-EJ_-__
400 400 2 #1/0-250 kcmil CU 2.5 [3] 2192F_-FK_-__ 2192F_-FJ_-__
600
Bolted pressure contact switch. Viewing window
600 J, R, H, L 2 #2-600 kcmil 3.5 [4] 2192F_-GK_-__ 2192F_-GJ_-__
SC-II
800 on door for visual verification of disconnect blades. 800 3 #6-350 kcmil CU/AL 3.5 [4] 2192F_-HKC-__ 2192F_-HJC-__
L
1200 1200 4 #6-350 kcmil [4] 2192F_-JKC-__ 2192F_-JJC-__
3.5
• For 400-1200 Amperes, insert T for Top mounted or B for Bottom mounted (e.g., 2192FT- or 2192FB-).
• Unless already selected, select the voltage from Fuse Clip Voltage table (e.g., 2192F-BKC).
• Select the fuse clip designator from Fuse Clip Sizes/Types table (e.g., 2192F-BKC-24J). For duals, add letter suffix only—numbers are already supplied in catalog number
(e.g.,2192F-CKA-2525J).
• If power fuse will be selected, select from table on page 208 (e.g., 2192F-BKC-24J-603G). Double code number for duals (e.g., 603603G).
• For fuse rating, based on disconnect rating, see publication 2100-TD003x-EN-P.
• If optional load lugs will be selected, select from table on page 72. Add option number to base catalog number (e.g., 2192F-GKC-29R-603G-82B500).
[2] Not available with DSA (options 11DSA2 and 11DSA3).
[3] Frame mounted unit. Must be located at top or bottom of section.
[4] Frame mounted unit, section does not have vertical wireway next to this unit. Must be located at top or bottom of section. May not be mounted in section containing other frame
mounted units.
88
Fuse Clip Voltage Fuse Clip Sizes/Types and UL Listed Short Circuit Withstand Ratings for Fusible Disconnect Switch Units (2192FT, 2192FB, 2192MT, 2192MB)
Fuse Clip Designator Available Short
Fuse Clip Voltage Fuse Clip (Amperes)
Voltage Code Type Circuit Amperes
30A 60A 100A 200A 400A 600A 800A 1200A 1600A 2000A (rms symmetrical) through 600V
220-230 P [2] J 24J 25J 26J 27J 28J 29J — — — — 100kA
240 A [2] R 24R 25R 26R 27R 28R 29R — — — — 100kA
250 A [1] H 24 25 26 27 28 29 — — — — 10kA
380 N [2] L — — — — — 23L [3] 24L 25L 26L 27L 100kA
400 KN [2] CC 24C — — — — — — — — — 100kA
415 I [2] Non-Fused [4] — — — — — 00N 00N 00N 00N 00N 100kA [5]
480 B [2]
600 C
[1] Not available for 1600A or 2000A 2192M.
[2] These voltage codes are to be used only when ground fault protection (option 88GF) is selected on 1600A-2000A 2192M units.
[3] For 600A, 100% rated, Class L fuses are the only valid option. 23L indicates provision for a 601A, Class L.
[4] Available on mains (2192MT, 2192MB) only. This is 100% rated and can be supplied in NEMA 1, 1 with gasket, and 12. Not available as standard with 100kA series coordinated
bus bracing, consult factory.
[5] Short circuit withstand is 100kA only when protected upstream with Class L fuses that are sized in accordance with particular switch (e.g., 800A upstream fuses are to be used
with 800A switch or 2000A upstream fuses are to be used with 2000A switch).
Bulletin 2192M
Fusible Disconnect Switch—Mains (MFDS) 2
• Select disconnect switch rating based upon 125% of actual load amperes. Refer to NEC/UL/cUL.
• Mains are suitable for use as service entrance per NEC (UL) and CEC (CSA). If application is a four-wire system, a 3
neutral connection plate rated for 280A is available. Select on pages 25, 105, 117 and 214. If a Neutral connection
greater then 280A is required, refer to page 25 and page 117 or contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office.
• Mains rated 1000A and above may require ground fault protection. For 1000-1200A applications that require ground
fault protection, contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office. For 1600-2000A applications that require
ground fault protection, see option 88GF on page 116.
• Non-fused mains are available in 600A through 2000A. See Fuse Clip Sizes/Types table on page 70.
2192MT—Top-mounted main, 30A-2000A are top-fed. 5
2192MB—Bottom-mounted main, 30A-400A are top-fed.
2192MB—Bottom-mounted main, 600A-2000A are reverse-fed.
• Top- and bottom-mounted mains are designed with adequate space to route cables to lugs. Special consideration 6
• Includes line terminal guard.
89
Fuse Clip Line Lugs Provided Catalog Number [1]

Switch Rating Space Wiring Type A Only—Class I Delivery
(Amperes) Rating Cables/ Cable/Wire Size Wire Factor NEMA Type 1 and Program
Class NEMA Type 12
(Amperes) Phase Range [2] Type Type 1 w/ gasket
30 30 1 #14-#8 AWG CU 2192M_-BK_-__ 2192M_-BJ_-__
60 60 1 #14-#6 AWG CU 1.5 [3] 2192M_-CK_-__ 2192M_-CJ_-__
100 100 J, R, H 1 #8-1/0 AWG CU 2192M_-DK_-__ 2192M_-DJ_-__
200 200 1 #6-4/0 AWG CU 2.0 [3] 2192M_-EK_-__ 2192M_-EJ_-__
400 400 2 1/0-250 kcmil CU 2.5 [3] 2192M_-FK_-__ 2192M_-FJ_-__
600 [5],[6] 600 J, R, H, L 2 #2-600 kcmil CU/AL 2192M_-GK_-__ 2192M_-GJ_-__ SC-II
[5],[6]
800 800 3 #6-350 kcmil CU/AL 3.5 [4] 2192M_-HKC-__ 2192M_-HJC-__
1200 [5],[6] 1200 4 #6-350 kcmil CU/AL 2192M_-JKC-__ 2192M_-JJC-__
L
1600 [5],[6],[7] 1600 4 #2-600 kcmil CU/AL 6.0 2192M_-KK_-__ 2192M_-KJ_-__
2000 [5],[6],[7] 2000 6 #2-600 kcmil CU/AL 20” D 35” W [8] 2192M_-LK_-__ 2192M_-LJ_-__
• Insert T for Top mounted or B for Bottom mounted (e.g., 2192MT- or 2192MB-).
• Unless already selected, select the voltage code from table on page 70 (e.g., 2192MT-GKC).
• Then select the appropriate fuse clip designator from Fuse Clip Sizes/Types on page 70 (e.g., 2192MT-GKC-29J).
• If power fuse will be selected, select from table on page 208 (e.g., 2192MT-GKC-29J-629G).
• For fuse rating, based on disconnect rating, see publication 2100-TD003x-EN-P.
• If optional line lugs will be selected, select from Optional Crimp Lugs for Bulletins 2192FT, 2192FB, 2192MT and 2192MB table below (e.g., 2192MT-GKC-29J-629G-82B500).
[2] If optional full-rated incoming neutral bus (see page 117) is specified, the quantity and size/type of the lug(s) on neutral lug pad will be the same as the 3-phase lugs. When
optional half-rated incoming neutral bus (see page 117) is specified and (1) or (2) lugs per phase are specified, (1) lug will be provided on the half-rated neutral riser. When (3) or
(4) lugs are specified, (2) lugs will be provided. When (5) or (6) lugs are specified, (3) lugs will be provided on half-rated neutral riser.
mounted units.
[5] Fusible disconnect switch is a bolted pressure switch. No vertical wireway. Not available in NEMA Type 3R or Type 4 for 1600A and 2000A. 600A through 1200A units have
viewing window on door for visual verification of disconnect blades.
[6] Units having 100% ratings are available for these fusible disconnect switches for NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 with gasket only. Non-fused switches are 100% rated and available in
NEMA 1, 1 with gasket, and 12. See options on page 122 to select. For 100% rated 1600A and 2000A units, no top or bottom wireway is present above or below the unit and the
unit must be located at either end of the motor control center lineup.
[7] When used with a 3-phase, 4-wire power system, horizontal neutral bus and incoming neutral bus is required.
[8] Frame mounted unit, section does not have vertical wireway. Horizontal bus is 5” deeper than standard. A special bus splice kit is provided when this unit is supplied adjacent to
a section with standard depth bus.
Optional Crimp Lugs for Bulletins 2192FT, 2192FB, 2192MT and 2192MB 90
2 Cables/ Cable/Wire Size or Option 2192FT 2192MT

Switch Size Type of Lug Wire Type
Phase Range Number [1] 2192FB 2192MB
200A Mechanical Only 1 #6-250 kcmil CU 81A250 9 9
3
2 250 kcmil CU 82B250 9[2],[3]
Panduit Type LCC
1 500 kcmil CU 82A500 9 [2],[3],[4]
400A
2 250 kcmil CU/AL 83B250 9[2],[3]
Burndy YA-A Series
1 500 kcmil CU/AL 83A500 9[2],[3],[4]
5 [3]
Panduit Type LCC 2 CU 82B500 9 9[3]
600A
Burndy YA-A Series 2 CU/AL 83B500 9[3] 9[3]
6 Panduit Type LCC 3 CU 82C500 9[3] 9[3]
800A
Burndy YA-A Series 3 CU/AL 83C500 9[3] 9[3]
[3] 9[3]
Panduit Type LCC 4 CU 82D500 9
1200A 500 kcmil
Burndy YA-A Series 4 CU/AL 83D500 9[3] 9[3]
Panduit Type LCC 5 CU 82E500 9[3]
1600A
Burndy YA-A Series 5 CU/AL 83E500 9[3]
Panduit Type LCC 6 CU 82F500 9[3]
2000A
Burndy YA-A Series 6 CU/AL 83F500 9[3]
[2] For top entry of incoming cables only.
[3] Disconnect supplied with lug pad assembly, reference page 215 for additional lugs.
[4] Requires pullbox. Select on page 28.
Circuit Breaker Feeders and Mains 2
• 150A and 250A Frame Feeders through 225A Trip are Plug-In Units
• 400-2000A Frame Feeders and all Mains are Frame Mounted 3
• Mains 600-2000A available with Built in Ground Fault Protection
91
5
2193F T - B K C - 30CB - ** 6
Bulletin Number Mounting Max Trip Rating NEMA Enclosure Type Line Voltage Circuit Breaker Trip Size and Type Options
91A 91C 91E 91F
Code Type Code Trip Rating Code Line Voltage Circuit Breaker
A 100A C Up to 600V Code Trip Size and Type
2193F Circuit Breaker
Feeder (FCB) B 150A See table on page 76.
2193M Main Circuit Breaker C 225A 91G
(MCB) 91D
D 400A Code Options
E 600A Code NEMA Enclosure Type
NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 See Options section
F 800A K beginning on page 107.
with gasket
G 1200A
91B J NEMA Type 12
H 1600A
Code Mounting
J 2000A
T [1] Top
B [1] Bottom
Z 0.5 Space Factor
[1] A “T” or “B” is required for all
2193M units and all 400A
frame and larger Bulletin 2193F
units.
Bulletin 2193F
2 3-Pole Feeder Circuit Breaker (FCB)
• See Appendix for circuit breaker characteristics.
3 • Continuous current rating based on 40° C ambient.
• Select circuit breaker frame and trip size based upon 125% of actual load amperes. Refer to NEC/CEC. Contact your
local Rockwell Automation Sales Office if 100% rated circuit breakers are required.
• Two (2) circuit breakers with trip current up to 150 A can be dual mounted in one plug-in unit for I3C, I6C, and I0C
150A frames. I3C frame circuit breakers with current limiters also can be dual mounted but are limited to a 100A trip
5 maximum on each circuit breaker. To specify dual mounted units, add two numbers from table on page 76 to base
catalog number (e.g., 2193F-AJC-3031CB). Half space factor units cannot be dual-mounted.
2193F—Plug-in unit, 15A-225A.
2193FZ—Plug-in unit, 0.5 space factor, 15A-225A.
6 2193FT—Top-mounted feeder, 400A are top-fed, connect load to bottom of switch.
2193FT—Top-mounted feeder, 600A-1200A are reverse-fed, connect load to top of switch.
2193FB—Bottom-mounted feeder, 400A-1200A are top-fed, connect load to bottom of switch.
92
Interrupting Capacity Ratings [1]

Frame Catalog Number
Range of (rms symmetrical amperes) Wiring Type A Only—Class I
Available 380V Space Delivery
Rating Trips 208V 400V Factor NEMA Type 1 and Program
Type (Amperes) 600V NEMA Type 12
(Amperes) 240V 415V Type 1 w/ gasket
480V
I3C 65k 35k 18k 2193FZ-AKC-_CB 2193FZ-AJC-_CB
15-100
I6C 100k 65k 25k 2193FZ-AKC-_CM 2193FZ-AJC-_CM
15-50
I0C 100k 100k 35k 2193FZ-AKC-_CX 2193FZ-AJC-_CX
60-100
15-50
I3C-CL 100k 100k 100k 0.5 [3] 2193FZ-AKC-_CD 2193FZ-AJC-_CD
60-100
I3C 65k 35k 18k 2193FZ-BKC-_CB 2193FZ-BJC-_CB
I6C 100k 65k 25k 2193FZ-BKC-_CM 2193FZ-BJC-_CM
125-150
I0C 100k 100k 35k 2193FZ-BKC-_CX 2193FZ-BJC-_CX
I3C-CL 100k 100k 100k 2193FZ-BKC-_CD 2193FZ-BJC-_CD
150 [2] I3C 65k 35k 18k 2193F-AKC-_CB 2193F-AJC-_CB
SC
15-100
I6C 100k 65k 25k 2193F-AKC-_CM 2193F-AJC-_CM
1.0
15-50
I0C 100k 100k 35k 2193F-AKC-_CX 2193F-AJC-_CX
60-100
15-50 1.0 [4]
I3C-CL 100k 100k 100k 2193F-AKC-_CD 2193F-AJC-_CD
60-100 1.5
I3C 65k 35k 18k 2193F-BKC-_CB 2193F-BJC-_CB
I6C 100k 65k 25k 1.0 2193F-BKC-_CM 2193F-BJC-_CM
125-150 [5]
I0C 100k 100k 35k 2193F-BKC-_CX 2193F-BJC-_CX
I3C-CL 100k 100k 100k 1.5 2193F-BKC-_CD 2193F-BJC-_CD
• Select the trip current from table on page 76 (e.g., 2193F-AKC-40CB).
• If optional load lugs will be selected, select from table on page 76 (e.g., 2193F-AKC-40CB-80A350).
[2] Non-interchangeable trip breakers.
[3] These units have horizontal operating handles.
[4] When supplied with DSA (options 11DSA2 and 11DSA3), requires 1.5 space factor.
[5] When selecting a dual circuit breaker unit with one circuit breaker with 125A or 150A trip and the other circuit breaker with 15-100 A trip, use catalog number configuration
2193F-B_C-____ (e.g., 2193F-BKC-4130CB).
Bulletin 2193F
3-Pole Feeder Circuit Breaker (FCB), continued 2
• Continuous current rating based on 40° C ambient.
• For circuit breaker sizing, select circuit breaker frame and trip size based upon 125% of actual load amperes. Refer to 3
NEC/CEC. Contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office if 100% rated circuit breakers are required.
93
Interrupting Capacity Ratings Catalog Number

Frame Range of (rms symmetrical amperes) Wiring Type A Only—Class I
Available
380V 400V
Space Delivery 5
Rating Trips 208V Factor NEMA Type 1 and Program
Type (Amperes) 415V 600V NEMA Type 12
(Amperes) 240V Type 1 w/ gasket
480V
6
JD3D [2] 65k 35k 18k 2193FZ-CKC-_CT 2193FZ-CJC-_CT
JD6D 100k 65k 25k 0.5 [3] 2193FZ-CKC-_CM 2193FZ-CJC-_CM
JD0D 70 100k 100k 35k 2193FZ-CKC-_CX 2193FZ-CJC-_CX
225A [1] SC
JD3D [2] 90-225 65k 35k 18k 2193F-CKC-_CT 2193F-CJC-_CT
JD6D 100k 65k 25k 1.5 2193F-CKC-_CM 2193F-CJC-_CM
JD0D 100k 100k 35k 2193F-CKC-_CX 2193F-CJC-_CX
K3D 65k 35k 25k 2193F_-DKC-_CT 2193F_-DJC-_CT
400 [4],[5] K6D 125-400 100k 65k 35k 2.0 2193F_-DKC-_CM 2193F_-DJC-_CM
K0D 100k 100k 65k 2193F_-DKC-_CX 2193F_-DJC-_CX
LD 65k 35k 25k 2193F_-EKC-_CT 2193F_-EJC-_CT
600 [4],[5],[6] HLD 300-600 100k 65k 35k 2.0 2193F_-EKC-_CM 2193F_-EJC-_CM
LDC 100k 100k 50k 2193F_-EKC-_CX 2193F_-EJC-_CX
SC-II
MDL 65k 50k 25k 2193F_-FKC-_CT 2193F_-FJC-_CT
800 [4],[5],[6] HMDL 400-800 100k 65k 35k 2.5 2193F_-FKC-_CM 2193F_-FJC-_CM
NDC 100k 100k 65k 2193F_-FKC-_CX 2193F_-FJC-_CX
ND 65k 50k 25k 2193F_-GKC-_CT 2193F_-GJC-_CT
1200
[4],[6],[7] HND 600-1200 100k 65k 35k 3.5 2193F_-GKC-_CM 2193F_-GJC-_CM
NDC 100k 100k 65k 2193F_-GKC-_CX 2193F_-GJC-_CX
• Select the trip current from table on page 76 (e.g., 2193F-CKC-44CT).
• If optional load lugs will be selected, select from table on page 76.
• Then add option number to the base catalog number (e.g., 2193F-CKC-44CT-80A350).
[3] These units have horizontal operating handles.
• Insert T for Top mounted or B for Bottom mounted (e.g., 2193FT- or 2193FB-).
• Select the trip current from table on page 76 (e.g., 2193FT-DKC-50CT).
• If optional load lugs will be selected, select from table on page 76.
• Then add option number to the base catalog number (e.g. 2193FT-EKC-44CT-80A350).
[6] Sealed breaker and Digitrip RMS 310 electronic trip with interchangeable trip plugs.
mounted units.
Bulletin 2193F
2 3-Pole Feeder Circuit Breaker (FCB), continued
• CENTERLINE 2100 motor control centers are rated for use with 75° C wires. Wire must be sized using the 75° C
column in NEC Table 310-16. The actual temperature rating of the lug is not relevant.
3 • Refer to Appendix for wire size conversion table.
Trip Current 94
Trip Current
(Amperes)
Number Trip Current
(Amperes)
Number Standard Mechanical Lugs Supplied [1] 95
(No breaker) 00 [1] 175 43 Trip Cables/ Cable/Wire Wire

5 15 30 200 44 Frame Type Rating Current
(Amperes)
Phase Size Range Type
20 31 225 45 15-100 1 #14-#1/0 AWG CU/AL
30 32 250 46 I3C, I6C, I0C 150A
125-150 1 #4-#4/0 AWG CU
6 40 34 300 48 15-70 1 #14-#2 AWG CU/AL
50 35 350 49 I3C-CL [2] 150A
80-150 1 #1-#4/0 AWG CU/AL
60 36 400 50 JD3D, JD6D,
70 37 500 51 225A 70-225 1 #4-350 kcmil CU/AL
JD0D
80 38 600 52 125-225 1 #3-350 kcmil CU
90 39 700 53 K3D, K6D, K0D 400A 250-350 1 250-500 kcmil CU
100 40 800 54 400 2 #3/0-250 kcmil CU
125 41 1000 55 LD, HLD, LDC 600A 300-600 2 250-350 kcmil CU
150 42 1200 56 400-600
MDL 2 #2/0-500 kcmil CU
800A
[1] Provision for Field Mounting
Single or dual mounted plug-in feeder units may be selected without the circuit HMDL 700-800 3 #3/0-300 kcmil CU
breaker in the 150A frame size only. Add the number 00 from Trip Current table 400-700 2 #2-500 kcmil CU
above to the base catalog number (e.g., 2193F-AKC-3500CB or NDC 800A
800 3 #3/0-500 kcmil CU
2193F-BKC-4100CB). Mounting hardware, space, and operating mechanism will be
provided for future mounting of circuit breaker(s). For a single mounted feeder 600-700 2 #2/0-500 kcmil CU
without circuit breaker but field mounting selected instead, the unit cost is $310. ND, HND, NDC 1200A 800-1000 3 #3/0-500 kcmil CU
For dual mounted units, add the $310 for any field mounting provisions selected
(e.g., 2193F-AKC-00CM is $310; 2193F-AKC-3900CM is $1380; $310 + 1070 = 1100-1200 4 #4/0-400 kcmil CU
$1380). [1] Lugs are designed for use with breaker frame. Standard crimp or mechanical lugs
cannot be used without special lug pad assembly.
[2] No optional lugs available for I3C frame with current limiters.
Optional Mechanical Lugs [1] 96
Trip Current Cables/

Frame Type Rating Cable/Wire Size Range Wire Type Option Number
(Amperes) Phase
I3C, I6C, I0C 150A 15-100 1 #4-#4/0 AWG CU/AL -80A4X0
JD3D, JD6D, JD0D 225A 70-225 1 #4-350 kcmil CU/AL -80A350
125-225, 400 1 250-500 kcmil CU -81A500
125-225 1 #3-350 kcmil CU/AL -80A350
K3D, K6D, K0D 400A 125-350 2 #3/0-250 kcmil CU -81B250
1 250-500 kcmil -80A500
125-400 CU/AL
2 #3/0-250 kcmil -80B250
2 #3/0-350 kcmil -80B350
LD, HLD, LDC 600A 300-600 CU/AL
2 400-500 kcmil -80B500
2 #1-500 kcmil CU/AL -80B500
400-600
MDL 3 #3/0-300 kcmil CU -81C300
800A
HMDL 2 [2] 500-750 kcmil -80B750
400- 800 CU/AL
3 #3/0-400 kcmil -80C400
400-700 2 #1-500 kcmil -80B500
NDC 800A CU/AL
400-800 3 #3/0-400 kcmil -80C400
600-700 2 #1-500 kcmil -80B500
600-1000 3 #3/0-400 kcmil -80C400
ND, HND, NDC 1200A CU/AL
4 #4/0-500 kcmil -80D500
600-1200
3 500-750 kcmil -80C750
[1] Lugs are designed for use with breaker frame. Standard crimp or mechanical lugs cannot be used without special lug pad assembly.
[2] Requires top entry and pullbox for 600-750 kcmil cables in order to meet UL and NEC/UL/cUL wire bending requirements. Select pullbox on page 28.
Bulletin 2193M
3-Pole Main Circuit Breaker (MCB) 2
• Select circuit breaker frame and trip size based upon 125% of actual load amperes. Continuous current rating based 3
on 40° C ambient. Refer to NEC/CEC.
• Mains are suitable for use as service entrance per NEC (UL) and CEC (CSA). If application is a four-wire system, a
neutral plate rated for 280A is available, refer to page 25, 105, 117 and 214. If a neutral greater then 280A is required,
see page 25 or 117 or contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office. Mains rated 1000A and above may
require ground fault protection. Refer to NEC/UL/cUL.
• Main Breakers supplied with internal ground fault protection (Breaker Code CTG, CMG or CXG) are supplied with a 5
neutral CT for use on a 3 Phase, 4 Wire, Solidly Grounded “WYE” System. Circuit breakers with internal ground fault
protection are not designed for use on a Delta System, Ungrounded “WYE” System or Impedance Grounded “WYE”
System. 6
• Mains units are frame mounted. They must be located at the top or bottom of the section.
2193MT—Top-mounted main, 150A-2000A are top-fed.
• Includes line terminal guard for JD, K, L, M, N, and R frame circuit breaker units.
97
Interrupting
Frame Range of Capacity Ratings Catalog Number [1]
Available (rms symmetrical amperes) Space Wiring Type A Only—Class I Delivery
Trips Factor Program
Rating (Amperes) 380V/400V NEMA Type 1 and Type 1
(Ampere)
Type 208V/240V 415V/480V 600V w/ gasket NEMA Type 12
I3C 65k 35k 18k 2193M_-AKC-_CB 2193M_-AJC-_CB
15-100
I6C 100k 65k 25k 2193M_-AKC-_CM 2193M_-AJC-_CM
15-50
I0C 100k 100k 35k 2193M_-AKC-_CX 2193M_-AJC-_CX
60-100
15-50
150A[2] I3C-CL 100k 100k 100k 2193M_-AKC-_CD 2193M_-AJC-_CD
60-100
I3C 65k 35k 18k 1.5 2193M_-BKC-_CB 2193M_-BJC-_CB
I6C 100k 65k 25k 2193M_-BKC-_CM 2193M_-BJC-_CM
125-150
I0C 100k 100k 35k 2193M_-BKC-_CX 2193M_-BJC-_CX
I3C-CL 100k 100k 100k 2193M_-BKC-_CD 2193M_-BJC-_CD
JD3D [2] 65k 35k 18k 2193M_-CKC-_CT 2193M_-CJC-_CT
70,
225A JD6D 100k 65k 25k 2193M_-CKC-_CM 2193M_-CJC-_CM
90-225 SC-II
JD0D 100k 100k 35k 2193M_-CKC-_CX 2193M_-CJC-_CX
K3D 65k 35k 25k 2193M_-DKC-_CT 2193M_-DJC-_CT
400A K6D 125- 400 100k 65k 35k 2193M_-DKC-_CM 2193M_-DJC-_CM
K0D 100k 100k 65k 2193M_-DKC-_CX 2193M_-DJC-_CX
LD [3] 65k 35k 25k 2193M_-EKC-_CT 2193M_-EJC-_CT
LDG [3] [5]
, 65k 35k 25k 2193M_-EKC-_CTG 2193M_-EJC-_CTG
2.0
HLD [3] 100k 65k 35k 2193M_-EKC-_CM 2193M_-EJC-_CM
300-600 [4]
600A HLDG [3],[5] 100k 65k 35k 2193M_-EKC-_CMG 2193M_-EJC-_CMG
LDC [3] 100k 100k 50k 2193M_-EKC-_CX 2193M_-EJC-_CX
LDCG [3],[5] 100k 100k 50k 2193M_-EKC-_CXG 2193M_-EJC-_CXG
[6] 600 65k 35k 25k 2193M_-EKC-52CN 2193M_-EJC-52CN
LD HI-MAG
• Insert T for top mounted or B for bottom mounted (e.g., 2193MT- or 2193MB-).
• Select trip current from table on page 79 (e.g., 2193MB-AKC-40CB).
• If optional line lugs will be selected, select from Optional Mechanical and Crimp Lugs tables on page 80.
• Then add option number to base catalog number (e.g., 2193MB-AKC-40CB-80A4X0).
[3] Units having 100% rating are available for these circuit breakers for NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 with gasket only. See options on page 122 to select.
[5] Ground fault protection system is suited for solidly grounded system. Ground fault trip range is adjustable from 0.2 to 1 times the trip current rating of the circuit breaker rating
plug. Time delay setting can be adjusted from 0.05 to 0.5 seconds. Neutral current transformer shipped loose except when option 88HN or 88FN is specified.
[6] NOT UL listed. Internal auxiliary contacts (98X, 99X) are not available on this breaker. Unit supplied with molded case switch with fixed high magnetic trip. Requires upstream
current limiting branch protection. See molded case switch markings for proper selection of this protection. Ratings listed are the maximum fault currents that can be
applied to the devices.
Bulletin 2193M
2 3-Pole Main Circuit Breaker (MCB), continued
3 • Select circuit breaker frame and trip size based upon 125% of actual load amperes. Continuous current rating based
on 40° C ambient. Refer to NEC/CEC.
• Mains are suitable for use as service entrance per NEC (UL) and CEC (CSA). If application is a four-wire system, a
neutral plate rated for 280A is available, refer to page 25, 105, 117 and 214. If a neutral greater then 280A is required,
see page 25 or 117 or contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office. Mains rated 1000A and above may
require ground fault protection. Refer to NEC/UL/cUL.
5 • Main Breakers supplied with internal ground fault protection (Breaker Code CTG, CMG or CXG) are supplied with a
neutral CT for use on a 3 Phase, 4 Wire, Solidly Grounded “WYE” System. Circuit breakers with internal ground fault
protection are not designed for use on a Delta System, Ungrounded “WYE” System or Impedance Grounded “WYE”
6 System.
• Mains units are frame mounted. They must be located at the top or bottom of the section.
2193MT—Top-mounted main, 150A-2000A are top-fed.
• Includes line terminal guard for M, N, and R frame circuit breaker units.
98
Frame
Interrupting Capacity Ratings Catalog Number [1]
Range of (rms symmetrical amperes) Wiring Type A—Class I
Available Space Delivery
Trips 208V 380V, 400V, Factor NEMA Type 1 and Program
Rating (Amperes) Type (Amperes) 600V NEMA Type 12
240V 415V, 480V Type 1 w/ gasket
MDL [2] 65k 50k 25k 2193M_-FKC-_CT 2193M_-FJC-_CT

[2],[4] 65k 50k 25k 2193M_-FKC-_CTG 2193M_-FJC-_CTG
MDLG
HMDL [2] 100k 65k 35k 2193M_-FKC-_CM 2193M_-FJC-_CM
400-800 [3]
800A HMDLG [2],[4] 100k 65k 35k 2.5 2193M_-FKC-_CMG 2193M_-FJC-_CMG
[2] 100k 100k 65k 2193M_-FKC-_CX 2193M_-FJC-_CX
NDC
NDCG [2],[4],[5] 100k 100k 65k 2193M_-FKC-_CXG 2193M_-FJC-_CXG
MDL HI-MAG [6] 800 42k 35k 22k 2193M_-FKC-54CN 2193M_-FJC-54CN
ND [2] 65k 50k 25k 2193M_-GKC-_CT 2193M_-GJC-_CT
NDG [2],[4],[5] 65k 50k 25k 2193M_-GKC-_CTG 2193M_-GJC-_CTG
HND [2] 100k 65k 35k 2193M_-GKC-_CM 2193M_-GJC-_CM
600-1200 [3] SC-II
1200A HNDG [2],[4],[5] 100k 65k 35k 3.5 [7] 2193M_-GKC-_CMG 2193M_-GJC-_CMG
NDC [2] 100k 100k 65k 2193M_-GKC-_CX 2193M_-GJC-_CX
[2],[4],[5] 100k 100k 65k 2193M_-GKC-_CXG 2193M_-GJC-_CXG
NDCG
ND HI-MAG [6] 1200 65k 50k 25k 2193M_-GKC-56CN 2193M_-GJC-56CN
Due to MCC design RD [2] 100k 65k 50k 2193M_-JKC-_CM 2193M_-JJC-_CM
and bus short circuit
withstand limitations,
these units only can be 6.0
2000A used on systems of 1200-2000 [3] 30” W
65kA available or less. RDG [2],[4] 100k 65k 50k
If 100kA is required, 20” D [8] 2193M_-JKC-_CMG 2193M_-JJC-_CMG
contact your local
Rockwell Automation
Sales Office.
• Insert T for top mounted or B for bottom mounted (e.g., 2193MT or 2193MB).
• Select trip current from table on page 79 (e.g., 2193MT-AKC-40CB).
• If optional line lugs will be selected, select from Optional Mechanical and Crimp Lugs tables on page 80. Then add option number to the base catalog number (e.g.,
2193MB-AKC-40CB-80A4X0).
[2] Units having 100% rating are available for these circuit breakers for NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 with gasket only. See options on page 122 to select.
[4] The ground fault protection system is suited for solidly grounded system. Ground fault trip range is adjustable from 0.2 to 1 times the trip current rating of the circuit breaker
rating plug. The time delay setting can be adjusted from 0.05 to 0.5 seconds. Neutral current transformer supplied loose except when option 88HN or 88FN is supplied.
[5] Circuit breaker is supplied with one (1) N.O. and one (1) N.C. internal auxiliary contact, option code 98X9X must be selected to represent these auxiliary contacts.
[6] NOT UL listed. Internal auxiliary contacts (98X, 99X) are not available on this breaker. Unit supplied with molded case switch with fixed high magnetic trip. Requires upstream
current limiting branch protection. See molded case switch markings for proper selection of this protection. Unfused withstand rating is 35,000A.
[7] Section does not have vertical wireway next to this unit.
[8] Section does not have vertical wireway.
Bulletin 2193M
3-Pole Main Circuit Breaker (MCB), continued 2
• CENTERLINE 2100 motor control centers are rated for use with 75°C wire. Wire must be sized using the 75°C column
in NEC/UL/cUL. The actual temperature rating of the lug is not relevant.
• Top- and bottom-mounted mains are designed with adequate space to route cables to lugs. Special consideration 3
Trip Current 99
Trip Current Trip Current

(Amperes)
Number (Amperes)
Number 5
15 30 225 45
20 31 250 46
6
30 32 300 48
40 34 350 49
50 35 400 50
60 36 500 51
70 37 600 52
80 38 700 53
90 39 800 54
100 40 1000 55
125 41 1200 56
150 42 1600 58
175 43 2000 60
200 44 — —
Standard Mechanical Lugs Supplied [1] 100
Trip Cables/ Cable/Wire

Frame Type Rating Wire Type
Current
(Amperes)
(Amperes) Phase [2] Size Range
I3C, I6C, I0C, 15-100 1 #14-#1/0 AWG CU/AL
150 A
I3C-CL 125-150 1 #4- #4/0 AWG CU
JD3D, JD6D, JD0D 225 A 70-225 1 #4-350 kcmil CU
125-225 1 #3-350 kcmil CU
K3D, K6D, K0D 400 A 250-350 1 250-500 kcmil CU
400 2 #3/0-250 kcmil CU
LD, HLD, LDC, LDG, HLDG, LDCG 600 A 300-600 2 250-350 kcmil CU
LD HI-MAG 600 A 600 2 250-350 kcmil CU
MDL, MDLG 400-600 2 #2/0-500 kcmil CU
800 A
HMDL, HMDLG 700-800 3 #3/0-300 kcmil CU
MDL HI-MAG 800 A 800 3 #3/0-300 kcmil CU
400-700 2 #2/0-500 kcmil CU
NDC, NDCG 800 A 800 3 #3/0-500 kcmil CU
ND HI-MAG 1200 A 1200 4 #3/0-400 kcmil CU
600-700 2 #2/0-500 kcmil CU
ND, HND, NDC, NDG, HNDG, NDCG 1200 A 800-1000 3 #3/0-500 kcmil CU
1200 4 #3/0-400 kcmil CU
ND, HND, NDC, NDG, HNDG, NDCG—100% rated 1200 A 600-1200 4 #4/0-600 kcmil CU/AL
1200-1600 4 #1-600 kcmil CU
RD, RDG 2000 A 2000 6 #2-600 kcmil CU/AL
1200-1600 4 #2-600 kcmil CU/AL
RD, RDG—100% rated 2000 A 2000 6 #2-600 kcmil CU/AL
[1] Lugs are designed for use with breaker frame. See page 80 for additional lugs.
Bulletin 2193M
2 3-Pole Main Circuit Breaker (MCB), continued
Optional Mechanical and Crimp Lugs 101
[1]
3 MECHANICAL LUGS
Rating Trip Current Cables/ Cable/Wire Size
Frame Type (Amperes) (Amperes) Phase Range Wire Type Option Number [2]
I3C, I6C, I0C 150A 15-100 1 #4-#4/0 AWG CU/AL 80A4X0
JD3D, JD6D, JD0D 225A 70-225 1 #4-350 kcmil CU/AL 80A350
5 125-225, 400 1 250-500 kcmil CU 81A500
125-225 1 #3-350 kcmil CU/AL 80A350
K3D, K6D, K0D 400A 125-350 2 #3-250 kcmil CU 81B250
6 1 250-500 kcmil 80A500
125-400 CU/AL
2 #3/0-250 kcmil 80B250
LD, HLD, LDC #3/0-350 kcmil 80B350
600A 300-600 2 CU/AL
LDG, HLDG, LDCG 400-500 kcmil 80B500
[3] #1-500 kcmil CU/AL 80B500
2
400-600
MDL, MDLG 3 [3] #3/0-300 kcmil CU 81C300
800A
HMDL, HMDLG [4]
400-800 2 500-750 kcmil 80B750
CU/AL
400-800 3 #3/0-400 kcmil 80C400
400-700 2 #1-500 kcmil 80B500
NDC, NDCG 800A CU/AL
400-800 3 #3/0-400 kcmil 80C400
[3]
600-700 2 #1-500 kcmil 80B500[5]
ND, HND, NDC, 600-1000 3 [3] #3/0-400 kcmil 80C400[5]

1200A CU/AL
NDG, HNDG, NDCG 4 #4/0-500 kcmil 80D500[5]
600-1200
3 500-750 kcmil 80C750[5]
ND, HND, NDC,
NDG, HNDG, NDCG—(with option -755, 100% 1200A 600-1200 3 [6] 350-800 kcmil CU/AL 80C800
rated only)
4 500-1000 kcmil 80D01K[5]
RD, RDG 2000A 1200-1600 CU/AL
6 #2-600 kcmil 80F600
CRIMP LUGS [7]
125-400 2 250 kcmil CU [9] 82B250
125-400 1 500 kcmil CU [9] 82A500
K3D, K6D, K0D [8] 400A
125-400 2 250 kcmil CU/AL [9] 83B250
125-400 1 500 kcmil CU/AL [9] 83A500
LD, HLD, LDC 2 CU [9] 82B500

600A 300-600
LDG, HLDG, LDCG [8] 2 CU/AL [9] 83B500
MDL, MDLG 3 CU [9] 82C500

800A 400-800
HMDL, HMDLG [8] 3 CU/AL [9] 83C500
3 CU [9] 82C500
NDC, NDCG [8] 800A 400-800 500 kcmil
[9]
3 CU/AL 83C500
4 CU [9] 82D500
ND, HND, NDC, NDG, HNDG, NDCG 1200A 600-1200
4 CU/AL [9] 83D500
6 CU [9] 82F500
RD, RDG 2000A 1200-2000
6 CU/AL [9] 83F500
[1] Lugs are designed for use with breaker frame. Standard crimp or mechanical lugs cannot be used without optional lug pad assembly.
[3] Cannot be used on the HI-MAG frames.
[4] Requires top entry and pullbox for 600-750 kcmil cables in order to meet UL and NEC/UL/cUL wire bending requirements. Select on page 28.
[5] Not available with 2193M units with option -755 (100% rated)
[6] For top entry of incoming cables only. Requires pullbox for 750-800 kcmil cables in order to meet UL and NEC/UL/cUL cable bending requirements. Select on page 28.
[7] Breaker supplied with a lug pad assembly, reference page 215 for additional lugs.
[8] For top entry of incoming cables only. Requires pullbox. Select on page 28.
[9] CU crimp lugs are Panduit type LCC Series. CU/AL crimp lugs are Burndy YA-A Series.
Lighting and Power Panel Units
Bulletin 2193LE 2
Lighting Panel (LPAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Bulletin 2193LE is a frame mounted lighting panel with either a main lug 3
or main circuit breaker. The lighting panels are rated for 100A or 225A
with up to 42 branch circuits. One, two, and three pole bolt-on branch
circuit breakers are available with ratings from 15A to 100A.
Bulletin 2193PP
7
Panel Board with Main Circuit Breaker (PPAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Bulletin 2193PP is a plug-in unit panel board with main circuit breaker.
The panel boards are rated for 100A, 150A, or 225A with up to 42 branch
circuits. One, two, and three pole bolt-on branch circuit breakers are
available with ratings from 15A to 100A.
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2193LE
2 Lighting Panel (LPAN)
• Frame mounted lighting panel that is designed for field installation
3 • When ordered as a SC-I Unit, supplied with lighting panel, door, hardware and instructions
• Rated for 100A or 225A with a maximum 42 branch circuits
• 1, 2 or 3 pole bolt-on branch circuit breakers are available with ratings from 15 - 100A
• Reference page 219 for additional bolt-on breakers
5
6
102
7
2193LE - A K L 1 18 - 00WT - 30A18
Maximum Rating of NEMA Enclosure 1-Pole Branch Breakers Main Breaker Trip Rating and
Bulletin Number Type of Main System Phases Branch Breakers
Main Bus Type Positions Type Rating
102E 102G
102A Code System Phases Main Breaker

1 Single Phase Trip Rating and
Code Type
3 Three Phase Code Type Rating
Lightning Panels
2193LE with Bolt-on Branch 102D 00WT Lug Only
Breakers (LPAN) 40WT 100A
Code Type of Main
45WT 225A
L Main Lug Only
102B 102F
B Main Circuit Breaker
Max. Rating 1-Pole Branch
102H
Code of Main Bus Code Breakers Positions
A 100A 15 15 Code Branch Breakers
C 225A 16 16 See Factory - Installed Bolt-On
18 18 Branch Breaker table on Page 83
102C
27 27
Code NEMA Enclosure Type 30 30
NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with 42 42
K gasket
J NEMA Type 12
Bulletin 2193LE
Frame Mounted Lighting Panel for Bolt-on Branch Circuit Breakers (LPAN) 2
• Units are NOT wired. Units have NO plug-in stabs.
• Load terminal blocks are NOT furnished. 3
• Lighting panel bus is aluminum with tin plating. Directory card is supplied.
103
Catalog Number
Wiring Type A—Class I
Panel Bus and Max. Number of Space (Catalog numbers do not include branch breakers. 5
Refer to Factory-Installed Bolt-On Branch Circuit Delivery
Type Main Lug Ampere 1-pole
Circuit Breakers Factor Breakers table below for catalog string numbers.) Program
Rating
NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 NEMA Type 12 6
w/ gasket
WITH MAIN LUG ONLY (MLO)
Single Phase 100 18 2.0 2193LE-AKL118-00WT 2193LE-AJL118-00WT 7
3-Wire 120/240 Volts 30 2.5 2193LE-CKL130-00WT 2193LE-CJL130-00WT
AC 10kA 225
IC rms Sym. 42 3.0 2193LE-CKL142-00WT 2193LE-CJL142-00WT
SC
Three Phase 18 2.0 2193LE-AKL318-00WT 2193LE-AJL318-00WT
4-Wire 120/208 Volts 100
30 2.5 2193LE-AKL330-00WT 2193LE-AJL330-00WT
AC 10kA
IC rms Sym. 225 42 3.0 2193LE-CKL342-00WT 2193LE-CJL342-00WT
WITH MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCB) [1]
100A Main Circuit Breaker is Cutler-Hammer BAB type series rating 10kA.
225A Main Circuit Breaker is Cutler-Hammer ED type series rating 65kA.
Single Phase 100 [1] 16 2.0 2193LE-AKB116-40WT 2193LE-AJB116-40WT

3-Wire 120/240 Volts 30 3.5 2193LE-CKB130-45WT 2193LE-CJB130-45WT
AC. 225
42 4.0 2193LE-CKB142-45WT 2193LE-CJB142-45WT
SC
15 2.0 2193LE-AKB315-40WT 2193LE-AJB315-40WT
Three Phase 4-Wire 100 [1]
27 2.5 2193LE-AKB327-40WT 2193LE-AJB327-40WT
120/208 Volts AC.
225 42 4.0 2193LE-CKB342-45WT 2193LE-CJB342-45WT
[1] The 100A main circuit breaker in a 100A lighting panel is a reverse-fed branch lighting panel circuit breaker.
Factory-Installed Bolt-On Branch Circuit Breakers * 104
3-Pole Thermal Magnetic 120/240V AC

1-Pole Thermal Magnetic 120V AC 2-Pole Thermal Magnetic 120/240V AC Circuit Breaker 10kA IC Sym
Circuit Breaker 10kA IC Sym Circuit Breaker 10kA IC Sym (for use on three phase lighting panels only)
Trip Rating Catalog String Trip Rating Catalog String Trip Rating Catalog String
@ 40° C @ 40° C @ 40° C
(Amperes) Number [1] (Amperes) Number [1] (Amperes) Number [1]
15A 30A__ 15A 30B__ 15A 30C__
20A 31A__ 20A 31B__ 20A 31C__
30A 32A__ 30A 32B__ 30A 32C__
15A w/ grd flt [2] 30D__ 50A 35B__ 50A 35C__
20A w/ grd flt [2] 31D__ 100A 40B__ 100A 40C__
Filler Plate 00A__ — — — —
• Select the number of branch breakers (e.g., 32A18).
• Add two digits to specify the number of branch breakers desired. Two digits are required for quantities less than ten (e.g., 03 for quantity three).
• When selecting multiple branch breakers with different trip ratings, add additional string numbers to the end of the catalog number (e.g.,
2193LE-AKL318-00WT-30A08-31B02-30C02).
• Locations of the branch breakers are determined by the factory.
• The maximum amperes connected to any one connector cannot exceed 200A on bolt-on branch breakers. All branch breakers are Type BAB.
[2] Ground fault interrupting circuit breakers provide 5mA personnel protection.
* Refer to page 219 for catalog numbers for field installed branch breakers. When breakers are to be factory-installed, specify filler plates for all remaining blank spaces in panel.
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2193PP
2 Panel Board with Main Circuit Breaker (PPAN)
• Plug-in unit panel board
3 • Rated for 100A, 150A, or 225A with up to 42 branch circuits
• 1, 2 or 3 pole bolt-on branch circuit breakers available with ratings from 15A - 100A
• Reference page 219 for additional bolt-on breakers
5
105
6
2193PP - C K B 5 18 - 40 CB - 30A18
Maximum Rating NEMA Enclosure 1-Pole Branch Main Breaker Circuit Breaker
7 Bulletin Number
of Main Bus Type
Type of Main System Phases
Breakers Positions Trip Rating Type
Branch Breakers
105E 105H
105A
105C Code System Phases Code Circuit Breaker Type
Code Type
NEMA Enclosure 5 Three Phase Standard Interrupting
CT
2193PP Plug-in Panel Code Type Capacity
Board (PPAN)
NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 Medium Interrupting
K 105F CB
with gasket Capacity
J NEMA Type 12 1-Pole Branch High Interrupting
Code Breakers Positions CM Capacity
105D 18 18
105B Code Type of Main 30 30
B Main Circuit Breaker 42 42 105I
Max. Rating
Code of Main Bus Code Branch Breakers
C 225A 105G See Factory - Installed
Main Breaker Bolt-On Branch Breaker
Code Trip Rating table on Page 85.
40 100A
42 150A
45 225A
Bulletin 2193PP
Plug-in Panel Board with Main Circuit Breaker (PPAN) 2
• Unit plugs into the MCC vertical bus.
• The panel board bus is aluminum with tin plating. 3
• The panel board is series rated. The interrupting capacity rating shown can be applied to all branch circuit
breakers.
• Bulletin 2193PP panel board is suitable for use with 3-phase, 4-wire, solidly grounded, Wye systems rated 480Y/277V
or less. May also be used on solidly grounded 3-wire power systems, however, only 2-pole and 3-pole branch circuit
breakers can be used.
NOTE: Neutral and ground bar in Bulletin 2193PP will not be factory connected to any neutral bus, neutral plate or
ground bus.
5
106
Max. IC Rating at 480Y/277V Catalog Number [1]
Main Main
Breaker Number of Circuit (rms Sym.) 6
Space Wiring Type A—Class I Delivery
Trip 1-pole (This rating can be
Breaker Factor NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ Program
Rating Circuit applied to all branch NEMA Type 12
Type
(Amperes) Breakers circuit breakers.) gasket 7
WITH MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCB)
I3C 25kA 2193PP-CKB518-40CB-__ 2193PP-CJB518-40CB-__
100 18 I6C 2.5 65kA 2193PP-CKB518-40CM-__ 2193PP-CJB518-40CM-__
I0C[2] 100kA 2193PP-CKB518-40CX-__ 2193PP-CJB518-40CX-__
30 I6C 3.0 65kA 2193PP-CKB530-42CM-__ 2193PP-CJB530-42CM-__
[2] 100kA 2193PP-CKB530-42CX-__ 2193PP-CJB530-42CX-__
I0C
150 PE
42 I6C 3.5 65kA 2193PP-CKB542-42CM-__ 2193PP-CJB542-42CM-__
I0C[2] 100kA 2193PP-CKB542-42CX-__ 2193PP-CJB542-42CX-__
18 3.5 35kA[4] 2193PP-CKB518-45CT-__ 2193PP-CJB518-45CT-__
225 30 JD3D[3] 3.5 35kA[4] 2193PP-CKB530-45CT-__ 2193PP-CJB530-45CT-__
42 4.0 35kA[4] 2193PP-CKB542-45CT-__ 2193PP-CJB542-45CT-__
• Select the appropriate catalog string number from Factory-Installed Bolt-On Branch Breaker table below to identify the branch breaker trip rating.
• Add two digits to specify the number of branch breakers desired. Two digits are also required for quantities less than ten (e.g., 03 for quantity three—
2193PP-CKB530-42CX-32A03).
• When selecting multiple branch breakers with different trip ratings, add additional string numbers to the end of the catalog number (e.g.,
2193PP-CKB518-40CB-30A08-31B02-30C02).
• Locations of the branch breakers are determined by the factory.
[2] PE delivery program in Canada, Engineered delivery program in U.S. Contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office for availability.
[4] 35kA series combination rating only when used with 50 A or lower rated branch circuit breakers. Series combination rating is 22kA when used with branch circuit breakers rated
60 A or higher.
*
Factory-Installed Bolt-On Branch Breaker 107
1-Pole Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) 2-Pole Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) 3-Pole Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic)
277VAC 480Y/277VAC 480Y/277VAC
Circuit Breaker 14kA I.C. SYM Circuit Breaker 14kA I.C. SYM Circuit Breaker 14kA I.C. SYM Delivery
Program
Trip Rating @ 40° C Catalog String Trip Rating @ 40° C Catalog String Trip Rating @ 40° C Catalog String
(Amperes) Number (Amperes) Number (Amperes) Number
15 30A__ 15 30B__ 15 30C__
20 31A__ 20 31B__ 20 31C__
25 61A__ 25 61B__ 25 61C__
30 32A__ 30 32B__ 30 32C__
35 33A__ 35 33B__ 35 33C__
40 34A__ 40 34B__ 40 34C__
PE
50 35A__ 50 35B__ 50 35C__
60 36A__ 60 36B__ 60 36C__
70 37A__ 70 37B__ 70 37C__
80 38A__ 80 38B__ 80 38C__
90 39A__ 90 39B__ 90 39C__
100 40A__ 100 40B__ 100 40C__
Filler Plate 00A__ — — — — SC
* All branch breakers are Type GHB. Refer to page 219 for catalog number of field installed branch breakers. Specify filler plates for all blank spaces in panel. The maximum
amperes connected to any one connector cannot exceed 200A. The 14kA interrupting capacity rating applies to the individual branch breaker. When used in the 2193PP, the I.C.
rating of the main breaker can be applied to all branch breakers.
86
Transformer Units
Bulletin 2195, 2196, 2197 2
Control and Lighting Transformers (XFMR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Bulletins 2195, 2196, and 2197 are control and lighting transformer units.
The transformer units are available with ratings from 0.5 kVA through 50 3
kVA for single-phase and 10 kVA through 45 kVA for three-phase.
Secondary fuses are provided with each transformer unit. Factory
installed primary fusing is optional on the 2196 transformer unit.
Transformer Units
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2195, 2196 and 2197
2 Transformer Units
• Control and lighting transformers
3 • Rated from 0.5 kVA - 50 kVA, single-phase and 10 kVA - 45 kVA, three-phase
• Secondary protection provided
5
108
6
2195 - A K BD - - **
2196 - A K BD - 24J - **
7
2197 - A K BD - 30CB - **
NEMA Enclosure Fuse, Clip Rating and Class or Circuit
8 Bulletin Number Transformer Size
Type
Line Voltage
Breaker Trip and Type
Options
108A 108C 108E

Code Type NEMA Enclosure Fuse, Clip Rating and Class
Control and Lighting Transformer Code Type or Circuit Breaker Trip and
2195 without Disconnecting Means NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 Code Type
(XFMR) K 2195 Not Applicable
with gasket
“24J” Fuse Clip Rating and
2196(Z) Control and Lighting Transformer J NEMA Type 12 2196
with Fusible Disconnect (XFMR) Class. See table on Page 209
“30CB” Circuit Breaker Trip and
2197(Z) Control and Lighting Transformer
with Circuit Breaker (XFMR) 2197 Type. See table on Page 209 and
Note: The (Z) denotes that the disconnect 211
portion of the unit is 0.5 space factor.
108D
Line Voltage 108F
108B Single Phase Code Options
Transformer Code Primary Secondary See Options Section
Code Size AD 240 V 120 V, (1) Fuse beginning on Page 107
Single Phase BD 480 V0 V 120 V, (1) Fuse
A 0.5 kVA CD 600 V 120 V, (1) Fuse
B 0.75 kVA AA 240 V 240/120 V, (2) Fuses
C 1.0 kVA BA 480 V 240/120 V, (2) Fuses
Z 1.6 kVA CA 600 V 240/120 V, (2) Fuses
E 2.0 kVA NS 380 V 110/115 V, (1) 1-pole CB
F 3.0 kVA KNS 400 V 110/115 V, (1) 1-pole CB
G 5.0 kVA IS 415 V 110/115 V, (1) 1-pole CB
H 7.5 kVA NP 380 V 110 V, (2) 1-pole CB
J 10 kVA KNP 400 V 115 V, (2) 1-pole CB
K 15 kVA IP 415 V 220 V, (2) 1-pole CB
M 25 kVA IT 415 V 240 V, (2) 1-pole CB
X 37.5 kVA Three Phase
Y 50 kVA Code Primary Secondary
Three Phase AH 240 V 208/120 V, (3) Fuses
P 10 kVA BH 480 V 208/120 V, (3) Fuses
Q 15 kVA CH 600 V 208/120 V, (3) Fuses
S 25 kVA
T 30 kVA
V 37.5 kVA
W 45 kVA
Transformer Units
Bulletin 2195
Control and Lighting Transformer Unit without Disconnecting Means (XFMR) 2
See 87 for product description.
NOTE: Do not mount transformer units below drive units. Heat from transformer units may cause drive to trip. 3
NOTE: In order to address the heating effects from loads containing a high degree of harmonic content, it may
be necessary to oversize the field conductors (especially neutrals), use k-factor lighting transformers,
and oversize the lighting contactor units (increase by 50%). Contact your local Rockwell Automation
Sales Office.
NOTE: Tap arrangement for 15-50kVA single phase transformers is (2) 2-1/2% Taps FCAN, (4) 2-1/2% Taps
FCBN. 5
Tap arrangements for 10-45 kVA three phase transformers is (2) 2-1/ 2% Taps FCBN.
NOTE: Transformers have Class 180°C insulation, 80° C rise. 6
For 71” high sections, see restrictions on page 24.
109
7
Recommended Primary Catalog Number [2]
Protection (Amperes) Wiring Type A—Class I
kVA [1] Factor NEMA Type 1 and Type NEMA Type 1 with
filters and Type 1 w/
Program 8
240 V 480 V 600 V [3] NEMA Type 12 [1]
1 w/ gasket gasket and filters [4]
SINGLE PHASE—120 Volt secondary with one (1) secondary fuse
0.5 2195-AK_D — 2195-AJ_D
1.0
0.75 2195-BK_D — 2195-BJ_D
1 1.5 2195-CK_D — 2195-CJ_D [5]
15 15
1.6 15 2195-ZK_D — 2195-ZJ_D
2.0
2 2195-EK_D — 2195-EJ_D
3 (1.5) 1.5 [6] 2195-FK_D 2195-FK_D-16A 2195-FJ_D
[7]
5 (2.5) — — 1.5 [6] 2195-GK_D 2195-GK_D-16A 2195-GJ_D
SINGLE PHASE—120/240 Volt secondary with two (2) secondary fuses
Transformer secondary wired and protected for 240 V phase to phase/120 V phase to center tap neutral.
5 (2.5) 30 15 — 2195-GK_A 2195-GK_A-16A 2195-GJ_A
7.5 (3.7) 40 20 20 1.5 [6] 2195-HK_A 2195-HK_A-16A 2195-HJ_A
10 (5) 50 30 20 2195-JK_A 2195-JK_A-16A 2195-JJ_A
15 (7.5) 70 40 30 2195-KK_A 2195-KK_A-16A 2195-KJ_A [7]
2.0 [8]
25 (12.5) 125 70 60 2195-MK_A 2195-MK_A-16A 2195-MJ_A
37.5 (18.5) 200 100 70 2.0 2195-XK_A 2195-XK_A-16A 2195-XJ_A
50 (25) 300 150 100 20” D [8] 2195-YK_A 2195-YK_A-16A 2195-YJ_A
THREE PHASE—120/208 Volt secondary with three (3) secondary fuses
Transformer secondary wired and protected for 208 V phase to phase/120 V phase to WYE neutral.
10 (5) — 20 15 2195-PK_H 2195-PK_H-16A 2195-PJ_H
15 (7.5) — 20 15 2195-QK_H 2195-QK_H-16A 2195-QJ_H
2.0 [8]
25 (12.5) — 40 30 2195-SK_H 2195-SK_H-16A 2195-SJ_H [7]
30 (15) — 50 40 2195-TK_H 2195-TK_H-16A 2195-TJ_H
37.5 (18.5) — 60 50 2.0 2195-VK_H 2195-VK_H-16A 2195-VJ_H
45 (22.5) — 70 60 20” D [8] 2195-WK_H 2195-WK_H-16A 2195-WJ_H
than 50% of its nameplate rating. Number in parentheses indicates approximate derated rating. However, in many applications, NEMA Type 1 with gasket design (vented and
filtered doors) may be sufficient.
[2] The catalog numbers listed are not complete. Select the primary voltage code from table on page 205 to identify the transformer primary voltage desired (e.g., 2195-FKBD).
[3] For ratings 3kVA and larger, vented door is provided.
[4] For ratings 3kVA and larger, vented and filtered door is provided. 3kVA and larger are available on NEMA Type 12 structures but unit still will be NEMA Type 1/1G with gasket and
filters. See page 114 for option -16A.
[5] 240 V and 480 V are SC in U.S. and Canada. 600 V is PE in U.S. and SC in Canada.
[6] Frame mounted unit. Must be located at bottom of section.
[7] 240 V and 480 V are SC-II in U.S. and Canada. 600 V is PE-II in U.S. and SC-II in Canada.
[8] Frame mounted unit, section does not have vertical wireway next to this unit. Must be located at bottom of section.
Transformer Units
Bulletin 2195
2 Control and Lighting Transformer Unit without Disconnecting Means (XFMR), continued
3 NOTE: Do not mount transformer units below drive units. Heat from transformer units may cause drive to trip.
Sales Office.
5 NOTE: Transformers have Class 180°C insulation, 80° C rise.
110
6 Recommended Primary Catalog Number
Protection Wiring Type A—Class I
Rating (Amperes)
Space Delivery
7 kVA [1] Factor NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 NEMA Type 1 with Program
380 V 400 V 415 V filters and Type 1 w/ NEMA Type 12 [1]
w/ gasket [2] gasket and filters [3]
8 SINGLE PHASE—110/115 Volt secondary with one (1) 1-pole circuit breaker [4]
0.5 [4] 2195-AK_S [5] — 2195-AJ_S [5]
1.0
0.75 [4] 2195-BK_S [5] — 2195-BJ_S [5]
1 [4] 1.5 2195-CK_S [5] — 2195-CJ_S [5] PE
15 15 15
1.6 [4] 2195-ZK_S [5] — 2195-ZJ_S [5]
2.0
2 [4] 2195-EK_S [5] — 2195-EJ_S [5]
3 [4] (1.5) 1.5 [6] 2195-FK_S [5] 2195-FK_S-16A [5] 2195-FJ_S [5] PE-II
SINGLE PHASE—110/220, Volt secondary with two (2) 1-pole circuit breakers
Transformer secondary wired and protected for 220 V phase-to-phase, 110 V phase-to-center tap neutral.
5 (2.5) [4] 20 — — 2195-GKNP 2195-GKNP-16A 2195-GJNP
7.5 (3.7) [4] 20 — — 1.5 [6] 2195-HKNP 2195-HKNP-16A 2195-HJNP
PE-II
[4] 30 — — 2195-JKNP 2195-JKNP-16A 2195-JJNP
10 (5)
15 (7.5) 50 — — 2.0 [7] 2195-KKNP 2195-KKNP-16A 2195-KJNP
SINGLE PHASE—115/230 Volt secondary with two (2) 1-pole circuit breakers
5 (2.5) — 20 — 2195-GKKNP 2195-GKKNP-16A 2195-GJKNP
7.5 (3.7) — 20 — [6] 2195-HKKNP 2195-HKKNP-16A 2195-HJKNP PE-II
1.5
10 (5) — 30 — 2195-JKKNP 2195-JKKNP-16A 2195-JJKNP
SINGLE PHASE— 120/240 Volt secondary with two (2) 1-pole circuit breakers [8]
5 (2.5) [4] — — 20 2195-GKIT 2195-GKIT-16A 2195-GJIT
7.5 (3.7) [4] — — 20 1.5 [6] 2195-HKIT 2195-HKIT-16A 2195-HJIT
PE-II
[4] — — 30 2195-JKIT 2195-JKIT-16A 2195-JJIT
10 (5)
15 (7.5) [9] — — 50 2.0 [7] 2195-KKIP 2195-KKIP-16A 2195-KJIP
[4] Incorporates primary taps for future conversion to new global IEC voltage standards (e.g., 400 V/115 V/230 V). Allows conversion without the need to replace transformers.
[5] The catalog numbers listed are not complete. Select the primary voltage code from table on page 205 to identify the transformer primary voltage desired (e.g., 2195-FKNS).
[8] The 15kVA transformer has 110/220 Volt secondary with two (2) 1-pole circuit breakers.
[9] Tap arrangement is (2) 2-1/2% Taps FCAN, (4) 2-1/2% Taps FCBN.
Transformer Units
Bulletin 2196
Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (XFMR) 2
Sales Office.
NOTE: Transformers have Class 180°C insulation, 80°C rise.
5
FCBN.
Tap arrangements for 10-45 kVA three phase transformers is (2) 2-1/ 2% Taps FCBN. 6
NOTE: 3 through 50 kVA consists of two (2) compartments—a fusible disconnect compartment and a
transformer compartment wired and interlocked together.
For 71” high sections, see restrictions on page 24. 7
111
Fuse Clip Rating Catalog Number [2]
(Amperes) Wiring Type A—Class I 8
Rating Delivery
Space Factor NEMA Type 1 with
kVA [1] NEMA Type 1 and Type filters and Type 1 w/
Program
240 V 480 V 600 V [3] NEMA Type 12 [1]
0.5 2196-AK_D-__ — 2196-AJ_D-__
1.0
0.75 2196-BK_D-__ — 2196-BJ_D-__
1 1.5 2196-CK_D-__ — 2196-CJ_D-__ [5]
1.6 30 30 30 2196-ZK_D-__ — 2196-ZJ_D-__
2.0
2 2196-EK_D-__ — 2196-EJ_D-__
3 (1.5) 2.5 [6] 2196-FK_D-__ 2196-FK_D-__-16A 2196-FJ_D-__ [7]
5 (2.5) — — 30 2.5 [6] 2196-GK_D-__ 2196-GK_D-__-16A 2196-GJ_D-__
5 (2.5) 30 30 — 2196-GK_A-__ 2196-GK_A-__-16A 2196-GJ_A-__
7.5 (3.7) 60 30 30 2.5 [6] 2196-HK_A-__ 2196-HK_A-__-16A 2196-HJ_A-__
10 (5) 60 30 30 2196-JK_A-__ 2196-JK_A-__-16A 2196-JJ_A-__
15 (7.5) 100 60 60 3.0 [8],[9] 2196-KK_A-__ 2196-KK_A-__-16A 2196-KJ_A-__ [7]
25 (12.5) 200 60 60 3.0 [8],[9] 2196-MK_A-__ 2196-MK_A-__-16A 2196-MJ_A-__
37.5 (18.5) 200 100 100 3.5 20” D [8],[9] 2196-XK_A-__ 2196-XK_A-__-16A 2196-XJ_A-__
50 (25) — 200 100 3.5, 20” D , [9] [10] 2196-YK_A-__ 2196-YK_A-__-16A 2196-YJ_A-__
10 (5) — 30 30 2196-PK_H-__ 2196-PK_H-__-16A 2196-PJ_H-__
15 (7.5) — 30 30 [9] 2196-QK_H-__ 2196-QK_H-__-16A 2196-QJ_H-__
25 (12.5) — 60 60 3.0 2196-SK_H-__ 2196-SK_H-__-16A 2196-SJ_H-__
[7]
30 (15) — 60 60 2196-TK_H-__ 2196-TK_H-__-16A 2196-TJ_H-__
37.5 (18.5) — 60 60 3.0 20” D [9] 2196-VK_H-__ 2196-VK_H-__-16A 2196-VJ_H-__
45 (22.5) — 100 60 3.0 20” D [9],[10] 2196-WK_H-__ 2196-WK_H-__-16A 2196-WJ_H-__
[2] The catalog numbers listed are not complete.
Select the voltage code from table on page 205 (e.g., 2196-FKBD).
• If power fuse will NOT be selected, select fuse clip designator from table on page 209 (e.g., 2196-FKBD-24J).
• If power fuse WILL be selected, select the fuse clip designator AND the manufacturer from table on page 209 (e.g., 2196-FKBD-24JG).
• For fuse rating, based on transformer rating, see publication 2100-TD003x-EN-P.
[4] For ratings 3kVA and larger, vented and filtered door is provided. 3kVA and larger are available on NEMA Type 12 structures but unit still will be NEMA Type 1/1G with gasket
and filters. See page 114 for option -16A.
[7] 240 V and 480 V are SC-II in U.S. and PE-II in Canada. 600 V is PE-II in U.S. and SC-II in Canada.
[8] For transformers with 240 volt primary, add 0.5 space factor.
Transformer Units
Bulletin 2196Z*
2 Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (XFMR)
Sales Office.
5 NOTE: Tap arrangement for 15-50kVA single phase transformers is (2) 2-1/2% Taps FCAN, (4) 2-1/2% Taps
FCBN.
Tap arrangements for 10-45 kVA three phase transformers is (2) 2 1/ 2% Taps FCBN.
6 NOTE: Transformers have Class 180°C insulation, 80°C rise.
NOTE: Unit consists of two (2) compartments—a fusible disconnect compartment and a transformer
compartment wired and interlocked together. The fusible disconnect compartment has a horizontal
7 operating handle.
112
8 Fuse Clip Rating Catalog Number [2]
(Amperes) Wiring Type A—Class I
Rating Delivery
Space Factor NEMA Type 1 with
kVA [1] NEMA Type 1 and Type filters and Type 1 w/
Program
240 V 480 V 600 V [3] NEMA Type 12 [1]
3 (1.5) 30 30 30 2.0 [5] 2196Z-FK_D-__ 2196Z-FK_D-__-16A 2196Z-FJ_D-__ [6]
5 (2.5) — — 30 2.0 [5] 2196Z-GK_D-__ 2196Z-GK_D-__-16A 2196Z-GJ_D-__
5 (2.5) 30 30 — 2196Z-GK_A-__ 2196Z-GK_A-__-16A 2196Z-GJ_A-__
7.5 (3.7) — 30 30 2.0 [5] 2196Z-HK_A-__ 2196Z-HK_A-__-16A 2196Z-HJ_A-__ [6]
10 (5) — 30 30 2196Z-JK_A-__ 2196Z-JK_A-__-16A 2196Z-JJ_A-__
10 (5) — 30 30 2196Z-PK_H-__ 2196Z-PK_H-__-16A 2196Z-PJ_H-__
15 (7.5) — 30 30 2.5 [7] 2196Z-QK_H-__ 2196Z-QK_H-__-16A 2196Z-QJ_H-__
[6]
• Select the voltage code from table on page 205 (e.g., 2196Z-FKBD).
• If power fuse will NOT be selected, select fuse clip designator from table on page 209 (e.g., 2196Z-FKBD-24J).
• If power fuse WILL be selected, select the fuse clip designator AND the manufacturer from table on page 209 (e.g., 2196Z-FKBD-24JG).
• For fuse rating, based on transformer rating, see publication 2100-TD003x-EN-P.
* The (Z) denotes that the disconnect portion of the unit is 0.5 space factor.
92 For Options, Modifications, and Accessories, see pages 107–123 Discount Schedule A6
Transformer Units
Bulletin 2196
Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (XFMR), continued 2
Sales Office.
NOTE: Transformers have Class 180°C insulation, 80° C rise.
5
NOTE: 3 through 50kVA consists of two (2) compartments—a fusible disconnect compartment and a
transformer compartment wired and interlocked together.
113
Fuse Clip Rating Catalog Number [2]

(Amperes) Wiring Type A—Class I 7
NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 NEMA
kVA [1] Factor Type 1 with filters Program
380 V 400 V 415 V and Type 1 w/ gasket NEMA Type 12 [1]
w/ gasket [3]
and filters [4] 8
SINGLE PHASE—110/115 Volt secondary with one (1) 1-pole circuit breaker [5]
0.5 [5] 2196-AK_S-__ — 2196-AJ_S-__
1.0
0.75 [5] 2196-BK_S-__ — 2196-BJ_S-__
[5] 1.5 2196-CK_S-__ — 2196-CJ_S-__ PE
1
30 30 30
1.6 [5] 2196-ZK_S-__ — 2196-ZJ_S-__
2.0
[5] 2196-EK_S-__ — 2196-EJ_S-__
2
[5] 2.5 [6] 2196-FK_S-__ 2196-FK_S-__-16A 2196-FJ_S-__ PE-II
3 (1.5)
5 (2.5) [5] 30 — — 2196-GKNP-__ 2196-GKNP-__-16A 2196-GJNP-__
7.5 (3.7) [5] 30 — — 2.5 [6] 2196-HKNP-__ 2196-HKNP-__-16A 2196-HJNP-__
PE-II
10 (5) [5] 30 — — 2196-JKNP-__ 2196-JKNP-__-16A 2196-JJNP-__
15 (7.5) [7] 60 — — 3.0 [8] 2196-KKNP-__ 2196-KKNP-__-16A 2196-KJNP-__
SINGLE PHASE—115 /230 Volt secondary with two (2) 1-pole circuit breakers
5 (2.5) — 30 — 2196-GKKNP-__ 2196-GKKNP-__-16A 2196-GJKNP-__
7.5 (3.7) — 30 — 2.5 [6] 2196-HKKNP-__ 2196-HKKNP-__-16A 2196-HJKNP-__ PE-II
10 (5) — 30 — 2196-JKKNP-__ 2196-JKKNP-__-16A 2196-JJKNP-__
SINGLE PHASE—120/240 Volt secondary with two (2) 1-pole circuit breakers [9]
5 (2.5) [5] — — 30 2196-GKIT-__ 2196-GKIT-__-16A 2196-GJIT-__
7.5 (3.7) [5] — — 30 2.5 [6] 2196-HKIT-__ 2196-HKIT-__-16A 2196-HJIT-__
PE-II
10 (5) [5] — — 30 2196-JKIT-__ 2196-JKIT-__-16A 2196-JJIT-__
15 (7.5) [7] — — 60 3.0 [8] 2196-KKIP-__ 2196-KKIP-__-16A 2196-KJIP__
• Select the voltage code from table on page 205 (e.g., 2196-FKNS).
• Select the fuse clip designator from table on page 209 (e.g., 2196-FKNS-24J). No power fuses available.
[4] For ratings 3kVA and larger, vented door is provided. 3kVA and larger are available on NEMA Type 12 structures but unit still will be NEMA Type 1/1G with gasket and filters. See
page 114 for option -16A.
[7] Tap arrangement is (2) 2-1/2% Taps FCAN, (4) 2-1/2% Taps FCBN.
[9] The 15kVA transformer has 110/220 V secondary with two (2) 1-pole circuit breakers.
Transformer Units
Bulletin 2196Z*
2 Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (XFMR), continued
Sales Office.
NOTE: Unit consists of two (2) compartments—a fusible disconnect compartment and a transformer
compartment wired and interlocked together.The fusible disconnect compartment has a horizontal
6 operating handle.
114
7 Fuse Clip Rating Catalog Number [2]
(Amperes) Wiring Type A—Class I
kVA [1] NEMA Type 1 with filters
8 380 V 400 V 415 V
Factor NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 and Type
[3] 1 w/ gasket NEMA Type 12 [1]
Program
w/ gasket and filters [4]
SINGLE PHASE—110/115 Volt secondary with one (1) 1-pole circuit breaker [5]
3 (1.5) [5] 30 30 30 2.0 [6] 2196Z-FK_S-__ 2196Z-FK_S-__-16A 2196Z-FJ_S-__ PE-II
5 (2.5) [5] 30 — — 2196Z-GKNP-__ 2196Z-GKNP-__-16A 2196Z-GJNP-__
7.5 (3.7) [5] 30 — — 2.0 [6] 2196Z-HKNP-__ 2196Z-HKNP-__-16A 2196Z-HJNP-__ PE-II
10 (5) [5] 30 — — 2196Z-JKNP-__ 2196Z-JKNP-__-16A 2196Z-JJNP-__
5 (2.5) — 30 — 2196Z-GKKNP-__ 2196Z-GKKNP-__-16A 2196Z-GJKNP-__
7.5 (3.7) — 30 — [6] 2196Z-HKKNP-__ 2196Z-HKKNP-__-16A 2196Z-HJKNP-__ PE-II
2.0
10 (5) — 30 — 2196Z-JKKNP-__ 2196Z-JKKNP-__-16A 2196Z-JJKNP-__
5 (2.5) [5] — — 30 2196Z-GKIT-__ 2196Z-GKIT-__-16A 2196Z-GJIT-__
7.5 (3.7) [5] — — 30 2.0 [6] 2196Z-HKIT-__ 2196Z-HKIT-__-16A 2196Z-HJIT-__ PE-II
[5] — — 30 2196Z-JKIT-__ 2196Z-JKIT-__-16A 2196Z-JJIT-__
10 (5)
• Select the voltage code from table on page 205 (e.g., 2196Z-FKNS).
• Select the fuse clip designator from table on page 209 (e.g., 2196Z-FKNS-24J). No power fuses available.
[4] For ratings 3kVA and larger, vented door is provided. 3kVA and larger are available on NEMA Type 12 structures but unit still will be NEMA Type 1/1G with gasket and filters. See
page 114 for option -16A.
94 For Options, Modifications, and Accessories, see pages 107–123 Discount Schedule A6
Transformer Units
Bulletin 2197
Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Circuit Breaker (XFMR) 2
Sales Office.
FCBN. 5
NOTE: Transformers have Class 180°C insulation, 80° C rise. 6
NOTE: 3 through 50kVA consists of a circuit breaker compartment and transformer compartment wired and
interlocked together.
115
Size of Primary Protection Catalog Number [2]

Rating Wiring Type A Only—Class I 8
Space Delivery
NEMA Type 1 with
kVA [1] Factor NEMA Type 1 and Type 1
filters and Type 1 w/
Program
240 V 480 V 600 V [3] NEMA Type 12 [1]
w/ gasket [4]
gasket and filters
0.5 2197-AK_D-__ — 2197-AJ_D-__
1.0
0.75 2197-BK_D-__ — 2197-BJ_D-__
1 1.5 2197-CK_D-__ — 2197-CJ_D-__ [6]
1.6 15 15 15 [5] 2197-ZK_D-__ — 2197-ZJ_D-__
2.0
2 2197-EK_D-__ — 2197-EJ_D-__
3 (1.5) 2.5 [7] 2197-FK_D-__ 2197-FK_D-__-16A 2197-FJ_D-__ [8]
5 (2.5) — — 15 2.5 [7] 2197-GK_D-__ 2197-GK_D__-16A 2197-GJ_D-__
5 (2.5) 30 15 — 2197-GK_A-__ 2197-GK_A-__-16A 2197-GJ_A-__
7.5 (3.7) 40 20 20 2.5 [7] 2197-HK_A-__ 2197-HK_A-__-16A 2197-HJ_A-__
10 (5) 50 30 20 2197-JK_A-__ 2197-JK_A-__-16A 2197-JJ_A-__
15 (7.5) 70 40 30 2197-KK_A-__ 2197-KK_A-__-16A 2197-KJ_A-__ [8]
25 (12.5) 125 70 60 3.0 [9] 2197-MK_A-__ 2197-MK_A-__-16A 2197-MJ_A-__
37.5 (18.5) 200 100 70 3.0 2197-XK_A-__ 2197-XK_A-__-16A 2197-XJ_A-__
20” D
50 (25) — 150 100 [9],[10] 2197-YK_A-__ 2197-YK_A-__-16A 2197-YJ_A-__
Transformer secondary wired and protected for 208V phase to phase/120 V phase to WYE neutral.
10 (5) — 20 15 2197-PK_H-__ 2197-PK_H-__-16A 2197-PJ_H-__
15 (7.5) — 20 20 [9] 2197-QK_H-__ 2197-QK_H-__-16A 2197-QJ_H-__
25 (12.5) — 40 30 3.0 2197-SK_H-__ 2197-SK_H-__-16A 2197-SJ_H-__ [8]
30 (15) — 50 40 2197-TK_H-__ 2197-TK_H-__-16A 2197-TJ_H-__
37.5 (18.5) — 60 50 3.0 2197-VK_H-__ 2197-VK_H-__-16A 2197-VJ_H-__
45 (22.5) — 70 60 20” D [9] 2197-WK_H-__ 2197-WK_H-__-16A 2197-WJ_H-__
[1] In NEMA Type 12 applications (non-ventilated 3kVA and larger transformers), to maximize transformer life, it is recommended that the transformer not be loaded to greater than
50% of its nameplate rating. Number in parentheses indicates approximate derated rating. However, in many applications, NEMA Type 1 with gasket design (vented and filtered
door) may be sufficient.
• Select the primary voltage code from table on page 205 (e.g., 2197-EKBD).
• Select the trip current from table on page 209 (e.g., 2197-EKBD-30).
• Select the circuit breaker from table on page 211 (e.g., 2197-EKBD-30CB).
[5] Transformer secondary wired and protected for 240 V phase to phase/120 V phase to center tap neutral.
Transformer Units
Bulletin 2197Z*
2 Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Circuit Breaker (XFMR)
Sales Office.
5 NOTE: Tap arrangement for 15-50kVA single phase transformers is (2) 2-1/2% Taps FCAN, (4) 2-1/2% Taps
FCBN.
NOTE: Units consists of a circuit breaker compartment and transformer compartment wired and interlocked
together. This circuit breaker compartment has a horizontal operating handle.
7 For 71” high sections, see restrictions on page 24.
116
[2]
Catalog Number
8 Rating
Size of Primary Protection
Space Delivery
NEMA Type 1 with
kVA [1] Factor
NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 filters and Type 1 w/
Program
240 V 480 V 600 V [3] NEMA Type 12 [1]
w/ gasket gasket and filters [4]
3 (1.5) 15 15 15 2.0 [5] 2197Z-FK_D-__ 2197Z-FK_D-__-16A 2197Z-FJ_D-__ [6]
5 (2.5) — — 15 2.0 [5] 2197Z-GK_D-__ 2197Z-GK-D__-16A 2197Z-GJ_D-__
5 (2.5) 30 15 — 2197Z-GK_A-__ 2197Z-GK_A-__-16A 2197Z-GJ_A-__
7.5 (3.7) 40 20 20 2.0 [5] 2197Z-HK_A-__ 2197Z-HK_A-__-16A 2197Z-HJ_A-__
10 (5) 50 30 20 2197Z-JK_A-__ 2197Z-JK_A-__-16A 2197Z-JJ_A-__
15 (7.5) 70 40 30 2197Z-KK_A-__ 2197Z-KK_A-__-16A 2197Z-KJ_A-__ [6]
[7]
25 (12.5) 125 70 60 2.5 2197Z-MK_A-__ 2197Z-MK_A-__-16A 2197Z-MJ_A-__
37.5 (18.5) 200 100 70 2.5 2197Z-XK_A-__ 2197Z-XK_A-__-16A 2197Z-XJ_A-__
50 (25) — 150 100 20” D [7] 2197Z-YK_A-__ 2197Z-YK_A-__-16A 2197Z-YJ_A-__
10 (5) — 20 15 2197Z-PK_H-__ 2197Z-PK_H-__-16A 2197Z-PJ_H-__
15 (7.5) — 20 20 [7] 2197Z-QK_H-__ 2197Z-QK_H-__-16A 2197Z-QJ_H-__
25 (12.5) — 40 30 2.5 2197Z-SK_H-__ 2197Z-SK_H-__-16A 2197Z-SJ_H-__ [6]
30 (15) — 50 40 2197Z-TK_H-__ 2197Z-TK_H-__-16A 2197Z-TJ_H-__
37.5 (18.5) — 60 50 2.5 2197Z-VK_H-__ 2197Z-VK_H-__-16A 2197Z-VJ_H-__
45 (22.5) — 70 60 20” D [7] 2197Z-WK_H-__ 2197Z-WK_H-__-16A 2197Z-WJ_H-__
[1] In NEMA Type 12 applications (non-ventilated 3kVA and larger transformers), to maximize transformer life, it is recommended that the transformer not be loaded to greater than
50% of its nameplate rating. Number in parentheses indicates approximate derated rating. However, in many applications, NEMA Type 1 with gasket design (vented and filtered
door) may be sufficient.
• Select the primary voltage code from table on page 205 (e.g., 2197Z-FKBD).
• Select the trip current from table on page 209 (e.g., 2197Z-FKBD-30).
• Select the circuit breaker from table on page 211 (e.g., 2197Z-FKBD-30CB).
Transformer Units
Bulletin 2197
Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Circuit Breaker (XFMR), continued 2
be necessary to oversize the field conductors (especially neutrals), use
k-factor lighting transformers, and oversize the lighting contactor units (increase by 50%). Contact
NOTE: Transformers have Class 180°C insulation, 80° C rise.
5
NOTE: 3 through 50kVA consists of a circuit breaker compartment and transformer compartment wired and
interlocked together.
117
Size of Primary Protection Catalog Number [2]

Rating Wiring Type A—Class I 7
Space Delivery
NEMA Type 1 with
kVA [1] Factor NEMA Type 1 and filters and Type 1 w/
Program
380 V 400 V 415 V [3] NEMA Type 12 [1]
Type 1 w/ gasket [4] 8
gasket and filters
SINGLE PHASE—110/115 secondary with one (1) 1-pole circuit breaker [5]
0.5 [5] 2197-AK_S-__ — 2197-AJ_S-__
1.0
0.75 [5] 2197-BK_S-__ — 2197-BJ_S-__
1 [5] 1.5 2197-CK_S-__ — 2197-CJ_S-__ PE
15 15 15
1.6 [5] 2197-ZK_S-__ — 2197-ZJ_S-__
2.0
2 [5] 2197-EK_S-__ — 2197-EJ_S-__
3 (1.5) [5] 2.5 [6] 2197-FK_S-__ 2197-FK_S-__-16A 2197-FJ_S-__ PE-II
5 [5] (2.5) 20 — — 2197-GKNP-__ 2197-GKNP-__-16A 2197-GJNP-__
7.5 [5] (3.7) 20 — — 2.5 [6] 2197-HKNP-__ 2197-HKNP-__-16A 2197-HJNP-__
PE-II
10 [5] (5) 30 — — 2197-JKNP-__ 2197-JKNP-__-16A 2197-JJNP-__
15 (7.5) [7] 50 — — 3.0 [8] 2197-KKNP-__ 2197-KKNP-__-16A 2197-KJNP-__
5 (2.5) — 20 — 2197-GKKNP-__ 2197-GKKNP-__-16A 2197-GJKNP-__
7.5 (3.7) — 20 — 2.5 [6] 2197-HKKNP-__ 2197-HKKNP-__-16A 2197-HJKNP-__ PE-II
10 (5) — 30 — 2197-JKKNP-__ 2197-JKKNP-__-16A 2197-JJKNP-__
5 (2.5) [5] — — 20 2197-GKIT-__ 2197-GKIT-__-16A 2197-GJIT-__
7.5 (3.7) [5] — — 20 2.5 [6] 2197-HKIT-__ 2197-HKIT-__-16A 2197-HJIT-__
PE-II
10 (5) [5] — — 30 2197-JKIT-__ 2197-JKIT-__-16A 2197-JJIT-__
15 (7.5) [7] — — 50 3.0 [8] 2197-KKIP-__ 2197-KKIP-__-16A 2197-KJIP__
• Select the primary voltage code from table on page 205 (e.g., 2197-EKNS).
• Select the trip current from table on page 209 (e.g., 2197-EKNS-30).
• Select the circuit breaker from table on page 211 (e.g., 2197-EKNS-30CB).
[7] Tap arrangement is two 2-1/2% Taps FCAN, four 2-1/2% Taps FCBN.
Transformer Units
Bulletin 2197Z*
2 Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Circuit Breaker (XFMR), continued
be necessary to oversize the field conductors (especially neutrals), use
k-factor lighting transformers, and oversize the lighting contactor units (increase by 50%). Contact
NOTE: Units consists of a circuit breaker compartment and transformer compartment wired and interlocked
together. The circuit breaker compartment has a horizontal operation handle.
6 For 71” high sections, see restrictions on page 24.
118
[2]
Size of Primary Protection Catalog Number
7 Rating Wiring Type A—Class I
Space Delivery
NEMA Type 1 with
kVA [1] Factor
NEMA Type 1 and filters and Type 1 w/
Program
380 V 400 V 415 V [3] NEMA Type 12 [1]
8 Type 1 w/ gasket gasket and filters [4]
SINGLE PHASE—110/115 secondary with one (1) 1-pole circuit breaker [5]
3 (1.5) [5] 15 15 15 2.0 [6] 2197Z-FK_S-__ 2197Z-FK_S-__-16A 2197Z-FJ_S-__ PE-II
Transformer secondary wired and protected for 220 V phase-to-phase, 110 V phase-to-enter tap neutral.
5 [5] (2.5) 20 — — 2197Z-GKNP-__ 2197Z-GKNP-__-16A 2197Z-GJNP-__
7.5 [5] (3.7) 20 — — 2.0 [6] 2197Z-HKNP-__ 2197Z-HKNP-__-16A 2197Z-HJNP-__
PE-II
10 [5] (5) 30 — — 2197Z-JKNP-__ 2197Z-JKNP-__-16A 2197Z-JJNP-__
15 (7.5) [7] 50 — — 2.5 [8] 2197Z-KKNP-__ 2197Z-KKNP-__-16A 2197Z-KJNP-__
5 (2.5) — 20 — 2197Z-GKKNP-__ 2197Z-GKKNP-__-16A 2197Z-GJKNP-__
7.5 (3.7) — 20 — 2.0 [6] 2197Z-HKKNP-__ 2197Z-HKKNP-__-16A 2197Z-HJKNP-__ PE-II
10 (5) — 30 — 2197Z-JAKNP-__ 2197Z-JAKNP-__-16A 2197Z-JJKNP-__
5 (2.5) [5] — — 20 2197Z-GKIT-__ 2197Z-GKIT-__-16A 2197Z-GJIT-__
7.5 (3.7) [5] — — 20 2.0 [6] 2197Z-HKIT-__ 2197Z-HKIT-__-16A 2197Z-HJIT-__
PE-II
10 (5) [5] — — 30 2197Z-JKIT-__ 2197Z-JKIT-__-16A 2197Z-JJIT-__
15 (7.5) [7] — — 50 2.5 [8] 2197Z-KKIP-__ 2197Z-KKIP-__-16A 2197Z-KJIP__
• Select the primary voltage code from table on page 205 (e.g., 2197Z-EKNS).
• Select the trip current from table on page 209 (e.g., 2197Z-EKNS-30).
• Select the circuit breaker from table on page 211 (e.g., 2197Z-EKNS-30CB).
[7] Tap arrangement is two 2-1/2% Taps FCAN, four 2-1/2% Taps FCBN.
1
Catalog Number Explanation - Full Section Mounting Plates
119
3
Full Section Blank Mounting Plate with No Disconnecting Means, with or without Horizontal Power Bus
2100 - E K C 1 X 1 B - - 120 - **
Full Section Blank Mounting Plate with Fusible Disconnect Switch, with or without Horizontal Power Bus
2100 - F K C 1 X 1 B - 24J - 120 - **
Full Section Blank Mounting Plate with Circuit Breaker, with or without Horizontal Power Bus
2100 - G K C 1 X 1 B - 32CB - 120 - **
Fuse Clip or
Bulletin Disconnecting Mounting Horizontal
NEMA Type Voltage Unit Depth Placeholder Unit Width Circuit Options
Number Means Plate Depth Power Bus
Breaker
119A 119F
Code Type Code Placeholder 119K

2100 X is a placeholder Code Option
119G See available
119D
Code Unit Width Options on page 23.
9
Code Voltage 1 20” wide
119B
A Up to 250V 2 25” wide
Code Disconnecting Means C Up to 600V 3 30” wide
E No disconnecting means
119E
4 35” wide
F With fusible disconnect 119J
5 40” wide
G With circuit breaker Code Unit Depth Horizontal Power
1 15” Deep 119H
Code Bus
119C
2 20” Deep Code Mounting Plate Depth Blank Provided with
B 14” Deep horizontal power bus
K NEMA Type 1 or Type 1
C 19” Deep 120 No horizontal power 12
D 8.5” Deep bus is provided
with gasket
J NEMA Type 12 119I
13
Fuse Clip or
Code Circuit Breaker
2100F and See page 100 for
2100G only fuse clip rating or
circuit breaker
17
18
15
20
Full Section Blank Mounting Plates
2 • Line side of disconnect or circuit breaker is connected to horizontal bus for sections with horizontal bus.
• Customer cables connect to the line side of the disconnect or circuit breaker for sections without horizontal bus.
120
Description Space Delivery
Factor NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ Program
NEMA Type 12
gasket
With no With horizontal bus 2100-EKC_ X _ _ 2100-EJC_ X _ _
disconnect Without horizontal
means 2100-EKC_ X _ _-120 2100-EJC_ X _ _-120
bus
Full width door, no vertical With horizontal bus 2100-FK_ _ X _ _-_ 2100-FJ_ _ X _ _-_
Full section Blank With fusible
wireway or vertical bus, disconnect 6.0 SC-II
Mounting Plates [2] with or without horizontal Without horizontal
2100-FK_ _ X _ _-_-120 2100-FJ_ _ X _ _-_-120
power bus. Frame Mounted. switch bus
With horizontal bus 2100-GKC_ X _ _ -_ 2100-GJC_ X _ _ -_
With circuit
breaker Without horizontal
2100-GKC_ X _ _-_-120 2100-GJC_ X _ _-_-120
bus
For 2100-E catalog numbers
• Select unit depth from table below (e.g., 2100-EKC1).
• Select unit width from table below (e.g., 2100-EKC1X1).
• Select mounting plate depth from table below (e.g., 2100-EKC1X1D).
For 2100-F catalog numbers
• Select fuse clip voltage from table below (e.g., 2100-FKC).
9 • Select unit depth from table below (e.g., 2100-FKC1).
• Select unit width from table below (e.g., 2100-FKC1X1).
• Select mounting plate depth from table below (e.g., 2100-FXC1X1D).
• Select disconnect rating and fuse clip from table on page 100 (e.g., 2100-FKC1X1D-24J).
For 2100-G catalog numbers
• Select unit depth from table below (e.g., 2100-GKC1).
• Select unit width from table below (e.g., 2100-GKC1X1).
• Select mounting plate depth from table below (e.g., 2100-GKC1X1D).
• Select trip current and circuit breaker option from tables on page 100 (e.g., 2100-GKC1X1D-32CB).
[2] 20” wide sections can be grouped up to 3 sections in a shipping block. 25” and wider sections are in separate shipping blocks. Sections without horizontal bus must be located
on the end of the MCC lineup, in a separate shipping block.
Voltage Code 121 Unit Depth 122
Fuse Clip Code Unit Depth Code
Voltage (Inches)
12 250 A 15 1
600 C 20 2
Unit Width 123
13
Width (Inches) Code Depth
20 1
25 2
30 3 15
35 4
40 [1] 5
20 1
25 2
30 3 20
35 4
40 [1] 5
[1] Only available with 2100-E. 40” wide section is a two-door section with a 3-point
latch. 40” wide cannot have horizontal power bus.
17 Mounting Plate Depth 124
Mounting Plate Depth (Inches) Code
14 [1],[2]
18 B
19 C [3]
8.5 D [4]
15 [2] For 15” deep sections without horizontal bus or 20” deep sections with or without
horizontal bus.
20 [3] Only available with 20” deep section without horizontal bus.
[4] Not available with 40” wide mounting plate.
Disconnect Rating and Fuse Clip 125
Disconnect Rating Short Circuit Fuse Clip 2

Fuse Clip Class withstand Rating
and Fuse Clip Size Designator
through 600V
J 100kA 24J 3
30 R 100kA 24R
H 10kA 24
J 100kA 25J
60 R 100kA 25R
H 10kA 25
J 100kA 26J
100 R 100kA 26R
H 10kA 26
J 100kA 27J
200 R 100kA 27R
H 10kA 27
J 100kA 28J
400 R 100kA 28R
H 10kA 28
Trip Current 126 9
Trip Current Trip Current Trip Current
Number Number Number
(Amperes) (Amperes) (Amperes)
15 30 80 38 200 44
20 31 90 39 225 45
30 32 100 40 250 46
40 34 125 41 300 48
50 35 150 42 350 49
60 36 175 43 400 50
70 37
Circuit Breaker Option * 127 12

Standard Interrupting Medium Interrupting Capacity
Rating Medium Interrupting Capacity High Interrupting Capacity
Capacity w/ Current Limiter
(Amperes)
Suffix Frame Suffix Frame Suffix Frame Suffix Frame 13
175-225 CT JD3D — — — — CM JD6D
250-400 CT K3D — — — — CM K6D
17
18
15
20
* Refer to page 234 for circuit breaker interrupting capacity ratings.
Blank Unit Doors 128
2 Catalog Number
Description Space Factor
NEMA Type 1 and Program
NEMA Type 12
3 Type 1 w/ gasket
0.5 2100-BK05 2100-BJ05
1.0 2100-BK10 2100-BJ10
1.5 2100-BK15 2100-BJ15
Covers the unused unit space (includes unit 2.0 2100-BK20 2100-BJ20
Blank Unit Door SC
support pan) 2.5 2100-BK25 2100-BJ25
3.0 2100-BK30 2100-BJ30
3.5 2100-BK35 2100-BJ35
4.0 2100-BK40 2100-BJ40
Field-Mounted Equipment Units 129
Catalog Number
Description Space Factor
NEMA Type 1 and Program
NEMA Type 12
Type 1 w/ gasket
0.5 [2] 2100-NK05 2100-NJ05
1.0 2100-NK10 2100-NJ10
9 For field installed equipment and 8.625” working 1.5 2100-NK15 2100-NJ15
depth. No plug-in stabs. 2.0 2100-NK20 2100-NJ20
Empty Unit Insert [1] Inserts come with unit support pan and door.
Inserts are NOT UL listed and are NOT CSA 2.5 2100-NK25 2100-NJ25
certified. 3.0 2100-NK30 2100-NJ30
3.5 2100-NK35 2100-NJ35
4.0 2100-NK40 2100-NJ40
For field installed equipment, 8.625” working 1.5 2100D-CK_-__ 2100D-CJ_-__
depth. Includes fusible disconnect and plug-in 2.0 2100D-DK_-__ 2100D-DJ_-__
SC
stabs.[5] 2.5 2100D-EK_-__ 2100D-EJ_-__
Inserts come with unit support pan and door.
Adding equipment to this unit insert may require 3.0 2100D-FK_-__ 2100D-FJ_-__
12 field evaluation by UL/CSA in order to retain 3.5 2100D-GK_-__ 2100D-GJ_-__
Empty Unit Insert with listing/certification. 4.0 2100D-HK_-__ 2100D-HJ_-__
Disconnecting Means
1.5 2100M-CKC-__ 2100M-CJC-__
13 [1],[3],[4] For field installed equipment, 8.625” working
depth. Includes inverse time (thermal magnetic) 2.0 2100M-DKC-__ 2100M-DJC-__
circuit breaker and plug-in stabs.[6] 2.5 2100M-EKC-__ 2100M-EJC-__
Inserts come with unit support pan and door.
Adding equipment to this unit insert may require 3.0 2100M-FKC-__ 2100M-FJC-__
field evaluation by UL/CSA in order to retain 3.5 2100M-GKC-__ 2100M-GJC-__
listing/certification. 4.0 2100M-HKC-__ 2100M-HJC-__
[1] See Options, Modifications, and Accessories, pages 123, for terminal block options.
[2] Terminal block options (-800, -801, -802, -803, -804) are not available on 2100-NK05 or 2100-NJ05.
[3] These units do not meet service entrance requirements. Not intended to be used as feeder circuits.
[4] See Appendix for interrupting capacity ratings.
• Select the voltage code from table on page 103 (e.g., 2100D-CKC).
• Select the fuse clip designator from table on page 103 (e.g., 2100D-CKC-24J).
• If power fuse will be selected, select from page 208 (e.g., 2100D-CKC-24J-604G).
• Select the trip current from table on page 103 (e.g., 2100M-CKC-30).
• Select the circuit breaker from table on page 103 (e.g., 2100M-CKC-30CB).
17
18
15
20
Tables for Configuring Bulletin 2100D and 2100M Unit Catalog Numbers
Voltage Code 130 2
Fuse Clip Voltage Voltage Code
250 A
600 C
3
Fuse Clip Designator * 131
Fuse Clip Short Circuit Fuse Clip

Rating Fuse Clip Class withstand Rating Designator
(Amperes) through 600V
J 100kA 24J
R 100kA 24R
30
H 10kA 24
CC 100kA 24C
J 100kA 25J
60 R 100kA 25R
H 10kA 25
J 100kA 26J
100 R 100kA 26R
H 10kA 26
J 100kA 27J 9
200 [1] R 100kA 27R
H 10kA 27
[1] Not available in 1.5 space factors.
Trip Current 132
Trip Current Number Trip Current Number
(Amperes) (Amperes)
15 30 90 39
20 31 100 40
30 32 125 41
40 34 150 42 12
50 35 175 43
60 36 200 44
70 37 225 45 13
80 38 — —
Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Circuit Breaker Option †,‡ 133

Standard Interrupting Medium Interrupting Capacity
Rating Medium Interrupting Capacity High Interrupting Capacity
Capacity w/ Current Limiter
(Amperes)
175-225 CT JD3D — — — — CM JD6D
17
18
15
20
* Refer to publication 2100-TD003x-EN-P, CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers Power Fuses.

† Refer to page 234 for circuit breaker interrupting capacity ratings.
‡ Refer to publication 2100-TD002x-EN-P, CENTERLINE MCCs Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers.
Miscellaneous DeviceNet Units 134
Catalog Number
2 Space Wiring Type A Only—Class I Delivery
Description
Factor NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 Program
NEMA Type 12
w/ gasket
3 DeviceNet Power Supply Unit Without disconnection means, plug-in stabs or control circuit 0.5 2100-DPS8KXWD 2100-DPS8JXWD
(110-120VAC input and 8.0A transformer. Requires separate 110-120VAC source.
24VDC output) [1] Includes disconnect, fuses and 350VA control circuit
This power supply is to be used transformer to provide power to power supply
1.0 2100-DPS8K_[3] 2100-DPS8J_[3]
with 8.0A Class I Cable only.
Refer to DNET-UM072x-EN-P,
DeviceNet Cable System Includes circuit breaker, fuses and 350VA control circuit
transformer to provide power to power supply 1.0 [4] 2100-DPS8K_-30_[6] 2100-DPS8J_-30_[6]
Planning and Installation
Manual.[2]
Redundant DeviceNet Power Without disconnection means, plug-in stabs or control circuit
transformer. Requires separate 110-120VAC source. 1.0 2100-DPS8KXWD-767C 2100-DPS8JXWD-767C
Supply Unit
(110-120VAC input and 8.0A, Includes disconnect, fuses and 750VA control circuit
24VDC output). Two power transformer to provide power to power supply 1.5 2100-DPS8K_-767C[3] 2100-DPS8J_-767C[3]
supplies providing back-up for Includes circuit breaker, fuses and 750VA control circuit
DeviceNet system.[1],[5] transformer to provide power to power supply 1.5 2100-DPS8K_-30_-767C[6] 2100-DPS8J_-30_-767C[6]
Without disconnecting means, plug-in stabs, or control
circuit transformer. Requires separate 110-120VAC source.
0.5 2100-C2DKXWD 2100-C2DJXWD
Bulletin 1788 ControlNet to Viewing window in door to provide visual verification of
DeviceNet linking device used network status, etc. SC
to interface a DeviceNet With disconnect, fuses, and 80VA control circuit transformer.
network to a ControlNet Viewing window in door to provide visual verification of 1.0 2100-C2DK_ [3] 2100-C2DJ_ [3]
9 network without the need for a network status, etc.
PLC chassis [7],[8] With circuit breaker, fuses, and 80VA control circuit
transformer. Viewing window in door to provide visual 1.0 2100-C2DK_-30_ [6] 2100-C2DJ_-30_ [6]
verification of network status, etc.
Without disconnecting means, plug-in stabs or control
transformer. Requires separate 110-120VAC source. Viewing 0.5 2100-E2DKXWD 2100-E2DJXWD
window in door to provide visual verification of network
Bulletin 1788 Ethernet to status, etc.
DeviceNet linking device. Used
to connect an Ethernet network With fusible disconnect and 80VA control transformer.
to a DeviceNet network without Viewing window in door to provide visual verification of 1.0 2100-E2DK_[3] 2100-E2DJ_[3]
network status, etc.
the need for a PLC chassis.[7],[9]
With circuit breaker and 80VA control transformer. Viewing
window in door to provide visual verification of network 1.0 2100-E2DK_-30_[6] 2100-E2DJ_-30_[6]
status, etc.
12 External DeviceNet Connector
Unit with remotely powered
Door mounted external DeviceNet connection and 120VAC
receptacle for connection of computer to DeviceNet without 0.5 2100-DCK05XWD 2100-DCJ05XWD
120VAC receptacle having to open doors.
[1] Includes buffer module which provides for minimum 500ms ride-through at full-load. Power supply must be located within one section of center for MCCs with eight or more
13 sections.
[2] See page 123 for optional external DeviceNet connector with 120VAC receptable (option 767A).
DeviceNet power supply requires a 95-132VAC 50/60 Hz power source that provides sinusoidal waveform. Use of non-sinusoidal power sources, including some UPSs, could
damage the DeviceNet power supply.
[3] The catalog numbers listed are not complete. Short circuit withstand rating is 100kA. Select the voltage code from the Voltage Code Table below (e.g., 2100-DPS8KB).
[4] Requires 1.5 space factor when circuit breaker suffix CD is specified.
[5] Optional DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (Option -11DSA3) is available. Select from page 114.
• Select the voltage code from the Voltage Code Table below (e.g., 2100-DPS8KB).
• Select the circuit breaker from the Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Circuit Breaker Option Table below (e.g., 2100-DPS8KB-30CB).
[7] ControlNet to DeviceNet linking device units are supplied with a 1794 Flex I/O power supply to provide the 24VDC source for the unit so the linking device unit does not burden
the DeviceNet power supply with its 1.0A load.
[8] Refer to publication CNET-IN002x-EN-P, ControlNet Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide, and 1770-IN041x-EN-P, Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines,
for information on installing and routing ControlNet Cable.
[9] Refer to publication ENET-IN001x-EN-P, Ethernet Planning Guide, and 1770-IN041x-EN-P, Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, for information on installing
and routing ethernet cable.
Voltage Code 135 Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Circuit Breaker
Option[1] 136
17
Fuse Clip Voltage Voltage Code Suffix Frame Type Circuit Breaker Description
Medium Interrupting Capacity with
220-230 P CD I3C-CL
18 Current Limiter
240 A CB I3C Medium Interrupting Capacity
380 N CM I6C High Interrupting Capacity
400 KN
415 I
15 480 B
20 600 C
[1] Refer to Appendix for circuit breaker interrupting capacity ratings.
Other Miscellaneous Units 137
Catalog Number
2
Space Delivery
Description Factor NEMA Type 1 and Type Program
NEMA Type 12
1 w/ gasket 3
44 TB 2100-CK10T-0044CA 2100-CJ10T-0044CA
66 TB 2100-CK10T-0066CA 2100-CJ10T-0066CA
Top- mounted
88 TB 2100-CK10T-0088CA 2100-CJ10T-0088CA
110 TB 2100-CK10T-0110CA 2100-CJ10T-0110CA
1.0
44 TB 2100-CK10B-0044CA 2100-CJ10B-0044CA
66 TB 2100-CK10B-0066CA 2100-CJ10B-0066CA
Bottom- mounted
88 TB 2100-CK10B-0088CA 2100-CJ10B-0088CA
NEMA Type “C” Terminal Includes Bulletin 110 TB 2100-CK10B-0110CA 2100-CJ10B-0110CA
Board Unit (supplied 1492-CA1 terminal SC
unwired) blocks 76 TB 2100-CK15T-0076CA 2100-CJ15T-0076CA
114 TB 2100-CK15T-0114CA 2100-CJ15T-0114CA
Top- mounted
152 TB 2100-CK15T-0152CA 2100-CJ15T-0152CA
190 TB 2100-CK15T-0190CA 2100-CJ15T-0190CA
1.5
76 TB 2100-CK15B-0076CA 2100-CJ15B-0076CA
114 TB 2100-CK15B-0114CA 2100-CJ15B-0114CA
Bottom- mounted
152 TB 2100-CK15B-0152CA 2100-CJ15B-0152CA
190 TB 2100-CK15B-0190CA 2100-CJ15B-0190CA 9
Requires separate 120V AC source. Must be installed in
bottom of section. Provides one (1) form C contact
closure. The use of bottom closing plates (see page 24)
Smoke Detector Unit is recommended for most efficient operation. For further
(not available with 0.5 2100-SD1 2100-SD1 PE
information on smoke detector unit, see publication
T-handle latches) 2100-IN046x-EN-P.
Unit is UL listed but is NOT CSA certified.

0.25” x 2” x 12” copper tin plated bus plate with #6-250 0.5 2100-BKNPC-05SF 2100-BJNPC-05SF SC
Neutral Connection Plate kcmil lug (280A capacity)
Unit [1] 0.25” x 2” x 12” copper silver plated bus plate with 0.5 2100-BKNPS-05SF 2100-BJNPS-05SF PE
#6-250 kcmil lug (280A capacity) 12
480V L-L, 277V L-G [2] 2100-SPKB-1 2100-SPJB-1 SC
600V L-L, 346V L-G [3] 2100-SPKC-1 2100-SPJC-1
Surge Protective Device
WYE power
systems with a [3]
13
208V L-L, 120V L-G 2100-SPKH-1 2100-SPJH-1
Unit (formerly known as solidly grounded
TVSS) neutral 380V L-L, 220V L-G [3] 2100-SPKN-1 2100-SPJN-1
The SPD consists of an IslaGuard 3-wire
surge suppression system by 400V L-L, 230V L-G [3] 2100-SPKKN-1 2100-SPJKN-1
Control Concepts, with circuitry PE
provided to monitor the status of 415V L-L, 240V L-G [3] 2100-SPKI-1 2100-SPJI-1
all protection modes. Unit
consists of a fused disconnect WYE power
feeding a surge protective device systems with a 0.5
(SPD) rated to provide a minimum solidly grounded 480V L-L, 277V L-G, 277V L-N 2100-SPKB-3 2100-SPJB-3
of 160kA per phase of surge neutral,
current protection. The unit is
provided with one green light as a 4-wire
status indicator. (Response time is 480V 2100-SPKB-2 2100-SPJB-2 SC
0.5nS) SPD meets UL 1449 WYE power
requirements. Refer to publication systems with 600V 2100-SPKC-2 2100-SPJC-2
2100-TD023x-EN-P, Surge impedence
Protective Device Unit for more 240V 2100-SPKA-2 2100-SPJA-2
information. grounded neutral
or 3 Phase, 3 Wire 380V 2100-SPKN-2 2100-SPJN-2 PE
Delta Power 400V 2100-SPKKN-2 2100-SPJKN-2 17
Systems 415V 2100-SPKI-2 2100-SPJI-2
Use this catalog number to select a corner section with
Corner Section an MCC lineup. See page 24 for corner section 6.0 2100-CS60 2100-CS60 SC-II 18
description. Available as lug compartment, see page 64.
[1] Neutral Connection Plate 0.5 SF Unit can only be used in sections with vertical wireway. Not for use in sections with full width frame mounted units, including all mains.When
horizontal neutral bus is selected the cable connection from the neutral connection plate to the horizontal neutral plate is NOT provided.
[2] For systems with neutral bus (4-wire systems), use 2100-SP_B-3
[3] For systems with neutral bus (4-wire systems), contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office.
15
20
12
13
17
18
15
20
106
Factory-Installed Options, Modifications,
Accessories for Contactors and Starters, Metering, 2
Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, 3
Transformer and Miscellaneous Units
Multiple option numbers are separated by a dash and added to the base catalog number in ascending order. 4
138
TS1W TSR1W TSR1W
FVC FVR FVNR TS2W TSR2W TSR2W 5
2126E 2126J Option Delivery
Option Description
2102L 2106 2112 2122 2127E 2127J Number Program
2103L 2107 2113 2123 2126F 2126K 6
2127F 2127K
START - STOP [4] 9
FORWARD - REVERSE - STOP 9 -1 7
HIGH - LOW - STOP 9
Push Buttons
[1],[2],[3] OFF 9
-1B 8
STOP 9 9 9 9 9
ON - OFF [4] 9
FAST - SLOW - STOP 9
-1E 9
Push Buttons and HAND-ON, HAND-OFF, HAND-OFF-AUTO 9
Selector Switch -1F [5]
[1],[2] HAND-START, HAND-STOP, HAND-OFF-AUTO 9
10
Blank 9 9 9 9 9 9 -2
1 hole—for one pilot device 9 9 9 9 9 9 -2A
Control Station 2 holes—for two pilot devices 9 9 9 9 9 9 SC
-2B
Housing [6] 11
3 holes—for three pilot devices 9 9 9 9 9 9 -2C
4 holes—for four pilot devices 9 9 -2D [7]
HAND - OFF - AUTO 9 9
FORWARD - OFF - REVERSE 9 [3] 12
Selector Switch HIGH - OFF - LOW 9[3] -3
[1],[2]
FORWARD - OFF - REVERSE and HIGH - LOW 9
(800H) 13
HIGH - LOW - OFF - REVERSE 9
(maximum one switch
per unit) FAST - OFF - SLOW 9
OFF - ON 9 9
-3E[3]
FORWARD - OFF - REVERSE and FAST - SLOW 9 14
FAST - SLOW - OFF - REVERSE 9
[1] Push buttons may not be used in conjunction with selector switches, except with option 1F. Generally, when more than three devices are selected, Bulletin 800F pilot devices are
supplied. When three or less devices are selected, Bulletin 800T pilot devices are supplied except selector switches are Bulletin 800H devices. On 0.5 space factor units, Bulletin 15
800F pilot devices are supplied.
[2] Maximum of four (4) pilot devices on 0.5 space factor units and maximum of three (3) pilot devices on dual mounted units. Legend plates are available in French or Spanish at no
additional cost by adding 860F or 860S to catalog string number.
[3] Mutually exclusive with DeviceNet communication modules, DeviceNet starter auxiliary (11DSA2, 11DSA3) and E3 solid-state overloads (7FEC_ _) and E1 Plus solid state
overload relay with DeviceNet communication module (7FEE_D).
[4] Two (2) Bulletin 800F pilot lights will be supplied when two (2) pilot lights are selected in conjunction with push buttons, separate or transformer control only. Only one (1) 800T 16
pilot light can be supplied on 2103L or 2113 dual units when push buttons are also selected.
[5] When option 1F is used with 11DSA_, 7FEE_D, or 7FEC_, option 90 (1 N.O. auxiliary contact) is required (NOTE: required option code for Bulletin 2112 and 2113 vacuum contactor
starter units is 900111).
[6] Available only on units without pilot devices. The control station on the dual 2103L or dual 2113 is a flat mounting plate, flush mounted to the door of the unit. Holes are for
Bulletin 800T devices when unit is 1.0 space factor and larger. Holes are for Bulletin 800F pilot devices when unit is 0.5 space factor.
17
[7] Not available for 1.0 space factor and larger units.

2 Multiple option numbers are separated by a dash and added to the base catalog number in ascending order.
Pilot Lights (Non-Push-To-Test)
• Bulletin 800T pilot lights are transformer type, Bulletin 800F pilot lights are full-voltage type.
3 • When three or less devices are selected, pilot devices supplied are Bulletin 800T (800H for selector switches).
• When more than three devices are selected, pilot devices supplied are Bulletin 800F.
• On 0.5 space factor units, pilot devices supplied are Bulletin 800F, maximum of four (4) pilot devices may be selected.
4 • On dual mounted units, pilot devices supplied are Bulletin 800T (800H for selector switches), maximum of three (3)
pilot devices may be selected.
• When selected, option 85T (Elapsed Time Meter) occupies the space of one Bulletin 800T (or 800H) pilot device or the
5 space of two Bulletin 800F pilot devices, reducing the number of other devices which may be selected.
• Legend plates are available in French or Spanish at no additional cost by adding 860F or 860S to catalog string number.
139
TS1W TSR1W TSR1W Incandescent L.E.D.

FVC FVR FVNR TS2W TSR2W TSR2W Lamps[1] Lamps[2]
2126E 2126J Delivery
Description
2102L 2106 2112 2122 2127E 2127J Option Option Program
2103L 2107 2113 2123 2126F 2126K Number[2] Number[2]
2127F 2127K
ON[3] 9 -4_ -4L_
9 ON -OFF[5],[6] 9 -4_ _ -4L_ _
FORWARD - REVERSE[7] 9 -4_ _ -4L_ _
FORWARD - REVERSE - OFF[8] 9 -4_ _ _ -4L_ _ _
10
ON[9] 9 -4_ -4L_
ON -OFF[6],[10] 9 -4_ _ -4L_ _
11 HIGH - LOW[11] 9 -4_ _ -4L_ _

FAST - SLOW[11] 9 -4E_ _ -4EL_ _ SC[4]
HIGH - LOW - OFF[12] 9 -4_ _ _ -4L_ _ _
FAST - SLOW - OFF[12] 9 -4E_ _ _ -4EL_ _ _
12
HIGH - LOW - FORWARD - REVERSE 9 9 -4_ _ _ _ --
FAST - SLOW - FORWARD - REVERSE 9 9 -4E_ _ _ _ --
13 HIGH - LOW - FORWARD - REVERSE - OFF[13] 9 9 -4_ _ _ _ _ --
FAST - SLOW - FORWARD - REVERSE - OFF[13] 9 9 -4E_ _ _ _ _ --
OVERLOAD[14] 9 9 [6] 9 9 9 -4T_ -4TL_
14 [1] Bulletin 800F incandescent lamps are only available for 110-120VAC separate or transformer control.
[2] Option numbers are not complete, select pilot light lens color, add letter(s) to the option number (A = amber, B = blue, C = clear, G = green, R = red, W = white) (e.g., 4RG is a red ON
and green OFF pilot light).
Clear and white are not available for Bulletin 800T LED type pilot lights.
15 White is not available on Bulletin 800F incandescent pilot lights.
Clear is not available on Bulletin 800F LED pilot lights.
[3] When used with option 1F or 11DSA_, option 90 (N.O. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
When used with option 1F and 11DSA3, option 900 (2 N.O. auxiliary contacts) must be selected.
[4] SC delivery for 110-120V control voltage. PE delivery for 220-240V control voltage.
Bulletin 800F pilot lights cannot be used with common (line voltage) control.
16 [5] Option 91 (1 N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
When used with option 1F or 11DSA_, option 901 (1 N.O. and 1 N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
When used with option 1F and 11DSA3, option 9001 (2 N.O. and 1 N.C. auxiliary contacts) must be selected.
[6] When ON and OFF or ON and OVERLOAD pilot lights are selected in conjunction with push buttons, and control type is separate control or transformer control, the pilot lights will be
Bulletin 800F pilot lights and the push buttons will be Bulletin 800T.
17 [7] When used with option 11DSA_ or 7FEC_, option 90 (1 N.O. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
[8] Option 91 (1 N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected. When used with option 11DSA_ or 7FEC_, option 901 (1 N.O. and 1 N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
[9] When used with option 1F, 11DSA_, 7FEE_D, or 7FEC_, option 90 (N.O. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
(NOTE: required option code for Bulletin 2112 and 2113 vacuum contactor starter units is 900111.)
When used with option 1F and 11DSA3, 7FEE_D, or 7FEC_, option 900 (2 N.O. auxiliary contacts) must be selected.
[10] Option 91 (1 N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
When used with option 1F, 11DSA_, 7FEE_D, or 7FEC_, option 901 (1 N.O. and 1 N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
When used with option 1F and 11DSA3, 7FEE_D, or 7FEC_, option 9001 (2 N.O. and 1 N.C. auxiliary contacts) must be selected.
[11] When used with option 11DSA_ or 7FEE_DEE_D, option -90 (1 N.O. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
When used with option 11DSA_ or 7FEE_DEE_D, option -901 (1 N.O. and 1 N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
[14] When a eutectic alloy overload relay is used, option 9 (N.O. overload relay auxiliary contact) must be selected. Not available with option 11DSA3, 7FEE_D, or 7FEC_.

Pilot Lights (Push-To-Test)
• When selected, option 85T (Elapsed Time Meter) occupies the space of one Bulletin 800T (or 800H) pilot device or the
space of two Bulletin 800F pilot devices, reducing the number of other devices which may be selected. 3
• Bulletin 800T pilot lights are transformer type, Bulletin 800F pilot lights are full-voltage type.
• When three or less devices are selected, pilot devices supplied are Bulletin 800T (800H for selector switches).
• When more than three devices are selected, pilot devices supplied are Bulletin 800F. 4
• On 0.5 space factor units, pilot devices supplied are Bulletin 800F, maximum of four (4) pilot devices may be selected.
• On dual mounted units, pilot devices supplied are Bulletin 800T (800H for selector switches), maximum of three (3) pilot
devices may be selected. 5
• Legend plates are available in French or Spanish at no additional cost by adding 860F or 860S to catalog string number.
140
6
TS1W TSR1W TSR1W Incandescent L.E.D. Lamps
FVC FVR FVNR TS2W TSR2W TSR2W Lamps[1]
Description 2126E 2126J Delivery
Program
7
2102L 2106 2112 2122 2127E 2127J Option Option
2103L 2107 2113 2123 2126F 2126K Number[2] Number[2]
2127F 2127K
8
ON[3] 9 -5_ -5L_
ON -OFF[5],[6] 9 -5_ _ -5L_ _
FORWARD - REVERSE [7] 9 -5_ _ -5L_ _ 9
FORWARD - REVERSE - OFF[8] 9 -5_ _ _ -5L_ _ _
ON[9] 9 -5_ -5L_
ON -OFF[6],[10] 9 -5_ _ -5L_ _ 10
HIGH - LOW [11] 9 -5_ _ -5L_ _
FAST - SLOW[11] 9 -5E_ _ -5EL_ _ SC[4]
HIGH - LOW - OFF[12] 9 -5_ _ _ -5L_ _ _ 11
FAST - SLOW - OFF [12] 9 -5E_ _ _ -5EL_ _ _
HIGH - LOW - FORWARD - REVERSE 9 9 -5_ _ _ _ --
FAST - SLOW - FORWARD - REVERSE 9 9 -5E_ _ _ _ --
HIGH - LOW - FORWARD - REVERSE - OFF[13] 9 9 -5_ _ _ _ _ -- 12
FAST - SLOW - FORWARD - REVERSE - OFF[13] 9 9 -5E_ _ _ _ _ --
OVERLOAD[14] 9 9[3] 9 9 9 -5T_ -5TL_ 13
[1] Bulletin 800F incandescent lamps are only available for 110-120VAC separate or transformer control.
[2] Option numbers are not complete, select pilot light lens color, add letter(s) to the option number (A = amber, B = blue, C = clear, G = green, R = red, W = white) (e.g., 4RG is a red ON and
green OFF pilot light).
Clear and white are not available for Bulletin 800T LED type pilot lights.
White is not available on Bulletin 800F incandescent pilot lights. 14
Clear is not available on Bulletin 800F LED pilot lights.
[3] When used with option 1F or 11DSA_, option 90 (N.O. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
When used with option 1F and 11DSA3, option 900 (2 N.O. auxiliary contacts) must be selected.
[4] SC delivery for 110-120V control voltage. PE delivery for 220-240V control voltage. 15
Bulletin 800F pilot lights cannot be used with common (line voltage) control.
When used with option 1F or 11DSA_, option 901 (1 N.O. and 1 N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
When used with option 1F and 11DSA3, option 9001 (2 N.O. and 1 N.C. auxiliary contacts) must be selected.
[6] When ON and OFF or ON and OVERLOAD pilot lights are selected in conjunction with push buttons, and control type is separate control or transformer control, the pilot lights will be
Bulletin 800F pilot lights and the push buttons will be Bulletin 800T. 16
[7] When used with option 11DSA_ or 7FEC_, option 90 (1 N.O. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
When used with option 11DSA_ or 7FEC_, option 901 (1 N.O. and 1 N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
[9] When used with option 1F, 11DSA_, 7FEE_D, or 7FEC_, option 90 (N.O. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
(NOTE: required option code for Bulletin 2112 and 2113 vacuum contactor starter units is 900111.) 17
When used with option 1F and 11DSA3, 7FEE_D, or 7FEC_, option 900 (2 N.O. auxiliary contacts) must be selected.
When used with option 1F, 11DSA_, 7FEE_D, or 7FEC_, option 901 (1 N.O. and 1 N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
When used with option 1F and 11DSA3, 7FEE_D, or 7FEC_, option 9001 (2 N.O. and 1 N.C. auxiliary contacts) must be selected.
[11] When used with option 11DSA_ or 7FEE_DEE_D, option -90 (1 N.O. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
When used with option 11DSA_ or 7FEE_DEE_D, option -901 (1 N.O. and 1 N.C. auxiliary contact) must be selected.
[14] When a eutectic alloy overload relay is used, option 9 (N.O. overload relay auxiliary contact) must be selected.
Not available with option 11DSA3, 7FEE_D, or 7FEC_.

141
TS1W TSR1W
3 FVC FVR FVNR TS2W TSR2W
Option Size or Size or Delivery
Option Description 2102L 2106 2112 2122 2126
Number Rating Rating Program
2103L 2107 2113 2123 2127
4
VA VA VA VA VA
30A 80 [2] 1 80 80 [2] 80 130
5 60A 80 2 80 80 80 200
100A 200 3 200 200 200 —
200A 250 4 250 250 250 —
Standard
-6P [1] capacity with 300A 350 5 350 350 350 —
primary fusing — — 6 — 80 — —
200A
Control Circuit — — and — 250 — —
Transformer 400A
(with — — 600A — 500 — —
SC
grounded and 30A 130 1 130 130 130 200
fused
secondary) 60A 130 2 130 130 130 250
9 100A 250 3 250 250 250 —
200A 350 4 350 350 350 —
100 watt extra capacity with 300A 500 5 500 500 500 —
-6XP [3],[1] primary fusing
10 — — 6 — 130 — —
200A
— — and — 350 — —
400A
11 — — 600A — 750 — —
[1] When a control circuit transformer is selected on dual 2103L and 2113 units, one auxiliary contact mounting position (P3) is given up for the transformer secondary fuse.
[2] For 0.5 space factor 2102L, 2103L, 2112 and 2113, standard capacity VA rating is 75VA.
[3] Not available on 0.5 space factor units.
12
13
14
15
16
17

142
TS1W TSR1W TSR1W

Option Option Description 2126E 2126J Delivery
Number 2102L 2106 2112 2122 2127E 2127J Program
2103L 2107 2113 2123 2126F 2126K 4
2127F 2127K
9 9
NEMA Size 1, 2 9dual[4], 5
[5] 9[5] 9[5] 9[5]
Selectable trip class (10, 15, 20, 30)
selectable Auto/Manual-Auto reset 9 9
E1 Plus Electronic
-7FEE_ [3] electronic overload relay for NEMA
NEMA Size 3
9[5]
6
Overload Relay [1],[2] starters, Size 1-6.
NEMA Size 4 9[6] 9[7]
NEMA Size 5 9 9 7
NEMA Size 6 9
Vacuum Contactor Starters 200A, 400A, 600A 9
9 8
NEMA Size 1, 2 9dual[4],
Selectable to class (10, 15, 20, 30) [5] 9[5]
E1 Plus Electronic
selectable Auto/Manual-Auto reset
electronic overload relay NEMA starters, NEMA Size 3 9 9
Overload Relay with [3] Size 1-6. Includes DeviceNet module with [5]
DeviceNet module -7FEE_D 9
[1],[2],[8]
(2) 24VDC inputs and (1) 110-240VAC
output. NEMA Size 4 9[7]
NEMA Size 5 9 10
NEMA Size 6 9
Vacuum Contactor Starters 200A, 400A, 600A 9 SC
NEMA Size 1, 2 9 9 [11]
Selectable to class (10, 15, 20, 30)
selectable Auto/Manual-Auto reset
11
NEMA Size 3 9[12] 9[12]
E1 Plus Electronic electronic overload relay for NEMA
Overload Relay with starters, Size 1-3. Includes Ground Fault NEMA Size 4 9 [13] 9[14]
Ground Fault Protection -7FEE_G [3] Protection Module with integral Jam
Protection and external Ground Fault NEMA Size 5 9 9[15]
Module & Jam
Protection [1],[2],[9],[10]
Sensor. NEMA Size 6 9 9[16] 12
200A 9
Vacuum Contactor Starters
400A, 600A 9
9 9[11]
13
NEMA Size 1, 2 9dual[4],
[5] 9[5] 9[5] 9[5]
Selectable trip class (10, 15, 20, 30)
selectable Auto/Manual-Auto reset 9 9
E1 Plus with Jam
Protection
electronic overload relay for NEMA NEMA Size 3 14
7FEE_J [3] starters, size 1-6 with Jam Protection 9[5]
Module [1],[2],[10] Module NEMA Size 4 9[6] 9[7]
NEMA Size 5 9 9 15
NEMA Size 6 9
Vacuum Contactor Starters 200A, 400A, 600A 9
[1] Options -7FEE_, 7FEE_D, 7FEE_G and 7FEE_J are supplied with (1) N.O. and (1) N.C. auxiliary contact.
[2] Options -7FEE_, 7FEE_D, 7FEE_G and 7FEE_J are mutually exclusive with each other and E3 overload relay options.
[3] Option number is not complete:
16
Select overload relay code from appropriate table on 112 and add to option number (e.g., 7FEEB).
[4] Not available on NEMA Size 2 dual units.
[5] For two-speed starter and dual mounted starter units, there are two overload option codes required
(e.g., 7FEEEEEB, with DeviceNet module 7FEEEDEEBD, with Jam Protection module 7FEEEJEEBJ). 17
For two-speed applications, the first code denotes the high speed overload relay and the second code denotes the low speed overload relay.
For dual unit applications, the first code denotes the left-side overload relay, the second code denotes the right-side overload relay.
[6] Bulletin 2106 NEMA Size 4 will be increased to 4.5 space factor.
[7] Bulletin 2112 NEMA 4 with Class J or HRCII-C fuses will be increased to 3.0 space factor. Bulletin 2113 Size 4 with circuit breaker option -CT or -CM requires 3.0 space factor.
[8] Mutually exclusive with 89_ relay and 87_auxiliary timer options. Not available with pushbuttons or selector switches, except 3 and 1F are allowed for Bulletin 2112 and 2113.
Separate or transformer control only. Not available with option 11DSA2 or 11DSA3.
[9] Not available on dual starter units or with option 85XA (current transformer), 85AA (ammeter) or 700TC_ (current transducer).
[10] Available for separate, transformer, or line-to-neutral control only; not available with common control.
[11] Not available on 0.5 space factor units with option 11DSA2 or 11DSA3.
[12] NEMA size 3, power terminal blocks must be supplied. Not available with Type A wiring or option 106 (omission of power terminal blocks).
[13] Bulletin 2107, NEMA Size 4 with circuit breaker suffix CT or CM will be increased to 4.5 space factor.
[14] Bulletin 2112, NEMA Size 4 will be increased to 3.5 space factor. Bulletin 2113, NEMA Size 4 with circuit breaker suffix CA will be increased to 2.5 space factors.
[15] Bulletin 2112, NEMA Size 5 with Class J fuse clips will be increased to 4.0 space factor.
[16] Not available for 200HP at 240V or 400HP at 480V.

2 Overload Relay Codes for E1 Plus, Option -7FEE_ ,-7FEE_D, -7FEE_G, or 7FEE_J 143
For Use with Overload Relay Code (Add to Option Number from 111
Full Load Current Range (Amperes)
NEMA Size [e.g., 7FEEB]) [1]
3 0.2 - 1.0 B
1.0 - 5.0 C
1[2]
4 3.2 - 16 D
5.4 - 27 E
2[3] 9 - 45 F
5
3 18 - 90 G
4 30 - 150 H
5 60 - 300 J
6 120 - 600 K
200A Vacuum Contactor Starter 40 - 200 L
[4] 60 - 300 J
400A Vacuum Contactor Starter
400A Vacuum Contactor Starter[4] 100 - 500 M
600A Vacuum Contactor Starter 120 - 600 K
[1] For two-speed starter and dual mounted starter units, there are two overload option codes required (e.g., 7FEEEEEB, with DeviceNet module 7FEEEDEEBD, with
9 Jam Protection module 7FEEEJEEBJ). For two-speed applications, the first code denotes the high speed overload relay and the second code denotes the low
speed overload relay. For dual mounted starter units, the first code denotes the overload relay for the left-hand starter, the second code denotes the overload
relay for the right-hand starter. If a DeviceNet module or Jam protection module is selected, it must be added to both overload relay codes and be the same
option, either DeviceNet or Jam protection for both codes.
[2] Not available on NEMA Size 1 dual units when option 7FEE_G (ground fault protection) is used.
10 [3] Not available on NEMA Size 2 dual units.
[4] 400A Vacuum Contactor Starters use code “J” except 125HP@208V, 125 - 150HP@240V, 250HP@380-415V, 250 - 300HP@480V, and 350 - 400HP@600V use
code “M”
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

Multiple option numbers are separated by a dash and 144
added to the base catalog number in ascending 2
order.
TS1W TSR1W TSR1W
Option 2126E 2126J Delivery
Option Description
2103L 2107 2113 2123 2126F 2126K
2127F 2127K
4
NEMA size 1 9[4]
E3 Electronic Overload
NEMA size 2 9[5] 5
Relay [1],[2] E3 Basic is provided with NEMA size 3 9
-7FEC1_ [3] two (2) 24VDC inputs and NEMA size 4 9[6]
one (1) 110-240VAC output.
For non-DeviceNet NEMA size 5 9 6
applications a 24VDC NEMA size 6 9
separate power source Vacuum Contactor Starters 9
is needed. A Bulletin SC
E3 Plus is provided with NEMA size 1 9 9[4]
193-DNCT, may be four (4) 24VDC inputs and 7
needed for -7FEC2_ [3] two (2) 110-240VAC NEMA size 2 9 9[5]
programming and outputs. NEMA size 3 9 9
monitoring. Refer to
publication, E3 Plus is provided with NEMA size 4 9[8] 9[6] 8
193-UM001x-EN-P. four (4) 24VDC inputs and NEMA size 5 9 9
7FEC3_[3],[7] two (2) 110-240VAC NEMA size 6 9
outputs. Vacuum Contactor Starters 9
9
[1] Outputs are rated NEMA B300 (3A @ 120VAC and 1.5A @ 240VAC). Not available with common (line voltage)control. Not available with Type A wiring. Not available on dual
2113, 0.5 space factor 2112 and 0.5 space factor 2113 units.
[2] Mutually exclusive with E1 Plus overload relays (options -7FEE_, 7FEE_D, 7FEE_G and 7FEE_J). Mutually exclusive with option 9 & 9A, 11DSA_, 18, 84A1, 85XA & 85AA, 87_,
89_, and 700TC_.
[3] Catalog numbers listed are not complete: 10
• Select overload relay code from table below and add to option number (e.g., 7FEC2B).
• For NEMA size 1-3 overload relays, if 120VAC inputs are required, place a “Y” configuration option in the catalog string number as in table below (e.g., 7FEC2BY).
• If applicable for NEMA size 4-6 and vacuum contactor starters, select an E3 overload relay configuration option from table below, add to option number (e.g., 7FEC3FY,
120VAC input points).
[4] NEMA size 1 2112/2113 1.0 space factor units are limited to 10 control terminal points and 3 power terminal points. When option 106 (eliminate power terminals) is used, up to 11
15 control terminal points are available. For 20 control terminal points, add 0.5 space factor.
[5] NEMA size 2 2112/2113 1.0 space factor units are limited to 10 control terminal points and 3 power terminal points. Option 106 (eliminate power terminals) is not available for
NEMA size 2 2112/2113 units. For 15 to 20 control terminal points, add 0.5 space factor.
[6] Bulletin 2112, NEMA Size 4, with Class J or HRCII-C fuses will be increased to 3.0 space factors. Bulletin 2113, NEMA Size 4, with circuit breaker suffix "CT" or "CM" will be
increased to 3.0 space factors.
[7] NEMA size 1-3 E3 Plus overload relays have ground fault sensor as standard. NEMA size 4-6 E3 Plus overload relays and vacuum contactor starters need to have the ground fault 12
configured to include a ground fault sensor. Refer to E3 overload relay configuration options table below.
[8] Bulletin 2106, NEMA Size 4 will be increased to 4.5 space factors.
13
Overload Relay Codes for E3 and E3 Plus, Option 7FEC_ 145 E3 Overload Relay Configuration Options 146
Overload Relay Code (Add to Overload Relay Code (Add to
For use with NEMA Full Load Current
Size Range (Amperes) Option Number [e.g., Description option number [e.g.,
7FEC1A]) 7FEC3FYG])
0.4-2.0 P 24VDC input points None 14
1-5 A 120VAC input points, available for 110-120VAC control
1 Y
3-15 B voltage only
5-25 C Ground fault. Includes Bulletin 193-CBCT3 or
G [1], [2] 15
193-CBCT4 ground fault sensor.
2 9-45 D
120VAC input points and ground fault (see description
3 18-90 E above) YG [1], [2]
4 28-140 F
5 60-302 H
[1] Only available for E3 Plus overload relays for NEMA Size 4, 5 and 6 and vacuum
contactor starters. 16
6 125-630 K [2] Bulletin 2112, NEMA Size 4 will be increased to 3.5 space factor.
200A Vacuum Contactor Bulletin 2113, NEMA Size 4 with circuit breaker suffix CA will be increased to 2.5
42 - 210 G space factors.
Starter
400A Vacuum Contactor
Bulletin 2112, NEMA Size 5 with Class J fuse clips will be increased to 4.0 space
factor.
17
60 - 302 H
Starter[1] Bulletin 2107, NEMA Size 4, with circuit breaker suffix "CT" or "CM" will be
400A Vacuum Contactor increased to 4.5 space factors.
84 - 420 M Bulletin 2112, NEMA Size 5, with Class J fuses will be increased to 4.0 space
Starter[1] factors.
600A Vacuum Contactor 125 - 630 K
Starter
[1] 400A Vacuum Contactor Starters use code “H” except 125HP@208V,
125 - 150HP@240V, 250HP@380-415V, 250 - 300HP@480V, and
350 - 400HP@600V use code “M”

147
TS1W TSR1W TSR1W Feeder/
3 FVC FVR FVNR
TS2W TSR2W TSR2W Main
Option Description
Number 2102L 2106 2112 2122 2127E 2127J 2192 Program
4 2103L 2107 2113 2123 2126F

2127F
2126K
2127K
2193
Type A 9 9
Wiring 9 9 9
5 Overload Relay -9 Normally Open
9 9
Auxiliary Contact Type B
(Eutectic Alloy) Wiring 9 9 9
Type A 9 9
(one contact per
Wiring 9 9 9
overload relay) [1] -9A Normally Closed
Type B 9 9 SC
Wiring 9 9 9
For use with contactors and starters to provide DeviceNet inputs 9
-11DSA2 and outputs. (4) 120V inputs and (2) 120V outputs. Available for 9 9 9 9 [4],[5],[6]
110V-120V control only.
DeviceNet Starter
Auxiliary (DSA) [2],[3] For use with contactors and starters to provide DeviceNet inputs
and outputs. (4) 24VDC inputs and (2) 240VAC (max), 30VDC (max) 9
-11DSA3 outputs. Available for 110V-120VAC or 220V-240VAC control 9 9 9 9 [5],[6]
voltage.
9 Adds 0.5 space factor unit space to Bulletin 2112 and 2113 size 1,
2 and 3 units.
Additional Unit
Space -15 Note: Bulletin 2112 and 2113, sizes 1 and 2, cannot be increased 9
from 1.5 to 2.0 space factors by selecting option 15, nor can size 1
10 increase from 0.5 to 1.0 space factor by using option 15.
Filters for door vents on NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 1 with Available on NEMA Type 1 and NEMA Type 1 with gasket Bulletins 2195,
Filters for Door Vents -16A
gasket Bulletin 2195, 2196 and 2197 units 2196 and 2197 only
9 9
11 On coil, one per contactor, for starters and contactors, not 9 9
-17 [8] available on vacuum type, selection of this option requires the
selection of -17R if an option relay (89__) is also selected. 9 9
Surge SC
Suppressor [7]
For units with interposing relays (89CB and 89CBL) and unwired 9 9
12 -17R
control relays (89CF and 89P), may only be used if option relay
(89__) is selected. Selection of this option requires selection of
9 9
option -17. Except when 89CBL or Common Control is selected. 9 9
O/L Contact on Moves overload trip contact from right (grounded) side of the
[9] 9 9 9
13 Left Side of Circuit -18 control circuit to left (power input) side of control circuit.
Omit Wiring -19 Omission of control wiring [10] 9 9 9 9 9 9
-21 One (1) control circuit fuse for separate control or line to neutral 9 9 9 9 9 9
Control Circuit control
Fuse
9 9 9 9 9 9
14 -22 Two (2) control circuit fuses for common control PE
[1] Options 9 and 9A are mutually exclusive and not available with optional overload relays (-7F_ _ _).
[2] Not available for dual 2103L or dual 2113 units. Not available for 0.5 space factor 2103L units. Not available for 0.5 space factor 2112 or 0.5 space factor 2113 units with E1 Plus with
ground fault/jam protection (option 7FEE_G) or E1 Plus with jam protection (option 7FEE_J). Not allowed for 0.5 space factor 2113 units with eutectic overload relay. Mutually
15 exclusive with 89_ relay and 87 timer options. Not available with push buttons or selector switches, except options 3 and 1F are allowed for Bulletin 2102L, 2103L, 2112 and 2113.
[3] DeviceNet options 11DSA2 and 11DSA3 are mutually exclusive. Not available with 7FEE_D. Not available for 2193F single or dual mounted when one or both trip code ‘00’ is used.
Mutually exclusive with E3 overload relays, option 7FEC_.
[4] A 120/240VAC source must be provided.
[5] Bulletins 2192F and 2192M require option 98 (external N.O. auxiliary contact). Bulletins 2193F and 2193M require option 98 (N.O. external auxiliary contact) or 98X (N.O. internal
16 auxiliary contact).
[6] Not available with dual 2192F units.
[7] Available for 110-240V control voltage. SC delivery for 110-120V control voltage. PE delivery for 220-240V control voltage. Not available for common control.
[8] Options 17 and 89CBL are mutually exclusive.
[9] Not available with option -7FEC_ _.
17 [10] Except primary wiring to control transformers. On units where the control transformer is inaccessible (e.g. installed under a mounting bracket), the transformer secondary ‘x1’ will be
wired to the transformer secondary fuse and the transformer secondary ‘x2’ will be grounded and wired to the coil on Bulletin 2102 or 2103 units, to the coil on the starter units when
option -18 is selected, to the normally closed overload relay auxiliary contact on the starter units when option -18 is not selected.

148
TS1W TSR1W TSR1W
Option Description
2103L 2107 2113 2123 2126F 2126K 4
2127F 2127K
Blown Fuse Indicator -4BF Option 4BF is valid only when 480V and 600V Power Factor
Lights Correction Capacitor is selected
9 5
-30KV 2 kVAR 9
-31KV 2.5 kVAR 9
6
-32KV 3 kVAR 9
-33KV 4 kVAR 9
-34KV 5 kVAR 9 7
-35KV 2 kVAR through 40 kVAR in 0.5 space 6 kVAR 9
-36KV factor. [3] 7 kVAR 9
-37KV 7.5 kVAR 9 8
42.5 kVAR through 50 kVAR in 1.0 space
-38KV [3] 8 kVAR 9
factor.
-39KV 9 kVAR 9
480V and 600V
These capacitors should not be used on 10 kVAR 9
Power Factor -40KV 9
Correction motors subject to plugging or jogging. Do
-41KV 11 kVAR 9
Capacitors [1],[2] not subject capacitors to repetitive
-42KV switching where capacitors and motors 12.5 kVAR 9
-43KV might be reenergized too quickly after 13.5 kVAR 9 10
being de-energized. PE-II
(Refer to publication -44KV 15 kVAR 9
2100-AT001x-EN-P,
Power Factor -45KV Do not install capacitors in any vertical 16 kVAR 9
Correction -46KV section that contains a variable 17.5 kVAR 9 11
Capacitors for frequency drive.
-47KV 18 kVAR 9
CENTERLINE 2100
MCC Starter Units, -48KV Capacitors are mounted in separate unit 20 kVAR 9
for more -49KV with a separate door. This unit is located 22.5 kVAR 9
information) -50KV
below selected starter. Door interlock is
9 12
included. Three phase power fuses are 25 kVAR
-51KV included. 27.5 kVAR 9
-52KV 30 kVAR 9
Capacitors are factory wired to load side 13
-53KV 9
of the contactor and on the line side of 32.5 kVAR
-54KV the overload relay. 35 kVAR 9
-55KV 37.5 kVAR 9
-56KV 40 kVAR 9 14
-57KV 42.5 kVAR 9
-58KV 45 kVAR 9
-59KV 50 kVAR 9 15
[1] See option 4BF for optional blown fuse indicators. Not available on dual starters, 0.5 space factor units, 6.0 space factor units or Space Saving NEMA units or vacuum contactor
starters. Refer to Recommended Capacitor Size table in Appendix for suggested capacitor ratings.
[2] For applications other than motor applications connected to the load side of the starter or for those applications outlined in publication 2100-AT001x-EN-P, contact your local Rockwell
Automation Sales Office.
[3] At 600V, 37.5 kVAR to 50 kVAR are 1.0 space factor 16
17

149
3 FVC FVR FVNR TS1W TSR1W TSR1W

TS2W TSR2W TSR2W
Option Description
Number Program
4 2102L
2103L
2106
2107
2112 2122
2113 2123
2127E
2126F
2127J
2126K
2127F 2127K
5 Grounded Unit
Door -79GD
Hinge mounted ground strap mounted on bottom hinge of unit door. Unit
door hinge grounding strap for IEC requirements. Available on all units
Unit Load -79L Select on all plug-in units in sections with vertical Unplated copper Available on all plug-in units
Connector -79LT unit load ground bus Tin plated copper
— Copper unit ground stabs also may be used with Copper alloy
Unit Ground Stab -79U steel vertical ground bus. Select on plug-in units in Unplated copper Available on all plug-in units
-79UT sections with vertical plug-in ground bus. Tin plated copper
Thermistor
Protection -84A1 Bulletin 817-E2P, 110 - 120VAC, 50-60 Hz, output is unwired. 9
Relay[1],[2]
Unit Ammeter -85AA Analog ammeter and current transformer. 9 9
[3],[4] [2] Current transformer only for use with external meter. Current transformer
, -85XA rated 2.5VA or greater. 9 9
Elapsed Time
9 -85T Six digit non-resettable meter (with tenths), mounted in control station 9 9
Meter [5],[6],[7]
Unwired Timer -87A Bulletin 596 time delay addition to NEMA size 1 On delay 9
Auxiliary (not SC
through 5 contactors with N.O. and N.C. contacts.
available on 0.5 -87B
Not available with -7FEC_ E3. Off delay 9
10 SF units)
-88A 240 Volt
-88B 480 Volt
-88C 600 Volt
Three (3) Bulletin 800T pilot lights (clear), wired in 208 Volt Available on Bulletin 2191M, 2192M and 2193M ONLY
11 -88H
grounded WYE, complete with fusing Not for use with solidly grounded power systems
-88I 415 Volt
-88KN 400 Volt
Ground
Detection Lights -88N 380 Volt
[8] -88AT 240 Volt
12 -88BT 480 Volt
-88CT Three (3) Bulletin 800T push-to-test pilot lights 600 Volt
Available on Bulletin 2191M, 2192M and 2193M ONLY
-88HT (clear), wired in grounded WYE, complete with 208 Volt
Not for use with solidly grounded power systems
13 -88IT fusing 415 Volt
-88KNT 400 Volt
-88NT 380 Volt
Integral ground fault protection system with adjustable pick-up,
Ground Fault adjustable time delay, control power indicator light, trip indicator and Only available on Bulletin 2192M, 1600A-2000A. For use with
14 Protection [9]
-88GF built-in test feature. Shunt trip is included. See required voltage code on solidly grounded WYE systems only. PE-II
70.
[1] Not available on dual starters, requires 1.5 space factor for size 1 and 2 and 2.0 space factor for 2113 size 3. Requires extra 0.5 space factor for NEMA Size 4 Bulletin 2112 with Class
15 J and HRCII-C fuses. Requires 2.5 space factor for NEMA Size 4 Bulletin 2113 with MCP circuit breaker (Circuit Breaker code CA) and E1 Plus overload relay (Option 7FEE_). Not
available in units containing a current transducer (700TC_). Available in Canada only. Available for 120V separate or transformer control only. Not available with E3 overload relay; for
thermistor protection, use E3 Plus overload relay.
[2] 85XA, 85AA not available with 7FEE_D or 7FEC_ .
[3] Ammeter has 5A movement, 3.5” scale, 102° deflection and 2% of full scale accuracy. Current transformer for external meter is supplied with 8-foot secondary leads. Ammeter scale
and CT ratio are determined by the horsepower code. Not valid on 0.5 space factor or dual mounted units, units with E3 overload relay (7FEC_) or units with E1Plus overload relay with
16 ground fault/jam protection (option 7FEE_G). Requires 2.5 space factor for NEMA Size 4 Bulletin 2113 with MCP circuit breaker (Circuit Breaker code CA) and E1 Plus overload relay
(Option 7FEE_).
[4] Unit ammeter and current transducer options are mutually exclusive.
[5] Elapsed time meter mounts in position normally used for a pilot device, limiting the maximum number of pilot devices selected. On 0.5 space factor units, elapsed time meter uses two
positions normally used for a pilot device. Not available on dual mounted units. Available on units with 120 Volt separate or transformer control only. Not available on 380-415V, 50Hz
17 applications.
[6] Mutually exclusive with control relay options 89CB, 89CBL, 89CF_ and 89P in 1.0 space factor and current transformer options 700TC1 and 700TC4 in 1.0 space factor.
[7] Requires option -90, Normal open auxiliary contact for Bulletin 2102L, 2103L, 2112 and 2113. Requires option -900011 for Bulletin 2112 and 2113 vacuum contactor starters.
[8] Not available on Bulletin 2191M units specified with metering options. Not available on Bulletin 2191MT, 600A in horizontal wireway, corner section or 10” wide incoming lug
section. Not available on non-fused 2192M units. Mutually exclusive with key interlock mounting provision (option 201).
[9] Horizontal neutral bus and incoming neutral bus is required when 3-phase, 4-wire power system is specified.

150
Main Neutral Bus MLUG

Option
Option
Number
Description Rating Location
Space Factor Adder
2191M MFDS MCB Delivery
2192M 2193M Program
3
MLUG MFDS MCB MLUG MFDS MCB [1]
600 [3] None 9

800 [4] None 9
4
-88HN_
Incoming Neutral (half- 1200 [4] None 9
Bus [2] rated) Provides for incoming neutral 1600 [5] None 9 5
For Bulletin connection to horizontal neutral bus
2191M (main lug) within the main incoming unit. 2000 [5] None 9
units. Incoming neutral bus must match the 600 [3] None 9
See table on horizontal neutral bus, rating, half or
800 [4] None 9
6
page 64 for -88FN_ full.
available lugs (full- 1200 [4] [4] 9
rated)
1600 [5] None 9 7
2000 [5] None 9
400 [7] [7] [8] None 9 9
600 [9] [9] 1.0 1.0 [8] 9 9 8
Incoming Neutral PE
-88HN 800 [9] [9] 1.0 1.0 [8] 9 9
Bus [6] (half-
1200 [9] [9] 1.0 1.0 9 9
For Bulletins
2192M (main
rated)
1600 [3] N/A None N/A 9 9
9
fusible Provides for incoming neutral
disconnect 2000 [3] [3] None None 9 9
connection to horizontal neutral bus
switch) and within the main incoming unit. 150 N/A [7] N/A None 9
2193M (main Incoming neutral bus must match the 225 N/A [7] N/A None 9 10
circuit breaker). horizontal neutral bus, rating, half or
See tables on full 400 [7] [7] [8] None 9 9
page 72 for -88FN
2192M and 600 [9] [9] 1.0 1.0 [8] 9 9
(full-
pages 79-80 for rated) 800 [9] [9] 1.0 1.0 [8] 9 9 11
2193M standard
and optional lugs. 1200 [9] [9] 1.0 1.0 9 9
1600 [3] N/A None N/A 9 9
2000 [3] [3] None None 9 9
0.25” x 2” x 12” copper tin plated bus plate with #6–250 kcmil lug. Insulated from and mounted on unit support 12
Incoming Neutral [11] pan. Located below main incoming unit if top entry and located above main incoming unit if bottom entry. Adds [12]
Connection Plate -88NPC 0.5 space factor for main unit if less than 6.0 space factor. Not available for 2191M unit in top horizontal 9 9[13] 9[14] SC-II
[10] wireway. 280A capacity.
(can be used only 0.25” x 2” x 12” copper silver plated bus plate with #6–250 kcmil lug. Insulated from and mounted on unit
13
in sections with a [11] support pan. Located below main incoming unit if top entry and located above main incoming unit if bottom
vertical wireway) -88NPS entry. Adds 0.5 space factor for main unit if less than 6.0 space factor. Not available for 2191M unit in top 9[12] 9[13] 9[14] PE
horizontal wireway. 280A capacity.
[1] Not available with 600A incoming lug compartment in horizontal wireway, 300A incoming lug compartment or 10” wide section with incoming lugs.
[2] Option code is not complete. Add location (‘T’ for the top, ‘B’ for the bottom) which matches the location of the horizontal neutral bus. Use ‘T’ for neutral bus above the main power bus. 14
Use ‘B’ for neutral bus below the main power bus. NOTE: The code may be required to be opposite the code used on the Bulletin 2191 unit, e.g. 2191MT-DKC-54-88FNB.
[3] Same as MLUG, MFDS, MCB (e.g., if MLUG, MFDS or MCB is in the top of the section, main neutral bus will be in top bus pocket).
[4] Horizontal neutral must be located on the opposite side of the MLUG, except 6 space factor, the neutral bus location is unrestricted. 1200A full-rated neutral must be 6 space factor.
[5] No restrictions. 15
[6] Available in U.S. In Canada, contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office.
[7] Top incoming only. Horizontal neutral must be located below the main power bus.
[8] Adds 5” to width and eliminates vertical wireway.
[9] Horizontal neutral must be located below the main power bus.
[10] Can only be used in sections with a vertical wireway. Can not be used if horizontal neutral bus is selected. For applications with horizontal neutral bus, select the appropriate 88HN or
88FN option. If incoming neutral cable is greater than one, #6 AWG to 250 kcmil, or if neutral current will exceed 280A, do not use option 88NPC or 88NPS. Select horizontal neutral bus
16
and appropriate 88HN or 88FN options.
[11] Will increase unit size by 0.5 SF, mounted below main unit that is top mounted or mounted above main unit that is bottom mounted. Main unit and neutral unit doors are interlocked
[12] May only be selected for 300A main incoming lug compartment. For ratings greater than 300A, use incoming neutral bus option (-88HN_ or -88FN_).
[13] May only be selected for 400A and smaller main fusible disconnect switch. For ratings greater than 400A, use incoming neutral bus option (-88HN or -88FN). 17
[14] May only be selected for 400A and smaller frame main circuit breaker. For frame ratings greater than 400A, use incoming neutral bus option (-88HN or -88FN).

2 151
TS1W TSR1W TSR1W

FVC FVR FVNR
TS2W TSR2W TSR2W
3 Option Option Description 2126E 2126J Delivery
2103L 2107 2113 2123 2126F 2126K
4 2127F 2127K
Interposing Relay Control circuit interposing relay. Utilizes Bulletin 700-CF control relay to 9 9
control starter coil in control circuit. Available on NEMA sizes 1 through 5
[1] -89CB
and vacuum contactor starters. The starter or contactor coil voltages and 9 9
5 interposing relay coil voltages are the same as the control voltage.
Mutually exclusive Line circuit interposing relay. Utilizes Bulletin 700-CF control relay to 9 9 SC [2]
with 89CF and 89P, control starter coil in control circuit. Available on NEMA sizes 1 through 5.
unwired control -89CBL [3] The starter or contactor coil voltages are the same as the line voltage. The 9 9
relays interposing relay coil voltage is the same as the control voltage.
[1] 2.0 space factor minimum when selected on Bulletin 2113 size 3 starters and Bulletin 2106 and 2107 size 1 or 2. Not available on dual 2103L, dual 2113 units or 0.5 space factor units.
Not available with common control. Mutually exclusive with 7FEC_ options, 11DSA2 or 11DSA3 DeviceNet starter auxiliary options or 7FEE_D.
[2] SC delivery for 110-120V control voltage. PE delivery for 220-240V control voltage.
[3] Options 89CBL and 17 are mutually exclusive. When one (1) control circuit fuse for separate control (21) is selected with 89CBL on 1.0 space factor Bulletin 2102L, 2103L, 2112 or 2113
units, one (1) auxiliary contact mounting position (P3) is given up for the control circuit fuse.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

152
TS1W
TSR1W TSR1W
FVC FVR FVNR TS2W
TSR2W TSR2W 3
2126E 2126J
Option Delivery
Option Description 2102L 2106 2112 2122 2127E 2127J
Number 2103L 2107 2113 2123 2126F 2126K Program 4
2127F 2127K
QUANTITY SUPPLIED
5
-89CF40 4 N.O.
Bulletin 700CF 4-pole relay 3 N.O. and 1
-89CF31
[2] N.C. 1 2 1 2 4 4 6
2 N.O. and 2
-89CF22 N.C.
-89CF40A On-delay 4 N.O. 7
includes (1)
Bulletin 700CF NOTC and
4-pole relay 2 N.O. and 2
-89CF22A (1) NCTO N.C.
with time contact 8
attachment 1 2 1 2 4 4
-89CF40B Off-delay 4 N.O.
0.3 to 30 includes (1)
Unwired [4] NOTO and Instantaneous 2 N.O. and 2 SC [3] 9
-89CF22B seconds
Control (1) NCTC Contacts N.C.
Relay [1] contact
-89CF40C On-delay 4 N.O.
Mutually includes (1)
Bulletin 700CF NOTC and
(Instantaneous 10
exclusive contacts on 2 N.O. and 2
with 89CB -89CF22C 4-pole relay (1) NCTO Bulletin 700CF
with time N.C.
and 89CBL contact relays are non-
attachment convertible. 1 2 1 2 4 4
interpos-
ing relays
-89CF40D Off-delay Bulletin 700P 4 N.O. 11
1.8 to 180 includes (1) relays have
seconds [4] NOTO and 2 N.O. and 2
For -89CF22D instantaneous
(1) NCTC N.C.
common contacts that are
contact convertible from
control,
120V coil is -89CF40L Bulletin 700CF 4-pole relay normally open to 4 N.O. 12
provided with mechanical latch normally closed.) 2 N.O. and 2 1 2 1 2 4 4 PE
-89CF22L attachment [4] N.C.
-89P2 2 N.O. 13
Bulletin 700P relay 1 2 1 2 4 4 SC [3]
-89P4 4 N.O.
Bulletin 700P with No
-89PT pneumatic time delay instantaneous
attachment (on/off delay) contacts 1 2 1 2 4 4 14
-89PT2 with two (2) timed contacts 2 N.O.
(0.1 to 60 seconds) [4] PE
-89PT4 4 N.O.
Bulletin 700P
15
-89PL2 with mechanical latch 2 N.O. 1 2 1 2 4 4
attachment [4]
[1] Not available on dual 2103L units, dual 2113 units or 0.5 space factor units. When selected on 2122 or 2123 size 1 or 2 starter units, power terminal blocks will not be provided. One
(1) relay will be furnished per each contactor on reversing (2106/2107), two speed (2122/2123) and two-speed reversing (2126/2127) starters. Bulletin 2106 and 2107 size 1 and 2 16
starters and Bulletin 2113 size 3 starters require 2.0 space factors when a relay is selected. Mutually exclusive with 11DSA2 and 11DSA3 DeviceNet starter auxiliary,
7FEC_ _ or 7FEE_D.
[2] When control circuit transformer is selected on Bulletin 2102L or 2103L 30A or 60A units or Bulletin 2112 or 2113 size 1 or 2 units, the secondary control transformer fuse is mounted
in one of the three starter auxiliary contact pockets.
[3] SC delivery for 110-120V control voltage. PE delivery for 220-240V control voltage. 17
[4] When selecting Bulletin 2102L or 2103L 30A or 60A units or Bulletin 2112 or 2113 size 1 and 2 starters, a 1.5 space factor unit is required.

153
3 Option Wiring
Misc.
Units FVC [1] FVR
TS1W TSR1W
FVNR [1] TS2W TSR2W FDS CB Xfmr
Delivery
Option Description NEMA Size
2100M
2192M
2193M
2100D
2102L
2103L
2192F
2193F
Number Type Program
2106
2107
2112
2113
2122
2123
2126
2127
2196
2197
4 9 9 9 9
A 9 9 9 9
NORMALLY OPEN 9 9
5 -90 One (1) N.O. auxiliary contact mounted on each contactor or 1-6
starter 9 9 9 9
B [3] 9 9 9 9
9 9
9 9 9 9
A 9 9 9 9
NORMALLY CLOSED 9 9
-91 One (1) N.C. auxiliary contact mounted on each contactor or 1-6
Auxiliary starter 9 9 9 9
Contacts[2] B [3] 9 9 9 9 SC
9 9
NORMALLY OPEN 1-5 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9[5] 9 9 9 9
-98 [4] One (1) N.O. auxiliary contact (operates with movement of A or B
external handle only) 6 9 9
NORMALLY OPEN
-98X [6] One (1) N.O. auxiliary contact mounted internally in circuit 1-6 A or B 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
9 breaker
NORMALLY CLOSED 1-5 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 [5] 9 9 9 9
-99 [4] One (1) N.C. auxiliary contact (operates with movement of A or B
external handle only) 6 9 9
NORMALLY CLOSED
10 -99X [6] One (1) N.C. auxiliary contact mounted internally in circuit
breaker
1-6 A or B 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
[1] For vacuum contactor starters only option -91 or -900111 is allowed.
[2] Multiple auxiliary contacts must be group coded by adding the second and third digit of the special feature number to the base digit “9” (e.g., 90-91-98X-99, when group coded, reads
9018X9).
11 [3] Type B auxiliary contacts are wired to terminal blocks. If the number of auxiliary contact wiring points required exceeds the number of terminals available in the unit, remaining
auxiliary contacts will be unwired. Refer to wiring diagram.
[4] The maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be supplied is two (2), in any combination. Contacts actuate with movement of unit handle to ON or OFF position only. Contacts are
not designed to actuate as the result of a circuit breaker trip. For such applications, auxiliary contacts mounted internally (98X or 99X) must be selected. Auxiliary contacts are supplied
unwired. Not available on dual 2192F units or 1600A and 2000A 2193M units.
[5] For 1600A and 2000A 2192M, the maximum number of auxiliary contacts is four (4). The following contact arrangements are allowed.
12 • -98, -99, or -989 two contacts, (1) N.O/N.C. Form-C contacts
• -988, -999 four contacts, two (1) N.O/N.C. Form-C contacts
The auxiliary contacts are mounted external to the switch and are actuated by the movement of the operating handle. Auxiliary contacts are supplied unwired.
[6] The maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be supplied internally is (2) N.O. and (2) N.C. With a shunt trip, the maximum is (1) N.O. and (1) N.C.. Not available for 2193F single
13 or dual mounted when one or both trip codes are ‘00’.
Maximum Number of Additional Auxiliary Contacts Per Starter/Contactor 154
NEMA
Bulletin Number [1] Size 1-2 Size 3-5 Size 6
14 [2] —
2102L, 2103L
6
2112/2113 [2] 6 4
15 2103L/2113 Dual — —
2106/2107
4 4 —
2122/2123
2102L/2103L/2112/2113 0.5SF 3 — —
16 2126/2127 4 — —
[1] Units selected with OFF pilot light will use one of these contacts. Bulletins 2126 and 2127 will use two of these contacts.
[2] When Bulletin 596 timers are selected on 30-300A contactors or size 1-5 starters, auxiliary mounting positions (P3 and P4) are used, limiting the maximum number of
starter auxiliaries to two (2). When 89CB, 89CBL, 89CF, 89P, 700TC_, 11DSA2 or 11DSA3 with NEMA Type B wiring is present with transformer control in 1.0 space factor
17 units, the number of starter auxiliary contacts is limited to four (4). When 89CBL is present with separate control and control circuit fuse (21) in 1.0 space factor units, the
number of starter auxiliary contacts is limited to four (4) for units with 7FEC_ _. In E3 overloads, the number of starter auxiliary contacts is limited to five (5). For size 2 units
with 7FEEE_ or 7FEE_D, E1 Plus Overload, the number of auxiliary contacts is limited to five (5)

155
TS1W TSR1W TSR1W
Option Description
2103L 2107 2113 2123 2126F 2126K 4
2127F 2127K
For contactors and starters 9 9 9
Omission of
Power Terminal
-106 (NEMA Type BD) NEMA sizes 1, 2 and 3
9 9 9
5
Blocks [1] -110 [2] For 30A and 60A fusible disconnect feeders Available for Bulletin 2192F ONLY
Control Terminal
-107 One (1) extra 5-pole control terminal block (unwired) 9 9 9 9 9 9
6
Block [1],[3],[4]
Available on all units except 2191F, 2191M, 2192M,
T-Handle -111 T-handle latch on unit door
2193M, 2195, 2193LE and 2193PP[5]
SC 7
Key-interlock For circuit breaker or fusible disconnect main or feeder
Mounting -201 units. Permits customer mounting of Superior or Kirk Available for Bulletins 2192 and 2193 ONLY
Provision [6] brand key interlocks on unit operating handle. [7] 8
Ohio Semitronics Model MCT5-005E
-700TC1 [8] 85-135V AC, 50/60Hz power (includes current 9
Current transformer) 9
Transducers
(4-20mA Output) Crompton Instruments Model 253-TALU-LSHG 120V AC
-700TC2 [8] +/-20%, 50/60Hz power (includes current transformer). 9 PE
SC delivery in Canada.
N-K Technologies model AT 12-40V DC at sensor (current
10
-700TC4 [8] transformer not needed on sizes 1-3, included on sizes 9
4-6)
Riley Corp., 5-40VDC at sensor (current transformer not
Current Sensors needed) model 420, sizes 1-3, all voltages 9 11
(4-20mA Output) SC
-700TC5 [8] 9
needed) [9]
needed) [10]
9 12
[1] Available for NEMA Wiring Type B only. Not available on 0.5 space factor units. Not available on Bulletin 2112 or 2113 size 2 in 1.0 space factor with E3 (option 7FEC_).
[2]
[3]
This option is not available on dual mounted 2192F.
A maximum of two (2) 5-pole control terminal blocks only for each side of dual unit. 13
[4] An additional block of five control terminals can be supplied for customer use, provided the total number of control terminals does not exceed 15 maximum on units with power
terminals, 20 maximum on units without power terminals. Check wiring diagram for limitations.
[5] Provided as standard with Bulletin 2193LE and 2193PP.
[6] Mutually exclusive with ground detection lights (option 88_). Not available on 0.5 space factor units.
[7] For 150A-1200A 2192M and 150A-2000A 2193M units, use Superior key interlock #S105810Y, Type B-4003-1 (bolt flush when withdrawn) or Kirk key interlock #KFL000010. For 1600A
and 2000A 2192M units, use Superior key interlock #S105821Y, Type B-06003-1 (bolt extends 0.375” when withdrawn) or Kirk key interlock #KBL003710. Note: Fusible units should
14
not be used on a tie (double ended) system, due to access to fuses and back feeding. For these applications, contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office.
[8] Transducer/sensor output is unwired. Not available on 0.5 space factor or dual starter units. Not available with E1 Plus O.L. with ground fault/jam protection (option 7FEE_G). Options
700TC1, 700TC4 and 700TC5 require minimum 1.5 space factors for size 1 and 2 if optional control relay, timer auxiliary relay or 11DSA2/11DSA3 is used. Option 700TC1 requires
minimum 2.0 space factors for Bulletin 2113, size 3 when 11DSA2 or 11DSA3 is used. When control circuit transformer primary fusing is selected, the control transformer secondary
15
fuse is mounted in one of the three starter auxiliary contact pockets. Option 700TC2 always requires minimum 1.5 space factors for sizes 1 and 2. Option 700TC2 requires minimum 2.0
space factors for Bulletin 2113, size 3. Unit ammeter options, current transducer and thermistor protection relay options are mutually exclusive. Options 700TC1, 700TC2, 700TC4 and
700TC5 require extra 0.5 space factor for NEMA Size 4 Bulletin 2112 with Class J and HRCII-C fuses. Requires 2.5 space factor for NEMA Size 4 Bulletin 2113 with HMCP circuit
breaker (circuit breaker code CA) and E1 Plus overload relay (Option 7FEE_). Option 700TC5 requires extra 0.5 space factor for NEMA Size 5 Bulletin 2112 with Class J fuses.
[9] Model 420L, size 4 (all voltages) and size 5 at 380V, 415V, 480V and 600V only. 16
[10] Model 420X, size 5 at 208V and 240V and size 6 (all voltages).
17

156
3 FVC FVR FVNR

TS1W
TS2W
TSR1W
TSR2W
TSR1W
TSR2W
Option Option Description 2126E 2126J Delivery
4 2103L 2107 2113 2123 2126F 2126K
2127F 2127K
— Type MTW(TEW) 90° C copper wire, VW1 rated #16 AWG 9 9 9 9 9 9
5 Control -750 [2] Type MTW(TEW) 90° C copper wire, VW1 rated #14 AWG (tinned) 9 9 9 9 9 9
#14 AWG tinned, MTW, 90° C copper wire, VW1 rated and tinned SC
Circuit
-750B [2] power wire, including stab wires, excluding starter power wire 9 9 9 9 9 9
Wiring [1] jumpers.
-750S [2] Type SIS 90° C copper wire #14 AWG (tinned) 9 9 9 9 9 9
SC (+2
Control Circuit Lugs -750RL Insulated ring lugs for control wires where possible 9 9 9 9 9 9 days)
[1],[2],[3] -750SL Insulated spade lugs for control wires where possible 9 9 9 9 9 9
Adhesive Brady Datab type markers at each end of control wire. Not
-751D available in Canada. 9 9 9 9 9 9 SC
Control Wire
SC (+2
Markers [1] -751HS Heat shrink type wire marker 9 9 9 9 9 9 days)
-751S Sleeve type wire marker 9 9 9 9 9 9 SC
NEMA size 1 and 2 9 9 9 9 9
Omission of Circuit -752 For combination starter units, HMCP frame
9 Breaker only. N/A in 0.5 space factor units.
NEMA size 3 9 9 9
SC
NEMA size 4 9 9 9
Shunt Trip -754 For tripping circuit breakers from remote 120 volt, 60 Hz source Available on all circuit breaker units[4]
100% Rating of Available on 2192M, 600A-2000A[5]
10 Main Disconnect
-755
Provides 100% rating of main switch or circuit breaker. NEMA Type 1
and Type 1 with gasket only, except non-fused 2192M is available in PE-II
Switch or Circuit NEMA Type 12. Not available with NEMA Type 3R or Type 4. Available on 2193M, 600A-2000A ONLY
Breaker
[1] Options for factory wiring of control circuits. Also available for 2100-DPS_, 2100-C2D, 2100-E2D_, and 2100-DC_05XWD units. Also 2192F, 2192M, 2193F, and 2193M units when
11 option -11DSA_ is selected. 750B only available when unit is fed from the vertical or horizontal power bus. Dedicated auxiliary devices (e.g., fans), device and component internal
wiring and wiring that could affect operation or certification(s) (e.g., insulation temperature class, EMC shielding requirements, communication requirements, UL, cUL, CSA, CE) are
not included.
[2] Not available on 0.5 space factor Bulletin 2102L, 2103L, 2112, or 2113 units.
[3] Examples where insulated lugs CANNOT be used: Bulletin 800F pilot devices, 700CF, size 6 auxiliaries, and disconnect/circuit breaker auxiliaries and where more than one (1) wire per
terminal is required.
12 [4] Except for R-frame circuit breakers, not available when two (2) N.O. (98X8X), two (2) N.C. (99X9X) or two (2) N.O. and two (2) N.C. (98X8X9X9X) internal contacts are selected for
circuit breakers. Not available on 2193PP plug-in panel board with main circuit breaker or 2193LE lighting panels or 2100M- empty units with circuit breaker or 2193F single or dual
mounted when one or both trip codes are ‘00.’
[5] 600A switch must use 601A, Class L fuse for 100% rating.
13
14
15
16
17

157
2
TS1W TSR1W TSR1W
FVC FVR FVNR
TS2W TSR2W TSR2W
Option
Option
Number Description
2102L 2106 2112 2122
2126E
2127E
2126J
2127J
Delivery
Program
3
2103L 2107 2113 2123 2126F 2126K
2127F 2127K
Door mounted external DeviceNet connection and 120VAC 4
External DeviceNet
receptacle for connection of computer to DeviceNet without having
Connector with -767A[1] to open doors. Mounted on door of DeviceNet power supply unit.
Available on 2100-DPS_ units only
120VAC Receptacle See page 104. 5
DeviceNet Power Provides second power supply and anti-backfeed, blocking diodes. Available only for 2100-DPS8_ units. See page 104 for unit
Supply, Redundant 767C Allows seemless transfer of power from primary to secondary power
Design supply in the event of an internal failure of the primary power supply selection.
All mounting tabs on unit bottom plate are
6
-800 turned up for field installed terminal
blocks
All mounting tabs on unit bottom plate are 7
-801 turned up. (1) 5-pole pull-apart terminal
block included.
Available on 2100-NK and 2100-NJ empty unit inserts and 2100D
Unwired Pull-Apart All mounting tabs on unit bottom plate are
Terminal -802 Bulletin 1492-EC turned up. (2) 5-pole pull-apart terminal and 2100M empty unit inserts with disconnecting means ONLY
SC
8
5-pole terminal blocks
Blocks blocks included. Not available on 2100-NK05 or 2100-NJ05 units.
blocks included.
9
blocks included.
French Legend Legend plates printed in French are available on all pilot devices.
10
Plates -860F Specify 860F when pilot device option is selected. Available on all pilot devices
Spanish Legend -860S Legend plates printed in Spanish are available on all pilot devices. Available on all pilot devices
Plates Specify 860S when pilot device option is selected.
Plated steel nameplate screws. Provided 11
Door Nameplate Screws when cardholder or nameplates are not Available on all units
selected.
Card Holder for Unit 1.125'' x 3.625'' plastic card holders with
Available on all units
Doors blank cards
Unit Door
— Acrylic plate (available in U.S. only). 12
Nameplates [2],
Lettering is white with black letters or Available on all units
1.125” x 3.625” black with white letters.
engraved 3-line or 4-line
nameplate Phenolic plate. Lettering is white with 13
black letters, black with white letters or Available on all units
SC-II
red with white letters.
Overload Relay Set of three (3) W-type heater elements per overload 9 9
Heater supplied loose in each unit. Available on SC-II or PE-II assembled
—
Elements (Bulletin
592)
motor control centers only.
See 227 for heater element selection instructions.
9 9 9 14
Stainless Steel Stainless steel nameplate screws for unit nameplates
— Available on all units
Nameplate Screws (2 per unit)
Export Packing
Container is skid mounted and packaged in clear plastic. Packing is
SC
15
— not watertight or waterproof. Considerations should be taken if 9 9 9 9 9 9
Below Deck (+2 days)
extended storage is expected.
[1] When specified on 2100-DPS8KXWD, 2100-DPS8K_ or 2100-DPS8K_-30_ DeviceNet Power Supply Unit, the control circuit transformer increases to 500 VA.
[2] Blank nameplates will be supplied when no engraving is selected. Letter height for 3-line nameplates will be 0.22”. Letter height for 4-line nameplates will be 0.18”. All text will be
centered horizontally and vertically. 16
17

2
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
124
Accessories for 2
Space Saving NEMA Starter Units 3
• Multiple option numbers are separated by a dash and added to the base catalog number in ascending order.
• Pilot devices are Bulletin 800F
• To select pilot light lens color, add letter(s) to the option number: A = amber, B = blue, C = clear, G = green, R = red, 4
W = white (e.g., 4RG is a red ON and green OFF pilot light). Clear and white are not available for Bulletin 800T LED
type pilot lights. Clear is not available on Bulletin 800F LED pilot lights. White is not available on Bulletin 800F
incandescent pilot lights. 5
158
FVR FVNR Option Delivery

Option Description
2106, 2107 2112, 2113 Number Program 6
START - STOP 9
-1[3]
Push Buttons [1] [2] FORWARD - REVERSE - STOP 9
, 7
STOP 9 9 -1B[3]
Push Buttons and Selector
HAND-START, HAND-STOP, HAND-OFF-AUTO 9 -1F[4] 8
Switch [1], [2]
HAND - OFF - AUTO 9
-3
Selector Switch [1], [2] FORWARD - OFF - REVERSE [3] 9
9
OFF - ON 9 -3E[3]
ON 9 -4_[4], [5]
Standard Type ON-OFF 9 -4_ _[4], [6], [7]
10
Lens color
designator FORWARD-REVERSE 9 -4_ _[7]
A, B, C, G, R FORWARD-REVERSE-OFF 9 -4_ _ _ [6], [8]
OVERLOAD 9 9 -4T _[9] 11
ON 9 -4L_[4], [5]
LED Type ON-OFF 9 -4L_ _[4], [6], [7] SC
Lens color
designator FORWARD-REVERSE 9 -4L_ _ [7] 12
A, B, G, R, W FORWARD-REVERSE-OFF 9 -4L_ _ _[6], [8]
Pilot Lights
(Transformer Type for 800T,
OVERLOAD 9 9 -4TL _[9] 13
Full-voltage for 800F) [2] ON 9 -5_[4], [5]
Push-to-Test
Standard Type
ON-OFF 9 -5_ _[4], [6], [7]
Lens color FORWARD-REVERSE 9 -5_ _ [7] 14
designator
A, B, C, G, R FORWARD-REVERSE-OFF 9 -5_ _ _ [6], [8]
OVERLOAD 9 9 -5T _ [9]
15
ON 9 -5L_ [4], [5]
Push-to-Test
LED Type
ON-OFF 9 -5L_ _[4], [6], [7]
Lens color FORWARD-REVERSE 9 -5L_ _ [7]
designator
FORWARD-REVERSE-OFF 9 -5L_ _ _[6], [8] 16
A, B, G, R, W
OVERLOAD 9 9 -5TL _[9]
[1] Push buttons may not be used in conjunction with selector switches, except with option 1F.
[2] Maximum of four (4) pilot devices on 0.5 space factor units. When more than four (4) pilot devices are required, the 0.5 space factor units must be increased to 1.0 space factor. 17
Maximum of six (6) pilot devices on 1.0 space factor and larger units.
[3] Mutually exclusive with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (11DSA_), E3 solid-state overload relays (7FEC_ _) and E1 Plus solid state overload relay 7FEE_D.
[4] When option 1F is used with 11DSA_ or 7FEE_D, one (1) N.O. auxiliary contact, option 90, is required. When option 1F is selected with any ON pilot light, one (1) N.O. auxiliary
contact, option 90, is required.
[5] When used in 2112 or 2113 with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (11DSA_), 7FEE_D or E3 electronic overload relay (7FEC_ _), one (1) N.O. auxiliary contact, option 90, is required.
When used in 2112 or 2113 with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (11DSA3) and option 1F, 7FEE_D and option 1F or E3 electronic overload relay (7FEC_ _) and option 1F, two (2) N.O.
auxiliary contacts, option 900, are required.
[6] Select one (1) N.C. auxiliary contact, option 91, for OFF pilot light when in 2106, 2107, 2112 or 2113.
[7] When used in 2112 or 2113 with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (11DSA3), 7FEE_D or E3 electronic overload relay (7FEC_ _), one (1) N.O. and one (1) N.C. auxiliary contact, option
901, is required. When used in 2112 or 2113 with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (11DSA3) and option 1F, 7FEE_D and option 1F or E3 solid-state overload relay
(7FEC_ _) and option 1F, two (2) N.O. and one (1) N.C. auxiliary contacts, option 9001, are required. When used in 2106 or 2107 with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (11DSA3) or E3
electronic overload relay (7FEC_ _), one (1) N.O. auxiliary contact, option 90, is required.
[8] When used in 2106 or 2107 with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (11DSA3) or E3 electronic overload relay (7FEC_ _), one (1) N.O. and one (1) N.C. auxiliary contact, option 901, is
required.
[9] Not available with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (11DSA3), 7FEE_D or E3 electronic overload relay (7FEC_ _).

Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Space Saving NEMA Starter Units
Multiple option numbers are separated by a dash and added to the base catalog number in ascending order.
159
2 Option FVR FVNR Delivery
Option Description
Number 2106, 2107 2112, 2113 Program
NEMA Size 1 80 VA[1] 80 VA[1]
3 -6P Standard capacity with primary fusing NEMA Size 2 80 VA 80 VA[1]
Control Circuit Transformer (with NEMA Size 3-4 250 VA 250 VA
grounded and fused secondary)
4 -6XP [2] Extra capacity with primary fusing
NEMA Size 1
NEMA Size 2
130 VA
130 VA
130 VA
130 VA
NEMA Size 3-4 350 VA 350 VA
E1 Plus Electronic Overload
5 Relay [3],[4]
-7FEE_ [5]
Selectable trip class (10, 15, 20, 30) selectable Auto/Manual-Auto reset electronic
overload relay for NEMA starters, size 1-4.
9 9[6]
E1 Plus Electronic Overload Selectable trip class (10, 20, 30). Selectable Auto/Manual-Auto reset electronic overload
Relay with DeviceNet Module -7FEE_D[5] relay for starters Size 1-4. Includes DeviceNet module with (2) 24VDC inputs and (1) 9[7]
[3],[4],[10] 110-120VAC output.
E1 Plus Electronic Overload Selectable to class (10, 15, 20, 30) selectable Auto/Manual-Auto NEMA Size 1, 2 9 9[7]
Relay with Ground Fault reset electronic overload relay for NEMA starters, size 1-3.
Protection Module & Jam -7FEE_G[5] NEMA Size 3 9 9
Includes Ground Fault Protection Module with integral Jam
Protection [3],[4] Protection and external Ground Fault Sensor. NEMA Size 4 9[8]
E1 Plus Electronic Overload
Selectable trip class (10, 15, 20, 30) selectable Auto/Manual-Auto reset electronic SC
Relay with Jam Protection 7FEE_J[5] overload relay for NEMA starters, size 1-4 with Jam Protection Module
9 9[7]
Module [3],[4]
E3 Electronic Overload Size 1 9
Relay [4],[9],[10] E3 Basic overload relay is provided with two (2) 24VDC inputs and Size 2 9
-7FEC1_[5]
9 NOTE: For non-DeviceNet one (1) 110-240VAC output Size 3 9
applications, a 24VDC separate Size 4 9[12]
power source is needed. A
Bulletin 193-DNCT DeviceNet Size 1 9 9
10 Configuration Terminal may be -7FEC2_[5] E3 Plus overload relay is provided with four (4) 24VDC inputs and Size 2 9 9
needed for programming and two (2) 110-240VAC outputs Size 3 9 9
monitoring. -7FEC3_[5] Size 4 9[12]
For use with starters to provide DeviceNet inputs and outputs. Four (4) 120VAC inputs
DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary -11DSA2 and two (2) 120V outputs. Cannot be selected with E3 electronic overload relay (7FEC_ _) 9 9
or E1 Plus with DeviceNet (7FEE_D).
11 (DSA) [10],[11],[12]
(mutually exclusive)
For use with starters to provide DeviceNet inputs and outputs. Four (4) 24VDC inputs and
-11DSA3 two (2) 240VAC max outputs. Cannot be selected with E3 electronic overload relay 9 9
(7FEC_ _) or E1 Plus with DeviceNet (7FEE_D).
[1] For 0.5 space factor or 1.0 space factor with option -15; Bulletin 2106, 2107, 2112 and 2113, the standard capacity VA rating is 75 VA.
12 [2] Extra capacity control circuit transformer, option 6XP, changes 0.5 space factor units to 1.0 space factor.
[3] E1 Plus electronic overload relay is supplied with one (1) N.O. and one (1) N.C. auxiliary contact.
[4] Overload relay option 7FEE_, 7FEE_D, 7FEE_G, 7FEE_J or 7FEC_ _ _ must be specified.
Overload relay option 7FEE_, 7FEE_D, 7FEE_G, 7FEE_J and 7FEC_ _ are mutually exclusive.
13 [5] Option number is not complete.
• Select overload relay code from appropriate table below and add to option number (e.g., 7FEED or 7FEC2B).
• For option 7FEC_ _, review configuration options in the table below, and, if needed, select and add to option number (e.g., 7FEC1BY or 7FEC3FYG).
• NEMA size 1-3 E3 Plus overload relays have ground fault sensor as standard. NEMA size 4-6 E3 Plus overload relays need to have the ground fault configured to include a
ground fault sensor. Refer to E3 overload relay configuration options table below.
[6] 0.5 space factor Size 2, Bulletin 2113 units with pilot devices and external reset button for overload relay are increased to 1.0 space factor.
14 [7] 0.5 space factor Size 2, Bulletin 2113 are increased to 1.0 space factor.
[8] Bulletin 2113, NEMA Size 4 with circuit breaker suffix CA are increased to 1.5 space factors. Bulletin 2113, NEMA Size 4 with circuit breaker suffix CT or CM are increased to 2.0
space factors.
[9] 0.5 space factor Size 1, Bulletin 2106 and 2107 units are increased to 1.0 space factor.
15 0.5 space factor Size 1, Bulletin 2112 and 2113 units with pilot devices and external reset button for overload relay are increased to 1.0 space factor.
0.5 space factor Size 2, Bulletin 2113 units are increased to 1.0 space factor.
[10] Not available with push button or selector switches, except options 3 and 1F. Not available with unwired control relay, option 89CF_ and 89HA_.
[11] 0.5 space factor Size 1, Bulletin 2107 units are increased to 1.0 space factor. 0.5 space factor Size 2, Bulletin 2113 units are increased to 1.0 space factor.
[12] 1.0 space factor Size 4, Bulletin 2113 units are increased to 1.5 space factor.
16 Overload Relay Codes for E1 Plus, Option 7FEE 160 Overload Relay Codes for E3 and E3 Plus, Option -7FEC_ 161
For use with Space Full Load Current Overload Relay Code, Add to For use with Space Full Load Current Overload Relay Code, Add to
Saving NEMA Size Range (Amperes) Option Number (e.g., 7FEED) Saving NEMA Size Range (Amperes) Option Number (e.g., 7FEC2B)
1-5 C 1-5 A
17 1 3.2 - 16 D 1 3 - 15 B
5.4 - 27 E 5 - 25 C
2 9 - 45 F 2 9 - 45 D
3 18 - 90 G 3 18 - 90 E
4 30 - 150 H 4 28 - 140 F
E3 Overload Relay Configuration Option 162
Overload Relay Code
Description
(Add to option number [e.g. 7FEC3FYG])
24VDC input points None
120VAC input points, available for 110-120VAC control voltage only Y
Ground fault. Includes Bulletin 193-CBCT3 ground fault sensor G[1]
120VAC input points and ground fault (see description above) YG[1]
[1] Available for Size 4 E3 Plus overload relays only. 1.5 space factor Size 4, Bulletin 2113 units with circuit breaker suffix CT or CM, are increased to 2.0 space factor.

163
FVR FVNR
2
Option Delivery
Option Description 2106, 2112,
Number Program
2107 2113 3
Additional Unit -15 Adds 0.5 space factor to the unit after any required space factor increases (due to 9 9
Space other options) have been added.
9
4
On starter coil, one per contactor. Selection of this option requires the selection of
-17 Option -17R if an optional relay (89__) is also selected. 9
Surge Suppressor
On control relay, one per control relay. May only be used if optional relay (89__) is 9 5
-17R selected. Selection of this option requires selection of Option -17. 9
Omit Wiring -19 Omission of control wiring, except primary and secondary transformer wiring 9 9
6
Control Circuit Fuse -21 One (1) control circuit fuse for separate control 9 9
Grounded Unit 9 9
-79GD Hinge mounted ground strap mounted on bottom hinge of unit door
Door 7
Unplated 9 9
-79L
Unit Load Copper
Select on all plug-in units in section with vertical unit load ground bus
Connector
-79LT Tin Plated 9 9
8
Copper
- Copper Alloy 9 9
9
-79U Copper unit grounds stabs may be used with steel vertical ground bus. Unplated 9 9
Unit Ground Stab Select on plug-in units in sections with vertical plug-in ground bus Copper
Tin Plated
-79UT Copper
9 9 10
Elapsed Time
-85T Six digit non-resettable meter with tenths, mounted in control station 9
Meter[1]
-89CF40 4 N.O. 2 1
3 N.O. / 1 SC 11
-89CF31 2 1
Bulletin 700CF 4-pole relay N.C.
2 N.O. / 2
-89CF22 2 1
N.C.
12
-89CF40A [6] On-delay 4 N.O. 2 1
with (1)
NOTC and (1) 2 N.O. / 2
-89CF22A [6] Bulletin 700CF 4-pole relay with time NCTO contact N.C. 2 1 13
attachment
-89CF40B [6] 0.3 - 30 seconds Off-delay 4 N.O. 2 1
with (1)
NOTO and (1) 2 N.O. / 2
-89CF22B [6] N.C. 2 1
Unwired Control
NCTC contact
Instantaneous 14
-89CF40C [6] On-delay 4 N.O. 2 1
Relay [2],[3],[4],[5] with (1)
Contacts
NOTC and (1)
-89CF22C [6]
2 N.O. / 2 2 1 15
Bulletin 700CF 4-pole relay with time NOTO N.C.
attachment contact
-89CF40D [6] 1.8 - 180 seconds Off-delay 4 N.O. 2 1
with (1)
-89CF22D [6] NCTO and (1) 2 N.O. / 2 2 1 16
NCTC contact N.C.
-89CF40L [6] 4 N.O. 2 1
Bulletin 700CF 4-pole relay with mechanical latch
-89CF22L [6] attachment 2 N.O. / 2 2 1 17
N.C.
Bulletin 700HA 3PDT relay (Contacts rated 240VAC, 3 N.O. / 3
-89HA33 [6] max.) N.C. 2 1
[1] Elapsed Time Meter (85T) requires one (1) N.O. auxiliary contact, option 90. Mounts in position normally used for two (2) pilot devices, limiting the maximum number of pilot
devices allowed.
[2] Not available with E3 electronic overload relays (7FEC) or E1 Plus electronic overload relay with DeviceNet Communications (7FEE_D).
[3] Requires 0.5 space factor Size 1 Bulletin 2106 and 2107 and size 2 Bulletin 2113 units to be increased to 1.0 space factor.
[4] Requires Size 3 Bulletin 2113 unit to be 1.5 space factor when specified with control circuit transformer (Option 6P or 6XP).
[5] Requires Size 4 Bulletin 2113 unit to be 1.5 space factor when specified with E1 Plus overload relay (Option 7FEE_), and control circuit transformer (Option 6P or 6XP).
[6] Requires Size 2 Bulletin 2107 unit to be 1.5 space factor when specified with control circuit transformer (Option 6P or 6XP).

164
2
Option FVR FVNR Delivery
Option Description
Number 2106, 2107 2112, 2113 Program
3 9
-90[2] NORMALLY OPEN One (1) N.O. auxiliary contact on each contactor or starter
9
9
4 -91 [2] NORMALLY CLOSED One (1) N.C. auxiliary contact on each contactor or starter
9
NORMALLY OPEN One (1) N.O. auxiliary contact
-98[3] 9 9
5 Auxiliary Contacts [1] (operates with movement of external handle only)
NORMALLY OPEN, One (1) N.O. auxiliary contact
-98X[4] mounted internally in circuit breaker
9 9
NORMALLY CLOSED, One (1) N.C. auxiliary contact
-99[3] (operates with movement of external handle only)
9 9
NORMALLY CLOSED, One (1) N.C. auxiliary contact
-99X[4] mounted internally in circuit breaker
9 9
SC
T-Handles -111 T-handle latch on unit door 9 9
-751D Adhesive Brady Datab type markers at each end of control wire. Not available in Canada 9 9
Control Wire Markers -751HS Heat shrink type wire marker 9 9
-751S Sleeve type wire marker 9 9
Legend plates printed in French are available on all pilot devices. Specify 860F when 9 9
French Legend Plates -860F pilot device option is selected.
9 Spanish Legend Legend plates printed in Spanish are available on all pilot devices. Specify 860S when
-860S 9 9
Plates pilot device option is selected.
Plated steel nameplate screws. Provided
10 – Door Nameplate Screws when cardholder or nameplates are not 9 9
selected.
1.125'' x 3.625'' plastic card holders with 9 9
Unit Door Card Holder for Unit Doors blank cards
Nameplate[5] – Acrylic plate (available in U.S. only), white 9 9
11 1.125” x 3.625” engraved 3-line or 4-line
with black letters or black with white letters SC-II
nameplate Phenolic plate, white with black letters,
– black with white letters or red with white 9 9
letters
12 Stainless Steel 9 9
Nameplate Screws – Stainless steel nameplate screws for unit nameplates (2 per unit) SC
Export Packing Below – Container is skid mounted and packaged in clear plastic. Packing is not watertight or 9 9
SC
13 Deck waterproof. Considerations should be taken if extended storage is expected. (+2 days)
[1] Multiple auxiliary contacts must be group coded by adding the second and third digit of the special feature number to the base digit “9” (e.g., 90-91-98X-99, when group coded,
reads 9018X9)
[2] Auxiliary contacts are wired to terminal blocks. If the number of auxiliary contact wiring points exceeds the number of terminals available in the unit, remaining auxiliary contacts
will be unwired. See auxiliary contact options table below for allowable auxiliary contact configurations.
14 [3] The maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be supplied is two (2), in any combination. Contacts actuate with movement of unit handle to ON or OFF position only.
Contacts are not designed to actuate as the result of a circuit breaker trip. For such applications, auxiliary contacts mounted internally (98X or 99X) must be selected.
[4] Only available for Bulletin 2107 and 2113. The maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be supplied internally is two (2) N.O. and two (2) N.C.
[5] Blank nameplates will be supplied when no engraving is selected or provided. Letter height for 3-line nameplates will be 0.22.” Letter height for 4-line nameplates will be 0.18.”
15 All text will be centered horizontally and vertically.
Auxiliary Contact Option 165
Auxiliary Contact Bulletin 2106 and 2112 Bulletin 2107and 2113 Bulletin 2107 Bulletin 2113 Bulletin 2113
Catalog String Size 1 Size 1 and 2 Size 3 Size 3 Size 4
16 90 9 9 9 9 9
91 9 9 9 9 9
900 9 9 9 9 9
901 9 9 9 9 9
17 911 9 9 N/A 9 9
9000 9 9 N/A 9 9
9001 9 9 N/A 9 9
9011 9 9 N/A 9 9
9111 9 9 N/A N/A N/A
90000 9 9 N/A 9 9
90001 9 9 N/A 9 9
90011 9 9 N/A 9 9
90111 9 9 N/A N/A N/A
91111 9 9 N/A N/A N/A

Combination Soft Starter (SMC) Units
Bulletin 2154H and 2155H 2
Soft Starter (SMC) Units - SMC-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
These combination soft starter units are designed especially for use in 3
CENTERLINE motor control centers. Each unit contains a
microprocessor-controlled motor controller, control circuit transformer
and either a fusible disconnect switch or circuit breaker. 4
Features include:
• Three starting modes: soft start, kick start and current limit
• Electronic overload protection with selectable overload trip class 5
• Motor and system diagnostics
• Configurable auxiliary contacts
• Soft stop 6
• Integrated bypass contactor
Each unit is provided as a NEMA Class 1, Type B unit with terminal
blocks mounted within the controller unit for connection of remote pilot 7
devices, input signals, etc. Bulletins 2154H and 2155H are available in
NEMA Type 1, NEMA Type 1 with gasket and NEMA Type 12 plug-in
construction. Class J time delay fuses provide branch circuit protection on 8
Bulletin 2154H units. Instantaneous or a variety of inverse time (thermal
magnetic) circuit breakers provide branch circuit protection on 2155H
units. A variety of options such as isolation contactors, auxiliary contacts,
pilot devices, protective modules, DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (DSA), etc., 9
can be added to Bulletin 2154H and 2155H units. Extra space may be
required to accommodate the optional equipment.
Bulletin 2154J and 2155J 10
Soft Starter (SMC) Units - SMC-Flex. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
These combination soft starter units are designed especially for use in
CENTERLINE motor control centers. Each unit contains a 11
microprocessor-controlled motor controller, control circuit transformer
and either a fusible disconnect switch or circuit breaker.
Features include:
• Seven standard modes of operation: soft start, current limit start, dual ramp,
full voltage, linear speed acceleration, preset slow speed and soft stop 12
• Optional modes of operation: pump control, Smart Motor Braking ™,
Accu-Stop™ and slow speed with braking
• Integral SCR bypass 13
• Electronic overload protection with selectable trip class
• Full metering and diagnostics
• Four programmable auxiliary contacts
• DPI communication
• LCD display 14
• Keyboard programming
Each unit is provided as a NEMA Class 1, Type B unit with terminal
blocks mounted within the controller unit for connection of remote pilot 15
devices, input signals, etc. Bulletins 2154J and 2155J are available in
NEMA Type 1, NEMA Type 1 with gasket and NEMA Type 12
construction. Each unit door includes a window for viewing the LCD
display, except when door mounted human interface is provided. Class J
time delay fuses provide branch circuit protection on 5A-361A Bulletin 16
2154J units. Class L time delay fuses provide branch circuit protection on
480A Bulletin 2154J units. Instantaneous or varieties of inverse time
(thermal magnetic) circuit breakers provide branch circuit protection on
2155J units. A variety of options such as isolation contactors, auxiliary 17
contacts, pilot devices, protective modules, human interface modules,
DeviceNet communication etc. can be added to Bulletin 2154J and 2155J
units. In some cases, extra space may be required to accommodate the
optional equipment.
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2154H and 2155H
2 Combination Soft Starter (SMC-3) Unit
• Bulletin 150 SMC-3 Solid State Controller
3 • Three starting modes: soft start, kick start and current limit
• 3A - 135A rating
4 • Built-in bypass contactor and overload relay
5
169
2154H B - A A B - 38 - **
2155H B - A A B - 38CA - **
Horsepower/kW Code and
Bulletin Number Wiring Type Current Rating NEMA Enclosure Type Line Voltage Options
Disconnecting Means
9 169A
169E 169G
Code Type Code Line Voltage Code Options
10 2154H
SMC-3 Soft Starter
(SMC) with Fusible 169C P 220 - 230V [1] See Options section
Disconnect A 240V beginning on Page 137.
Current
SMC-3 Soft Starter Code Rating 169D N 380V [1]
2155H (SMC) with Circuit A 3A Code NEMA Enclosure Type KN 400V [1]
11 Breaker B 9A NEMA Type 1 or Type 1
D 19A A with gasket with
I 415V [1]
E 25A external reset button B 480V
F 30A NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 C 600V
169B
K with gasket without
12 Code Wiring Type G 37A
external reset button
[1] Units at these voltages
H 43A are not UL or cUL listed.
B Type B NEMA Type 12 with
J 60A D external reset button
13 K 85A NEMA Type 12 without
L 108A J 169F
external reset button
M 135A Horsepower/kW Code and
Code Disconnecting Means
“38” Horsepower/kW code
14 2154H- “38” See tables on Page 206
“38__” Horsepower/kW code
2155H- “38CA” “__CA” Circuit Breaker Type
15 See tables on page 206 and 212
16
17
Units—2154H
Combination Soft Starter Motor Controller with Fusible Disconnect Switch (SMC-3) 2
• Unit includes power fuses. 3
• Isolation contactor is optional. Select on page 141. This addition or other options may require additional space, see
table below.
• Control circuit transformer included. 4
• Bulletin 150 SMC-3 controller includes (1) N.O. auxiliary contact set to NORMAL. The Bulletin 150-CF64 fan also is
included for 3-37A ratings. Integrated fan is standard for 43-135A ratings.
• Bulletin 150 SMC-3 controllers are cUL US (UL and cUL listed) as motor overload protective devices. An external 5
overload relay is not required for single motor applications.
• See page 237 for short circuit withstand ratings.
170
Nominal Horsepower (Nominal kW)
6
The horsepower and kW ratings shown are nominal. NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 NEMA Type 12
The limiting factor in the application and use of the SMC-3 is w/ gasket
Rating the output ampere rating. Disc. Delivery 7
(Amps) Rating Space Catalog Number Space Catalog Number Program
[4] [4]
220-230V [1] 240V 380V-415V [1] 480V 600V [2] Factor Factor
[3] Wiring Type B— [3] Wiring Type B— 8
Class I Class I
3 (0.25-0.55) 0.5 (0.37-1.1) 0.5-1.5 0.75-2 30 0.5 [5] 2154HB-AA_-_ 0.5 [5] 2154HB-AD_-_
9 (0.75-2.2) 0.75-2 (1.5-3.7) 2-5 3-7.5 30 0.5 [5] 2154HB-BA_-_ 0.5 [5] 2154HB-BD_-_ 9
19 (3.7) 3-5 (5.5-7.5) 7.5-10 10-15 30 0.5 [5] 2154HB-DA_-_ 0.5 [5] 2154HB-DD_-_
25 (5.5) 7.5 (11) 15 20 30 1.0 2154HB-EA_-_ 1.0 2154HB-ED_-_
30 (7.5) 10 (15) 20 25 60 1.0 2154HB-FA_-_ 1.0 2154HB-FD_-_ 10
37 — — (18.5) 25 30 60 1.0 2154HB-GA_-_ 1.0 2154HB-GD_-_ SC
43 (11) 15 (22) 30 40 60 1.5 2154HB-HA_-_ 2.0 2154HB-HD_-_
60 (15) 20 (30) 40 50 100 2154HB-JA_-_ 2154HB-JD_-_
85
(18.5-22) 25-30 (37) 50 — 100 1.5
2154HB-KA_-_
2.5
2154HB-KD_-_
11
— — (45) 60 60-75 200
108 (30) 40 (55) 75 100 200 2154HB-LA_-_ 2154HB-LD_-_
3.5 4.0
135 (37) 50 — 100 125 200 2154HB-MA_-_ 2154HB-MD_-_
[1] Units at these voltages are not UL or cUL listed. 12
[2] Delivery program is PE in U.S. and SC in Canada.
[3] See space factor tables below for NEMA Type 12 or for any NEMA Type when options are selected.
• Select the control voltage code from table on page 205 to identify the preferred control voltage (e.g., 2154HB-AAB). 13
• If horsepower rated, select the number from table on page 206 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower desired (e.g., 2154HB-AAB-35).
• If kW rated, select the number from table on page 206 that corresponds to the nominal kW desired (e.g., 2154HB-AAN-35K).
• The catalog numbers listed include an external reset button for the SMC-3. To order catalog numbers without the external reset button, replace the letter “A” with
the letter “K” (e.g., 2154HB-AK __-__) or replace the letter “D” with the letter “J” (e.g., 2154HB-AJ__-__).
[5] These units have horizontal operating handles, Bulletin 194R fused molded case switch, up to four Bulletin 800F pilot devices and one 10 pt. pull-apart control terminal
block (Type B-D only), with #16 AWG control wire only. 14
Bulletin 2154H Space Factors with Unit Options 171
Ratings
(Amps)
NEMA Type 1 and 1 with Gasket 15
Standard Unit With Option 13DSA_ With Option 13IC With Option 89CF With Option 13IC and 13DSA_ With Option 13IC and 89CF
3 - 19 0.5[1] 0.5[1] 0.5[1] 0.5[1],[2]
25 - 37 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5
43
60 1.5
1.5 1.5 1.5 16
[3] [3] [3] 2.0 2.0
85 1.5 1.5 1.5
108 - 135 3.5
[1] 1.0 space factor when -750, -750B, or -750S is selected. 17
[2] 1.0 space factor when -89CF_A, -89CF_B, -89CF_C, -89CF_D or -89CF_L specified.
[3] 2.0 space factor for 45kw at 380V-415V, 60HP at 480V and 60-75HP at 600V applications.
172
Ratings NEMA Type 12

(Amps) Standard Unit With Option 13DSA_ With Option 13IC With Option 89CF With Option 13IC and 13DSA_ With Option 13IC and 89CF
3 - 19 0.5[1] 0.5[1]
1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5
25 - 37 1.0 1.0
43 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
60 2.5 2.5 2.5
2.5 2.5 2.5
85 3.0 3.0 3.0
108 - 135 4.0
[1] 1.0 space factor when -750, -750B, or -750S is selected.
Units—2155H
2 Combination Soft Starter Motor Controller with Circuit Breaker (SMC-3)
• Isolation contactor is optional. Select on page 141. This addition or other options may require additional space.
3 • Control circuit transformer included.
• Bulletin 150 SMC-3 controller includes (1) N.O. auxiliary contact set to NORMAL. The Bulletin 150-CF64 fan also is included for
3-37A ratings. Integrated fan is standard for 43-135A ratings.
• Bulletin 150 SMC-3 controllers are cUL US (UL and cUL listed) as motor overload protective devices. An external overload relay is
4 not required for single motor applications.
• See page 237 for short circuit withstand ratings.
173
5 Nominal Horsepower (Nominal kW)
The horsepower and kW ratings shown are nominal. NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 with
The limiting factor in the application and use of the SMC-3 is the output ampere gasket NEMA Type 12
Rating rating. Delivery
(Amperes) [3] [3]
Program
Space Catalog Number Space Catalog Number
220 - 230V [1] 240V 380V-415V [1] 480V 600V [2] Factor Wiring Type B - Class Factor Wiring Type B -
I Class I
3 (0.25-0.55) 0.5 (0.37-1.1) 0.5-1.5 0.75-2 2155HB-AA_-__ 2155HB-AD_-__
9 (0.75-2.2) 0.75-2 (1.5-3.7) 2-5 3-7.5 2155HB-BA_-__ 2155HB-BD_-__
19 (3.7) 3-5 (5.5-7.5) 7.5-10 10-15 2155HB-DA_-__ 2155HB-DD_-__
1.0 1.0
25 (5.5) 7.5 (11) 15 20 2155HB-EA_-__ 2155HB-ED_-__
30 (7.5) 10 (15) 20 25 2155HB-FA_-__ 2155HB-FD_-__
9 37 — — (18.5) 25 30 2155HB-GA_-__ 2155HB-GD_-__
43 (11) 15 (22) 30 40 2155HB-HA_-__ 2.0 2155HB-HD_-__ SC
60 (15) 20 (30) 40 50 2155HB-JA_-__ 2.5 2155HB-JD_-__
1.5
10 85
(18.5-22) 25-30 (37) 50 —
2155HB-KA_-__ 3.0[4] 2155HB-KD_-__
— — (45) 60 60-75
108 (30) 40 (55) 75 100 2.5 2155HB-LA_-__ 2155HB-LD_-__
135 (37) 50 — 100 — 2.5 3.5
2155HB-MA_-__ 2155HB-MD_-__
11 135 — — — 125 3.0
[1] Units at these voltages are not UL listed or CSA certified.
[2] Delivery program is PE in the United States and SC in Canada.
• Select the control voltage code from the table on page 205 to identify the preferred control voltage (e.g. 2155HB-AAB)
12 • If horsepower rated, select the number from the table on page 206 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower desired (e.g. 2155HB-AAB-35)
• If kW rated, select the number from the table on page 206 that corresponds to the nominal kW desired (e.g. 2155HB-AAN-35K)
• Select the appropriate suffix from the table on page 212 to identify the circuit breaker type (e.g. 2155HB-AAB-35CA or 2155HB-AAN-35KCA)
• The catalog numbers listed include an external reset button for the SMC-3. To order catalog numbers without the external reset button, replace the letter “A” with the letter
13 “K” (e.g. 2155HB-AK__-__) or replace the letter “D” with the letter “J” (e.g. 2155HB-AJ__-__).
[4] Reduce by 0.5 space factor for 45kW at 380V-415V, 60HP at 480V and 60-75HP at 600V applications when circuit breaker suffix CT or CM is selected.
Bulletin 2155H Space Factors with Unit Options 174
NEMA Type 1 and 1 with Gasket
Ratings
14 With
(Amps) Standard Option With Option
With
Option
With
Option
With Option With Option With Option With Option With Option With Option
13IC and 13IC and
With Option
13HIC and 13HIC and 13HIC and 13HIC and 13IC 13HIC and 13IC
Unit 13HIC
13DSA_ 13IC 89CF 13DSA_ 89CF 13DSA_ 13IC 89CF and 13DSA_ and 89CF
3 - 37 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
1.5 1.5 1.5
15 43 1.5
1.5 1.5 1.5
1.5 1.5
60 1.5 1.5 1.5
2.0 2.0 2.0
85 1.5 [1] 1.5 [1] 1.5 [1] 1.5 [1] 1.5 [1] 1.5 [1]
[2] 2.5 3.5 2.5 3.5
108-135
16 108-135[3] 3.0 4.0 3.0 4.0
[1] 2.0 space factor for 45 kw at 380V-415V, 60HP at 480V and 60-75HP at 600V applications, when used with circuit breaker types CT or CM.
[2] Space factor when circuit breaker suffix ‘CA’ is selected; except for 125HP at 600V.
[3] Space factor when circuit breaker suffix ‘CT’ or ‘CM’ is selected, or when circuit breaker suffix ‘CA’ is selected for 125HP at 600V. 175
17 NEMA Type 12
Ratings With With With Option With Option With Option With Option With Option With Option With Option
(Amps) Standard Option With Option With Option Option 13IC and 13IC and 13HIC and 13HIC and 13HIC and 13HIC and 13IC 13HIC and 13IC
Unit 13HIC 13IC
13DSA_ 89CF 13DSA_ 89CF 13DSA_ 13IC 89CF and 13DSA_ and 89CF
3 - 37 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
43 2.0 2.0 2.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
60 2.5 2.5 3.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
85 3.0[1] 3.0[1] 3.5[1] 3.5[1] 3.0[1] 3.5[1] 3.5[1] 3.5[1] 4.0[1] 3.5[1] 4.0[1] 4.0[1]
108-135[2] 3.5 4.0 3.5 4.0
108-135[3] 3.5 4.5 3.5 4.5
[1] Reduce by 0.5 space factor for 45kW at 380V-415V, 60HP at 480V and 60-75HP at 600V applications when circuit breaker suffix CT or CM is selected.
[2] Space factor when circuit breaker suffix ‘CA’ is selected; except for 125HP at 600V.
[3] Space factor when circuit breaker ‘CT’ or ‘CM’ is selected, or when circuit breaker suffix ‘CA’ is selected for 125HP at 600V.
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2154J and 2155J
2
Combination Soft Starter (SMC-Flex) Unit
• Seven standard modes of operation: soft stop, current limit, dual ramp, full-voltage, linear speed
acceleration, preset slow speed and soft stop 3
• Optional modes of operation: pump control, Smart Motor Braking™, Accu-Stop™ and slow speed with
braking 4
• 5 - 480A rating
• Built-in bypass contactor and overload relay 5
• NEMA Class I, Type B wiring with terminals mounted in unit
6
176
8
2154J B - F108 L K B - 49 - **
9
2155J B - F108 L K B - 49CA - **
Bulletin Number Wiring Type Current Rating NEMA Type Line Voltage Options
Disconnecting Means 10
176A 176F
176H
Code Type Code Line Voltage
SMC-Flex Soft
176D
P 220 - 230V [1]
Code Options 11
2154J Starter (SMC) with 176C See Options section
Line A 240V beginning on Page 137.
Fusible Disconnect Current L
SMC-Flex Soft Code Rating
Connected N 380V [1]
2155J Starter (SMC) with F005 5A KN 400V [1] 12
Circuit Breaker F025 25A I 415V [1]
F043 43A B 480V
F060 60A C 600V 13
176B F085 85A [1] Units at these voltages
Code Wiring Type F108 108A are not UL or cUL listed.
B Type B F135 135A
176G
F201 201A 176E
14
F251 251A
Code NEMA Enclosure Type Code Disconnecting Means
F317 317A
NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 “49” Horsepower/kW code”
F361 361A K with gasket without 2154J-”49” See table on Page 206 15
F480 480A external reset button “49__” Horsepower/kW code
NEMA Type 12 without 2155J- “49CA “__CA” Circuit Breaker Type
J external reset button See tables on page 206 and 212
16
17
Units—2154J
2 Combination Soft Starter Motor Controller with Fusible Disconnect Switch (SMC-Flex) - Line Connected
3 • SMC-Flex units are configured as line connected, for Delta connected contact factory.
• Isolation contactor is optional. Select on page 141. The addition of this option may require additional space. See the
table below, for space factor of units with option.
• Unit includes power fuses.
4 • Control circuit transformer included.
• Bulletin 150 SMC-Flex controllers are C-UL US (UL and C-UL listed) as motor overload protective devices. An external
5 • See page 237 for short circuit withstand ratings.
177
The horsepower and kW ratings shown are nominal. NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/
NEMA Type 12
The limiting factor in the application and use of the SMC-Flex gasket
Rating is the output ampere rating. Disc. Delivery
(Amps) Rating [3] [3]
Program
Space Catalog Number Space Catalog Number
220-230V [1] 240V 380V-415V [1] 480V 600V [2] Factor Wiring Type B— Factor Wiring Type B—
Class It Class I
5 (0.25-1.1) 0.5-1 (0.37-2.2 0.5-3 0.75-3 30 2154JB-F005LK_-__ 2154JB-F005LJ_-__
25 (1.5-5.5) 1.5-7.5 (3.7-11) 5-15 5-20 30 2.0 2154JB-F025LK_-__ 2154JB-F025LJ_-__
43 (7.5-11) 10-15 (15-22) 20-30 25-40 60 2154JB-F043LK_-__ 3.0 2154JB-F043LJ_-__
9 60 (15) 20 (30) 40 50 100 2154JB-F060LK_-__ 2154JB-F060LJ_-__
SC
(18.5-22) 25-30 (37) 50 — 100 2.5
85 2154JB-F085LK_-__ 2154JB-F085LJ_-__
— — (45) 60 60-75 200 3.5
10 108 (30) 40 (55) 75 100 200
3.5
2154JB-F108LK_-__
4.0
2154JB-F108LJ_-__
135 (37) 50 — 100 125 200 2154JB-F135LK_-__ 2154JB-F135LJ_-__
201 (45-55) 60-75 (75-90) 125-150 150-200 400 [4]
2154JB-F201LK_-__ 2154JB-F201LJ_-__
6.0 , 20” W 6.0[4], 20” W
251 (75) 100 (110-132) 200 250 400 2154JB-F251LK_-__ 2154JB-F251LJ_-__
11 317 (90) 125 (150-160) 250 300 400
6.0[5],
2154JB-F317LK_-__
6.0[5],
2154JB-F317LJ_-__ SC-II
361 (110) 150 (185) 300 350 600 2154JB-F361LK_-__ 2154JB-F361LJ_-__
20” W, 20” D 20” W, 20” D
480 (132) 200 (200-250) 350-400 400-500 600 2154JB-F480LK_-__ 2154JB-F480LJ_-__
12 [2] Delivery program is PE-II in the United States and SC-II in Canada.
• Select the control voltage code from table on page 205 to identify the preferred control voltage (e.g., 2154JB-F108LKB).
• If horsepower rated, select the number from table on page 206 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower desired, (e.g., 2154JB-F108LKB-49).
13 • If kW rated, select the number from table on page 206 that corresponds to the nominal kW desired, (e.g., 2154JB-F108LKN-49K).
[4] Frame mounted unit, section does not have vertical wireway. The design of these units is optimized for bottom entry of load cables. For top entry of load cables, consult the
factory.
[5] Frame mounted unit, section does not have vertical wireway. Horizontal bus is 5” deeper than standard. The design of these units is optimized for bottom entry of load cables. For
top entry of load cables, consult the factory.
14 Bulletin 2154J Space Factors with Unit Options 178

Space Factor for NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ gasket Units Space Factor for NEMA Type 12 Units
Rating
(Amperes) Standard Unit With Option With Option 13IC With Options 13GF Standard Unit With Option With Option 13IC With Options 13GF
15 5
13GF and 13IC 13GF and 13IC
25 2.0
3.0
43
60
16 85
2.5
3.0 / 3.5 [1]
108 3.5 4.0
135 3.5 4.0
17 201
251
6.0, 20” W
6.0, 20” W
6.0, 20” W
6.0, 20” W
317 6.0, 20” W, 20” D 6.0, 25” W, 20” D 6.0, 20” W, 20” D 6.0, 25” W, 20” D
361 6.0, 20” W, 20” D 6.0, 25” W, 20” D 6.0, 20” W, 20” D 6.0, 25” W, 20” D
480 6.0, 20” W, 20” D 6.0, 30” W, 20” D 6.0, 20” W, 20” D 6.0, 30” W, 20” D
[1] Requires 3.5 space factor for 45kW @ 380-415V, 60HP @ 480V and 60-75HP @ 600V.
Units—2155J
Combination Soft Starter Motor Controller with Circuit Breaker (SMC-Flex) - Line Connected 2
• SMC-Flex units are configured as line connected, for Delta connected contact factory. 3
• Isolation contactor is optional. Select on page 141. The addition of this option may require additional space. See
page 135 for space factor of units with option.
• Control circuit transformer included. 4
• Bulletin 150 SMC-Flex controllers are C-UL US (UL and C-UL listed) as motor overload protective devices. An external
• See page 237 for short circuit withstand ratings. 5
179
The horsepower and kW ratings shown are nominal.
The limiting factor in the application and use of the NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ gasket NEMA Type 12 6
Rating SMC-Flex is the output ampere rating. Delivery
[3] Program
(Amps)
380V-415V Space Catalog Number [3] Space Catalog Number 7
220-230V [1] 240V [1] 480V 600V [2] Factor Wiring Type B— Factor Wiring Type B—
Class I Class I
5 (0.25-1.1) 0.5-1 (0.37-2.2) 0.5-3 0.75-3 2155JB-F005LK_-__ 2155JB-F005LJ_-__
25 (1.5-5.5) 1.5-7.5 (3.7-11) 5-15 5-20 2155JB-F025LK_-__ 2155JB-F025LJ_-__
8
43 (7.5-11) 10-15 (15-22) 20-30 25-40 2.0 2155JB-F043LK_-__ 3.0 2155JB-F043LJ_-__
60 (15) 20 (30) 40 50 2155JB-F060LK_-__ 2155JB-F060LJ_-__
SC 9
(18.5-22) 25-30 (37) 50-60 60-75
85 2155JB-F085LK_-__ 2155JB-F085LJ_-__
— — (45) — — 3.0[4]
108 (30) 40 (55) 75 100 2.5 2155JB-F108LK_-__
3.5
2155JB-F108LJ_-__ 10
135 (37) 50 — 100 125 2155JB-F135LK_-__ 2155JB-F135LJ_-__
201 (45-55) 60-75 (75-90) 125-150 150-200 2155JB-F201LK_-__ 2155JB-F201LJ_-__
6.0[5], 20” W 6.0[5], 20” W
251 (75) 100 (110-132) 200 250 2155JB-F251LK_-__ 2155JB-F251LJ_-__
317 (90) 125 (150-160) 250 300
6.0 [6]
2155JB-F317LK_-__
6.0 [6]
2155JB-F317LJ_-__ SC-II 11
361 (110) 150 (185) 300 350 2155JB-F361LK_-__ 2155JB-F361LJ_-__
20” W, 20” D 20” W, 20” D
480 (132) 200 (200-250) 350-400 400-500 2155JB-F480LK_-__ 2155JB-F480LJ_-__
[2] Delivery program is PE-II in the United States and SC-II in Canada.
[3] The catalog numbers listed are not complete: 12
• Select the control voltage code from table on page 205 to identify the preferred control voltage (e.g., 2155JB-F108LKB).
• If horsepower rated, select the number from table on page 206 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower desired, (e.g., 2155JB-F108LKB-49).
• If kW rated, select the number from table on page 206 that corresponds to the nominal kW desired, (e.g., 2155JB-F108LKN-49K).
• Select the appropriate suffix from the table on page 212 to identify the circuit breaker type (e.g. 2155JB-F108LKB-49CA or 2155JB-F108LKB-49KCA). 13
[4] Requires minimum of 3.5 space factors for 45kW @380-415 V when circuit breaker suffix ‘CT’ or ‘CM’ is selected.
[5] Frame mounted unit, section does not have vertical wireway next to this unit. The design of these units is optimized for bottom entry of load cables. For top entry of load cables,
consult the factory.
[6] Frame mounted unit, section does not have vertical wireway. Horizontal bus is 5” deeper than standard. The design of these units is optimized for bottom entry of load cables. For
top entry of load cables, consult the factory. 14
Bulletin 2155J Space Factors with Unit Options 180
Space Factor for NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ gasket Units Space Factor for NEMA Type 12 Units
Rating With With
With
With
With
With
With
With With
With
With
With With With 15
(Amperes) Standard Option Option Options Options Options Standard Options Options Options Options
Unit 13GF and Option 13GF and Options 13IC 13GF, 13IC Unit Option Option 13GF and Option 13GF and 13IC and 13GF, 13IC
13GF 13IC 13HIC and 13HIC 13GF 13IC 13HIC
13IC 13HIC and 13HIC 13IC 13HIC 13HIC and 13HIC
5
2.0
25
43 2.5 2.0
2.5 3.0
16
2.0
60 2.5
3.0 3.5
2.0 2.0 [1] 2.5
85
2.5 [2] 3.0[2] 3.5 [2]
17
108 - 135[3] 2.5 3.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 3.5 4.0
108 - 135[4] 3.0 3.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 3.5 4.0 3.5 4.0 4.5
201 6.0, 20” W 6.0, 20” W
251 6.0, 20” W 6.0, 20” W
317 6.0, 20” W, 20” D 6.0, 25” W, 20” D 6.0, 20” W, 20” D 6.0, 25” W, 20” D
361 6.0, 20” W, 20” D 6.0, 25” W, 20” D 6.0, 20” W, 20” D 6.0, 25” W, 20” D
480 6.0, 20” W, 20” D 6.0, 30” W, 20” D 6.0, 20” W, 20” D 6.0, 30” W, 20” D
[1] The following combination of option requires 2.5 space factors: Options 89_ and 4T_ or 4TL_ or 5TL and 9_ (without Option 13IC).
[2] Space factor for 45kW applications @ 380V-415V when circuit suffix ‘CT’ or ‘CM’ is selected.
[3] Space factor when circuit breaker suffix ‘CA’ is selected.
[4] Space factor when circuit breaker suffix ‘CT’ or ‘CM’ is selected.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Accessories for Combination Soft Starter (SMC) Units 2
181
3
[1] SMC-Flex
SMC-3
Option Delivery
Option Description
2154H
2155H
2154J
2155J
Number Program
4
START-STOP [4] 9 9 9[5] 9[5] -1
SC
STOP 9 9 9[5] 9[5] -1B 5
START-STOP and SOFT STOP Note: When SMC-Flex 9 [5] 9 [5] -1XA SC
START-STOP and PUMP STOP option 13XB is selected, the 9 [6] 9 [6] -1XB PE
only push button option that
Push Buttons [2],[3] START-STOP and SLOW SPEED can be selected is 1XB. 9 [5] 9 [5] -1XC SC 6
When SMC-Flex option
START-STOP and BRAKE
13XD is selected, the only 9 [7] 9 [7] -1XD
START-STOP and ACCU-STOP push button options that 9 [7] 9 [7] -1XE
START-STOP, SLOW SPEED and can be selected are 1XD,
PE 7
BRAKE 1XE, or 1XF 9 [7],[8] 9 [7],[8] -1XF
Blank 9 9 9 9 -2
1 hole—for one pilot device 9 9 9 9 -2A 8
Control Station Housing [9] 2 holes—for two pilot devices 9 9 9 9 -2B
3 holes—for three pilot devices 9 9 9 9 -2C
4 holes—for four pilot devices 9 -2D [10] SC 9
HAND-OFF-AUTO 9 9 9 9 -3
Selector Switch [2],[11], 9 9 9 9
OFF-ON -3E [3]
HAND-OFF-AUTO for Soft Stop [13] 9 9 -3XA 10
Selector Switch [2], [12] HAND-OFF-AUTO for Pump Control 9 9 -3XB PE
HAND-OFF-AUTO for Smart Motor Braking [14] 9 9 -3XD SC
[1] Pilot devices for 0.5 space factor units are Bulletin 800F. A minimum of 1.0 space factor is required for SMC-3 units when more than four pilot devices are required.
[2] Maximum one (1) switch per unit. Push buttons may not be used in conjunction with selector switches. When three (3) or less pilot devices are selected, Bulletin 800T pilot 11
devices are supplied, except selector switches are Bulletin 800H devices. Generally, when more than three (3) pilot devices are selected, Bulletin 800F pilot devices are supplied.
For 0.5 space factor units, Bulletin 800F pilot devices are supplied. Maximum four (4) pilot devices on 0.5 space factor units. Only one push button or selector switch option may
be selected.
[3] Mutually exclusive with 13GC, 13GD, 13GE, 13GR and 13DSA_.
[4] Two (2) Bulletin 800F pilot lights will be supplied when two (2) pilot lights are selected in conjunction with two (2) push buttons.
[5] Can only be used with standard starting mode for SMC-Flex.
12
[6] Can only be used with Pump Control option 13XB for SMC-Flex.
[7] Can only be used with Smart Motor Braking, Accu-Stop and Slow Speed with Braking option 13XD for SMC-Flex.
[8] Option 1XF cannot be used with ON/OFF and fault pilot lights for SMC-Flex.
[9] Available only on units without pilot devices. Holes are for Bulletin 800T pilot devices when unit is 1.0 space factor and larger. Holes are for Bulletin 800F pilot devices when unit
is 0.5 space factor.
13
[10] Not available for 1.0 space factor and larger units.
[11] Selector switches 3 and 3E are not available when option 13XB or 13XD is selected.
[12] These selector switches can only be used with corresponding control options (e.g. -3XA used only with standard starting mode, -3XB used only for 13XB and 3XD only used for
13XD). 14
[13] Selector switch option 3XA functions when SMC-Flex is operating in Soft Stop mode. Consult factory if SMC-Flex will be operating in Preset Slow Speed mode.
[14] Selector switch option 3XD functions when SMC-Flex is operating in Smart Motor Braking mode. Consult factory if SMC-Flex will be operating in Accu-Stop or Slow Speed
Braking mode.
15
16
17

Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Combination Soft Starter (SMC) Units
To select pilot light lens color, add letter(s) to the option number: A = amber, B = blue, C = clear, G = green,
R = red, W = white (e.g., 4RG is a red ON and green OFF pilot light). Clear and white are not available for
3 Bulletin 800T LED type pilot lights. Clear is not available on Bulletin 800F LED pilot lights. White is not
available on Bulletin 800F incandescent pilot lights.
182
4 SMC-3 [1] SMC-Flex
Option Delivery
Option Description
2154H
2155H
2154J
2155J
Number Program
5
ON [4] 9 9 9 [5] 9 [5] -4_
Standard type ON-OFF [2] 9 9 9 [5]
9 [5] -4_ _
FAULT 9[6] 9[6] 9 9 -4T_
ON [4] 9 9 9 [5] 9 [5] -4L_
LED type ON-OFF [2] 9 9 9 [5] 9 [5] -4L_ _
Pilot Lights (Transformer 9 9
Type for 800T, Full-voltage
FAULT 9[6] 9 [6] -4TL_
SC
for 800F) [2],[3] ON [4] 9 9 9 [5] 9 [5] -5_
Push-To-Test Standard
ON-OFF [2] 9 9 9 [5] 9 [5] -5_ _
Type
FAULT 9[6] 9 [6] 9 9 -5T_
ON [4] 9 9 9 [5] 9 [5] -5L_
9 9 9
Push-To-Test LED Type ON-OFF [2] 9 [5] 9 [5] -5L_ _
FAULT 9 [6]
9 [6] 9 9 -5TL_
10 [1] Pilot devices for 0.5 space factor units are Bulletin 800F. A minimum of 1.0 space factor is required for SMC-3 units when more than four pilot devices are required.
[2] Select one (2) N.O. auxiliary contacts (option 900) for SMC-3 units with ON light and DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (option 13DSA_) when isolation contactor (option 13IC) is not
selected. Select one (1) N.O. auxiliary contacts (option 90) for SMC-3 units with ON light and DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (option 13DSA_) and when isolation contactor (option
13IC) is selected.
[3] When three (3) or less pilot devices are selected, Bulletin 800T pilot devices are supplied, except selector switches are Bulletin 800H devices. Generally, when more than three
11 (3) pilot devices are selected, Bulletin 800F pilot devices are supplied. For 0.5 space factor units, Bulletin 800F pilot devices are supplied. Maximum four (4) pilot devices on 0.5
space factor units.
[4] Select one (1) N.O. and one (1) N.C. auxiliary contact(option 901) when isolation contactor (option 13IC) is not selected. Select one (1) N.C. auxiliary contact(option 91) when
isolation contactor (option 13IC) is selected. If used with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (option 13DSA_), select isolation contactor (option 13IC) and (2) N.O. and one (1) N.C.
auxiliary contact(option 9001)
[5] Select (1) N.O. auxiliary contact (Option 90) when ON pilot light is selected for SMC-Flex units. Select (1) N.O. and (1) N.C. auxiliary contact (Option 90 and 91) when ON-OFF pilot
12 lights are selected for SMC-Flex units.
[6] Not available with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (Option 13DSA3).
13
14
15
16
17

184
Option SMC-3 SMC-Flex Delivery
Option
Number
Description
2154H 2155H 2154J 2155J Program 3
3A-37A 9 9
43A-85A 9 9
480V MAX 108A-135A 9 9 SC 4
5A-85A 9 9
9 9
-13D Line Side
108A-480A
3A-37A 9 9
5
Protective module
contains capacitors 43A-85A 9 9
and metal oxide PE in U.S.,
600V 108A-135A 9 9
varistors (MOVs)
5A-85A 9 9
SC in Canada 6
Protective which protect the
Modules internal power 108A-480A 9 9
circuitry from 43A-85A 9 9
severe electrical
108A-135A 9 9
7
transients and high 480V MAX SC
electrical noise 5A-85A 9 9
108A-480A 9 9
-13E Load Side
43A-85A 9 9
8
108A-135A 9 9 PE in U.S.,
600V
5A-85A 9 9 SC in Canada
108A-480A 9 9 9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

185
SMC-3 SMC-Flex
3 Option Delivery
2154H
2155H
Option Description
2154J
2155J
Number Program
DeviceNet Starter 9 9 9[2] 9[2]

4 Auxiliary (mutually
-13DSA2 (4) 120VAC inputs and (2) 120VAC outputs for DeviceNet.
exclusive) [1] -13DSA3 (4) 24VDC inputs and (2) 120VAC outputs for DeviceNet. 9 9 9[2] 9[2]
ControlNet communication module.
5 -13GC Mounted internal to SMC-Flex. 9 9
Communication Modules Includes one 1786-TPYS tap, supplied loose for customer mounting.
-13GD DeviceNet communication module. Mounted internal to SMC-Flex. 9 9 SC
(mutually exclusive)
Ethernet communication module.
-13GE Mounted internal to SMC-Flex. 9 9
-13GR Single Point Remote I/O 9 9
Ground Fault Current Provides ground fault core balance current transformer for ground fault
-13GF 9 9
Transformer indication
-13HBA0 Blank Cover. No 9 9
functionality Door mounted in bezel. Cable to SMC Flex unit
LCD display, full numeric included. No window on door.
-13HBA3 keypad Available on NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 with gasket 9 9
Human Interface Module LCD display programmer only.
(HIM) -13HBA5 9 9
9 (mutually exclusive) only
LCD display, full numeric Door mounted. HIM is not removable from bezel.
-13HC3S 9 9
keypad One HIM required per SMC Flex unit. No window
LCD display programmer on door.
10 -13HC5S only Available on NEMA 12 only. 9 9
3A-19A 9
25A-37A 9
SC
43A-60A 9
11 85A-108A 9
Provides unit with high interrupting
capacity fuses for increased short circuit Class J - Time 135A 9
High Interrupting Capacity withstand rating. 5A 9
Delay
Fuses (Class J - Time -13HIC 25A 9
Delay) [3] See page 237 for short circuit withstand 43A-60A 9
12 ratings of Bulletin 2155J units with this
option. 85A-108A 9
135A-201A 9
251A-361A 9
13 Class L - Time
Delay
480A 9
[1] Not available with push buttons, selector switch (option 3E) and control relays (option 89C_ or 89P_). The addition of DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (option 13DSA_) may increase
space factor of 2154H and 2155H SMC-3 units. See page 131 and page 132. Select (1) N.O. auxiliary contact (Option 90) when used with Bulletin 2154J and 2155J.
[2] When specifying options 13DSA2 or 13DSA3 with Bulletin 2154J and 2155J units, option 13GD must also be specified.
14 [3] Adding this option may require additional space for Bulletin 2155H units, see page 132 for space factors of units with this option. Adding this option may require additional
space for Bulletin 2155J units, see page 135 for space factors of units with this option.
15
16
17

Multiple option numbers are separated by a dash and added to the base catalog number in ascending order 2
. 186
Description SMC-3 SMC-Flex
Option Delivery 3
2154H
2155H
Option
2154J
2155J
Number Program
3A-19A 9 9 9 9
24A, 25A 9 9 9 9 4
30A-37A 9 9
43A 9 9 9 9
54A-60A 9 9 9 9 5
Add Isolation Contactor -13IC Provides unit with Bulletin 100 isolation contactor. 85A 9 9 9 9 SC
[1]
97A-108A 9 9 9 9
135A-180A 9 9 9 9 6
201A-251A 9 9
317A-361A 9 9
480A-500A 9 9 7
This starting mode group provides soft start, soft stop, current limit,
Standard Starting Mode full voltage, kick start, preset slow speed, linear speed start and stop
[2] [3] — 5A-480A 9 9
, and dual ramp. Refer to SMC-Flex Selection Guide, Publication
150-SG009x-EN-P, for detailed description of modes of operation. 8
This starting mode provides pump start and stop in addition to soft
start, soft stop, current limit, full voltage and kick start.
Pump Control [2],[4] -13XB Refer to SMC-Flex Selection Guide, Publication 150-SG009x-EN-P, for 5A-480A 9 9
detailed description of modes of operation. 9
5A-85A 9 9
108A 9 9
Braking Control This starting mode provides Smart Motor Braking, Accu-Stop and 135A 9 9 PE 10
Smart Motor Braking™, Slow Speed Braking in addition to soft start, soft stop, current limit, 201A 9 9
Accu-Stop™ and Slow -13XD full voltage, kick start and preset slow speed.
9 9
Refer to SMC-Flex Selection Guide, Publication 150-SG009x-EN-P, for 251A
Speed Braking [2],[5] detailed description of modes of operation. 317A 9 9
9 9
361A
480A 9 9
11
[1] Adding this option may increase the space factor of the unit.
• For Bulletin 2154H, see page 131, for Bulletin 2155H, see page 132.
• For Bulletin 2154J, see page 134, for Bulletin 2155J, see page 135.
[2] Soft Start, Pump Stop, Smart Motor Braking, Accu-Stop and slow speed with braking are not intended to be used as an emergency stop 12
[3] Push Button option 1XA and 1XC and selector switch option 3XA can only be used with standard starting mode and are the only pushbutton and selector switch options that can
be selected with standard starting mode.
[4] Push Button option 1XB and selector switch option 3XB can only be used with Pump Control (Option 13XB) and are the only pushbutton and selector switch options that can be
selected with Pump Control.
[5] Push Button option 1XD, 1XE and 1XF and selector switch option 3XD can only be used with Smart Motor Braking, Accu-Stop and Slow Speed with Braking (Option 13XD) and are 13
the only pushbutton and selector switch options that can be selected for Smart Motor Braking, Accu-Stop and Slow Speed with Braking (Option 13XD).
14
15
16
17

190

3 Option
Number
Description
2154H 2155H 2154J 2155J Program
Surge Suppressor -17R Provides surge suppressor across coil of unwired control relays (option 89CF or 89P) 9 9 9 9
Omit Wiring -19 Omission of control wiring 9 9 9 9
4 Grounded Unit Hinge mounted ground strap mounted on bottom hinge of unit door. Unit door hinge
Door -79GD grounding strap for IEC requirements. 9 9 9 9
Unplated
5 Unit Load
-79L copper 9 9 9 9
Specify on all plug-in units in sections with vertical unit load ground bus
Connector Tin plated SC
-79LT copper 9 9 9 9
— Copper alloy 9 9 9 9
-79U Specify on plug-in units in sections with vertical plug-in ground bus. Copper Unplated 9 9 9 9
Unit Ground Stab copper
unit ground stabs also may be used with steel vertical ground bus.
-79UT Tin plated 9 9 9 9
copper
-89CF40 4 N.O. 9 9 9 9
3 N.O. and 1
-89CF31 Bulletin 700CF 9 9 9 9
4-Pole Relay N.C.
2 N.O. and 2
-89CF22 9 9 9 9
N.C.
9 -89CF40A On Delay 4 N.O. 9 9 9 9
Bulletin 700CF
-89CF22A 4-Pole Relay with Time Includes (1) NOTC and 2 N.O. and 2
9 9 9 9
Attachment (1) NCTO Contact N.C.
10 -89CF40B Off Delay 4 N.O. 9 9 9 9 SC
0.3 to 30 seconds Includes (1) NOTO and
-89CF22B 2 N.O. and 2 9 9 9 9
(1) NCTC Contact Instantaneous Contacts N.C.
-89CF40C On Delay (Instantaneous contacts on 4 N.O. 9 9 9 9
Bulletin 700CF Includes (1) NOTC and Bulletin 700CF relays are 2 N.O. and 2
11 Unwired Control -89CF22C 4-Pole Relay with Time (1) NCTO Contact non-convertible Bulletin N.C.
9 9 9 9
Relay [1] Attachment 700P relays have
-89CF40D Off Delay 4 N.O. 9 9 9 9
instantaneous contacts that
1.8 to 180 seconds Includes (1) NOTO and are convertible from 2 N.O. and 2
-89CF22D (1) NCTC Contact 9 9 9 9
normally open to normally N.C.
12 -89CF40L Bulletin 700CF closed.) 4 N.O. 9 9 9 9
4-Pole Relay with Mechanical Latch 2 N.O. and 2 PE
-89CF22L Attachment 9 9 9 9
N.C.
-89P2 2 N.O. 9 9
Bulletin 700P Relay SC
13 -89P4 4 N.O. 9 9
-89PT Bulletin 700P with Pneumatic Time Delay None 9 9
-89PT2 Attachment (on/off delay) with two (2) timed 2 N.O. 9 9
-89PT4 contacts (0.1-60 sec) 4 N.O. 9 9 PE
14 Bulletin 700P Relay with Mechanical Latch
-89PL2 Attachment 2 N.O. 9 9
[1] Mutually exclusive with DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (option 13DSA_). The addition of unwired control relay (option 89CF) may increase the space factor of 2154H SMC-3 units.
15 See page 131.
16
17

191
Option
Number
Description
2154H 2155H 2154J 2155J Program 3
Normally Open—1 N.O. auxiliary contact mounted on isolation contactor (13IC)
-90
when supplied 9[1] 9 [1] 9 [2] 9 [2]
-91
Normally Closed—1 N.C. auxiliary contact mounted on isolation contactor (13IC)
9 [1] 9 [1] 9 [2] 9 [2]
4
when supplied
Auxiliary Normally Open—1 N.O. mounted on operating mechanism (operates with
-98 [3] 9 9 9 9
Contacts
Type B Wiring
movement of external handle only) SC 5
-98X [4] Normally Open—1 N.O. mounted internally. Circuit breaker units only. 9 9
Normally Closed—1 N.C. mounted on operating mechanism (operates with
-99 [3] 9 9 9 9
movement of external handle only) 6
-99X [4] Normally Closed—1 N.C. mounted internally. Circuit breaker units only. 9 9
[1] The following apply to auxiliary contacts for Bulletin 2154H and 2155H SMC-3 units:
• Bulletin 150 SMC-3 controller includes one N.O. auxiliary contact set to NORMAL (unless otherwise specified below). 7
• When isolation contactor (option -13IC) is not selected, the maximum number of auxiliary contacts is two (2) in the following combinations (2) N.O. or (1) N.O. and (1) N.C.
The auxiliary contacts are side-mounted on the SMC-3 and set to NORMAL. The standard SMC-3 N.O. auxiliary contact is set for AT SPEED and is not used.
• When isolation contactor (option -13IC) is selected, the maximum number auxiliary contacts is four (4) in any combination (except (3) N.C, (4) N.C., or (1) N.O. & (3) N.C.).
These auxiliary contacts are on the isolation contactor. The standard SMC-3 N.O. auxiliary contact is set for NORMAL and is used to control the isolation contactor. 8
• When ON pilot light or DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (option -13DSA_) is selected in SMC-3 units, without an isolation contactor and without any additional auxiliary contacts,
the standard SMC-3 N.O. auxiliary contact will be used and set to NORMAL.
• When ON pilot light or DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (option -13DSA_) is selected in SMC-3 units, without an isolation contactor, only one additional N.O. or N.C. contact may
be selected, select (2) N.O. auxiliary contacts (option -900) or (1) N.O. and (1) N.C. auxiliary contacts (option -901). The auxiliary contacts are side-mounted on the SMC-3 and 9
set to NORMAL. The standard SMC-3 N.O. auxiliary contact is set for AT SPEED and is not used.
• When ON pilot light and DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (option -13DSA_) are selected in SMC-3 units, select (2) N.O. auxiliary contacts (option -900). Without an isolation
contactor (option-13IC) the auxiliary contacts are side-mounted on the SMC-3 and set to NORMAL. The standard SMC-3 N.O. auxiliary contact is set for AT SPEED and is not
used. 10
• When ON-OFF pilot lights are selected on SMC-3 units, select (1) N.O. auxiliary contact and (1) N.C. auxiliary contact (option -901). Without an isolation contactor
(option-13IC) the auxiliary contacts are side-mounted on the SMC-3 and set to NORMAL. The standard SMC-3 N.O. auxiliary contact is set for AT SPEED and is not used.
• When ON-OFF pilot lights and DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (option -13DSA_) are selected on SMC-3 units, select (2) N.O. and (1) N.C. auxiliary contact (option -9001). Note:
this number of auxiliary contacts requires the selection of an isolation contactor (option -13IC).
[2] The following apply to auxiliary contacts for Bulletin 2154J and 2155J SMC Flex units:
• When isolation contactor (Option 13IC) is selected, the maximum number of auxiliary contacts is four (4) in any combination (except (3) N.C., (4) N.C., or (1) N.O. & (3) N.C.). 11
• When isolation contactor (Option 13IC) is not selected, the maximum number of auxiliary contacts is four (4) in the following combinations: (2) N.O. / (2) N.C., (3) N.O. / (1)
N.C., (4) N.O. or (4) N.C.
• When ON pilot light is selected on SMC-Flex units, select (1) N.O. auxiliary contact (option -90).
• When ON-OFF pilot lights are selected on SMC-Flex units, select (1) N.O. and (1) N.C. auxiliary contact (option -90 and -91).
• When DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (-13DSA_) is selected on SMC-Flex units, select (1) N.O. auxiliary contact (option -90).
[3] The maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be supplied is two (2), in any combination. Contacts actuate with movement of unit handle to ON or OFF position only.
12
Contacts are not designed to actuate as a result of a circuit breaker trip. For such applications, auxiliary contacts “mounted internally” (98X or 99X) must be selected. Auxiliary
contacts are supplied unwired.
[4] The maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be supplied internally is (2) N.O. and (2) N.C. (form C). Internal auxiliary contacts (98X or 99X) are wired to a 3-point
unmounted terminal block. 13
14
15
16
17

192

3 Option
Number
Description
2154H 2155H 2154J 2155J Program
T-Handle -111 T-Handle latch on unit door 9 9 9 9
4 — Type MTW (TEW) 90° C #16 AWG copper wire, VW1 rated 9 9 9 9
-750 Type MTW (TEW) 90° C #14 AWG (tinned) copper wire, VW1 rated 9 [2]
9 [2] 9 9 SC
Control Circuit Wiring [1]
5 -750B #14 AWG tinned, MTW, 90° C copper wire, VW1 rated and tinned
power wire, including stab wires. 9 [2] 9 [2] 9 9
-750S Type SIS 90° C #14 AWG (tinned) copper wire 9 [2]
9 [2] 9 9
Control Circuit Ring Lugs -750RL [3] Insulated ring lugs for control wires where possible 9 9 9 9 SC (+2 days)
Control Circuit Spade Lugs -750SL [3] Insulated spade lugs for control wires where possible 9 9 9 9
-751D Adhesive Brady Datab type markers at each end of control wire. Not 9 9 9 9 SC
available in Canada.
Control Wire Markers
-751HS Heat shrink type marker at each end of control wire 9 9 9 9 SC (+2 days)
-751S Sleeve type marker at each end of control wire 9 9 9 9
Shunt Trip -754 [4] For tripping circuit breakers from remote 120V, 60Hz source 9 9
French Legend Plates -860F Legend plates printed in French are available on all pilot devices. 9 9 9 9
9 Specify 860F when pilot device option is selected.
SC
Legend plates printed in Spanish are available on all pilot devices.
Spanish Legend Plates -860S Specify 860S when pilot device option is selected. 9 9 9 9
10 Door Nameplate
when cardholder or nameplates are not 9 9 9 9
Screws
selected.
Card Holder for Unit 1.125'' x 3.625'' plastic card holders with
Doors blank cards 9 9 9 9
11 Unit Door Nameplates — Acrylic plate (available in U.S. only).

1.125” × 3.625” Lettering is white with black letters or black 9 9 9 9
engraved with white letters.
SC-II
3-line or 4-line Phenolic plate. Lettering is white with black
nameplate letters, black with white letters, or red with 9 9 9 9
12 white letters.
Stainless Steel Nameplate — Stainless steel nameplate screws for unit nameplates (2 per unit) 9 9 9 9
Screws
Container is skid mounted and packaged in clear plastic. Packing is not
13 Export Packing Below Deck — watertight or waterproof. Considerations should be taken if extended
storage is expected.
9 9 9 9 SC-II (+2 days)
[1] Options for factory wiring of control circuits. Device and component internal wiring and wiring that could affect operation or certification (e.g., insulation temperature class, EMC
shielding requirements, communication requirements, UL, cUL, CSA, CE) are not included.
14 [2] Requires 0.5 space factor SMC-3 units to be increased to 1.0 space factor.
[3] Examples of where insulated lugs cannot be used include SMC terminals, Bulletin 800F pilot devices, 700CF relays, disconnects/circuit breakers and areas where more than one
(1) wire per terminal is required.
[4] Not available when 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. (form C) internal contacts are selected for circuit breakers.
15
16
17

Variable Frequency AC Motor Drive Units
Bulletin 2162Q and 2163Q
with PowerFlex 70 Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
These combination variable frequency AC motor drive units are
specifically designed for use in CENTERLINE motor control centers. Each
unit contains a high performance, microprocessor-controlled, variable
frequency AC drive and either a fusible disconnect switch or a circuit
breaker.
They also:
• Include isolated logic and power.
• Include fan(s) and venting where required. See page 243.
• Include internal electronic overload protection.
• Include EMC filters on 380-415VAC.
• Include UL Class J time delay fuses. These fuses provide both branch circuit
protection and drive input protection. The drive input fuses are provided in
series with the circuit breaker in Bulletin 2163Q units.
• Include control circuit transformer (CCT). The CCT is sized to provide
power for all standard pilot devices and any required fan(s).
• Produce a three-phase, pulse width modulated (PWM) adjustable frequency
output and voltage output for exceptional control of motor speed and
torque.
• Are digitally programmable with access to mode programming, providing
precise and repeatedly accurate setup, control and operation and
adaptability to handle a variety of applications.
A Human Interface Module (HIM) and Control Platform Type must be
selected.
Bulletin 2162Q and 2163Q use PowerFlex 70 drives.
Each unit is provided as a NEMA Wiring Class I, Type A unit with
terminals mounted on the drive chassis for connection of remote pilot
devices, input signals, etc. For NEMA Type 3R and NEMA Type 4
enclosure construction, contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales
Office or Allen-Bradley distributor.
Bulletin 2162R and 2163R
with PowerFlex 700 Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
unit contains a high performance, microprocessor-controlled, variable 14
breaker.
They also:
• Include internal electronic overload protection.
• Include EMC filters on 380-415VAC.
• Include UL Class J time delay fuses. These fuses provide both branch circuit
protection and drive input protection. The drive input fuses are provided in
series with the circuit breaker in Bulletin 2163R units.
torque.
precise and repeatedly accurate set-up, control and operation and
• Have available 24VDC or 115VAC control voltages.
• A Human Interface Module (HIM) and Control Interface Type must be
selected.
• Bulletin 2162R and 2163R use PowerFlex 700 drives.
• Each unit is provided as a NEMA Wiring Class I, Type A unit with terminals
mounted on the drive chassis for connection of remote pilot devices, input
signals, etc. For NEMA Type 3R and NEMA Type 4 enclosure construction,
contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office or Allen-Bradley
distributor.
For Options, Modifications and Accessories, see pages 187–193 Discount Schedule A6 145
Bulletin 2162T and 2163T
PowerFlex 40 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
unit contains a high performance, microprocessor-controlled, variable
breaker.
They also:
• Include UL Class CC or J time delay fuses. These fuses provide both branch
circuit protection and drive input protection. The drive input fuses are
provided in series with the circuit breaker in Bulletin 2163T units.
torque.
precise and repeatedly accurate setup, control and operation and
Bulletin 2162T and 2163T use normal duty PowerFlex 40 drives.
Each unit is provided as a NEMA Wiring Class I, Type A unit with
terminals mounted on the drive chassis for connection of remote pilot
devices, input signals, etc. For NEMA Type 3R and NEMA Type 4
enclosure construction, contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales
Office or Allen-Bradley distributor.
Bulletin 2164Q, 2164R, 2165Q and 2165R
Manual Drive Bypass and PowerFlex 70 or PowerFlex 700 Drive . . . . . . . . . 176
These combination variable frequency drive units are specially designed
for use in CENTERLINE motor control centers. The configuration consists
of two interlocked components, one containing the bypass circuitry and
one containing a PowerFlex 70 (Bulletin 2164Q or 2165Q) or PowerFlex
700 (Bulletin 2164R or 2165R) variable frequency drive. The bypass
component contains a fusible or circuit breaker disconnect, control
circuit transformer, six-pole manually operated bypass switch, pull-apart
terminal blocks and bypass contactor (Bulletin 100 contactor) with a
Bulletin 193 overload relay. The drive compartment contains the
14 respective PowerFlex variable frequency drive (see product descriptions
on Bulletins 2162Q, 2162R, 2163Q and 2163R for specific PowerFlex 70
and 700 features) less control circuit transformer and disconnecting
means. This configuration allows for the drive to be taken offline and
replaced as needed with minimal disruption to the application process.
When in bypass mode the serviceable drive component meets NFPA 70E
hazard/Risk Level 0.
The bypass component is provided as a NEMA Class II wiring, Type B
unit. Terminals mounted on the drive chassis are provided for the
connection of remote devices, input signals, etc. Also
• A Human Interface Module must be specified.
• “Drive On” and “Bypass On” pilot lights and HAND-OFF-AUTO selector
switch, HAND START and HAND STOP push buttons must be specified.
• Control Platform Type (Bulletin 2164Q, 2165Q) or Control Interface Type
(Bulletin 2164R, 2165R) must be specified for Bulletins 2164R and 2165R.
Bulletin 2164Q and 2165Q use normal duty PowerFlex 70 drives.
Bulletin 2164R and 2165R use normal duty PowerFlex 700 drives.
For all NEMA Type 3R and NEMA Type 4 applications, contact your local
Rockwell Automation Sales Office or Allen-Bradley distributor.
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2160R
PowerFlex 700H Variable Frequency AC Drive Load Reactor Unit
• Supplied in a unit separate from the drive
• Available in NEMA Enclosure Type 1 and Type 1 with gasket only
• NOTE: PowerFlex 700H drives have approximately 3% line reactance inherent to the device.
Contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office for information
196
2160R A - 300N K B - 14RXL 01 - 54

Nominal Horsepower NEMA Enclosure
Bulletin Number Wiring Type Line Voltage Unit Type Identification Code Horsepower Code
Rating Type
196A 196G
Code Type Code Identification Code
196E
Variable Frequency
01 - 99 Corresponds
Code Line Voltage to adjustable
Drive (VFD) frequency drive unit location
2160R B 480V
Supplemental Units
for PowerFlex 700H
196F
196D
Code Unit Type
196B Code NEMA Enclosure Type 14RXL_ _ Load Reactor 196H
Code Wiring Type NEMA Type 1 and Type 1
K Code Horsepower Code
A Type A with gasket
52 150 HP (Heavy Duty Only)
196C 54 200 HP
Code Rating
300N Normal Duty
300H Heavy Duty
14
Units—2160R
PowerFlex 700H Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Load Reactor
• See page 191 for a description of load reactor options and associated rules.
• Reactor unit is a separate unit from the drive unit.
• Reactor unit requires an additional section mounted to the right of the section with the drive unit. These two sections
will create a shipping block.
• The reactor unit is to be mounted in the bottom of the section.
• The remaining space in the section with the load reactor is available for plug-in units.
197
[1]
Nominal Horsepower Catalog Number
Drive Line Space Space Catalog Number [1] Delivery
Rating The horsepower ratings shown are
Voltage Factor NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ Factor Program
nominal. NEMA Type 12
gasket
150 480 2160RA-300HKB-14RXL_ _-52
Heavy Duty Available for NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/
200 480 1.5[2] 2160RA-300HKB-14RXL_ _-54 gasket only PE-II
Normal Duty 200 480 2160RA-300NKB-14RXL_ _-54
• Select the drive supplementary unit identification code (01-99) (e.g., 2160RA-300NKB-14RXL01-54).
• The supplementary unit identification code must begin with “01” and continue sequentially (“02,” “03,” “04,” etc.) Each reactor unit is to have a unique supplementary unit
identification code that correlates with the same identification code on the drive unit.
[2] Frame mounted unit, must be located at the bottom of the section. Must be located in the adjacent section to the right of the corresponding drive location.
14
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2162Q and 2163Q
PowerFlex 70 Drive
• Bulletins 2162Q and 2163Q use PowerFlex 70 drives
• NEMA Enclosure Type 1, Type 1 with gasket or Type 12 Enclosure Type
• NEMA Wiring Class I, Type A
• Isolated logic and power produces a three-phase, pulse-width-modulated (PWM) adjustable
frequency output to vary motor speed
207
2162Q A - 1P1N K B - 33 - 14HA0

2163Q A - 1P1N K B - 33CA - 14HA0
PowerFlex 70 Nominal Output NEMA Enclosure Nominal Horsepower/kW and Human Interface Module
Bulletin Number Wiring Type Line Voltage
Current Rating Type Circuit Breaker Type and Options
207A 207D 207F
Code Type Code NEMA Enclosure Type Nominal Horsepower/kW

PowerFlex 70 Variable Code Code and Circuit Breaker Type
NEMA Type 1 and Type 1
Frequency AC Drive K “33” Nominal Horsepower/kW
2162Q with gasket 2162Q-”33”
with Fusible code. See table on page 206
J NEMA Type 12
Disconnect “33_” Nominal Horsepower/kW
2163Q-”33CA” code.
PowerFlex 70 Variable See table on page 206
2163Q Frequency AC Drive “__CA” Circuit Breaker Type. See
with Circuit Breaker table on page 212
207E
Code Line Voltage
207G
207B N 380V [1]
Human Interface Module
Code Wiring Type KN 400V [1] Code and Options
A Type A I 415V [1] See options section beginning on
B 480V page 187
C 600V
14
[1] Units at these voltages are not UL or
cUL listed.
207C
Drive Size Code, Output Current Rating (Amperes) and Nominal hp or (kw) [1]
Normal Duty Applications Heavy Duty Applications
380-415V Line Voltage 480V Line Voltage 600V Line Voltage 480V Line Voltage 600V Line Voltage
Code Ratings kW Code Ratings hp Code Ratings hp Code Ratings hp Code Ratings hp
1P3N 1.3 0.37 1P1N 1.1 0.5 0P9N 0.9 0.5 2P1H 1.1 0.5 1P7H 0.9 0.5
2P1N 1.5 0.55 2P1N 1.6 0.75 1P7N 1.3 0.75 2P1H 1.6 0.75 1P7H 1.3 0.75
2P1N 2.1 0.75 2P1N 2.1 1 1P7N 1.7 1 3P4H 2.1 1 2P7H 1.7 1
3P5N 2.6 1.1 3P4N 3.0 1.5 2P7N 2.4 1.5 3P4H 3.0 1.5 2P7H 2.4 1.5
3P5N 3.5 1.5 3P4N 3.4 2 2P7N 2.7 2 5P0H 3.4 2 3P9H 2.7 2
5P0N 5.0 2.2 5P0N 5.0 3 3P9N 3.9 3 8P0H 5.0 3 6P1H 3.9 3
8P7N 8.7 3.7 8P0N 8.0 5 6P1N 6.1 5 011H 8.0 5 9P0H 6.1 5
011N 11.5 5.5 011N 11 7.5 9P0N 9.0 7.5 014H 11 7.5 011H 9.0 7.5
015N 15.4 7.5 014N 14 10 011N 11 10 022H 14 10 017H 11 10
022N 22 11 022N 22 15 017N 17 15 027H 22 15 022H 17 15
030N 30 15 027N 27 20 022N 22 20 034H 27 20 027H 22 20
037N 37 18.5 034N 34 25 027N 27 25 040H 34 25 032H 27 25
043N 43 22 040N 40 30 032N 32 30 052H 40 30 041H 32 30
060N 60 30 052N 52 40 041N 41 40 065H 52 40 052H 41 40
072N 72 37 065N 65 50 052N 52 50
[1] The kW and HP ratings shown are for reference only.
PowerFlex 70 drive units should be sized according to the applications and output ampere rating.
Units—2162Q
Combination PowerFlex 70 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 380-415V (NORMAL DUTY)
• Normal Duty Ratings, the drive overload capabilities (based on the output currents listed below) are:
110% for 60 seconds and 150% for 3 seconds.
• For specific drive applications refer to PowerFlex 70 User Manual.
• Branch circuit overload protection is provided by the internal drive overload.
• PowerFlex 70 drives are cUL US (UL and cUL listed) as motor overload protected devices.
An external overload relay is not required for single motor applications.
PowerFlex 70 AC drives are not intended for use with single phase motors.
• See page 238 for Combination Unit Short Circuit Withstand Ratings table.
• Wiring is Type A only. Drive can accept 16 AWG control wire maximum.
• Proper placement of drive units in the MCC is essential for proper operation and life cycle of the drive.
Strong consideration should be given to placing units with drives at the bottom of the section.
When more than one drive unit is placed in a section, the drive unit with the highest rating should be located at the
bottom of the section.
• Do not mount transformer units below drive units. Heat from transformer units may cause drive to trip.
• HIM (Human Interface Module) and Control Platform Type are required. Select on page 189 and 190.
• Combination VFD units at these voltages are not UL or cUL listed.
208
Nominal kW NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ gasket NEMA Type 12
Maximum The horsepower and kW
Continuous ratings shown below are for Delivery
Frame Output reference only. PowerFlex 70 Space Space
Catalog Number [2] Catalog Number[2] Program
Amperes [1] drive units should be sized Factor Factor
according to the application
and output ampere rating.
1.3 0.37 2162QA-1P3NK_-33K 2162QA-1P3NJ_-33K
1.5 0.55 2162QA-2P1NK_-34K 2162QA-2P1NJ_-34K
2.1 0.75 2162QA-2P1NK_-35K 2162QA-2P1NJ_-35K
2.0
B 2.6 1.1 1.5 2162QA-3P5NK_-36K 2162QA-3P5NJ_-36K
3.5 1.5 2162QA-3P5NK_-37K 2162QA-3P5NJ_-37K
5.0 2.2 2162QA-5P0NK_-38K 2162QA-5P0NJ_-38K
8.7 3.7 2162QA-8P7NK_-39K 2.5 2162QA-8P7NJ_-39K
11.5 5.5 2162QA-011NK_-40K 2162QA-011NJ_-40K PE
C 2.0
15.4 7.5 2162QA-015NK_-41K 3.0 2162QA-015NJ_-41K
22 11 2162QA-022NK_-42K 2162QA-022NJ_-42K
14 30 15 2.5 2162QA-030NK_-43K 3.5 2162QA-030NJ_-43K
D
37 18.5 2162QA-037NK_-44K 3.0 2162QA-037NJ_-44K
43 22 3.0 2162QA-043NK_-45K 3.5 2162QA-043NJ_-45K
60 30 3.0[3] 2162QA-060NK_-46K 2162QA-060NJ_-46K
E 4.0
72 37 3.5 2162QA-072NK_-47K 2162QA-072NJ_-47K
[1] Ampere ratings are at a 4kHz carrier frequency. If carrier frequencies above 4kHz are selected, the drive output ampere ratings must be derated. For derating information,
contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office and/or refer to PowerFlex 70/700 Reference Manual, PFLEX-RM001x-EN-E.
Select the appropriate voltage code: 380V = N, 400V = KN, 415 = I (e.g. 2162QA-1P3NKN-33K).
[3] Requires 3.5 total space factors when door mounted pilot devices are selected.
Units—2162Q
Combination PowerFlex 70 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 480V (NORMAL DUTY)
209
Nominal HP NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ gasket NEMA Type 12
Maximum The horsepower and kW ratings
Continuous shown below are for reference Delivery
Frame Output only. PowerFlex 70 drive units Space Space
Amperes [1] should be sized according to the Factor Factor
application and output ampere
rating.
1.1 0.5 2162QA-1P1NKB-33 2162QA-1P1NJB-33
1.6 0.75 2162QA-2P1NKB-34 2162QA-2P1NJB-34
A 2.1 1 2162QA-2P1NKB-35 2162QA-2P1NJB-35
2.0
3.0 1.5 1.5 2162QA-3P4NKB-36 2162QA-3P4NJB-36
3.4 2 2162QA-3P4NKB-37 2162QA-3P4NJB-37
5.0 3 2162QA-5P0NKB-38 2162QA-5P0NJB-38
B
8.0 5 2162QA-8P0NKB-39 2.5 2162QA-8P0NJB-39
11 7.5 2162QA-011NKB-40 2162QA-011NJB-40 SC
C 2.0
14 10 2162QA-014NKB-41 3.0 2162QA-014NJB-41
22 15 2162QA-022NKB-42 2162QA-022NJB-42
27 20 2.5 2162QA-027NKB-43 3.5 2162QA-027NJB-43 14
D
34 25 2162QA-034NKB-44 3.0 2162QA-034NJB-44
40 30 3.0 2162QA-040NKB-45 3.5 2162QA-040NJB-45
52 40 3.0[2] 2162QA-052NKB-46 4.0 2162QA-052NJB-46
E
65 50 3.5[3] 2162QA-065NKB-47 4.0[3] 2162QA-065NJB-47
[1] Ampere ratings are at a 4kHz carrier frequency. If carrier frequencies above 4kHz are selected, the drive output ampere ratings must be derated. For derating information, contact
your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office and/or refer to PowerFlex 70/700 Reference Manual, PFLEX-RM001x-EN-E.
[2] Requires 3.5 total space factors when door mounted pilot devices are selected and line or load reactor (-14RLX or -14RXL) is not selected.
Requires 4.0 total space factors when line or load reactor (-14RLX or -14RXL) is selected.
[3] Requires 6.0 total space factors, 20” wide, frame mounted (section does not have vertical wireway), when line or load reactor (-14RLX or -14RXL) is selected. Delivery program
changes to SC-II.
Units—2162Q
Combination PowerFlex 70 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 480V (HEAVY DUTY)
• Heavy Duty Ratings, the drive overload capabilities (based on the output currents listed below) are:
210
rating.
1.1 0.5 2162QA-2P1HKB-33 2162QA-2P1HJB-33
1.6 0.75 2162QA-2P1HKB-34 2162QA-2P1HJB-34
A
2.1 1 2162QA-3P4HKB-35 2.0 2162QA-3P4HJB-35
1.5
3.0 1.5 2162QA-3P4HKB-36 2162QA-3P4HJB-36
3.4 2 2162QA-5P0HKB-37 2162QA-5P0HJB-37
B
5.0 3 2162QA-8P0HKB-38 2.5 2162QA-8P0HJB-38
8.0 5 2162QA-011HKB-39 2162QA-011HJB-39
C 2.0 SC
11 7.5 2162QA-014HKB-40 3.0 2162QA-014HJB-40
14 10 2162QA-022HKB-41 2162QA-022HJB-41
22 15 2.5 2162QA-027HKB-42 3.5 2162QA-027HJB-42
D
27 20 2162QA-034HKB-43 3.0 2162QA-034HJB-43
14 34 25 3.0 2162QA-040HKB-44 3.5 2162QA-040HJB-44
40 30 3.0[2] 2162QA-052HKB-45 4.0 2162QA-052HJB-45
E
52 40 3.5[3] 2162QA-065HKB-46 4.0[3] 2162QA-065HJB-46
changes to SC-II.
Units—2162Q
Combination PowerFlex 70 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 600V (NORMAL DUTY)
211
Maximum The horsepower ratings shown
Continuous below are for reference only. Delivery
Frame Output Space Space
PowerFlex 70 drive units should be Catalog Number Catalog Number Program
Amperes [1] Factor Factor
sized according to the application
0.9 0.5 2162QA-0P9NKC-33 2162QA-0P9NJC-33
1.3 0.75 2162QA-1P7NKC-34 2162QA-1P7NJC-34
A 1.7 1 2162QA-1P7NKC-35 2162QA-1P7NJC-35
2.0
2.4 1.5 1.5 2162QA-2P7NKC-36 2162QA-2P7NJC-36
2.7 2 2162QA-2P7NKC-37 2162QA-2P7NJC-37
3.9 3 2162QA-3P9NKC-38 2162QA-3P9NJC-38
B
6.1 5 2162QA-6P1NKC-39 2.5 2162QA-6P1NJC-39 PE in U.S.
9.0 7.5 2162QA-9P0NKC-40 2162QA-9P0NJC-40
C 2.0 SC in Canada
11 10 2162QA-011NKC-41 3.0 2162QA-011NJC-41
17 15 2162QA-017NKC-42 2162QA-017NJC-42
22 20 2162QA-022NKC-43 3.5 2162QA-022NJC-43
D 2.5 14
27 25 2162QA-027NKC-44 2162QA-027NJC-44
3.0
32 30 2162QA-032NKC-45 2162QA-032NJC-45
41 40 2162QA-041NKC-46 2162QA-041NJC-46
E 3.0 [2] 4.0
52 50 2162QA-052NKC-47 2162QA-052NJC-47
Units—2162Q
Combination PowerFlex 70 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 600V (HEAVY DUTY)
212
PowerFlex 70 drive units should be Catalog Number Catalog Number Program
0.9 0.5 2162QA-1P7HKC-33 2162QA-1P7HJC-33
1.3 0.75 2162QA-1P7HKC-34 2162QA-1P7HJC-34
A
1.7 1 2162QA-2P7HKC-35 2.0 2162QA-2P7HJC-35
1.5
2.4 1.5 2162QA-2P7HKC-36 2162QA-2P7HJC-36
2.7 2 2162QA-3P9HKC-37 2162QA-3P9HJC-37
B
3.9 3 2162QA-6P1HKC-38 2.5 2162QA-6P1HJC-38
6.1 5 2162QA-9P0HKC-39 2162QA-9P0HJC-39 PE in U.S.
C 2.0
9.0 7.5 2162QA-011HKC-40 3.0 2162QA-011HJC-40 SC in Canada
11 10 2162QA-017HKC-41 2162QA-017HJC-41
17 15 2162QA-022HKC-42 3.5 2162QA-022HJC-42
D 2.5
22 20 2162QA-027HKC-43 2162QA-027HJC-43
3.0
27 25 2162QA-032HKC-44 2162QA-032HJC-44
14 32 30 2162QA-041HKC-45 2162QA-041HJC-45
E 3.0 [2] 4.0
41 40 2162QA-052HKC-46 2162QA-052HJC-46
Units—2163Q
Combination PowerFlex 70 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker Disconnect, 380-415V (NORMAL
DUTY)
213
Continuous ratings shown below are for Delivery
Frame Output reference only. PowerFlex 70 Space Space
Catalog Number[2] Catalog Number Program
Amperes [1] drive units should be sized Factor Factor
1.3 0.37 2163QA-1P3NK_-33K_ 2163QA-1P3NJ_-33K_
1.5 0.55 2163QA-2P1NK_-34K_ 2163QA-2P1NJ_-34K_
2.1 0.75 2163QA-2P1NK_-35K_ 2163QA-2P1NJ_-35K_
2.0
B 2.6 1.1 1.5 2163QA-3P5NK_-36K_ 2163QA-3P5NJ_-36K_
3.5 1.5 2163QA-3P5NK_-37K_ 2163QA-3P5NJ_-37K_
5.0 2.2 2163QA-5P0NK_-38K_ 2163QA-5P0NJ_-38K_
8.7 3.7 2163QA-8P7NK_-39K_ 2.5 2163QA-8P7NJ_-39K_
11.5 5.5 2163QA-011NK_-40K_ 2163QA-011NJ_-40K_ PE
C
15.4 7.5
2.0
2163QA-015NK_-41K_ 3.0 2163QA-015NJ_-41K_ 14
22 11 2163QA-022NK_-42K_ 2163QA-022NJ_-42K_
30 15 2.5 2163QA-030NK_-43K_ 3.5 21632QA-030NJ_-43K_
D
37 18.5 2163QA-037NK_-44K_ 3.0 2163QA-037NJ_-44K_
43 22 3.0 2163QA-043NK_-45K_ 3.5 2163QA-043NJ_-45K_
60 30 3.0 [3] 2163QA-060NK_-46K_ 4.0[3] 2163QA-060NJ_-46K_
E
72 37 4.0 2163QA-072NK_-47K_ 4.0 2163QA-072NJ_-47K_
• Select the appropriate voltage code: 380V = N, 400V = KN, 415 = I (e.g. 2163QA-1P3NKN-33K).
• Select the appropriate suffix code from the circuit breaker table on page 212 to identify the desired circuit breaker type (e.g. 2163QA-1P3NKN-33KCA).
[3] Requires 3.5 total space factors when door mounted pilot devices are selected.
Units—2163Q
Combination PowerFlex 70 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker Disconnect, 480V
(NORMAL DUTY)
214
Catalog Number [2] Catalog Number[2] Program
rating.
1.1 0.5 2163QA-1P1NKB-33_ 2163QA-1P1NJB-33_
1.6 0.75 2163QA-2P1NKB-34_ 2163QA-2P1NJB-34_
A 2.1 1 2163QA-2P1NKB-35_ 2163QA-2P1NJB-35_
2.0
3.0 1.5 1.5 2163QA-3P4NKB-36_ 2163QA-3P4NJB-36_
3.4 2 2163QA-3P4NKB-37_ 2163QA-3P4NJB-37_
5.0 3 2163QA-5P0NKB-38_ 2163QA-5P0NJB-38_
B
8.0 5 2163QA-8P0NKB-39_ 2.5 2163QA-8P0NJB-39_
11 7.5 2163QA-011NKB-40_ 2163QA-011NJB-40_ SC
C 2.0
14 10 2163QA-014NKB-41_ 3.0 2163QA-014NJB-41_
22 15 2163QA-022NKB-42_ 2163QA-022NJB-42_
14 27 20 2.5 2163QA-027NKB-43_ 3.5 2163QA-027NJB-43_
D
34 25 2163QA-034NKB-44_ 3.0 2163QA-034NJB-44_
40 30 3.0 2163QA-040NKB-45_ 3.5 2163QA-040NJB-45_
52 40 3.0[3] 2163QA-052NKB-46_ 4.0 2163QA-052NJB-46_
E
65 50 3.5[4] 2163QA-065NKB-47_ 4.0[4] 2163QA-065NJB-47_
• Select the appropriate suffix code from the Circuit Breaker table on page 212 to identify the desired circuit breaker type (e.g. 2163QA-1P1NKB-33CA).
changes to SC-II.
Units—2163Q
Combination PowerFlex 70 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker Disconnect, 480V (HEAVY DUTY)
215
Catalog Number [2] Catalog Number Program
rating.
1.1 0.5 2163QA-2P1HKB-33_ 2163QA-2P1HJB-33_
1.6 0.75 2163QA-2P1HKB-34_ 2163QA-2P1HJB-34_
A
2.1 1 2163QA-3P4HKB-35_ 2.0 2163QA-3P4HJB-35_
1.5
3.0 1.5 2163QA-3P4HKB-36_ 2163QA-3P4HJB-36_
3.4 2 2163QA-5P0HKB-37_ 2163QA-5P0HJB-37_
B
5 3 2163QA-8P0HKB-38_ 2.5 2163QA-8P0HJB-38_
8 5 2163QA-011HKB-39_ 2163QA-011HJB-39_
C 2.0 SC
11 7.5 2163QA-014HKB-40_ 3.0 2163QA-014HJB-40_
14 10 2163QA-022HKB-41_ 2163QA-022HJB-41_
22 15 2.5 2163QA-027HKB-42_ 3.5 2163QA-027HJB-42_
D
27 20 2163QA-034HKB-43_ 3.0 2163QA-034HJB-43_ 14
34 25 3.0 2163QA-040HKB-44_ 3.5 2163QA-040HJB-44_
40 30 3.0[3] 2163QA-052HKB-45_ 4.0 2163QA-052HJB-45_
E
52 40 3.5[4] 2163QA-065HKB-46_ 4.0[4] 2163QA-065HJB-46_
• Select the appropriate suffix code from the Circuit Breaker Table on page 212 to identify the desired circuit breaker type (e.g. 2163QA-1P1NKB-33CA).
changes to SC-II.
Units—2163Q
Combination PowerFlex 70 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker Disconnect, 600V
(NORMAL DUTY)
• Wiring is Type A only. Drive can only accept 16 AWG control wire.
216
PowerFlex 70 drive units should be Catalog Number [2] Catalog Number [2] Program
0.9 0.5 2163QA-0P9NKC-33_ 2163QA-0P9NJC-33_
1.3 0.75 2163QA-1P7NKC-34_ 2163QA-1P7NJC-34_
A 1.7 1 2163QA-1P7NKC-35_ 2163QA-1P7NJC-35_
2.0
2.4 1.5 1.5 2163QA-2P7NKC-36_ 2163QA-2P7NJC-36_
2.7 2 2163QA-2P7NKC-37_ 2163QA-2P7NJC-37_
3.9 3 2163QA-3P9NKC-38_ 2163QA-3P9NJC-38_
B
6.1 5 2163QA-6P1NKC-39_ 2.5 2163QA-6P1NJC-39_ PE in U.S.
9.0 7.5 2163QA-9P0NKC-40_ 2163QA-9P0NJC-40_
C 2.0 SC in Canada
11 10 2163QA-011NKC-41_ 3.0 2163QA-011NJC-41_
17 15 2163QA-017NKC-42_ 2163QA-017NJC-42_
22 20 2163QA-022NKC-43_ 3.5 2163QA-022NJC-43_
14 D
27 25
2.5
2163QA-027NKC-44_ 2163QA-027NJC-44_
3.0
32 30 2163QA-032NKC-45_ 2163QA-032NJC-45_
41 40 2163QA-041NKC-46_ 2163QA-041NJC-46_
E 3.0 [3] 4.0
52 50 2163QA-052NKC-47_ 2163QA-052NJC-47_
[2] The catalog number is not complete:
• Select the appropriate suffix code from the Circuit Breaker Table on page 212 to identify the desired circuit breaker type (e.g. 2163QA-0P9NKC-33CA).
Units—2163Q
Combination PowerFlex 70 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker Disconnect, 600V (HEAVY DUTY)
217
Frame
PowerFlex 70 drive units should be Space
Output Space Program
Factor Catalog Number [2] Factor Catalog Number[2]
Amperes [1] sized according to the application
0.9 0.5 2163QA-1P7HKC-33_ 2163QA-1P7HJC-33_
1.3 0.75 2163QA-1P7HKC-34_ 2163QA-1P7HJC-34_
A
1.7 1 2163QA-2P7HKC-35_ 2.0 2163QA-2P7HJC-35_
1.5
2.4 1.5 2163QA-2P7HKC-36_ 2163QA-2P7HJC-36_
2.7 2 2163QA-3P9HKC-37_ 2163QA-3P9HJC-37_
B
3.9 3 2163QA-6P1HKC-38_ 2.5 2163QA-6P1HJC-38_
6.1 5 2163QA-9P0HKC-39_ 2163QA-9P0HJC-39_ PE in U.S.
C 2.0
9 7.5 2163QA-011HKC-40_ 3.0 2163QA-011HJC-40_ SC in Canada
11 10 2163QA-017HKC-41_ 2163QA-017HJC-41_
17 15 2163QA-022HKC-42_ 3.5 2163QA-022HJC-42_
D 2.5
22 20 2163QA-027HKC-43_ 2163QA-027HJC-43_
3.0 14
27 25 2163QA-032HKC-44_ 2163QA-032HJC-44_
32 30 2163QA-041HKC-45_ 2163QA-041HJC-45_
E 3.0 [3] 4.0
41 40 2163QA-052HKC-46_ 2163QA-052HJC-46_
[2] The catalog number is not complete:
• Select the appropriate suffix code from the Circuit Breaker Table on page 212 to identify the desired circuit breaker type (e.g. 2163QA-0P9HKC-33CA).
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2162R and 2163R
PowerFlex 700 Drive
• Bulletins 2162R and 2163R use PowerFlex 700 Drives
• Class J time delay drive input fuses provide both branch circuit and drive input protection
• Isolated logic and power produces a three-phase, pulse-width-modulated (PWM) adjustable frequency
output to vary motor speed
218
2162R A - 034N K B - 44 - 14HA0

2163R A - 034N K B - 44CA - 14HA0
PowerFlex 700 Nominal NEMA Enclosure Nominal Horsepower/kW and Human Interface Module
Output Current Rating Type Circuit Breaker Type and Options
218F
218A 218D
Nominal Horsepower/kW
Code Type Code NEMA Enclosure Type Code Code and Circuit Breaker Type
PowerFlex 700 Variable NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 “33_” Nominal Horsepower/kW
K 2162R-”33”
2162R Frequency AC Drive with gasket code. See table on page 206
with Fusible Disconnect J NEMA Type 12 “33” Nominal Horsepower/kW
2163R-”33CA” code.
PowerFlex 700 Variable See table on page 206
2163R Frequency AC Drive “__CA” Circuit Breaker Type. See
with Circuit Breaker 218E
table on page 212
Code Line Voltage 218G
218B N 380V [1] Human Interface Module
Code Wiring Type Code and Options
KN 400V [1]
A Type A See options section beginning on
I 415V [1] page 187
B 480V
C 600V
[1] Units at these voltages are not UL or cUL listed.
218C
Drive Size Code, Output Current Rating (Amperes) and Nominal hp or (kw) [1]
14 Normal Duty Applications Heavy Duty Applications
380-415V Line Voltage 480V Line Voltage 600V Line Voltage 480V Line Voltage 600V Line Voltage
Code Ratings kW Code Ratings hp Code Ratings hp Code Ratings hp Code Ratings hp
1P3N 1.3 0.37 1P1N 1.1 0.5 1P7N 1.7 1 2P1H 1.1 0.5 2P7H 1.7 1
2P1N 1.5 0.55 2P1N 1.6 0.75 2P7N 2.4 1.5 2P1H 1.6 0.75 2P7H 2.4 1.5
2P1N 2.1 0.75 2P1N 2.1 1 2P7N 2.7 2 3P4H 2.1 1 3P9H 2.7 2
3P5N 2.6 1.1 3P4N 3.0 1.5 3P9N 3.9 3 3P4H 3.0 1.5 6P1H 3.9 3
3P5N 3.5 1.5 3P4N 3.4 2 6P1N 6.1 5 5P0H 3.4 2 9P0H 6.1 5
5P0N 5.0 2.2 5P0N 5.0 3 9P0N 9.0 7.5 8P0H 5.0 3 011H 9.0 7.5
8P7N 8.7 3.7 8P0N 8.0 5 011N 11 10 011H 8.0 5 017H 11 10
011N 11.5 5.5 011N 11 7.5 017N 17 15 014H 11 7.5 022H 17 15
015N 15.4 7.5 014N 14 10 022N 22 20 022H 14 10 027H 22 20
022N 22 11 022N 22 15 027N 27 25 027H 22 15 032H 27 25
030N 30 15 027N 27 20 032N 32 30 034H 27 20 041H 32 30
037N 37 18.5 034N 34 25 041N 41 40 040H 34 25 052H 41 40
043N 43 22 040N 40 30 052N 52 50 052H 40 30 062H 52 50
056N 56 30 052N 52 40 062N 62 60 065H 52 40 077H 62 60
072N 72 37 065N 65 50 077N 77 75 077H 65 50 125H 77 75
105N 85 45 077N 77 60 125N 99 100 096H 77 60 125H 99 100
105N 105 55 096N 96 75 125N 125 125 125H 96 75 144H 125 125
170N 138 75 125N 125 100 144N 144 150 156H 125 100
170N 170 90 156N 156 125 180H 156 125
300N 205 110 180N 180 150 300H 180 150
300N 255 132 300N 255 200 300H 245 200
[1] The kW and HP ratings shown are for reference only.
PowerFlex 700 drive units should be sized according to the applications and output ampere rating.
Units—2162R
Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 380-415VAC (NORMAL
DUTY)
• For specific drive applications refer to the PowerFlex 700 User Manual.
• Branch circuit (overload) protection is provided by the internal drive overload.
• PowerFlex700 AC drives are cUL US (UL and cUL listed) as motor overload protected devices.
• Proper placement of drive units in the MCC is essential for proper operation and life cycle of the drive. Strong
consideration should be given to placing units with drives at the bottom of the section. When more than one drive
unit is placed in a section, the drive unit with the highest rating should be located at the bottom of the section.
• HIM (Human Interface Module) and Control Interface Type are required. Select on page 189 and 190.
219
Continuous shown below are for reference
Frame Output only. PowerFlex 700 drive units Delivery
Amperes [1] should be sized according to the Space Factor Catalog Number[2] Space Factor Catalog Number Program
rating.
Normal Duty 380-415V
1.3 0.37 2162RA-1P3NK_-33K 2162RA-1P3NJ_-33K
1.5 0.55 2162RA-2P1NK_-34K 2162RA-2P1NJ_-34K
2.1 0.75 2162RA-2P1NK_-35K 2162RA-2P1NJ_-35K
2.0
2.6 1.1 2162RA-3P5NK_-36K 2162RA-3P5NJ_-36K
0
3.5 1.5 2162RA-3P5NK_-37K 2162RA-3P5NJ_-37K
2.0
5.0 2.2 2162RA-5P0NK_-38K 2162RA-5P0NJ_-38K
8.7 3.7 2162RA-8P7NK_-39K 2162RA-8P7NJ_-39K
11.5 5.5 2162RA-011NK_-40K 2.5 2162RA-011NJ_-40K PE
15.4 7.5 2162RA-015NK_-41K 2162RA-015NJ_-41K
1
22 11 2162RA-022NK_-42K 2162RA-022NJ_-42K 14
30 15 2162RA-030NK_-43K 3.0 2162RA-030NJ_-43K
2 2.5
37 18.5 2162RA-037NK_-44K 2162RA-037NJ_-44K
43 22 2162RA-043NK_-45K 3.5 2162RA-043NJ_-45K
3 56 30 3.0 2162RA-056NK_-46K 2162RA-056NJ_-46K
4.0
72 37 2162RA-072NK_-47K 2162RA-072NJ_-47K
85 45 2162RA-105NK_-48K 6.0, 2162RA-105NJ_-48K
5
105 55 [3]
2162RA-105NK_-49K 25”W, 20”D[3] 2162RA-105NJ_-49K
6.0, 25”W, 20”D
138 75 2162RA-170NK_-50K 6.0 2162RA-170NJ_-50K
6
170 90 2162RA-170NK_-51K 30”W, 20”D[3] 2162RA-170NJ_-51K
6.0, 35”W, 20”D[3] 2162RAT-300NK_-52K PE-II
205 110
6.0, 30”W, 20”D[3] 2162RAB-300NK_-52K Available in NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 with
9 [4] [3] gasket only
6.0, 35”W, 20”D 2162RAT-300NK_-53K
255 132
6.0, 30”W, 20”D[3] 2162RAB-300NK_-53K
[1] Ampere ratings are at a 4kHz carrier frequency. If carrier frequencies above 4kHz are selected, the drive output current ratings must be derated. For derating information, contact
• Select the appropriate voltage code (380V = N, 400V = KN, 415V = I) (e.g. 2162RA-1P3NKN-33K).
[3] Frame mounted unit, section does not have vertical wireway. Horizontal bus is 5” deeper than standard.
[4] Frame 9 is a PowerFlex 700H drive.
Units—2162R
Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 480VAC (NORMAL DUTY)
220
Continuous ratings shown below are for
Output reference only. PowerFlex 700 Delivery
Frame Program
Amperes [1] drive units should be sized Space Factor Catalog Number Space Factor Catalog Number
Normal Duty 480V
1.1 0.5 2162RA-1P1NKB-33 2162RA-1P1NJB-33
1.6 0.75 2162RA-2P1NKB-34 2162RA-2P1NJB-34
2.1 1 2162RA-2P1NKB-35 2162RA-2P1NJB-35
2.0
3.0 1.5 2162RA-3P4NKB-36 2162RA-3P4NJB-36
0
3.4 2 2162RA-3P4NKB-37 2162RA-3P4NJB-37
2.0
5.0 3 2162RA-5P0NKB-38 2162RA-5P0NJB-38
8.0 5 2162RA-8P0NKB-39 2162RA-8P0NJB-39
11 7.5 2162RA-011NKB-40 2.5 2162RA-011NJB-40 SC
14 10 2162RA-014NKB-41 2162RA-014NJB-41
1
22 15 2162RA-022NKB-42 2162RA-022NJB-42
27 20 2162RA-027NKB-43 3.0 2162RA-027NJB-43
2 2.5
34 25 2162RA-034NKB-44 2162RA-034NJB-44
14 40 30 2162RA-040NKB-45 3.5 2162RA-040NJB-45
3 52 40 3.0 2162RA-052NKB-46 2162RA-052NJB-46
4.0
65 50 2162RA-065NKB-47 2162RA-065NJB-47
[2]
4 77 60 6.0, 20” W 2162RA-077NKB-48 6.0, 25” W[2] 2162RA-077NJB-48
96 75 2162RA-096NKB-49 6.0 2162RA-096NJB-49
5
125 100 2162RA-125NKB-50 25”W, 20”D[3] 2162RA-125NJB-50
6.0 6.0 SC-II
156 125 2162RA-156NKB-51 2162RA-156NJB-51
25”W, 20”D[3] 30”W, 20”D[3]
6
6.0
180 150 2162RA-180NKB-52 2162RA-180NJB-52
35”W, 20”D[3]
6.0, 35”W, 20”D[3] 2162RAT-300NKB-54 Available in NEMA Type 1 and
9[4] 255 200
[3] Type 1 with gasket only
PE-II
6.0, 30”W, 20”D 2162RAB-300NKB-54
Units—2162R
Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 480VAC (HEAVY DUTY)
221
The horsepower and kW
Maximum ratings shown below are for
Continuous reference only. PowerFlex
Output Delivery
Frame 700 drive units should be Program
Amperes [1] sized according to the Space Factor Catalog Number Space Factor Catalog Number
application and output
ampere rating.
Heavy Duty 480V
1.1 0.5 2162RA-2P1HKB-33 2162RA-2P1HJB-33
1.6 0.75 2162RA-2P1HKB-34 2162RA-2P1HJB-34
2.1 1 2162RA-3P4HKB-35 2.0 2162RA-3P4HJB-35
0 3.0 1.5 2162RA-3P4HKB-36 2162RA-3P4HJB-36
3.4 2 2.0 2162RA-5P0HKB-37 2162RA-5P0HJB-37
5.0 3 2162RA-8P0HKB-38 2162RA-8P0HJB-38
8.0 5 2162RA-011HKB-39 2.5 2162RA-011HJB-39
SC
11 7.5 2162RA-014HKB-40 2162RA-014HJB-40
1
14 10 2162RA-022HKB-41 2162RA-022HJB-41
2
22 15
2.5
2162RA-027HKB-42 3.0 2162RA-027HJB-42
14
27 20 2162RA-034HKB-43 2162RA-034HJB-43
34 25 2162RA-040HKB-44 3.5 2162RA-040HJB-44
3 40 30 3.0 2162RA-052HKB-45 2162RA-052HJB-45
4.0
52 40 2162RA-065HKB-46 2162RA-065HJB-46
4 65 50 6.0, 20”W[2] 2162RA-077HKB-47 6.0, 25” W[2] 2162RA-077HJB-47
77 60 2162RA-096HKB-48 6.0 2162RA-096HJB-48
5
96 75 2162RA-125HKB-49 25”W, 20”D[3] 2162RA-125HJB-49
6.0 6.0 SC-II
125 100 2162RA-156HKB-50 2162RA-156HJB-50
25”W, 20”D[3] 30”W, 20”D[3]
6
6.0
156 125 2162RA-180HKB-51 2162RA-180HJB-51
35”W, 20”D[3]
6.0
2162RAT-300HKB-52
35”W, 20”D[3]
180 150
6.0 Available in NEMA Type 1 and
9[4] 2162RAB-300HKB-52 PE-II
30”W, 20”D[3] Type 1 with gasket only
6.0, 35”W, 20”D[3] 2162RAT-300HKB-54
245 200
6.0, 30”W, 20”D[3] 2162RAB-300HKB-54
Units—2162R
Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 600VAC (NORMAL DUTY)
222
Maximum The HP ratings shown below
Continuous are for reference only.
Output PowerFlex 700 drive units Delivery
Frame Space
Amperes should be sized according to Catalog Number Space Factor Catalog Number Program
the application and output Factor
ampere rating.
Normal Duty 600V
1.7 [1] 1 2162RA-1P7NKC-35 2162RA-1P7NJC-35
2.4 [1] 1.5 2162RA-2P7NKC-36 2162RA-2P7NJC-36
2.0
2.7 [1] 2 2162RA-2P7NKC-37 2162RA-2P7NJC-37
0
3.9 [1] 3 2162RA-3P9NKC-38 2162RA-3P9NJC-38
2.0
6.1 [1] 5 2162RA-6P1NKC-39 2162RA-6P1NJC-39
9.0 [1] 7.5 2162RA-9P0NKC-40 2.5 2162RA-9P0NJC-40
11 [1] 10 2162RA-011NKC-41 2162RA-011NJC-41
1
17 [1] 15 2162RA-017NKC-42 2162RA-017NJC-42
PE in U.S.,
22 [1] 20 2162RA-022NKC-43 3.0 2162RA-022NJC-43
14 2
27 [1] 25
2.5
2162RA-027NKC-44 2162RA-027NJC-44
32 [1] 30 2162RA-032NKC-45 3.5 2162RA-032NJC-45 SC in
Canada
3 41 [1] 40 3.0 2162RA-041NKC-46 2162RA-041NJC-46
4.0
52 [1] 50 2162RA-052NKC-47 2162RA-052NJC-47
4 62 [2] 60 6.0, 20”W[3] 2162RA-062NKC-48 6.0, 25”W[3] 2162RA-062NJC-48
6.0,
5 77 [2] 75 2162RA-077NKC-49 2162RA-077NJC-49
25”W, 20”D [4]
99 [2] 100 6.0, 25”W, 2162RA-125NKC-50 6.0, 2162RA-125NJC-50
125 [2] 125 20”D [4] 2162RA-125NKC-51 30”W, 20”D [4] 2162RA-125NJC-51
6
6.0,
144 [2] 150 2162RA-144NKC-52 2162RA-144NJC-52
35”W, 20”D [4]
[2] Ampere ratings are at 2kHz carrier frequency. If carrier frequencies above 2kHz are selected, the drive output current ratings may require derating. Contact your local Rockwell
Automation Sales Office and to PowerFlex 70/700 Reference Manual, PFLEX-RM001x-EN-E.
Units—2162R
Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 600VAC (HEAVY DUTY)
223
Frame
Amperes should be sized according to Space Factor Catalog Number Space Factor Catalog Number Program
the application and output
ampere rating.
Heavy Duty 600V
1.7 [1] 1 2162RA-2P7HKC-35 2162RA-2P7HJC-35
2.4 [1] 1.5 2162RA-2P7HKC-36 2.0 2162RA-2P7HJC-36
0 2.7 [1] 2 2162RA-3P9HKC-37 2162RA-3P9HJC-37
3.9 [1] 3 2.0 2162RA-6P1HKC-38 2162RA-6P1HJC-38
6.1 [1] 5 2162RA-9P0HKC-39 2.5 2162RA-9P0HJC-39
9.0 [1] 7.5 2162RA-011HKC-40 2162RA-011HJC-40
1
11 [1] 10 2162RA-017HKC-41 2162RA-017HJC-41
2
17 [1] 15
2.5
2162RA-022HKC-42 3.0 2162RA-022HJC-42 PE in U.S., 14
22 [1] 20 2162RA-027HKC-43 2162RA-027HJC-43
27 [1] 25 2162RA-032HKC-44 3.5 2162RA-032HJC-44
SC in
3 32 [1] 30 3.0 2162RA-041HKC-45 2162RA-041HJC-45 Canada
4.0
41 [1] 40 2162RA-052HKC-46 2162RA-052HJC-46
4 52 [2] 50 6.0, 20”W[3] 2162RA-062HKC-47 6.0, 25”W[3] 2162RA-062HJC-47
6.0,
5 62 [2] 60 2162RA-077HKC-48 2162RA-077HJC-48
25”W, 20”D[4]
77 [2] 75 6.0, 2162RA-125HKC-49 6.0, 2162RA-125HJC-49
99 [2] 100 25”W, 20”D [4] 2162RA-125HKC-50 30”W, 20”D [4] 2162RA-125HJC-50
6
6.0,
125 [2] 125 2162RA-144HKC-51 2162RA-144HJC-51
35”W, 20”D [4]
Units—2163R
Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker, 380-415VAC (NORMAL DUTY)
224
Continuous ratings shown below are for
Output reference only. PowerFlex 700 Delivery
Frame
Amperes [1] drive units should be sized Space Factor Catalog Number [2] Space Factor Catalog Number [2] Program
Normal Duty 380-415V
1.3 0.37 2163RA-1P3NK_-33K_ 2163RA-1P3NJ_-33K_
1.5 0.55 2163RA-2P1NK_-34K_ 2163RA-2P1NJ_-34K_
2.1 0.75 2163RA-2P1NK_-35K_ 2163RA-2P1NJ_-35K_
2.0
2.6 1.1 2163RA-3P5NK_-36K_ 2163RA-3P5NJ_-36K_
0
3.5 1.5 2163RA-3P5NK_-37K_ 2163RA-3P5NJ_-37K_
2.0
5.0 2.2 2163RA-5P0NK_-38K_ 2163RA-5P0NJ_-38K_
8.7 3.7 2163RA-8P7NK_-39K_ 2163RA-8P7NJ_-39K_
11.5 5.5 2163RA-011NK_-40K_ 2.5 2163RA-011NJ_-40K_ PE
15.4 7.5 2163RA-015NK_-41K_ 2163RA-015NJ_-41K_
1
14 22 11 2163RA-022NK_-42K_ 2163RA-022NJ_-42K_
30 15 2163RA-030NK_-43K_ 3.0 2163RA-030NJ_-43K_
2 2.5
37 18.5 2163RA-037NK_-44K_ 2163RA-037NJ_-44K_
43 22 2163RA-043NK_-45K_ 3.5 2163RA-043NJ_-45K_
3.0
3 56 30 2163RA-056NK_-46K_ 2163RA-056NJ_-46K_
4.0
72 37 3.5 2163RA-072NK_-47K_ 2163RA-072NJ_-47K_
85 45 2163RA-105NK_-48K_ 6.0, 25”W, 2163RA-105NJ_-48K_
5
105 55 6.0, 25”W, 2163RA-105NK_-49K_ 20”D[3] 2163RA-105NJ_-49K_
138 75 20”D[3] 2163RA-170NK_-50K_ 6.0, 30”W, 2163RA-170NJ_-50K_
6
170 90 2163RA-170NK_-51K_ 20”D[3] 2163RA-170NJ_-51K_
PE-II
2163RAT-300NK_-52K_
205 110
6.0, 30”W, 2163RAB-300NK_-52K_ Available in NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 with gasket
9[4]
20”D [3],[5] 2163RAT-300NK_-53K_ only.
255 132
2163RAB-300NK_-53K_
• Select the appropriate voltage code: 380V = N, 400V = KN, 415 = I (e.g. 2163RA-037NKN).
• Select the appropriate suffix from table on page 212 to identify the circuit breaker type (e.g. 2163RA-037NKN-44KCA).
[5] When specifying circuit breaker codes CT or CM on 132kW Bulletin 2163R drives, the width of the section increases to 35.”
Units—2163R
Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker, 480VAC (NORMAL DUTY)
225
Continuous shown below are for reference only.
Output Delivery
Frame PowerFlex 700 drive units should be
Amperes [1] sized according to the application Space Factor Catalog Number
[2] Space Factor Catalog Number [2] Program
Normal Duty 480V
1.1 0.5 2163RA-1P1NKB-33_ 2163RA-1P1NJB-33_
1.6 0.75 2163RA-2P1NKB-34_ 2163RA-2P1NJB-34_
2.1 1 2163RA-2P1NKB-35_ 2163RA-2P1NJB-35_
2.0
3.0 1.5 2163RA-3P4NKB-36_ 2163RA-3P4NJB-36_
0
3.4 2 2163RA-3P4NKB-37_ 2163RA-3P4NJB-37_
2.0
5.0 3 2163RA-5P0NKB-38_ 2163RA-5P0NJB-38_
8.0 5 2163RA-8P0NKB-39_ 2163RA-8P0NJB-39_
11 7.5 2163RA-011NKB-40_ 2.5 2163RA-011NJB-40_ SC
14 10 2163RA-014NKB-41_ 2163RA-014NJB-41_
1
22 15 2163RA-022NKB-42_ 2163RA-022NJB-42_
27 20 2163RA-027NKB-43_ 3.0 2163RA-027NJB-43_
2
34 25
2.5
2163RA-034NKB-44_ 2163RA-034NJB-44_
14
40 30 2163RA-040NKB-45_ 3.5 2163RA-040NJB-45_
3.0
3 52 40 2163RA-052NKB-46_ 2163RA-052NJB-46_
4.0
65 50 3.5 2163RA-065NKB-47_ 2163RA-065NJB-47_
4 77 60 6.0, 20” W[3] 2163RA-077NKB-48_ 6.0, 25” W[3] 2163RA-077NJB-48_
96 75 2163RA-096NKB-49_ 6.0 2163RA-096NJB-49_
5
125 100 2163RA-125NKB-50_ 25”W, 20”D[4] 2163RA-125NJB-50_
6.0 6.0 SC-II
156 125 2163RA-156NKB-51_ 2163RA-156NJB-51_
25”W, 20”D[4] 30”W, 20”D[4]
6
6.0
180 150 2163RA-180NKB-52_ 2163RA-180NJB-52_
35”W, 20”D[4]
6.0, 2163RAT-300NKB-54_ Available in NEMA Type 1 and
9[5] 255 200 PE-II
30”W, 20”D[4] 2163RAB-300NKB-54_ Type 1 with gasket only
• Select the appropriate suffix from table on page 212 to identify the circuit breaker type (e.g. 2163RA-034NKB-44CA).
Units—2163R
Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker, 480VAC (HEAVY DUTY)
226
Maximum The horsepower and kW ratings shown
Continuous below are for reference only. PowerFlex
Output Delivery
Frame 700 drive units should be sized Program
Amperes [1] according to the application and output Space Factor Catalog Number [2] Space Factor Catalog Number [2]
ampere rating.
Heavy Duty 480V
1.1 0.5 2163RA-2P1HKB-33_ 2163RA-2P1HJB-33_
1.6 0.75 2163RA-2P1HKB-34_ 2163RA-2P1HJB-34_
2.1 1 2163RA-3P4HKB-35_ 2.0 2163RA-3P4HJB-35_
0 3.0 1.5 2163RA-3P4HKB-36_ 2163RA-3P4HJB-36_
3.4 2 2.0 2163RA-5P0HKB-37_ 2163RA-5P0HJB-37_
5.0 3 2163RA-8P0HKB-38_ 2163RA-8P0HJB-38_
8.0 5 2163RA-011HKB-39_ 2.5 2163RA-011HJB-39_
SC
11 7.5 2163RA-014HKB-40_ 2163RA-014HJB-40_
1
14 10 2163RA-022HKB-41_ 2163RA-022HJB-41_
22 15 2163RA-027HKB-42_ 3.0 2163RA-027HJB-42_
2 2.5
27 20 2163RA-034HKB-43_ 2163RA-034HJB-43_
34 25 2163RA-040HKB-44_ 3.5 2163RA-040HJB-44_
14 3 40 30
3.0
2163RA-052HKB-45_ 2163RA-052HJB-45_
4.0
52 40 3.5 2163RA-065HKB-46_ 2163RA-065HJB-46_
4 65 50 6.0, 20” W[3] 2163RA-077HKB-47_ 6.0, 25” W[3] 2163RA-077HJB-47_
77 60 2163RA-096HKB-48_ 6.0 2163RA-096HJB-48_
5
96 75 2163RA-125HKB-49_ 25”W, 20”D[4] 2163RA-125HJB-49_
6.0 6.0 SC-II
125 100 2163RA-156HKB-50_ 2163RA-156HJB-50_
25”W, 20”D[4] 30”W, 20”D[4]
6
6.0
156 125 2163RA-180HKB-51_ 2163RA-180HJB-51_
35”W, 20”D[4]
2163RAT-300HKB-52_
180 150
6.0, 2163RAB-300HKB-52_ Available in NEMA Type 1 and
9[5] PE-II
30”W, 20”D[4] 2163RAT-300HKB-54_ Type 1 with gasket only
245 200
2163RAB-300HKB-54_
• Select the appropriate suffix from table on page 212 to identify the circuit breaker type (e.g. 2163RA-040HKB-44CA).
Units—2163R
Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker Disconnect, 600VAC (NORMAL DUTY)
227
Frame
Amperes should be sized according to Space Factor Catalog Number [1] Space Factor Catalog Number [1] Program
ampere rating.
Normal Duty 600V
1.7 [2] 1 2163RA-1P7NKC-35_ 2163RA-1P7NJC-35_
2.4 [2] 1.5 2163RA-2P7NKC-36_ 2163RA-2P7NJC-36_
2.0
2.7 [2] 2 2163RA-2P7NKC-37_ 2163RA-2P7NJC-37_
0
3.9 [2] 3 2163RA-3P9NKC-38_ 2163RA-3P9NJC-38_
2.0
6.1 [2] 5 2163RA-6P1NKC-39_ 2163RA-6P1NJC-39_
9.0 [2] 7.5 2163RA-9P0NKC-40_ 2.5 2163RA-9P0NJC-40_
11 [2] 10 2163RA-011NKC-41_ 2163RA-011NJC-41_
1
17 [2] 15 2163RA-017NKC-42_ 2163RA-017NJC-42_
22 [2] 20 2163RA-022NKC-43_ 3.0 2163RA-022NJC-43_
PE in U.S., 14
2 2.5
27 [2] 25 2163RA-027NKC-44_ 2163RA-027NJC-44_
32 [2] 30 2163RA-032NKC-45_ 3.5 2163RA-032NJC-45_ SC in
3.0 Canada
3 41 [2] 40 2163RA-041NKC-46_ 2163RA-041NJC-46_
4.0
52 [2] 50 3.5 2163RA-052NKC-47_ 2163RA-052NJC-47_
4 62 [3] 60 6.0, 20”W[4] 2163RA-062NKC-48_ 6.0, 25”W[4] 2163RA-062NJC-48_
6.0,
5 77 [3] 75 2163RA-077NKC-49_ 2163RA-077NJC-49_
25”W, 20”D[5]
99 [3] 100 6.0, 2163RA-125NKC-50_ 6.0, 2163RA-125NJC-50_
125 [3] 125 25”W, 20”D[5] 2163RA-125NKC-51_ 30”W, 20”D[5] 2163RA-125NJC-51_
6
6.0,
144 [3] 150 2163RA-144NKC-52_ 2163RA-144NJC-52_
35”W, 20”D[5]
• Select the appropriate suffix from table on page 212 to identify the circuit breaker type (e.g. 2163RA-027NKC-44CA).
Units—2163R
Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker Disconnect, 600VAC (HEAVY
DUTY)
228
Maximum The HP ratings shown below are
Continuous for reference only. PowerFlex
Output Delivery
Frame 700 drive units should be sized
Amperes according to the application and Space Factor Catalog Number [1] Space Factor Catalog Number [1] Program
output ampere rating.
Heavy Duty 600V
1.7 [2] 1 2163RA-2P7HKC-35_ 2163RA-2P7HJC-35_
2.4 [2] 1.5 2163RA-2P7HKC-36_ 2.0 2163RA-2P7HJC-36_
0 2.7 [2] 2 2163RA-3P9HKC-37_ 2163RA-3P9HJC-37_
3.9 [2] 3 2.0 2163RA-6P1HKC-38_ 2163RA-6P1HJC-38_
6.1 [2] 5 2163RA-9P0HKC-39_ 2.5 2163RA-9P0HJC-39_
9.0 [2] 7.5 2163RA-011HKC-40_ 2163RA-011HJC-40_
1
11 [2] 10 2163RA-017HKC-41_ 2163RA-017HJC-41_
17 [2] 15 2163RA-022HKC-42_ 3.0 2163RA-022HJC-42_
PE in U.S.,
2 2.5
14 22 [2] 20 2163RA-027HKC-43_ 2163RA-027HJC-43_
27 [2] 25 2163RA-032HKC-44_ 3.5 2163RA-032HJC-44_ SC in
3.0
3 32 [2] 30 2163RA-041HKC-45_ 2163RA-041HJC-45_ Canada
4.0
41 [2] 40 3.5 2163RA-052HKC-46_ 2163RA-052HJC-46_
4 52 [3] 50 6.0, 20”W[4] 2163RA-062HKC-47_ 6.0, 25”W[4] 2163RA-062HJC-47_
6.0,
5 62 [3] 60 2163RA-077HKC-48_ 2163RA-077HJC-48_
25”W, 20”D[5]
77 [3] 75 6.0, 2163RA-125HKC-49_ 6.0, 2163RA-125HJC-49_
[5] [5]
99 [3] 100 25”W, 20”D 2163RA-125HKC-50_ 30”W, 20”D 2163RA-125HJC-50_
6
6.0,
125 [3] 125 2163RA-144HKC-51_ 2163RA-144HJC-51_
35”W, 20”D [5]
• Select the appropriate suffix from table on page 212 to identify the circuit breaker type (e.g. 2163RA-032HKC-44CA).
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2162T and 2163T
PowerFlex 40 Drive
• Bulletins 2162T and 2163T use PowerFlex 40 Drives
• Bulletins 2162T and 2163T are sized for Normal Duty applications
• UL Class CC or J time delay drive input fuses provide both branch circuit and drive input
protection, fuse class dependent on drive rating
• Isolated logic and power produces a three-phase, pulse-width-modulated (PWM)
adjustable frequency output to vary motor speed
229
2162T A - 6P0 K B - 38 - 14HBA3

2163T A - 6P0 K B - 38CA - 14HBA3
PowerFlex 40 Nominal Output NEMA Enclosure Nominal Horsepower/kW and Human Interface Module
Current Rating Type Circuit Breaker Type and Options
229A 229D 229F

Code Type Code NEMA Enclosure Type Nominal Horsepower/kW
PowerFlex 40 Variable NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 Code Code and Circuit Breaker Type
2162T Frequency AC Drive K with gasket “38” Nominal Horsepower/kW
with Fusible Disconnect 2162T-”38”
J NEMA Type 12 code. See table on page 206
PowerFlex 40 Variable “38_” Nominal Horsepower/kW
2163T Frequency AC Drive
2163T-”38CA” code. See table on page 206
with Circuit Breaker “__CA” Circuit Breaker Type. See
table on page 212
229B
Code Wiring Type
A Type A 229E
229C Code Line Voltage
Nominal Constant Current Ratings (Amperes) N 380V [1] 14
380-480V Line Voltage 600V Line Voltage KN 400V [1]
Code Ratings Code Ratings I 415V [1]
1P4 1.4 1P7 1.7
B 480V
2P3 2.3 3P0 3.0
C 600V
4P0 4.0 4P2 4.2
6P0 6.0 6P6 6.6 [1] Units at these voltages are not UL or cUL listed.
010 10.5 9P9 9.9
012 12 012 12.2 229G
017 17 019 19 Human Interface Module
024 24 Code and Options
See options section beginning on
page 187
Units—2162T
Combination PowerFlex 40 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 380-480VAC
• All PowerFlex ratings are Normal Duty.
• Internal HIM (Human Interface Module) is included. Optional door mounted HIMs can be selected on page 189.
• PowerFlex 40 AC drives are cUL US (UL and cUL listed) as motor overload protective devices. An external overload
relay is not required for single motor applications. PowerFlex 40 AC drives are not intended for use with single phase
motors.
230
Nominal kW Nominal HP NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ NEMA 12

gasket
Maximum The horsepower and kw ratings shown
Continuous below Delivery
Frame are for reference only. PowerFlex
Output Space Space Program
40 drive units should be sized according to Catalog Number [2] Catalog Number [2]
Amperes[1] the application and output ampere rating. Factor Factor
380-415V[3] 480V
1.4 0.37 0.5 2162TA-1P4K_-_ 2162TA-1P4J_-_
2.3 0.55 - 0.75 0.75 - 1.0 2162TA-2P3K_-_ 2162TA-2P3J_-_
1.5 [4]
B 4.0 1.1 - 1.5 2.0 1.0[4] 2162TA-4P0K_-_ 2162TA-4P0J_-_
6.0 2.2 3.0 2162TA-6P0K_-_ 2162TA-6P0J_-_
SC
10.5 3.7 5.0 2162TA-010K_-_ 2.0 [4] 2162TA-010J_-_
12 5.5 7.5 2162TA-012K_-_ 2162TA-012J_-_
2.5 [4]
C 17 7.5 10 2.0 [4] 2162TA-017K_-_ 2162TA-017J_-_
24 11 15 2162TA-024K_-_ 3.0 [4] 2162TA-024J_-_
your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office and/or refer to PowerFlex 40 User Manual, 22B-UM001x-EN-E.
• Select voltage code from table on page 206 to the horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2162TA-1P4KB).
• Select the number from table on page 206 that corresponds to the horsepower or kilowatt rating desired (e.g., 2162TA-1P4KB-33 or 2162TA-1P4KN-33K).
14 [3] Units at these voltages are not UL listed or cUL listed
[4] Adding options to this catalog number could result in an increased space factor.
PowerFlex 40 Space Factors with Options 231
NEMA 1/1G NEMA 12
Isolated
Voltage Frame Drive Base Isolated Line or Signal Base Control Isolated Line or Isolated Signal
Control
Rating Rating Unit Station Signal Load Conditioner Unit Station Signal Load Conditioner
(Space 3, 4 or (-1, Conditioner Reactors (-14N2) AND (Space (-1, 3, 4 or Conditioner Reactors (-14N2) AND Line
5)
Factor) (-14N2) (-14R_ _) Line or Load Factor) 5) (-14N2) (-14R_ _) or Load Reactors
Reactors
1.4A
2.3A
1.5 1.5 1.5
B 4.0A 1.0 1.5 1.5 N/A N/A N/A N/A
380, 400, 6.0A
415 10.5A 2.0 2.0 2.0
12A
2.5 2.5 2.5
C 17A 2.0 2.0 2.0 N/A N/A N/A N/A
24A 3.0 3.0 3.0
1.4A
2.3A 1.5
1.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0
B 4.0A 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5
6.0A
480
10.5A 2.0 2.0 2.0
12A 2.0 2.5 2.5
2.5 2.5 2.5
C 17A 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
24A 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
Units—2162T
Combination PowerFlex 40 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 600VAC
motors.
232
Nominal HP NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ gasket NEMA 12
Maximum
Continuous The HP ratings shown below are for Delivery
Frame Output reference only. PowerFlex 40 drive Space Space
Catalog Number t [2] Catalog Number [2] Program
Amperes[1] units should be sized according to the Factor Factor
application and output ampere rating.
1.7 1.0 2162TA-1P7K_-_ 2162TA-1P7J_-_
3.0 1.5 - 2.0 2162TA-3P0K_-_ 1.5 [3] 2162TA-3P0J_-_
B
4.2 3.0 1.0 [3] 2162TA-4P2K_-_ 2162TA-4P2J_-_ PE in U.S.,
6.6 5.0 2162TA-6P6K_-_ 2.0 [3] 2162TA-6P6J_-_
9.9 7.5 2162TA-9P9K_-_ 2162TA-9P9J_-_
2.5 [3] SC in Canada
C 12.2 10 2.0 [3] 2162TA-012K_-_ 2162TA-012J_-_
19.0 15 2162TA-019K_-_ 3.0 [3] 2162TA-019J_-_
• Select voltage code from table on page 206 to the horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2162TA-1P7KC).
• Select the number from table on page 206 that corresponds to the horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2162TA-1P7KC-35).
14
NEMA 1/1G NEMA 12
Isolated
Voltage Frame Drive Base Control Isolated Line or Signal Base Control Isolated Line or Isolated Signal
(Space (-1, 3, 4 or Conditioner Reactors (-14N2) AND (Space (-1, 3, 4 or Conditioner Reactors (-14N2) AND Line
Factor) 5) (-14N2) (-14R_ _) Line or Load Factor) 5) (-14N2) (-14R_ _) or Load Reactors
Reactors
1.7A
3.0A 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0
B 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5
4.2A
600 6.6A 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
9.9A 2.5 2.5
2.5 2.5 2.5
C 12.2A 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
19A 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
Units—2163T
Combination PowerFlex 40 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker, 380-480VAC
motors.
234
Nominal kW Nominal HP NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ gasket NEMA 12
Maximum The HP and kW ratings shown below are for
Continuous reference only. PowerFlex 40 drive units Delivery
Frame Output should be sized according to the application Space Space
Catalog Number t [2] Catalog Number [2] Program
Amperes[1] and output ampere rating. Factor Factor
380-415V [3] 480V
1.4 0.37 0.5 2163TA-1P4K_-_ 2163TA-1P4J_-_
2.3 0.55 - 0.75 0.75 - 1.0 2163TA-2P3K_-_ 2163TA-2P3J_-_
1.5 [4]
B 4.0 1.1 - 1.5 1.5 - 2.0 1.0 [4] 2163TA-4P0K_-_ 2163TA-4P0J_-_
6.0 2.2 3.0 2163TA-6P0K_-_ 2163TA-6P0J_-_
SC
10.5 3.7 5.0 2163TA-010K_-_ 2.0 [4] 2163TA-010J_-_
12 5.5 7.5 2163TA-012K_-_ 2163TA-012J_-_
2.5 [4]
C 17 7.5 10 2.0 [4] 2163TA-017K_-_ 2163TA-017J_-_
24 11 15 2163TA-024K_-_ 3.0 [4] 2163TA-024J_-_
• Select voltage code from table on page 206 to the horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2163TA-1P4KB).
• Select the number from table on page 206 that corresponds to the horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2163TA-1P4KB-33).
• Select the appropriate suffix from table on page 212 to identify the circuit breaker type (e.g., 2163TA-1P4KB-33CA).
[3] Units at these voltages are not UL listed or cUL listed.
14 PowerFlex 40 Space Factors with Options 235
NEMA 1/1G NEMA 12
Isolated Isolated Signal Isolated Line or Isolated Signal
Voltage Frame Drive Base Unit Control Line or Load Conditioner Base Unit Control
Rating Rating (Space Station (-1, Signal Reactors (-14N2) AND (Space Station (-1, Signal Load Conditioner (-14N2)
Conditioner Conditioner Reactors AND Line or Load
Factor) 3, 4 or 5) (-14N2) (-14R_ _) Line or Load Factor) 3, 4 or 5) (-14N2) (-14R_ _) Reactors
Reactors
1.4A
2.3A
1.5 1.5 1.5
B 4.0A 1.0 1.5 1.5 N/A N/A N/A N/A
380, 400, 6.0A
415 10.5A 2.0 2.0 2.0
12A
2.5 2.5 2.5
C 17A 2.0 2.0 2.0 N/A N/A N/A N/A
24A 3.0 3.0 3.0
1.4A
2.3A 1.5
1.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0
B 4.0A 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5
6.0A
480
10.5A 2.0 2.0 2.0
12A 2.0 2.5 2.5
2.5 2.5 2.5
C 17A 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
24A 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
Units—2163T
Combination PowerFlex 40 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 600VAC
motors.
236
NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/
Nominal HP NEMA 12
Maximum gasket
Continuous The HP ratings shown below are for Delivery
Frame Output reference only. PowerFlex 40 drive units Space Space Program
Amperes[1] should be sized according to the Factor Catalog Number t [2] Factor Catalog Number [2]
application and output ampere rating.
1.7 1.0 2163TA-1P7K_-_ 2163TA-1P7J_-_
3.0 1.5 - 2.0 2163TA-3P0K_-_ 1.5 [3] 2163TA-3P0J_-_
B
4.2 3.0 1.0 [3] 2163TA-4P2K_-_ 2163TA-4P2J_-_ PE in U.S.,
6.6 5.0 2163TA-6P6K_-_ 2.0 [3] 2163TA-6P6J_-_
9.9 7.5 2163TA-9P9K_-_ 2163TA-9P9J_-_
2.5 [3] SC in Canada
C 12.2 10 2.0 [3] 2163TA-012K_-_ 2163TA-012J_-_
19.0 15 2163TA-019K_-_ 3.0 [3] 2163TA-019J_-_
• Select voltage code from table on page 206 to the horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2163TA-1P7KC).
• Select the number from table on page 206 that corresponds to the horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2163TA-1P7KC-35).
• Select the appropriate suffix from table on page 212 to identify the circuit breaker type (e.g., 2163TA-1P4KB-33CA).
[3] Adding options to this catalog number could result in an increased space factor. 14
NEMA 1/1G NEMA 12
Isolated
Voltage Frame Drive Base Control Isolated Line or Signal Base Control Isolated Line or Isolated Signal
(Space (-1, 3, 4 or Conditioner Reactors (-14N2) AND (Space (-1, 3, 4 or Conditioner Reactors (-14N2) AND Line
Factor) 5) (-14N2) (-14R_ _) Line or Load Factor) 5) (-14N2) (-14R_ _) or Load Reactors
Reactors
1.7A
3.0A 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0
B 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5
4.2A
600 6.6A 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
9.9A 2.5 2.5
2.5 2.5 2.5
C 12.2A 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
19A 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2164Q and 2165Q
PowerFlex 70 Drive with Manual Isolated Drive Bypass
• Bulletins 2164Q and 2165Q use Normal Duty PowerFlex 70 Drives
• Two interlocked compartments, one with bypass circuitry and one with drive - drive can be taken
offline and replaced as needed with minimal disruption to the application process
• Isolated logic and power produces a three-phase, pulse-width-modulated (PWM) adjustable
frequency output to vary motor speed
238
2164Q A - 1P1 A B - 33 - 14HA0

2165Q A - 1P1 A B - 33CA - 14HA0
PowerFlex 70 Nominal NEMA Enclosure Nominal Horsepower/kW and Human Interface Module
Output Current Rating Type Circuit Breaker Type and Options
238A
238F
Code Type
Manual Drive Bypass Code Code and Circuit Breaker Type
2164Q with PowerFlex 70 VFD
and Fusible Disconnect “33” Nominal Horsepower/kW
238E 2164Q-“33” code. See table on page 206
Manual Drive Bypass Code Line Voltage
2165Q with PowerFlex 70 VFD “33_” Nominal Horsepower/kW
B 480V
2165Q-“33CA” code.
and Circuit Breaker See table on page 206
C 600V “__CA” Circuit Breaker Type. See
table on page 212
238D
238B
NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with gasket
Code Wiring Type A w/ external reset button
A Type A NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 with gasket 238G
K w/o external reset button
NEMA Type 12 w/ external reset Human Interface Module
D Code and Options
button
NEMA Type 12 w/o external reset See options section beginning on
J page 187
button
14 238C
Nominal Constant Current Ratings
(Amperes) [1]
480 Line Voltage 600V Line Voltage
Code Ratings Code Ratings
1P1 1.1 0P9 0.9
2P1 2.1 1P7 1.7
3P4 3.4 2P7 2.7
5P0 5.0 3P9 3.9
8P0 8 6P1 6.1
011 11 9P0 9.0
014 14 011 11
022 22 017 17
027 27 022 22
[1] Bulletins 2164Q and 2165Q use Normal Duty
PowerFlex 70 Drives.
Units—2164Q
Combination PowerFlex 70 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) with Fusible Disconnect and Manual, Isolated Bypass, 480V
• Configuration consists of two units. The bypass unit contains a fusible disconnect, bypass contactor, 6-pole manual
bypass switch, control circuit transformer and pull-apart terminal blocks. Drive unit contains PowerFlex 70 variable
frequency drive.
• A Human Interface Module and Control Platform Type are required. Select on page 189 and 190.
• “DRIVE ON” and “BYPASS ON” pilot lights (options 4_ _) and HAND-OFF-AUTO/HAND START-HAND STOP (option
1F) must be specified. See page 187.
• Unit doors are interlocked.
239
Nominal HP NEMA 12
gasket
Maximum
Continuous The horsepower ratings shown Delivery
Frame Output below are for reference only. Space [2] Space [2] Program
Amperes [1] PowerFlex 70 drive units should be Catalog Number Catalog Number
Factor Factor
1.1 0.5 2164QA-1P1A_-_ 2164QA-1P1D_-_
A 2.1 0.75-1 2.5 2164QA-2P1A_-_ 2164QA-2P1D_-_
3.4 1.5-2 2164QA-3P4A_-_ 3.0 2164QA-3P4D_-_
5 3 2164QA-5P0A_-_ 2164QA-5P0D_-_
B 3.0
8 5 2164QA-8P0A_-_ 2164QA-8P0D_-_ SC-II
11 7.5 2164QA-011A_-_ 2164QA-011D_-_
C 3.5
14 10 2164QA-014A_-_ 2164QA-014D_-_
3.5
22 15 2164QA-022A_-_ 4.0 2164QA-022D_-_
D
27 20 2164QA-027A_-_ 4.5 2164QA-027D_-_
• Select voltage code from table on page 206 (2164QA-1P1AB-_).
• Select HP rating code from table on page 206 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2164QA-1P1AB-33).
14
the letter “K” (e.g.,2164QA-1P1K_-_) or replace the letter “D” with the letter “J” (e.g., 2164QA-1P1J_-_).
Units—2164Q
Combination PowerFlex 70 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) with Fusible Disconnect and Manual, Isolated Bypass, 600V
frequency drive.
• “DRIVE ON” and “BYPASS ON” pilot lights (options 4_ _) and HAND-OFF-AUTO/HAND START-HAND STOP
(option 1F) must be specified. See page 187.
240
Nominal HP NEMA 12
gasket
Maximum
Continuous The horsepower ratings shown Delivery
Frame Output below are for reference only. Space Space Program
Amperes [1] PowerFlex 70 drive units should be Factor Catalog Number[2] Factor Catalog Number [2]
0.9 0.5 2164QA-0P9A_-_ 2164QA-0P9D_-_
A 1.7 0.75-1 2.5 2164QA-1P7A_-_ 2164QA-1P7D_-_
2.7 1.5-2 2164QA-2P7A_-_ 3.0 2164QA-2P7D_-_
3.9 3 2164QA-3P9A_-_ 2164QA-3P9D_-_ PE-II in U.S
B 3.0
6.1 5 2164QA-6P1A_-_ 2164QA-6P1D_-_
9 7.5 2164QA-9P0A_-_ 2164QA-9P0D_-_ SC-II in Canada
C 3.5
11 10 2164QA-011A_-_ 2164QA-011D_-_
3.5
17 15 2164QA-017A_-_ 4.0 2164QA-017D_-_
D
22 20 2164QA-022A_-_ 4.5 2164QA-022D_-_
• Select voltage code from table on page 206 (2164QA-1P7AC-_).
• Select HP rating code from table on page 206 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2164QA-1P7AC-34).
14 the letter “K” (e.g.,2164QA-1P7K_-_) or replace the letter “D” with the letter “J” (e.g., 2164QA-1P7J_-_).
Units—2165Q
Combination PowerFlex 70 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) with Circuit Breaker Disconnect and Manual, Isolated Bypass,
480V
• Configuration consists of two units. The bypass unit contains a circuit breaker, bypass contactor, 6-pole manual
frequency drive and pull-apart terminal blocks.
• “DRIVE 0N” and “BYPASS ON” pilot lights (options 4_ _) and HAND-OFF-AUTO/HAND START-HAND STOP (option
241
Frame Output PowerFlex 70 AC drive units Space Space
Catalog Number [2] Catalog Number [2] Program
rating.
1.1 0.5 2165QA-1P1A_-_ 2165QA-1P1D_-_
A 2.1 0.75-1 2.5 2165QA-2P1A_-_ 2165QA-2P1D_-_
3.4 1.5-2 2165QA-3P4A_-_ 3.0 2165QA-3P4D_-_
5 3 2165QA-5P0A_-_ 2165QA-5P0D_-_
B 3.0
8 5 2165QA-8P0A_-_ 2165QA-8P0D_-_ SC-II
11 7.5 2165QA-011A_-_ 2165QA-011D_-_
C 3.5
14 10 2165QA-014A_-_ 2165QA-014D_-_
3.5
22 15 2165QA-022A_-_ 4.0 2165QA-022D_-_
D
27 20 2165QA-027A_-_ 4.5 2165QA-027D_-_
• Select voltage code from table on page 206 (e.g., 2165QA-1P1AB). 14
• Select HP rating code from table on page 206 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2165QA-1P1AB-33).
• Select the appropriate suffix from the Circuit Breaker Type table on page 212 to identify circuit breaker type (e.g., 2165QA-1P1AB-33CA).
Units—2165Q
Combination PowerFlex 70 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) with Circuit Breaker Disconnect and Manual, Isolated Bypass,
600V
frequency drive and pull-apart terminal blocks.
• “DRIVE ON” and “BYPASS ON” pilot lights (options 4_ _) and HAND-OFF-AUTO/HAND START-HAND STOP (option
242
Nominal HP
Maximum The horsepower ratings shown Catalog Number
Continuous below are for reference only. Space Space Catalog Number Delivery
Frame NEMA Type 1 and
Output PowerFlex 70 AC drive units should Factor Factor NEMA 12 [2] Program
[1] Type 1 w/ gasket [2]
Amperes be sized according to the application
0.9 0.5 2165QA-0P9A_-_ 2165QA-0P9D_-_
A 1.7 0.75-1 2.5 2165QA-1P7A_-_ 2165QA-1P7D_-_
2.7 1.5-2 2165QA-2P7A_-_ 3.0 2165QA-2P7D_-_
3.9 3 2165QA-3P9A_-_ 2165QA-3P9D_-_ PE-II in U.S
B 3.0
6.1 5 2165QA-6P1A_-_ 2165QA-6P1D_-_
9 7.5 2165QA-9P0A_-_ 2165QA-9P0D_-_ SC-II in Canada
C 3.5
11 10 2165QA-011A_-_ 2165QA-011D_-_
3.5
17 15 2165QA-017A_-_ 4.0 2165QA-017D_-_
D
22 20 2165QA-022A_-_ 4.5 2165QA-022D_-_
• Select voltage code from table on page 206 (e.g., 2165QA-1P7AC).
• Select HP rating code from table on page 206 that corresponds to the nominal horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2165QA-1P7AC-34).
• Select the appropriate suffix from the Circuit Breaker Type table on page 212 to identify circuit breaker type (e.g., 2165QA-1P7AC-34CA).
14 • The catalog numbers listed include an external reset button for the overload relay. To order catalog numbers without the external reset button, replace the letter “A” with
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2164R and 2165R
PowerFlex 700 Drive with Manual Isolated Drive Bypass
• Two interlocked components, one with bypass circuitry and one with drive - drive can be taken offline and replaced as needed with
minimal disruption to the application process
• Isolated logic and power produces a three-phase, pulse-width-modulated (PWM) adjustable frequency output to vary motor speed
243
2164R A - 034 A B - 44 - 14HA0

2165R A - 034 A B - 44CA - 14HA0
PowerFlex 700 Nominal Output NEMA Enclosure Nominal Horsepower/kW and Human Interface Module and
Current Rating Type Circuit Breaker Type Options
243A
243F
Code Type
Manual Drive Bypass Code and Circuit Breaker
with PowerFlex 700 Code Type
2164R VFD Drive and Fusible 243E
Disconnect “44” Nominal Horsepower/kW
Line 2164R-”44” code. See table on page 206.
Manual Drive Bypass Code Voltage
2165R with PowerFlex 700 “44” Nominal Horsepower/kW
B 480V code. See table on page 206
VFD and Circuit Breaker 2165R-”44CA”
C 600V “__CA” Circuit Breaker Type.
See table on page 212.
243B
243D
Code Wiring Type
A Type A Code NEMA Enclosure Type
NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 243G
243C A with gasket w/ external Human Interface Module
Nominal Constant Current Ratings (Amperes) [1] reset button Code and Options
480V Line Voltage 600V Line Voltage NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 See options section beginning on
K with gasket w/o external page 187
Code Ratings Code Ratings reset button
1P1 1.1 1P7 1.7 NEMA Type 12 w/ external
2P1 2.1 2P7 2.7 D reset button 14
3P4 3.4 3P9 3.9 NEMA Type 12 w/o
J
5P0 5.0 6P1 6.1 external reset button
8P0 8 9P0 9
011 11 011 11
014 14 017 17
022 22 022 22
027 27 027 27
034 34 032 32
040 40 041 41
052 52 052 52
065 65 062 62
077 77 077 77
096 96 125 125
125 125 144 144
156 156
180 180
[1] Bulletins 2164R and 2165R use Normal Duty PowerFlex 700
Drives.
Units—2164R
Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) with Fusible Disconnect and Manual, Isolated Bypass,
480VAC
frequency drive.
• A Human Interface Module (HIM) and a Control Interface Type are required. Select on page 189 and 190.
• “Drive On” and “Bypass On” pilot lights (options 4_ _) and HAND-OFF-AUTO/HAND START-HAND STOP (option
• DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (DSA) options (11DSA2 and 11DSA3) are available for the bypass unit of the manual drive
bypass configuration.
244
Frame Output PowerFlex 700 drive units Catalog Number
should be sized according to Space Factor [2] Space Factor Catalog Number [2] Program
Amperes [1]
ampere rating.
1.1 0.5 2164RA-1P1A_-_ 2164RA-1P1D_-_
2.1 0.75 - 1 2164RA-2P1A_-_ 2164RA-2P1D_-_
3.0 3.0
3.4 1.5 - 2 2164RA-3P4A_-_ 2164RA-3P4D_-_
0
5 3 2164RA-5P0A_-_ 2164RA-5P0D_-_
8 5 2164RA-8P0A_-_ 2164RA-8P0D_-_
11 7.5 2164RA-011A_-_ 3.5 2164RA-011D_-_
14 10 2164RA-014A_-_ 2164RA-014D_-_
1 3.5
22 15 2164RA-022A_-_ 2164RA-022D_-_
27 20 2164RA-027A_-_ 4.0 2164RA-027D_-_
2
34 25 2164RA-034A_-_ 2164RA-034D_-_
SC-II
40 30 4.5 2164RA-040A_-_ 4.5 2164RA-040D_-_
3 52 40 5.0 2164RA-052A_-_ 5.5 2164RA-052D_-_
14 65 50 5.5 2164RA-065A_-_ 6.0 2164RA-065D_-_
4 77 60 6.0, 35” W [3] 2164RA-077A_-_ 6.0, 35” W[3] 2164RA-077D_-_
96 75 6.0 2164RA-096A_-_ 6.0 2164RA-096D_-_
5
125 100 35” W, 20” D[4] 2164RA-125A_-_ 35” W, 20” D[4] 2164RA-125D_-_
6.0
156 125 2164RA-156A_-_ 2164RA-156D_-_
6.0 45” W, 20” D[4]
6
45” W, 20” D [4] 6.0
180 150 2164RA-180A_-_ 2164RA-180D_-_
50” W, 20” D[4]
• Select voltage code from table on page 206 (2164RA-034AB).
• Select number from table on page 206 that corresponds to the horsepower rating desired (e.g., 2164RA-034AB-44).
• The catalog numbers listed include an external resent button for the overload relay. To order catalog numbers without the external reset button, replace the letter “A” with
the letter “K” (e.g.,2164RA-034K_-_) or replace the letter “D” with the letter “J” (e.g., 2164RA-034J_-_).
[3] Frame mounted unit. Section does not have vertical wireway.
[4] Frame mounted unit. Section does not have vertical wireway. Horizontal bus is 5” deeper than standard.
Units—2164R
Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) with Fusible Disconnect and Manual, Isolated Bypass,
600VAC
frequency drive.
• “Drive On” and “Bypass On” pilot lights (options 4_ _) and HAND-OFF-AUTO/HAND START-HAND STOP (option
245
Nominal HP NEMA 12
gasket
Maximum
Continuous The horsepower ratings shown below Delivery
Frame are for reference only. PowerFlex 700
Output Space Space Program
Amperes drive units should be sized according to
Factor Catalog Number [1] Factor Catalog Number [2]
the application and output ampere
rating.
1.7 [2] 1 2164RA-1P7A_-_ 2164RA-1P7D_-_
2.7 [2] 1.5 - 2 3.0 2164RA-2P7A_-_ 3.0 2164RA-2P7D_-_
0 3.9 [2] 3 2164RA-3P9A_-_ 2164RA-3P9D_-_
6.1 [2] 5 2164RA-6P1A_-_ 2164RA-6P1D_-_
9 [2] 7.5 2164RA-9P0A_-_ 3.5 2164RA-9P0D_-_
11 [2] 10 2164RA-011A_-_ 2164RA-011D_-_
1 3.5
17 [2] 15 2164RA-017A_-_ 2164RA-017D_-_
22 [2] 20 2164RA-022A_-_ 4.0 2164RA-022D_-_ PE-II in U.S.,
2
27 [2] 25 2164RA-027A_-_ 2164RA-027D_-_
32 [2] 30 4.5 2164RA-032A_-_ 4.5 2164RA-032D_-_ SC-II in 14
Canada
3 41 [2] 40 2164RA-041A_-_ 2164RA-041D_-_
5.0 5.5
52 [2] 50 2164RA-052A_-_ 2164RA-052D_-_
4 62 [3] 60 6.0, 35”W[4] 2164RA-062A_-_ 6.0, 35”W[4] 2164RA-062D_-_
6.0, 35”W, 6.0, 35”W,
5 77 [3] 75 2164RA-077A_-_ 2164RA-077D_-_
20”D [5] 20”D [5]
6.0, 45”W,
125 [3] 100 - 125 2164RA-125A_-_ 2164RA-125D_-_
6.0, 45”W, 20”D [5]
6
20”D [5] 6.0, 50”W,
144 [3] 150 2164RA-144A_-_ 2164RA-144D_-_
20”D [5]
the letter “K” (e.g., 2164RA-034K_-_) or replace the letter “D” with the letter “J” (e.g., 2164RA-034J_-_).
Units—2165R
Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) with Circuit Breaker Disconnect and Manual, Isolated
Bypass, 480VAC
frequency drive.
• A Human Interface Module and a Control Interface Type are required. Select on page 189 and 190.
• “Drive On” and “Bypass On” pilot lights (option 4_ _) and HAND-OFF-AUTO/HAND START-HAND STOP (option 1F)
must be specified. See page 187.
246
Frame Output PowerFlex 700 drive units should Catalog
Space Factor Space Factor Catalog Number [2] Program
Amperes [1] be sized according to the Number [2]
rating.
1.1 0.5 2165RA-1P1A_-_ 2165RA-1P1D_-_
2.1 0.75 - 1 2165RA-2P1A_-_ 2165RA-2P1D_-_
3.0 3.0
3.4 1.5 - 2 2165RA-3P4A_-_ 2165RA-3P4D_-_
0
5 3 2165RA-5P0A_-_ 2165RA-5P0D_-_
8 5 2165RA-8P0A_-_ 2165RA-8P0D_-_
11 7.5 2165RA-011A_-_ 3.5 2165RA-011D_-_
14 10 2165RA-014A_-_ 2165RA-014D_-_
1 3.5
22 15 2165RA-022A_-_ 2165RA-022D_-_
27 20 2165RA-027A_-_ 4.0 2165RA-027D_-_
2
34 25 2165RA-034A_-_ 2165RA-034D_-_
SC-II
40 30 4.5 2165RA-040A_-_ 4.5 2165RA-040D_-_
3 52 40 5.0 2165RA-052A_-_ 5.5 2165RA-052D_-_
14 65 50 5.5 2165RA-065A_-_ 6.0 2165RA-065D_-_
4 77 60 6.0, 35” W[3] 2165RA-077A_-_ 6.0, 35” W[3] 2165RA-077D_-_
96 75 6.0 2165RA-096A_-_ 6.0 2165RA-096D_-_
5
125 100 35” W, 20” D[4] 2165RA-125A_-_ 35” W, 20” D[4] 2165RA-125D_-_
6.0
156 125 2165RA-156A_-_ 2165RA-156D_-_
6.0 45” W, 20” D[4]
6
45” W, 20” D [4] 6.0
180 150 2165RA-180A_-_ 2165RA-180D_-_
50” W, 20” D[4]
• Select voltage code from table on page 206 (e.g., 2165RA-034AB).
• Select number from table on page 206 that corresponds to the kilowatt rating desired (e.g., 2165RA-034AB-44).
• Select the appropriate suffix from table on page 212 to identify the circuit breaker type (e.g., 2165RA-037AN-44KCA).
• The catalog numbers listed include an external resent button for the overload relay. To order catalog numbers without the external reset button, replace the letter “A” with
the letter “K” (e.g.,2165RA-034K_-_) or replace the letter “D” with the letter “J” (e.g., 2165RA-034J_-_).
Units—2165R
Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive (VFD) with Circuit Breaker and Manual, Isolated Bypass, 600VAC
frequency drive.
• “Drive On” and “Bypass On” pilot lights (option 4_ _) and HAND-OFF-AUTO/HAND START-HAND STOP (option 1F)
must be specified. See page 187.
247
Nominal HP NEMA 12
gasket
Maximum The horsepower ratings shown below Delivery
Frame Continuous are for reference only. PowerFlex 700 Space Catalog Number Space Program
Output Amperes drive units should be sized according [1] Catalog Number [2]
Factor Factor
to the application and output ampere
rating.
1.7 [2] 1 2165RA-1P7A_-_ 2165RA-1P7D_-_
2.7 [2] 1.5 - 2 3.0 2165RA-2P7A_-_ 3.0 2165RA-2P7D_-_
0 3.9 [2] 3 2165RA-3P9A_-_ 2165RA-3P9D_-_
6.1 [2] 5 2165RA-6P1A_-_ 2165RA-6P1D_-_
9 [2] 7.5 2165RA-9P0A_-_ 3.5 2165RA-9P0D_-_
11 [2] 10 2165RA-011A_-_ 2165RA-011D_-_
1 3.5
17 [2] 15 2165RA-017A_-_ 2165RA-017D_-_
22 [2] 20 2165RA-022A_-_ 4.0 2165RA-022D_-_ PE-II in U.S.,
2
27 [2] 25 2165RA-027A_-_ 2165RA-027D_-_
32 [2] 30 4.5 2165RA-032A_-_ 4.5 2165RA-032D_-_
SC-II in
3 41 [2] 40 2165RA-041A_-_ 2165RA-041D_-_ Canada 14
5.0 5.5
52 [2] 50 2165RA-052A_-_ 2165RA-052D_-_
4 62 [3] 60 6.0, 35”W[4] 2165RA-062A_-_ 6.0, 35”W[4] 2165RA-062D_-_
6.0, 35”W, 6.0, 35”W,
5 77 [3] 75 2165RA-077A_-_ 2165RA-077D_-_
20”D [5] 20”D [5]
6.0, 45”W,
125 [3] 100 - 125 2165RA-125A_-_ 2165RA-125D_-_
6.0, 45”W, 20”D [5]
6
20”D [5] 6.0, 50”W,
144 [3] 150 2165RA-144A_-_ 2165RA-144D_-_
20”D [5]
the letter “K” (e.g., 2165RA-034K_-_) or replace the letter “D” with the letter “J” (e.g., 2165RA-034J_-_).
• Select the appropriate suffix from the table on page 212 to identify the circuit breaker type (e.g., 2165RA-022AC-33CA)
14
Accessories for Combination Variable Frequency
AC Motor Drive Units
To select pilot light lens color, add letter(s) to the option number: A = amber, B = blue, C = clear, G = green, R = red,
W = white (e.g., 4RG is a red ON and green OFF pilot light). Clear and white are not available for Bulletin 800T LED type pilot lights.
Clear is not available on Bulletin 800F LED pilot lights. White is not available on Bulletin 800F incandescent pilot lights.
248
PowerFlex
PowerFlex 40, 70 70 and 700 Manual
and 700 Drives Drive Bypass
Option Delivery
Option Description 2162Q Number Program
2162R 2162T 2164Q 2165Q
2163Q 2163T 2164R. 2165R
2163R
DRIVE START–DRIVE STOP 9[4] 9[5], -1
Push Buttons [1],[2], [3] [4]
JOG 9 -1E
Push Buttons and Selector
HAND-OFF-AUTO, HAND START-HAND STOP 9[6] 9[6] -1F
Switch [1]
AUTO–MANUAL (speed select) 9[4] 9[5] -3
Selector Switch [1],[2],[3] FORWARD–REVERSE 9[4] -3E
HAND–OFF–AUTO 9[4] 9[5] -3F
RUN 9 9 -4_
Standard type RUN-AT SPEED 9 -4_ _
BYPASS ON-DRIVE ON 9[6] 9[6] -4_ _ SC
RUN 9 9 -4L_
LED type RUN-AT SPEED 9 -4L_ _
Pilot Lights (Transformer
Type for 800T, full voltage
BYPASS ON-DRIVE ON 9[6] 9[6] -4L _ _
RUN 9 9 -5_
800F)[1], [3]
Push-to-Test standard type RUN–AT SPEED 9 -5_ _
BYPASS ON-DRIVE ON 9[6] 9[6] -5_ _
RUN 9 9 -5L_
Push-to-Test LED type RUN-AT SPEED 9 -5L_ _
BYPASS ON-DRIVE ON 9[6] 9[6] -5L_ _
[1] When three (3) or less pilot devices are selected Bulletin 800T pilot devices are supplied except selector switches are Bulletin 800H devices. When more than three (3) pilot lights
are selected, 800F pilot devices are supplied.
[2] Options 1, 1E, and 3E are not available with communication module 14GC, 14GD, 14GE, 14GR.
[3] Extra space may be required for Bulletin 2162Q, 2163Q, 2162T, 2163T, refer to specific drive selection pages for specific space factor adders.
[4] Option -3F is mutually exclusive with option -1, -1E, -3, and -3E.
[5] For Bulletin 2162T and 2163T, option -1, -3, and -3F are mutually exclusive with each other
[6] Push button and selector switch and pilot lights must be specified for Bulletin 2164Q, 2165Q, 2164R and 2165R units. 15

250
PowerFlex
PowerFlex 40, 70 and
700 Drives 70 and 700 Manual
Drive Bypass
Delivery
2162Q Program
Option 2163Q 2162T 2164Q 2165Q
Option Number Description 2162R 2163T 2164R 2165R
2163R
For use with contactors and starters to provide DeviceNet inputs and outputs. (4) 120V inputs
DeviceNet -11DSA2 and (2) 120V outputs. Not to be used with options 7FEC_ or 7FC_. Available for 110V-120V 9 [1] 9 [1]
Communication control only.
Modules (mutually For use with contactors and starters to provide DeviceNet inputs and outputs. (4) 24VDC
exclusive) -11DSA3 inputs and (2) 240VAC (max), 30VDC (max) outputs. Not to be used with 7FEC_ or 7FC_. 9 [1] 9 [1]
Available for 110V-120VAC or 220V-240VAC control voltage.
ControlNet Communication Module, Mounted Internal to Drive. Includes one SC
-14GC 1786-TPYS tap, supplied loose for customer mounting 9 9[3] 9 9
Communication 9
-14GD DeviceNet communication module, mounted internal to drive 9[3] 9 [1] 9 [1]
Module[2]
-14GE Ethernet communication module. Mounted internal to drive. 9 9[3] 9 9
-14GR Remote I/O communication module, mounted internal to drive 9 9 9
[1] When DeviceNet communication is required, select DeviceNet Communication Module (Option 14GD) and DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary (Option 11DSA2 or 11DSA3).
[2] Communication modules (options -14GC, 14GD, 14GE, and 14GR) are mutually exclusive on Bulletins 2162Q, 2162R, 2163Q, 2163R, 2164Q, 2164R, 2165Q, 2165R, 2162T and
2163T.
[3] For Bulletin 2162T and 2163T, when 14GC, 14GD or 14GE is specified with Human Operator Interface Module (Option 14HBA3 or 14HC2S) speed control on the Human Interface
Module is not functional.
15

251
PowerFlex
PowerFlex 40, 70 and 70 and 700
700 Drives Manual Drive
Option Bypass Delivery
Option Number Description Program
2162Q
2163Q 2162T 2164Q 2165Q
2162R 2163T 2164R 2165R
2163R
-14HBA0 No HIM (blank plate) Mounted in bezel on the door. 9 9 9 9
-14HBA3 LCD display, full numeric keypad HIM is removable. NEMA 1, 1G 9 9 9 9
-14HBA5 LCD display, programmer only only. Cable to drive is included. 9 9 9
Human Interface
-14HA0 No HIM (blank plate) Mounted inside unit on drive. 9 [2] 9 9
Module (HIM) [1] Available on NEMA Type 1, 1
-14HA3 LCD display, full numeric keypad with gasket and 12. Includes 9[2] 9 9 SC
(mutually 9 9
exclusive)
-14HA5 LCD display, programmer only viewing window on door. 9 [2]
-14HC2S LCD display, digital keypad Door mounted. HIM is not 9
-14HC3S LCD display, full numeric keypad removable. Cable to drive is 9 9 9
-14HC5S LCD display, programmer only included. NEMA Type 12 Only. 9 9 9
[1] A Human Interface Module (HIM) must be selected, except on Bulletin 2162T and 2163T. Optional door mounted HIMs are available for 2162T and 2163T units. Bulletin 2162T
and 2163T drives include an integral HIM as standard. Bulletin 2162T and 2163T drives include a viewing window over the integral HIM module when optional HIM is not
selected.
[2] Not available on Bulletin 2162R and 2163R with size code 300.
15

252
PowerFlex
PowerFlex 40, 70 and 700 Drives 70 and 700
Option Manual Drive Delivery
Option Description Bypass
Number Program
2162Q 2162R 2162T 2164Q 2164R
2163Q 2163R 2163T 2165Q 2165R
Encoder Feedback -14ENC1 Encoder Feedback Module, 12V 9 [1] 9 SC
-14DA1C 24 VDC Control Voltage Interface with Vector Control 9[1] 9[1]
I/O Control Interface -14DA1D 120 VAC Control Voltage Interface with Vector Control 9[1] 9[1]
Type[2] -14DA1E 24 VDC Control Voltage with Sensorless Vector Control 9 [3]
SC
-14DA1F 120 VAC Control Voltage with Sensorless Vector Control 9[3]
Enhanced Control -14C0 Enhanced control for PowerFlex 70 drive units 9 9
Enhanced control for PowerFlex 70 drive units with DriveGuard
Platform Type[4] -14G0 Safe-off Option 9 9
Provides a DC signal that is proportional to the drive DC output
Analog Output Isolation -14N2 signal. The signal is fully isolated from the drive output, line power 9 9 9[5] 9 9
and ground.
This option disconnects internal drive protective devices which are SC
Ungrounded Power referenced to ground. This option is required if the drive will be 9 9 9
System
-14PSUG
used on an ungrounded power system or a power system which is 9[6]
grounded through any impedance.
[1] Available only for Bulletin 2162R, 2163R, 2164R and 2165R units, except units with size code 300.
[2] Control type MUST be selected for Bulletin 2162R, 2163R, 2164R and 2165R.
[3] Available only for Bulletin 2162R and 2163R with size code 300.
[4] Enhanced control option MUST be specified.
[5] Space factor adder may be required for Bulletin 2162T and 2163T. See pages 172-175.
[6] For size code 300, Bulletin 2162R and 2163R, option -14PSUG changes delivery program to Engineered. Contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office for availability.
15

A load reactor (connecting a reactor on the load side of the drive) should be considered as a means to address one or more of the following issues:
1.)Multi-motor applications (one drive feeding more than one motor).
2.)A low voltage insulation class motor applied on a long cable length.
3.)575V motor applications (other than short cable length applications).
A load reactor is NOT required for applications where:
1.)Line voltage is 230V or less.
2.)A Bulletin 1204 terminator unit is utilized.
3.)An Allen-Bradley controlled matched solution is being applied (e.g., a 1850V CIV motor is used for a cable length of 600 ft. [185 m]or less in a
575V application).
A line reactor (connecting a reactor on the line side of the drive) should be considered as a means to address one or more of the following issues:
1.)Applications with severe power line transient disturbances degrading the power quality of the incoming power line (e.g., arcing during power
line switching, arc welder applications, or switching of a system power factor correction capacitor bank at the main service [especially if the PFCC
bank is switched by a vacuum contactor]).
2.)Applications utilizing improvement of power line harmonic content.
–However, due to the built-in DC link reactor internal to the Allen-Bradley IGBT-based PWM drives, a line reactor will usually have little effect on
the improvement of power line harmonic distortion.
3.)Applications exposed to excessive high voltage transients due to lightning.
–However, a surge protective device unit for the total MCC is recommended for such applications (e.g., catalog #2100-SPKB-1, catalog
#2100-SPKC-1, etc.).
Applications with both line and load reactors are not recommended without first contacting your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office. While this
application is not detrimental to the drive itself, it may produce erroneous drive operation caused by effects of common mode current. These effects
can be influenced by drive HP, carrier frequency, motor load and output cable length. Contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office when both
line and load reactors are deemed necessary for the application.
Additional recommendations are available in the specific IGBT-based PWM inverter user manual. Consult these manuals for restrictions regarding drive
carrier frequency, motor cable length and motor insulation class (inverter class motors). Information on the use of reactors and the use of Bulletin 1204
terminators can also be found in the user manuals.
253
PowerFlex 40, 70 and PowerFlex 70 and
700 Manual Drive
700 Drives Bypass Delivery
Option Option Number Description Program
2162Q 2163Q 2164Q 2165Q
2162R 2163R
2162T 2163T 2164R 2165R
0.5-1 HP 9 9 9 9
1.5-2 HP 9 9 9 9
3-5 HP 9 9 9 9
7.5 HP 9 9 9 9
10 HP 9 9 9 9
15 HP 9 9 9 9
20-25 HP 9 9 9 9
480V 30 HP 9 9 9 9 SC
40 HP 9 9 9 9
50-60 HP 9 9 9 9
75 HP 9 9 9 9
100 HP 9 9 9 9
-14R_ 125 HP 9 9 9 9
Line or Load [2] (See space
3% impedance line or load reactor. 150 HP[3] 9 9 9 9
Reactors [1] factor adders on
page 192) 1 HP 9 9 9 9 15
2 HP 9 9 9 9
3-7.5 HP 9 9 9 9
10 HP 9 9 9 9
15 HP 9 9 9 9
20-25 HP 9 9 9 9 PE in U.S.,
600V 30 HP 9 9 9 9
SC in
40 HP 9 9 9 9 Canada
50-60 HP 9 9 9 9
75 HP 9 9 9 9
100 HP 9 9 9 9
125 HP 9 9 9 9
150 HP 9 9 9 9
Load Reactor Only 3% impedance load reactor for size code 300, 150HP[3] 9 9
[4],[5] -14RXL _ _ [2] Bulletin 2162R and 2163R drive units 480V
200 HP
PE-II
[1] Line and load reactors are mutually exclusive, as space factor adders may be required see page 192.
[2] The option numbers listed are not complete:
Select LX for line reactor or XL for load reactors (e.g., 14RLX).
• For Bulletin 2162R and 2163R, size code 300 drive units (150HP Heavy Duty at 480V and 200HP at 480V), select the drive supplementary unit identification code (01-99) (e.g.,
14RLX01). The supplementary unit identification code must begin with “01” and increase sequentially with multiple drive units (“02,” “03,” “04,” etc.). Each drive unit is to
have a unique supplementary unit identification code that correlates with the same identification code on the supplementary unit. See page 148 for catalog number.
[3] For 150 hp, 480 V, Heavy Duty, Bulletin 2162R and 2163R units, refer to footnote [2], [4] and [5].
[4] Load reactors for Bulletin 2162R and 2163R, size code 300 drive units (150HP Heavy Duty at 480V and 200HP at 480V) are separate units from the drive units. The load reactors
require an additional section mounted to the right of the section with the drive. The reactor will be mounted in a supplementary drive unit in the bottom of the additional section.
The two (2) sections will be one (1) shipping block. Not available in back-to-back construction.
[5] Bulletin 2162R and 2163R, size code 300 rated units have approximately 3% of inherent line reactance.

Space Factor Adders for Bulletins 2162Q and 2163Q

480V 255 600V 256
NEMA Type Rating Code Space Factor Adder NEMA Type Rating Code Space Factor Adder
1P1 0P9
2P1 1P7
3P4 2P7
5P0 0.5 3P9 0.5
1, 1G 8P0 1, 1G 6P1
011 9P0
014 011
052 [1]
041 [1]
065 052
034 0.5 027
12 [1]
12 0.5
065 032
[1] See unit pages for space factor adders.
Space Factor Adders for Bulletins 2164Q and 2165Q

480V 257 600V 258
5P0 3P9
8P0 6P1
12 0.5 12 0.5
011 9P0
014 011
Space Factor Adders for Bulletins 2162R and 2163R

480V 259 600V 260
027 [1] 022 [1]
034 027
0.5
1, 1G 040 1, 1G 032
052 041
0.5
065 [2] 0.5, 1.0 052 [3]
1P1 [1] 1P7 - 3P9 [1]
15 2P1 [1] 12 027
12 3P4 [1] 0.5

032
5P0 [1]
034
040
[1] Bulletin 2163R only.
[2] Bulletin 2162R requires 1.0 space factor adder and Bulletin 2163R requires 0.5 space factor adder.
[3] Bulletin 2162R only.
Space Factor Adders for Line or Load Reactors
Space Factor Adders for Bulletins 2164R and 2165R
480V 261 600V 262
034 1, 1G 027
1, 1G
065 027 0.5
12
014 0.5 032
12 034
040

263
PowerFlex
PowerFlex 40, 70 and 700
70 and 700
Drives Manual Drive
Bypass Delivery
Program
Option 2162Q 2163Q 2164Q 2165Q
Option Description 2162R 2163R
Number 2162T 2163T 2164R 2165R
Grounded Unit Hinge mounted ground strap mounted on hinge of unit door. Unit door grounding strap for IEC
-79GD 9 9 9 9
Door [1] requirements.
-79L Specify on plug-in units for sections with unplated Unplated copper 9 9 9 9
Unit Load vertical unit load ground bus
Connector Specify on plug-in units for sections with tin plated Tin plated cooper
-79LT 9 9 9 9
vertical unit load ground bus
— Specify on plug-in units for sections with vertical Copper alloy 9 9 9 9
Unit Ground Stab -79U plug-in ground bus. Unplated copper unit ground Unplated copper 9 9 9 9
-79UT stab can also be used with steel vertical ground bus. Tin plated cooper 9 9 9 9
Normally Open—One (1) N.O. mounted on operating mechanism (operates with movement of 9 9 9 9 SC
Auxiliary -98X [3] Normally Open—One (1) N.O. mounted internally. Circuit breaker units only. 9 9 9 9
Contacts Normally Closed—One (1) N.C. mounted on operating mechanism (operates with movement of
-99 [2] external handle only) 9 9 9 9
-99X [3] Normally Closed—One (1) N.C. mounted internally. Circuit breaker units only. 9 9 9 9
T-Handle -111 T-Handle latch on unit door. Not available on 2160R units. 9 9 9 9
Control Circuit
Wiring — Type MTW (TEW) 90°C #16 AWG copper wire, VW1 rated 9 9 9 9
-751D Brady Datab wire markers at each end of the control wires. Not available in Canada. 9 9 9 9
Control Wire -751HS Heat shrink type wire markers 9 9 9 9 SC (+2
Markers days)
-751S Sleeve type wire marker 9 9 9 9
French Legend Legend plates printed in French are available on all pilot devices.
-860F 9 9 9 9
Plates Specify 860F when pilot device options are selected.
Spanish Legend Legend plates printed in Spanish are available on all pilot devices.
-860S 9 9 9 9 SC
Plates Specify 860S when pilot device options are selected.
Door Nameplate Screws when cardholder or nameplates are not 9 9 9 9
selected.
Card Holder for Unit Doors 1.125'' x 3.625'' plastic card holders with 9 9 9 9
Unit Door blank cards
—
Nameplates [1] Acrylic plate (available in U.S. only).
Nameplate is white with black letters or 9 9 9 9
1.125″ × 3.625″ engraved 3-line nameplate or black with white letters.
4-line nameplate SC-II
Phenolic plate. Nameplate is white with
black letters or black with white letters. 9 9 9 9
Stainless Steel
Nameplate — Stainless steel nameplate screws for unit nameplates (2 per unit) 9 9 9 9
15
Screws [1]
Container is skid mounted and packaged in clear plastic. Packing is not watertight or
Export Packing — waterproof. Extended storage may require space heater and other considerations. For sections, 9 9 9 9 SC (+2
Below Deck days)
see page 28.
[1] Also available on Bulletin 2160R units.
[2] The maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be supplied internally is two (2), in any combination. Contacts actuate with movement of unit handle to ON or OFF position
only. Contacts are not designed to actuate as a result of a circuit breaker trip. For such applications, auxiliary contacts mounted internally (98X or 99X) must be selected. Auxiliary
[3] The maximum number of auxiliaries that can be supplied is two (2). These are form C contacts. Each form C contact includes one N.O. and one N.C. contact. Internal auxiliary
contacts (98X or 99X) are wired to a 3-point floating terminal block.

15

Programmable Controller Units and Marshalling
2
Panels
Bulletin 2180E, 2182E, 2183E 3
with Bulletin 1771 Programmable I/O Chassis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Bulletin 2180E, 2182E and 2183E units contain one or more Bulletin 1771 4
input/output chassis. Space factors depend on the specific features,
options, modifications and accessories selected. Power supply and
terminal blocks are optional. 5
Unit features:
• Without disconnecting means or plug-in stabs, one 4-slot or 8-slot chassis in
2.0 space factor units. 6
• With disconnecting means (15A trip circuit breaker or 30A disconnect switch),
control circuit transformer and plug-in stabs, one 4-slot or 8-slot chassis in 3.0
space factor units.
• Viewing window in the door to permit visual verification of the 7
I/O status indicators.
NOTE: Plug-in units must be located in the bottom of the vertical section.
25” and 35” wide full section features: 8
• One 8-slot chassis in 25” wide section, with or without horizontal bus.
• Two 8-slot chassis in 25” wide section, with or without horizontal bus.
• One or two 16-slot chassis with 35” wide section. 9
• Can be specified without or with disconnecting means (30A trip circuit
breaker or 30A disconnect switch) and control circuit transformer
(non-isolated).
• Viewing window in the door to permit visual verification of the I/O status 10
indicators.
40” wide full section features:
• 15” deep without horizontal bus, 20” deep with or without horizontal bus.
Bus splice access is from rear (removal of backplates is necessary). 11
• Horizontal power bus is 5” deeper than standard.
• Two 20” wide doors with vault-style latching mechanism.
• 0.25” x 1” ground bus is supplied as standard.
• For Bulletin 2180E—one, two, or three 16-slot chassis without disconnecting
means. 12
• For Bulletins 2182E and 2183E—one or two 16-slot chassis with disconnecting
means (30A trip or 30A disconnect switch) and primary fused transformer
(non-isolated), six (6) 1-pole 10A circuit breakers, duplex receptacle and a
power distribution terminal block. 13
• Isolated ground bus for each chassis included.
• Viewing windows in the doors permit visual verification of the I/O status
indicators.
• Wire ducts included.
• Optional fluorescent light and door switch. 14
Bulletin 2180J, 2182J, 2183J
with Bulletin 1746 SLC 500 Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 15
Unit features:
• One 7-slot I/O chassis.
• Without disconnecting means or plug-in stabs in 1.0 space factor units.
Includes unwired master control relay (Bulletin 700CF, 4-pole).
• With disconnecting means (15A trip circuit breaker or 30A disconnect switch) 16
and plug-in stabs in 1.5 space factor units. Includes 750VA transformer with
primary fusing and unwired master control relay (Bulletin 700CF, 4-pole).
• Viewing window in the door to permit visual verification of the
I/O status indicators.
• Optional power supply.
Programmable Controller Units and Marshalling Panels
Bulletin 2180L, 2182L, 2183L
2 with Bulletin 1756 ControlLogix Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
The Bulletin 2180L, 2182L and 2183L units include a choice of (1) 4-slot or
3 (1) 7-slot Bulletin 1756 ControlLogix chassis.
Unit features:
Without disconnecting means or plug-in stabs
4 • 4-slot chassis, 1.0 space factor.
• 7-slot chassis, 2.0 space factor (frame mounted unit, section does not have
vertical wireway next to this unit). Bottom mounted only.
5 With disconnecting means:
• Fusible disconnect (30A switch), plug-in stabs, control circuit transformer,
4-slot chassis, 1.5 space factor.
• Fusible disconnect (30A switch) without plug-in stabs, control circuit
transformer, 7-slot chassis, 2.0 space factor (frame mounted unit, section does
not have vertical wireway next to this unit).Bottom mounted only.
• Circuit breaker (15A trip), plug-in stabs, control circuit transformer, 4-slot
chassis, 1.5 space factor.
• Circuit breaker (15A trip) without plug-in stabs, control circuit transformer,
7-slot chassis, 2.0 space factor (frame mounted unit, section does not have
vertical wireway next to this unit). Bottom mounted only.
Unit options include:
• Processor cards (all memory upgrade options).
• Communication cards (Ethernet, ControlNet, DeviceNet, RI/O DH+).
• Power supply (10.0A)
Bulletin 2181B
10
Marshalling Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
• 20” wide full section with (366) 1492-CA1 or (620) 1492-HM1 terminal blocks.
• 40” wide full section with (915) 1492-CA1 or (1550) 1492-HM1 terminal
blocks.
11 • 15” and 20” deep without horizontal bus. Wire ducts included.
12
13
14
15
16
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2180, 2182 and 2183
Programmable Control I/O Chassis Units 2
• NEMA Enclosure Type 1, Type 1 with gasket and Type 12
• Type A Wiring
3
264
6
2180E - A K XWD - - **
7
2182E - A K B - - **
2183E - A K B - 30CB - **
Trip Current and Circuit Breaker
8
Bulletin Number Number of I/O Chassis and Slots NEMA Enclosure Type Line Voltage Options
Type
264D
264A 9
Code Type Code Line Voltage 264F
264C P 220 - 230V
Bulletin 1771 Programmable Code Option
2180E Controller (PLC) I/O Chassis Code NEMA Enclosure Type A 240V See Options section 10
without Disconnecting Means NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 N 380V beginning on page 203.
K
Bulletin 1771 Programmable with gasket KN 400V
2182E Controller (PLC) I/O Chassis with J NEMA Type 12 I 415V
Fusible Disconnect B 480V
Bulletin 1771 Programmable C 600V
11
2183E Controller (PLC) I/O Chassis with
Circuit Breaker XWD 120V
Bulletin 1746 SLC 500 Does not include
Programmable Controller (PLC) I/O transformer or power
2180J Chassis without Disconnecting bus stabs 12
Means
Bulletin 1746 SLC 500
2182J Programmable Controller (PLC) I/O 13
Chassis with Fusible Disconnect 264B 264E
Bulletin 1746 SLC 500 Code Number of I/O Chassis and Slots Trip Current and
2183J Programmable Controller (PLC) I/O Code Circuit Breaker Type
Chassis with circuit breaker A (1) 4-slot chassis
Bulletin 2183_ Only See Table on page 199
Bulletin 1756 ControlLogix B (1) 7-slot chassis (Bulletins 2180J, 2182J and 14
Programmable Controller (PLC) I/O 2183J and Bulletins 2180L, 2182L and 2183L)
2180L Chassis without Disconnecting (1) 8-slot chassis (Bulletins 2180E, 2182E and
B
Means[1] 2183E) 15
Bulletin 1756 ControlLogix (1) 8-slot chassis
C
Programmable Controller (PLC) I/O 25” (635 mm) wide full section
2182L
Chassis with Fusible Disconnect[1] (2) 8-slot chassis
D 25” (635 mm) wide full section
Bulletin 1756 ControlLogix
Programmable Controller (PLC) I/O (1) 16-slot chassis 16
2183L E 35” (889 mm) wide full section
Chassis with Circuit Breaker[1]
(2) 16-slot chassis
F
[1] 2180LB, 2182LB and 2183LB indicate bottom 35” (889 mm) wide full section
mounting on section. (1) 16-slot chassis
G 40” (1016 mm) wide full section
(2) 16-slot chassis
H 40” (1016 mm) wide full section
(3) 16-slot chassis
J 40” (1016 mm) wide full section
Units—2180E, 2182E, 2183E
2 Bulletin 1771 Programmable Controller I/O Chassis (PLC)
• See 195 for product description.
3 • All programmable control I/O chassis plug-in units must be located in the bottom of the vertical section to retain UL
listing.
265

I/O Chassis Section Wiring Type A Only - Class I Delivery
Bulletin Space Factor Width Program
5 Chassis Chassis Size (inches) NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 NEMA Type 12
Quantity w/ gasket
1 4 slot 2.0 — 2180E–AKXWD 2180E–AJXWD
PE
1 8 slot 2.0 — 2180E–BKXWD 2180E–BJXWD
2180E
1 8 slot 6.0 [2] 25” 2180E–CKXWD 2180E–CJXWD
2 8 slot 6.0 [2] 25” 2180E–DKXWD 2180E–DJXWD
Basic I/O chassis 1 16 slot 2180E–EKXWD 2180E–EJXWD
without 6.0 [2],[4] 35”
2 16 slot 2180E–FKXWD 2180E–FJXWD PE-II
disconnecting
means, transformer, 1 [3] 16 slot 2180E–GKXWD 2180E–GJXWD
or plug-in stabs 40” wide
2 [3] 16 slot 6.0 [2],[4] 2180E–HKXWD 2180E–HJXWD
20” deep [5]
3 [3] 16 slot 2180E–JKXWD 2180E–JJXWD
1 4 slot 2.0 — 2182E–AK__ 2182E–AJ__
10 1 8 slot 2.5 [7] — 2182E–BK__ 2182E–BJ__
PE
2182E
1 8 slot 6.0 [2] 25” 2182E–CK__ 2182E–CJ__
2 8 slot 6.0 [2] 25” 2182E–DK__ 2182E–DJ__
11 Basic I/O chassis 1 16 slot 2182E–EK__ 2182E–EJ__
with disconnect and 6.0 [2],[4] 35” PE-II
2 16 slot 2182E–FK__ 2182E–FJ__
transformer [1]
1 [6] 16 slot 40” wide 2182E–GK__ 2182E–GJ__
6.0 [2],[4]
12 2 [6] 16 slot 20” deep [5] 2182E–HK__ 2182E–HJ__
1 4 slot 2.0 — 2183E–AK__–30__ 2183E–AJ__–30__
PE
13 1 8 slot 2.5 [7] — 2183E–BK__–30__ 2183E–BJ__–30__
2183E
1 8 slot 6.0 [2] 25” 2183E–CK__–30__ 2183E–CJ__–30__
2 8 slot 6.0 [2] 25” 2183E–DK__–32__ 2183E–DJ__–32__
Basic I/O chassis 1 16 slot 2183E–EK__–32__ 2183E–EJ__–32__
14 with circuit breaker 6.0 [2],[4] 35” PE-II
2 16 slot 2183E–FK__–32__ 2183E–FJ__–32__
and transformer [1]
1 [6] 16 slot 40” wide 2183E–GK__–32__ 2183E–GJ__–32__
15 6.0 [2],[4]
2 [6] 16 slot 20” deep [5] 2183E–HK__–32__ 2183E–HJ__–32__
[1] Catalog numbers listed are not complete for Bulletins 2182E and 2183E:
• Select the appropriate voltage code from table on page 199 to identify the control transformer primary voltage.
• For Bulletin 2183E, also select the appropriate circuit breaker suffix from table on page 199 to identify the circuit breaker type (e.g., 2183E–AKB–30CB).
16 [2] Frame mounted unit, section does not have vertical wireway.
[3] If one (1) chassis is selected, it will be located in the middle.
If two (2) chassis are selected, they will be located at the top and the middle.
If three (3) chassis are selected, they will be located at the top, middle and bottom.
[4] Not available in NEMA Type 3R or Type 4.
[5] 40” wide sections have two doors. Horizontal bus is 5” deeper than standard. Available 15” deep without horizontal bus. Rear access needed for splicing power bus.
[6] If one (1) chassis is selected, it will be located in the middle, directly below the disconnecting means panel.
If two (2) chassis are selected, they will be located at the middle (directly below the disconnecting means panel) and at the bottom.
[7] Not UL listed or CSA certified.
Units—2180J, 2182J, 2183J
Bulletin 1746 SLC 500 Programmable Controller (PLC) 2
266
3
[1]
I/O Chassis Catalog Number
Space Wiring Type A Only - Class I Delivery
Bulletin Factor Program 4
Chassis NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/
Chassis Size NEMA Type 12
Quantity gasket
2180J [2] 5
Basic I/O chassis without 1 7 slot 1.0 2180J–BKXWD 2180J–BJXWD
disconnecting means or
plug-in stabs 6
2182J [2]
Basic I/O chassis 1 7 slot 1.5 2182J–BK__ 2182J–BJ__ PE
with disconnect and 7
transformer
2183J [2]
Basic I/O chassis with 1 7 slot 1.5 2183J–BK__–30__ 2183J–BJ–30__ 8
circuit breaker and
transformer
[1] Catalog numbers listed are not complete for Bulletins 2182J and 2183J: 9
• Select the appropriate voltage code from table to identify the control transformer primary voltage (e.g., 2182J–BKB).
• For Bulletin 2183J, also select the suffix letter from table to identify the circuit breaker type (e.g., 2183J–BKB–30CB).
[2] A power supply must be selected for all 2180J, 2182J and 2183J units. Refer to power supply options on page 203.
10
Primary Voltage for Transformer 267
Primary Voltage Voltage Code

220/230 P
240 A
11
380 N
400 KN
415 I 12
480 B
600 C
13
Circuit Breaker Options and Adders (for combination short circuit withstand ratings, see page 238) * 268
Circuit Breaker Suffix

Frame Type
I3C CB 14
I6C CM
I3C–CL CD [1] 15
[1] Available on Bulletin 2183E only.
16
* Refer to publication 2100-TD002x-EN-P, CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers, for more information.
Units—2180L, 2182L, 2183L
2 Bulletin 1756 ControlLogix Programmable Controller (PLC)
3 269
I/O Chassis Catalog Number [1]

4 Space Wiring Type A Only - Class I Delivery
Bulletin
Chassis Factor NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ Program
Chassis Size NEMA Type 12
Quantity gasket
5 2180L [2] 1 4 slot 1.0 2180L-AKXWD 2180L-AJXWD SC
Basic I/O chassis without
disconnecting means or
plug-in stabs. Includes 1 7 slot 2.0 [3] 2180LB-BKXWD 2180LB-BJXWD SC-II
viewing window.
2182L [2] 1 4 slot 1.5 2182L-AK__ 2182L-AJ__ SC
Basic I/O chassis with
disconnect and
transformer. Includes 1 7 slot 2.0 [3] 2182LB-BK__ 2182LB-BJ__ SC-II
viewing window.
2183L [2] 1 4 slot 1.5 2183L-AK_-30__ 2182L-AJ_-30__ SC
Basic I/O chassis with
circuit breaker and
transformer. Includes 1 7 slot 2.0[3] 2183LB-BK_-30__ 2183LB-BJ_-30__ SC-II
viewing window.
10 [1] Catalog numbers listed are not complete:
• Select appropriate voltage code from the table on page 199 to identify the control transformer primary voltage (e.g., 2182L-BKB).
• For Bulletin 2183L, also select the suffix letter from the table on page 199 to identify the circuit breaker type (e.g., 2183L-BKB-30CB).
[2] A power supply must be selected for all 2180L, 2182L and 2183L units. Refer to the Options table on page 203.
[3] Frame mounted unit, section does not have vertical wireway next to this unit. Must be mounted at bottom of section. Cannot be used in section with 9” vertical wireway. May not
be mounted in a section containing other frame mounted units.
11
12
13
14
15
16
Catalog Number Explanation - Bulletin 2181B
Marshalling Panels 2
• Type A wiring, NEMA Enclosure Type 1, Type 1 with gasket or Type 12
• Wire ducts included
3
270
6
2181B - M K XW - 120 - 0366CA
Bulletin Number Space Factor NEMA Enclosure Type Line Voltage Horizontal Bus Terminal Blocks and Options 7
270C
270A 270E
NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 Horizontal
270F 8
Code Type K Terminal Blocks
Terminal Block Section with gasket Code Bus
2181B Code and Options
(Marshalling Panel) J NEMA Type 12 Horizontal Bus
120 Omitted See table on page 202 and 9
Options section beginning on
270B 270D page 203.
Code Space Factor Code Line Voltage 10
M 6.0, 20” (508 mm) wide XW No Line Voltage
N 6.0, 40” (1016 mm) wide
11
12
13
14
15
16
Units—2181B
2 Marshalling Panel
3 271
Catalog Number [1]

Section Width (Wiring Type A Only) Delivery
4 Bulletin Space Factor (Inches) Program
NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ gasket NEMA Type 12
20”
5 2181B
6.0 full section 2181B–MKXW–120–__ 2181B–MJXW–120–__
PE-II
Marshalling Panel 40”
6.0 2181B–NKXW–120–__ 2181B–NJXW–120–__
full section
[1] Catalog numbers listed are not complete. Select the terminal block code from the table below that corresponds to the required number of terminal blocks (e.g., 2181B–NAXW–
120–1550HM1).
Terminal Blocks (Unwired) for Marshalling Panels and Terminal Blocks 272
Terminal Block Type Number of Terminal Blocks Space Factors Terminal Block Code
366 6.0, 20” wide 0366CA
1492–CA1
915 6.0, 40” wide 0915CA
620 6.0, 20” wide 0620HM1
1492–HM1
1550 6.0, 40” wide 1550HM1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Accessories for Programmable Controllers and 2
Marshalling Panels 3
273
Option
Option
Description
Bulletin 1771 I/O
Chassis Bulletin 1746 SLC 500
Bulletin 1756
ControlLogix Chassis Delivery 4
Number Program
2180E 2182E 2183E 2180J 2182J 2183J 2180L 2182L 2183L
DeviceNet 1771-SDN 9 9 9
Scanner
Module
-12SDN01 DeviceNet scanner module
1747-SDN 9 9 9 5
Bulletin 1771-P2, 6.5A power supply and For (1) 4-slot, (1) 8-slot, or (1)
9 9 9
-12P2 [2] 1771-CE (4-slot chassis) or 1771-CD (8- or 16-slot 16-slot [3]
chassis) power cable For (2) 8-slot or for (2) 16-slot 9 9 9 6
-12P4S1 [4] Bulletin 1771–P4S, 8.0A power supply. One 1771–P4S power supply 9 9 9
One power supply per chassis is required. A
maximum of two power supplies per chassis can Two 1771–P4S power
-12P4S2 [4] be selected.
Note: One chassis slot is necessary for each
supplies (for one chassis) and
one 1771–CT paralleling cable
9 9 9
7
power supply.
Power Two 1771–P4R Power
Supply [1] -12P4R2 [4] 9 9 9
Supplies (for one chassis)
Bulletin 1771–P4R, 8.0A power supply. This is a PE
(Refer to table redundant power supply and requires two Three 1771–P4R Power 8
on 246 for -12P4R3 [4] Supplies (for one chassis) –
supplies to operate. Up to four power supplies 9 9 9
supplied control per chassis can be selected. 16-slot chassis only
circuit Note: One chassis slot is necessary for each Four 1771–P4R Power
transformer) -12P4R4 [4] power supply. Supplies (for one chassis) –
16-slot chassis only
9 9 9 9
Bulletin 1771–P7, 16A power supply and 1771– For (1) 8-slot or 16-slot 9 9 9
-12P7
CP2 power cable. For (2) 8-slot or for (2) 16-slot 9 9 9
Note: Does not mount in chassis slot. Not
available for plug-in units. For (3) 16-slot (40” wide only) 9 10
-12PA [5] One (1) Bulletin 1746–P1, 2.0A power supply 9 9 9
-12PB [5] One (1) Bulletin 1746–P2, 5.0A power supply 9
-12PA72 Bulletin 1756-PA72, 10.0A power supply for 4- and 7-slot ControlLogix chassis 9 9 9
Logix5561 Processor With 2Mbyte Memory, includes 1784-CF64 64Mbyte
-12LPA_ 9 9 9
CompactFlash memory module
Logix5562 Processor With 4Mbyte Memory, includes 1784-CF64 64Mbyte
11
ControlLogix -12LPB_ 9 9 9
[6] Logix5563 Processor With 8Mbyte Memory, includes 1784-CF64 64Mbyte
Processor -12LPC_ 9 9 9
-12LPD_ Logix5564 Processor With 16Mbyte Memory, includes 1784-CF64 64Mbyte 9 9 9
Bulletin 1756-CNBR ControlNet communication module with redundant
12
-12CN__ [2],[7] ControlNet port 9 9 9
ControlLogix
Communication -12ENB__ [2] Bulletin 1756-ENBT Ethernet communication module 9 9 9
Modules [6] -12DN__ [2] Bulletin 1756-DNB DeviceNet communication module 9 9 9 13
-12DH__ [2] Bulletin 1756-DHRIO Data Highway Plus and Remote I/O communication module 9 9 9
ControlLogix
Programming -12CP Bulletin 1756-CP3 cable for programming ControlLogix processors 9 9 9
Cable SC
ControlNet
T-Tap -12CNT_[7] Bulletin 1786 ControlNet T-Tap for use with ControlNet Communication Modules 9 9 9
14
Grounded Unit -79GD Hinge mounted ground strap mounted on hinge of unit door. (Unit door grounding
Door strap for IEC requirements.) 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
— Select on plug-in units for sections with vertical Copper alloy 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
Unit
Ground Stab
-79U plug-in ground bus. Unplated copper unit ground Unplated copper
stab can also be used with steel vertical ground
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 15
-79UT bus. Tin plate copper 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
Normally Open—(1) N.O. mounted on Disconnects 9 9 9 9
-98 [8] operating mechanism (operates with movement
of external handle only) Circuit Breakers 9 9 9
Auxiliary -98X [9] Normally Open—(1) N.O. mounted internally Circuit Breakers 9 9 9 16
Contacts Normally Closed—(1) N.C. mounted on Disconnects 9 9 9
[8] operating mechanism (operates with movement
-99
of external handle only) Circuit Breakers 9 9 9
-99X [9] Normally Closed—(1) N.C. mounted internally Circuit Breakers 9 9 9
[1] Power supply options are mutually exclusive.

17
[2] 2182E or 2183E 4-slot with 12P2: add 1.0 space factor. 2180E 8-slot with 12P2: add 1.0 space factor. 2182E or 2183E 8-slot with 12P2: add 1.0 space factor.
[3] Not available in 40” wide units.
[4] UL listing and CSA certification only valid for 6.0 space factor units.
[5] Option is NOT CSA certified.
[6] Option numbers are not complete. Add the number of chassis slot the option is to be mounted in (e.g., a 12LPA_ located in slot 0 will be 12LPA0 and a 12ENB_ located in slot 3
will be 12ENB3). Multiple quantities of the same option may be mounted in the same chassis (e.g., a 7-slot chassis may contain two [2] processor cards, two [2] ethernet cards,
one [1] ControlNet card and two DeviceNet cards).
[7] Option 12CNT_, Bulletin 1786 ControlNet T-Tap, is available for use with option 12CN_ for connection to ControlNet scheme. See publication CNET-IN002x-EN-P, ControlNet
Coax Media Planning and Installation Guide, for cabling configuration. Option number not complete. Add the corresponding slot number for the associated 12CN_. Option
-12CNT_ is not available alone.
[8] The maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be supplied is two (2), in any combination. Contacts actuate with movement of unit handle to ON or OFF position only.
Contacts are not designed to actuate as a result of a circuit breaker trip. For such applications, auxiliary contacts mounted internally (98X or 99X) must be selected. Auxiliary
[9] The maximum number of auxiliary contacts that can be supplied internally is two (2). These are form C contacts. Each form C contact includes one N.O. and one N.C. contact.
Internal auxiliary contacts (98X or 99X) are wired to a 3-point unmounted terminal block.

Factory-Installed Options, Modifications, Accessories for Programmable Controllers and Marshalling Panels
2 274
Bulletin 1771 I/O Bulletin 1756 Marshalling
Option Chassis Bulletin 1746 SLC 500 ControlLogix Chassis Panel Delivery
Option Description
Number Program
3 2180E 2182E 2183E 2180J 2182J 2183J 2180L 2182L 2183L 2181B
T-Handle -111 T-Handle latches on unit door 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
Omit
Available on 15” and 20” deep × 25” and 35” wide SC
4 Horizontal -120 [1] or on 20” deep × 40” wide 9 9 9 9
Power Bus
Light and Section is supplied with a top-mounted light that is
9 9 9 9
5 Door Switch
-203B activated by a door switch. Note: Only available on
40” wide 2180E, 2181B, 2182E and 2183E.
PE
Adhesive Brady Datab type markers at each end of

-751D control wire. Not available in Canada. 9 [2] 9 9 9 9 9 9 SC
Control Wire SC (+2
Markers -751HS Heat shrink type wire marker 9 [2] 9 9 9 9 9 9 days)
-751S Sleeve type wire marker 9 [2] 9 9 9 9 9 9 SC
For (1) 8-slot chassis, 25” wide (100 terminals) 9 9 9
-806
For (1) 16-slot chassis, no disconnecting means, 40”
wide (180 terminals) 9
Bulletin
1492–HM1 For (2) 16-slot chassis, no disconnecting means, 40” 9
9 Terminal wide (360 terminals)
Blocks For (3) 16-slot chassis, no disconnecting means, 40”
(white only) wide (540 terminals) 9
10 Terminal
For (1) 16-slot chassis, with disconnecting means,
40” wide (360 terminals) 9 9
Blocks For (2) 16-slot chassis, with disconnecting means,
(unwired) for 40” wide (720 terminals) 9 9
chassis in PE
full sections
9 9 9
11 only [3]
For (2) 8-slot chassis, 25” wide (174 terminals)
-807
For (1) 16-slot chassis, no disconnecting means, 40” 9
wide (108 terminals)
Bulletin
12 1492–CA1 For (2) 16-slot chassis, no disconnecting means, 40” 9
Terminal wide (216 terminals)
Blocks For (3) 16-slot chassis, no disconnecting means, 40” 9
(white only) wide (324 terminals)
13 For (1) 16-slot chassis, with disconnecting means, 9 9
40” wide (216 terminals)
For (2) 16-slot chassis, with disconnecting means, 9 9
40” wide (432 terminals)
Plated steel nameplate
14 screws. Provided when
Door Nameplate Screws cardholder or nameplates 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 SC
are not selected.
1.125'' x 3.625'' plastic
15 Card Holder for Unit
Doors
card holders with blank 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
cards
Unit Door Acrylic plate (available in
—
Nameplates U.S. only). Lettering is
white with black letters 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
16 1.125” x 3.625” engraved or black with white
letters.
3-line nameplate or
4-line nameplate SC-II
Phenolic plate. Lettering
is white with black letters
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
or black with white
17 letters.
Stainless
Steel Stainless steel nameplate screws for unit
Nameplate — nameplate (2 per unit) 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
Screws
Container is skid mounted and packaged in clear
Export
Packing — plastic. Packing is not watertight or waterproof. 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 SC (+2
Considerations should be taken if extended storage days)
Below Deck is expected.
[1] Enclosures with horizontal power bus omission are listed under UL Standard 508.
[2] Only available for 2180E when option -203B is selected.
[3] Options 806 and 807 are mutually exclusive.

Configuration Tables 2
Control Voltage Type for Bulletins 2102L, 2103L, 2106, 2107, 2112, 2113, 2122, 2123, 2126, and 2127 275
Control Voltage Code 3
Control Type
208V 240V 380V 400V 415V 480V 600V
H A — — — B C 120V, 60Hz, Transformer Control [1] 4
HD AD — — — BD CD 120V, 60Hz, Separate Control [2]
— — N — I — — 110V, 50Hz, Transformer Control [1],[3] 5
— — NS — IS — — 110V, 50Hz, Separate Control [2]
— — — KN — — — 115V, 50Hz, Transformer Control [1],[3]
6
— — — KNS — — — 115V, 50Hz, Separate Control [2]
— — NP — — — — 220V, 50Hz, Transformer Control [1],[3]
7
— — NP — — — — 220V, 50Hz, Separate Control [2]
— — — KNP — — — 230V, 50Hz, Transformer Control [1],[3]
— — — KNP — — — 230V, 50Hz, Separate Control [2] 8
— — — — IT — — 240V, 50Hz, Transformer Control [1],[3]
— — — — IT — — 240V, 50Hz, Separate Control [2] 9
— — NLP — — — — 220V, 50Hz, Line to Neutral Control, (Separate Control) [4],[5]
— — — KNLP — — — 230V, 50Hz, Line to Neutral Control, (Separate Control) [4],[5] 10
— — — — ILT — — 240V, 50Hz, Line to Neutral Control, (Separate Control) [4],[5]
H A — — — B C Common Control [6]
[1] Select a control circuit transformer. See Options section.
[2] Control circuit fusing (option 21) and/or disconnect interlock (option 98) may be required to comply with NEC. See Options section. 11
[3] Incorporates primary taps for future conversion to new global IEC voltage standards (e.g., 400V/115V/230V). Allows conversion without the need to replace transformers or coils.
[4] Requires horizontal neutral bus and vertical neutral bus in 9” vertical wireway. Refer to Section Modifications to select.
[5] Select control circuit fusing (see option 21 in Options section).
[6] Select control circuit fusing (see option 22 in Options section). Required to comply with NEC.
Control Voltage Type for Space Saving NEMA Bulletins 2106, 2107, 2112 and 2113 276 12
Control Voltage Code
Control Type
480V 600V 13
B C 120V, 60Hz, Transformer Control [1]
BD CD 120V, 60Hz, Separate Control [2]
[1] Select a control circuit transformer. See Options section. 14
[2] Control circuit fusing (option 21) and/or disconnect interlock (option 98) may be required to comply with NEC. See Options section.
Primary Voltage Code for Bulletins 2195, 2196, 2196Z, 2197 and 2197Z 277
240V 380V 400V 415V 480V 600V 15
A N KN I B C
Control Voltage Type for Bulletins 2154 and 2155 278

16
Control Voltage Code
Control Type
220V [1] 230V [1] 240V 380V [1] 400V [1] 415V [1] 480V 600V
P — — N — I — — 110V, 50Hz Transformer Control 17
— P — — KN — — — 115V, 50Hz Transformer Control
— — A — — — B C 120V, 60Hz Transformer Control
[1] Units at these voltages are not UL listed, cUL listed or CSA certified. 18

Configuration Tables
2 Control Voltage Type for Bulletins 2162, 2163, 2164 and 2165 279
Line Voltage Voltage Code
220/230 P [1],[2]
3
240 A [2]
380 N [1],[2]
4
400 KN [1],[2]
415 I [1],[2]
5
480 B
600 C
[2] Not applicable to 2164 or 2165.
Horsepower Ratings for All Bulletins 280
Motor Motor Motor Motor
Number Number Number Number
HP HP HP HP
0.125 30 3 38 40 46 250 56
0.25 31 5 39 50 47 300 57
0.33 32 7.5 40 60 48 350 58
0.50 33 10 41 75 49 400 59
9 0.75 34 15 42 100 50
1 35 20 43 125 51 450 60
1.5 36 25 44 150 52 500 61
10 2 37 30 45 200 54
11 kW Ratings for Bulletins 2154, 2155, 2162 and 2163 [1] 281
kW Number kW Number
0.25 32K 37 47K
0.37 33K 45 48K
12 0.55 34K 55 49K
0.75 35K 75 50K
1.1 36K 90 51K
13 1.5 37K 110 52K
2.2 38K 132 53K
3.7 39K 150 54K
5.5 40K 160 55K
14 7.5 41K 185 56K
11 42K 200 57K
15 15 43K 220 58K
18.5 44K 250 59K
22 45K
30 46K
16 [1] kW rated units are not UL listed, cUL listed or CSA certified.
17
18

Fuse Clip Designator Selection, Power Fuse Selection for Bulletins 2106, 2112, 2122, and 2126 282
2
To select Power Fuses,
To select Fuse Clip Designator, select power fuse manufacturer code from
select code from one of these two columns.
these columns [1],[2]. 3
When power fuses will be Power Fuse Manufacturer Code [5]
selected, select fuse clip
Fuse Clip
Rating Fuse Clip Type designator from this 4
(Amperes) When NO power fuses will be column [1],[2].
selected, select fuse clip The “20” portion of your Fuse Clip Typical (T) Accel. Long (L) Accel. Fuse
designator from this column. Designator (e.g., 20J) means that
<
Time
5 sec. >
Time
5 sec. Class[2] 5
the fuse clip size and power fuse
will be selected automatically
based on load horsepower. [3],[4] 6
30 CC 24C 20C LT LL CC
J 24J 20J J
R 24R 20R R 7
30 GT or BT GL or BL
H [1] 24 — —
HRCII-C [6] 24E 20E HRCII-C
8
J 25J 20J J
R 25R 20R R
H [1] 25 — — 9
J 26J 20J J
R 26R 20R R
10
H [1] 26 — —
J 27J 20J J 11
R 27R 20R R
H [1] 27 — —
J 28J 20J J 12
R 28R 20R R
H [1] 28 — — 13
J 29J 20J J
600 R 29R 20R GT or BT GL or BL R
HRCII-C [6] 29E 20E HRCII-C 14
800 L 24L 20L GT or BT GL or BL L
[1] Power fuse option not available for Class H fuse clips or Space Saving NEMA starter units.
[2] Available on 480V and 600V applications only.
15
• To select power fuses for Bulletins 2106, 2112, 2122, and 2126:
• Select fuse clip designator and add to catalog string number (e.g., 2106B-BABD-31__-20J).
• Then select power fuse manufacturer code and add to catalog string number (e.g., 2106B-BABD-31GT-20J). Only use power fuse code when selecting power fuses.
[3] For Bulletins 2100D, 2102L, 2192F and 2192M, see table on page 208. For Bulletin 2196, see 209.
[4] Refer to publication 2100-TD003x-EN-P, CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers Power Fuses, for more information. 16
[5] Select power fuse manufacturer code by indicating choice of power fuse manufacturer—LT or LL = LittelFuse, GT or GL = Ferraz Shawmut, and BT or BL = Bussmann. When
selecting Bussmann or LittelFuse, delivery program changes to PE. The Ferraz Shawmut Class J fuse incorporates blown fuse indication for fuses above 8A.
[6] HRCII-C fuses are available in Canada only. HRCII-C Bussmann (BT or BL) fuses are not available; use HRCII-C Ferraz Shawmut (option code GT or GL). They are CSA certified but
are NOT UL listed.
17
18

2 Fuse Clip Designator Selection, Power Fuse Selection for Bulletins 2100D, 2102L, 2192F and 2192M *,† 283
Use this information to select a fuse clip designator. Use this information to select power fuses. [1],[2]
3 Fuse Clip Rating Fuse Clip Class Fuse Clip Power Fuse Rating Power Fuse Power Fuse
Fuse Class
(Amperes) Designator (Amperes) Rating Code Manufacturer [3]
1 600
4 3 601
6 602
10 603
5 CC 24C
15 604 L [4] CC
20 605
25 606
30 607
30
1 600
3 601
6 602
J 24J J
R 10 603
24R R
15 604
H [1] 24 —
20 605
25 606
30 607
9 35 608
J 25J 40 609 J
60 R 25R 45 610 R
10 H [1] 25 50 611 —
60 612
70 613
J 26J J
R 80 614
100 26R R
90 615
11 H [1] 26 —
100 616
110 617
J 27J 125 618 J
200 R 27R 150 619 G or B [4] R
12 H [1] 27 175 620 —
200 621
225 622
13 J
R
28J 250 623 J
400 28R 300 624 R
H [1] 28 350 625 —
400 626
J 29J 450 627 J
14 R 29R 500 628 R
600
H [1] 29 600 629 —
L 23L [5] 601 630 L
15 601 630
800 L 24L 700 631 L
800 632
1000 633
1200 L 25L L
16 1200 634
1600 L 26L 1600 637 L
2000 L 27L 2000 639 L
17 [1] Power fuse option is not available for Class H fuse clips.
[2] Available on 480V and 600V applications only. To select power fuses for Bulletins 2100D, 2102L, 2192F and 2192M, combine power fuse rating code and power fuse manufacturer
code and add to catalog string number (e.g., 2102LB-BKBD-24J-607G). Only use power fuse code when selecting power fuses. Dual 2192F units require two (2) sets of fuses. The
fuse size code must correspond to the respective fuse clip designator code; the first fuse size code designates the fuse for the left side of the dual unit, the second code is for the
right side of the dual unit. The fuse manufacturer for both fuses must be the same (e.g., 2192F-CAC-2524J-609602G).
18 [3] L = Littelfuse, G = Ferraz Shawmut, B = Bussmann. The Ferraz Shawmut Class J fuse incorporates blown fuse indication for fuses above 8A.
[4] When selecting Bussmann or Littelfuse power fuses, delivery program changes to PE. Littelfuse power fuses are available only in Class CC fuses with blown fuse indicators.
[5] Available: G = Ferraz Shawmut, 601A only.
* For Bulletins 2106, 2112, 2122, 2126, and 2154, see table on page 207. For Bulletin 2196, see 209.
† Refer to publication 2100-TD003x-EN-P, CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers Power Fuses, for more information.

2
Fuse Clip Designator for Bulletin 2196 and 2196Z [1],[2] 284
Fuse Clip Size Fuse Clip Fuse Clip

Fuse Manufacturer Code [3] 3
Class Designator
J 24J Select G or B
30 R 24R G=Ferraz Shawmut 4
H [4] 24 B=Bussmann
J 25J Select G or B
H [4] 25 B=Bussmann
J 26J Select G or B
H [4] 26 B=Bussmann
J 27J
200 R 27R
Select G or B
G=Ferraz Shawmut
7
H [4] 27 B=Bussmann
[1] Only 24J option available for 2196Z units. 8
[2] See Appendix for short circuit withstand ratings. For fuse rating based upon kVA of transformer, see
publication 2100-TD003x-EN-P. Selecting Bussmann or Littelfuse power fuse changes delivery program
to PE. Power fuses are not available for Class H fuse clip. Power fuses are available on 480V and 600V
only. 9
[3] The Ferraz Shawmut Class J fuse incorporates blown fuse indication for fuses above 8A.
[4] Power fuse option not available for Class H fuse clip.
Trip Current for Bulletin 2103L 285

10
Contactor Rating Trip Current Number
(Amperes) (Amperes)
15 30
30 or 60
20 31
11
30, 60, or 100 30 32
40 34
60 or 100 50 35
12
60 36
70 37 [2]
80 38 [1] 13
100, 200, or 300
90 39 [2]
100 40
125 41 14
150 42
200 or 300
175 43
200 44 15
225 45
300 250 46
300 48
[1] Available only on 100A contactors.
16
[2] Available only on 100A and 200A contactors.
Trip Current for Bulletin 2197 and 2197Z 286
Trip Current
(Amperes)
Number Trip Current
(Amperes)
Number 17
15 30 70 37
20 31 100 40
30 32 125 41 18
40 34 150 42
50 35 200 44
60 36 — —

2 Circuit Breaker Type—Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Circuit Breaker Options for Bulletin 2103L*,† 287
Medium Interrupting
Standard Interrupting Capacity with Current Medium Interrupting High Interrupting
Rating
3 (Amperes)
Capacity
Limiter [1]
Capacity Capacity
4 30
(0.5 SF)
— — — — CB I3C CM I6C
5 100 — — CD I3C-CL [2] CB I3C CM I6C
200 CT JD3D — — — — CM JD6D
300 CT K3D — — — — CM K6D
[1] Circuit breakers with current limiters are not available on dual mounted units.
[2] Add 0.5 space factor.
Circuit Breaker Type for Bulletin 2113 Vacuum* 287A
Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic or Sollid State) Circuit Breakers[1]

Rating (Amperes) Standard Interrupting Capacity High Interrupting Capacity
[2]
Suffix Frame Suffix Frame[2]
9 200 JD3D JD6D
JD3D JD6D
400 CT K3D CM K6D
10 LD HLD
600 LD HLD
[1] Refer to publication 2100-TD002x-EN-P, CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers, for more information.
[2] Refer to unit selection information on page 45 for circuit breaker frame size correlation to vacuum contactor unit size, horsepower and
11 voltage.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
* Refer to Appendix for interrupting capacity and short circuit withstand rating.
† Refer to publication 2100-TD002x-EN-P, CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers, for more information.

Circuit Breaker Type for Bulletins 2107, 2113, 2123, and 2127* 288 2
[1]
Instantaneous Circuit Breakers
(For motor applications where transient inrush current exceeds Inverse Time [2] 3
13 times the full load current, contact your local Rockwell (Thermal Magnetic) Circuit Breakers
NEMA Automation Sales Office.)
Size High I.C. Medium I.C. with 4
Standard I.C. [3] High I.C. with Current Standard I.C. High I.C.
Current Limiter[4]
Limiter[4]
Suffix Frame Suffix Frame Suffix Frame Suffix Frame Suffix Frame Suffix Frame 5
1 — — CA MCP — — I3C — — CM I6C
(0.5 SF)
MCP- 6
1 CZ MCP CA MCP CC I3C CD I3C-CL [6] CM I6C
ELC [6]
CB[5]
2 CZ MCP CA MCP CC
MCP-
I3C CD I3C-CL [6] CM I6C 7
ELC [6]
MCP-
3 CZ MCP CA MCP CC [7] I3C CD [7] I3C-CL [8] CM I6C
8
ELC [8]
MCP-
4 — — CA MCP CC CT JD3D [9] — — CM JD6D [9]
ELC [9]
CA CT CM
9
MCP JD3D JD6D
5 — — CAH [10] MCP — — CTH [10] K3D — — CMH [10] K6D K6D
CA[11] MCP CT[11] K3D CM[11] 10
6 — — CA MCP — — CT LD — — CM HLD
6 [12] — — — — — — CT MDL — — CM HMDL
[1] Refer to publication 2100-TD001x-EN-P, CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers MCP Circuit Breakers, for more information.
[2] Refer to publication 2100-TD002x-EN-P, CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers, for more information. 11
[3] For Bulletins 2107, 2113, 2123E, 2123F, 2127E, 2127F, 2127J, and 2127K: 25kA short circuit withstand rating. CZ is available at 600V only.
[4] For Bulletin 2113, circuit breakers with current limiters are not available on dual mounted units or 0.5 space factor units.
[5] Medium I.C.
[6] For Bulletin 2107, add 0.5 space factor.
[7]
[8]
For Bulletin 2123F, add 0.5 space factor.
For Bulletin 2113, add 0.5 space factor. For Bulletin 2113 size 4 requires a minimum 2.5 space factor when option -CT or -CM is selected. 12
[9] Bulletin 2113 with suffix CC, CT or CM requires a minimum of 2.5 space factors.
[10] For special applications where higher than normal inrush exists. Substitutes a 400A frame circuit breaker for a 250A frame circuit breaker in Bulletins 2107, 2113, 2123E and
2123F in size 5, 125-150 HP, 480V applications only.
[11] 400A frame circuit breaker supplied for 200HP 480V, 150 HP @ 380-415V, 100 HP @240V, 75 HP @ 208V. 13
[12] For Bulletin 2113, for 200HP at 240V or 400HP at 480V, suffix letter identifying circuit breaker must be CT or CM only.
Circuit Breaker Type for Space Saving NEMA Bulletins 2107 and 2113 289
Instantaneous Circuit Breakers

(For motor applications where transient inrush
14
current exceeds 13 times the full load current, Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Circuit Breakers
NEMA contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales
Size Office.) 15
High I.C. Standard I.C. Medium I.C. High I.C.
1 — —
16
2 — — CB I3C I6C
3 CA [1] MCP
— —
CM
4 CT JD3D [2] — — JD6D [2] 17

[1] No UL listing for 1.5 - 3HP @ 600V.
[2] Requires Size 4 Bulletin 2113 to be 1.5 space factor.
Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Circuit Breaker Options for Bulletin 2197 * 290 18
Standard I.C. Med. I.C. w/ Current Limiter Medium I.C. High I.C.
Rating (Amperes)
200 CT JD3D — — — — CM JD6D
* Refer to Appendix for interrupting capacity and short circuit withstand rating.
Circuit Breaker Type for Horsepower and kW Rated Units for Bulletins 2155H and 2155J
2 291
Instantaneous Circuit Breakers [1]
(For motor applications where transient
Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic or Electronic) Circuit Breakers [2]
3 Rating
inrush currents exceed 13 times the full
load current, contact your local Rockwell
(Amperes) Automation Sales Office.)
High I.C. Standard I.C. Medium I.C. High I.C.
4 Suffix Frame Suffix Frame Suffix Frame Suffix Frame
3 - 60 — I3C I6C
5 85 —
I3C [4]
I6C [4]
97 MCP JD3D CB JD6D
I6C
108 JD3D I3C JD6D
MCP
135 JD3D — — JD6D
MCP
JD3D JD6D
MCP
180 — —
MCP K3D K6D
CA [3] MCP
CT
JD3D
CM
JD6D
201 — —
MCP K3D K6D
240 MCP K3D[5] — — K6D[5]
9 251 MCP K3D
LD — — K6D
HLD
317 MCP LD — — HLD
10 360 - 361 MCP LD — — HLD
LD HLD
480 - 500 MCP [6] — —
MDL HMDL
[1] Refer to publication 2100-TD001x-EN-P, CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers MCP Circuit Breakers, for more information.
11 [2] Refer to publication 2100-TD002x-EN-P, CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers, for more information.
[3] Bulletin 2155J SMC-Flex units with circuit breaker suffix CA requires High Interrupting Capacity fuses (option 13HIC) for 5A to 85A rated units.
[4] 30HP maximum at 240V, 50HP maximum at 480V and 600V, 22kW maximum at 220-230V and 37kW maximum at 380-415V.
[5] Not available for 75kW at 220-230V
[6] Not available at 240V, 350HP maximum at 480V, 450HP maximum at 600V, 132kW maximum at 220-230V and 220kW maximum at 380-415V.
12 Circuit Breaker Type for Bulletins 2163Q, 2163R, 2163T, 2165Q and 2165R *
292
Inverse Time (Thermal Inverse Time (Thermal
Instantaneous Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic)
Type Magnetic) Standard Magnetic) Medium
High Interrupting Capacity High Interrupting Capacity
13 Interrupting Capacity Interrupting Capacity
HP Range 0.5-60 60-150 [1] 200 60-150 [1] 200 — 0.5-40 50 0.5-40 50-60 60-150 [1] 200 —
22, 18.5, 18.5, 22,
kW Range 0.25-37 45-75 90 75-110[3] 132 0.25-22[2] 0.25-22[4] 75-110[3] 132
45-75 [2] 30-37 [4] 30-37 [4] 45-75 [5]
14 Suffix CA CA CA CT [6] CT CT[7] CB [3] CB [3] CM [3] CM [3] CM [6] CM CM [7]
Frame MCP MCP MCP JD3D K3D LD I3C I3C I6C I6C JD6D K6D HLD
15 [1]
[2]
150HP rating for 480V variable torque applications only. 60HP Heavy Duty at 480V.
Only available through 15kW at 220-230V.
[3] Only available through 30HP at 240V, through 50HP at 480V and through 60HP at 600V.
[4] 18.5kW rating is at 220-230V only.
[5] 22kW rating is at 220-230V only.
[6] Used for 60HP at 480V and 50 hp heavy duty for 480 V Bulletin 2163R.
16 [7] Increases width to 35” on Bulletin 2163R, 132kW drives.
17
18
* Refer to publication 2100-TD002x-EN-P, CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers, for more information.
Hardware and Kits 2
Section Hardware and Kits for Field Installation 3

293
Catalog Delivery
Description 4
Number Program
10” wide 2100H-DH10
Drip Hood Drip hood for NEMA Type 1, 1 w/ gasket and 12. Drip hood is an 20” wide 2100H-DH20
NOTE: NEMA Types 1, 1 overhang on top of a section. It provides protection from limited 25” wide 2100H-DH25
5
with gasket and 12 with amounts of liquid or dirt dripping and/or running down the front
drip hood fulfill NEMA of a section. Select one drip hood per section. Drip hoods fit 15” 30” wide 2100H-DH30
Type 2 requirements and 20” deep sections. 35” wide 2100H-DH35
40” wide 2100H-DH40
6
NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/gasket 2100H-N2A1
For 15'' deep sections
12'' high x 20'' wide
NEMA Type 12 2100H-N2J1
7
NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ gasket 2100H-N2A2
Pullbox
NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ gasket 2100H-N2AA1 8
NEMA Type 12 2100H-N2AJ1
12'' high x 25'' wide
NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ gasket 2100H-N2AA2
NEMA Type 12 2100H-N2AJ2 9
For use on Series A through E NEMA Type 1 2100H-NA4A1
For locating units with handle vertical sections NEMA Type 1 w/ gasket and 12 2100H-NA4J1
Top Horizontal Wireway
interlocks in the topmost space
Pan
factor of a vertical section For use on Series F through NEMA Type 1 2100H-NA4A2 10
current series sections NEMA Type 1 w/ gasket and 12 2100H-NA4J2
For 20'' wide vertical section 2100H-NWW20
Horizontal Wireway Covers either top or bottom wireway opening at front of vertical
Cover section
For 30'' wide vertical section 2100H-NWW30 11
For 35'' wide vertical section 2100H-NWW35 SC
NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ gasket 2100H-N3A1
Covers both top and bottom For 15'' deep sections
End Closing Plate
horizontal wireway openings
and bus opening on one side of NEMA Type 1 and Type 1 w/ gasket 2100H-N3A2
12
vertical section only For 20'' deep sections
For 20'' wide x 15'' deep section 2100H-N1A1
13
For 20'' wide x 20'' deep section NEMA Type 1 or Type 1 w/ gasket MCC 2100H-N1A2
Bottom Closing Plate
For 15'' deep corner section (Non-gasketed plates) 2100H-N1A1C
For 20'' deep corner section 2100H-N1A2C
For 20'' wide vertical section 2100H-NMC1
14
Two (2) 1.5'' x 3'' mounting channels for a single section. For 30'' wide vertical section 2100H-NMC3
External Mounting
Channel Kits NOTE: Adding an external mounting channel will add 1.5'' to
15
height of section.
For 15'' deep corner section 2100H-NMC5
For 20'' deep corner section 2100H-NMC6
Unit Operating Handle Permits unit operating handle to be located above the NEC 6' 7'' handle-to-floor height limitation. Complies with NEC
Extender Article 404.8(A) and the UL Standard for Safety UL 845. 2100H-NE1 16
200 watt, 120 volt strip heater with thermostat set at 21°C (70°F) 2100H-NH1
Space Heater Kit
200 watt, 240 volt strip heater with thermostat set at 21°C (70°F) 2100H-NH2
Gasketing to cover the section perimeter of two (2) 1.0 space factor doors or one (1) 1.5 through 5.0 space factor doors.
Gasketing Kit [1]
For units mounted in series A through D sections.
2100H-GJ10 17
[1] Cannot be air shipped
18
19

Hardware and Kits
2 Bus Kits, Splices and Bus Isolation Hardware for Field Installation
294
Catalog Delivery
3 Description Number Program
For use on vertical sections series C or later, with or without a vertical wireway. Includes five (5) vertical wireway tie bars.
Vertical Wireway Tie Bar Mounts on right-hand sidesheet for sections with vertical wireway. Mounts on right-hand and/or left-hand sidesheets for 2100H-WWTB
4 sections without vertical wireway.
For a central location of all wiring diagrams. Includes wiring diagram clip, clip location identification label for outside of
Wiring Diagram Holder Kit 2100H-WDH
section and mounting instructions.
5 Touch-Up Paint [1] ANSI 49 medium light gray, 12 oz. spray can (cannot be used for NEMA Type 3R enclosures) 2100H-NP1
Contains vertical ground bus, hardware and installation
instructions Zinc plated steel 2100H-GS1
Vertical Ground Bus Kit Unplated copper 2100H-N79U
Contains vertical ground bus, six (6) unit plug-in stabs,
hardware and installation instructions Tin plated copper 2100H-N79UT
Vertical Unit Load Ground Contains vertical ground bus, six (6) unit load connectors, Unplated copper 2100H-N79L
Bus Kit hardware and installation instructions Tin plated copper 2100H-N79LT
Unit Load Ground Kit Hardware for connecting unit load ground wires to horizontal ground bus. Kit consists of two, #14 AWG to #4 AWG, lugs 2100H-UG1
and hardware. Horizontal ground bus can accommodate up to six 2100H-UG1 kits.
For 600A aluminum, tin plated bus 2100H-NAT06
For 800A aluminum, tin plated bus 2100H-NAT08
9 Splice bars, hardware and installation instructions for 3-phase For 600A copper, tin plated bus
splicing of NEMA Enclosure Type 1, Type 1 with gasket and
2100H-NCT06
For 800A copper, tin plated bus 2100H-NCT08
Type 12 sections. One (1) kit required per shipping split on front
mounted lineups, two (2) for back-to-back. For 1200A copper, tin plated bus 2100H-NCT12
10 For 1600A copper, tin plated bus 2100H-NCT16
Horizontal Power Bus For 2000A copper, tin plated bus 2100H-NCT20
Splice Kit For 600A aluminum, tin plated bus 2100H-ZAT06
For 800A aluminum, tin plated bus 2100H-ZAT08
11 Splice bars, hardware and installation instructions for 3-phase For 600A copper, tin plated bus 2100H-ZCT06
splicing of NEMA Type I, Type I with gasket and Type 12 For 800A copper, tin plated bus 2100H-ZCT08
sections. One of the sections has horizontal power bus 5”
deeper then normal (Bumped-back Bus) For 1200A copper, tin plated bus 2100H-ZCT12
SC
For 1600A copper, tin plated bus 2100H-ZCT16
12 For 2000A copper, tin plated bus 2100H-ZCT20
For 0.25'' x 1'' unplated copper bus 2100H-NC1
One (1) splice bar per kit, complete with hardware and For 0.25'' x 2'' unplated copper bus 2100H-NC2
13 Horizontal Ground Bus
Splice Kit
installation instructions. One (1) kit required per shipping split
on front mounted lineups, two (2) for back-to-back. For 0.25'' x 1'' tin plated copper bus 2100H-NTC1
For 0.25'' x 2'' tin plated copper bus 2100H-NTC2
1-pint can 2100H-N18
NO-OX-ID[1] NO-OX-ID compound for bus bars and plug-in stabs
14 1-ounce tube 2100H-N18T
Insulated from and mounted on top of horizontal wireway 2100H-NPC1
pan.
15 0.25'' x 2'' x 12'' copper tin plated bus plate with #6-250 kcmil Insulated from and mounted to unit support pan for blank
unit space. Blank door not included. Select on page 2100H-NPC2
lug (280A capacity) 102.
Insulated from and mounted on bottom horizontal
2100H-NPC3
Neutral Connection Plate wireway pan
Kit [2]
16 Insulated from and mounted on top of horizontal wireway
pan
2100H-NPS1
0.25'' x 2'' x 12'' copper silver plated bus plate with #6-250 Insulated from and mounted to unit support pan for blank
unit space. Blank door not included. Select on page 2100H-NPS2
kcmil lug (280A capacity) 102.
17 Insulated from and mounted on bottom horizontal
wireway pan 2100H-NPS3
Protective caps—for unused plug-in stab openings. 36 per package. 2100H-N1
Manual shutters—for isolation of plug-in stab openings. 12 per package.
2100H-SM1
Bus Stab Isolation Kit Available for use on vertical sections, series G through current series.
Automatic shutters—for isolation of plug-in stab openings. 12 per package.
2100H-SA1
Available for use on vertical sections, series G through current series.
19 Unit Isolating Barriers For closing the wire opening between unit and vertical wireway. 6 per package. Series K and later structures. 2100H-N2K
[1] Cannot be air shipped
[2] A neutral connection plate can be used only in sections with a vertical wireway. Not for use in sections with full width frame mounted units, including all mains.

Hardware and Kits
Lugs for Field Installation 2
• Hardware not included. • For use on:
• One lug per kit. • Bulletin 2191 Mains and Feeders
• Bulletin 2192 400A Disconnect with Optional Lug 3
Pad Assembly*
• Bulletin 2192 600-1200A Bolted Pressure Switches 4
• Bulletin 2193 with Optional Lug Pad Assembly*
5
* The lugs can only be used if the Bulletin 2192 400A or Bulletin 2193 unit has been
ordered with a factory installed lug pad assembly, e.g. option code -82B500
295
6
Figure Catalog Number Delivery
Description # Program
#6-350 kcmil CU/AL 1 2100H-80350 7
#6-350 kcmil (double barrel lug)
For use on 600A incoming line lug CU/AL 2 2100H-80350DB
Mechanical Lugs
(for use with 42kA bus bracing only compartments only
[1] 8
when used with main or feeder lug #4/0-600 kcmil CU/AL 1 2100H-80600
compartment, Bulletin 2191M or #4/0-600 kcmil (double barrel lug) For
Lugs for Incoming Line 2191F) use on 600A incoming line lug CU/AL 2 2100H-80600DB
9
Provisions (2-hole compartments only [1]
standard NEMA 1-3/4”
350-800 kcmil CU/AL 1 2100H-80800
spacing for 1/2” 10
hardware) 250 kcmil CU 3 2100H-82250
Crimp Lugs 350 kcmil CU 3 2100H-82350 SC
One Lug per Kit (Panduit Type LCC) 500 kcmil CU 3 2100H-82500
750 kcmil CU 3 2100H-82750 11
250 kcmil CU/AL 3 2100H-83250
Crimp Lugs 350 kcmil CU/AL 3 2100H-83350
(Burndy YA-A series) 500 kcmil CU/AL 3 2100H-83500
750 kcmil CU/AL 3 2100H-83750 12
Insulating barrier for covering 1.0 space factor 2100H-NLB10
Incoming Line Lug user's terminations in main bus lug 1.5 space factor 2100H-NLB15
Barriers compartments 2.0 space factor 2100H-NLB20 13
[1] NOT for use on incoming neutral bus. Use single conductor lug for incoming neutral bus applications.
Lug Dimensions 296
Lug Size Number of Dimension “A” Refer to 14

Cables Per Lug Figure
MECHANICAL TYPE LUGS
#6-350 kcmil 1 2.13” (54 mm) 1 15
#4/0-600 kcmil 1 2.31” (59 mm) 1
350-800 kcmil 1 2.25” (57 mm) 1
#6-350 kcmil 2 2.13” (54 mm) 2
#4/0-600 kcmil 2 2.13” (54 mm) 2 16
CRIMP TYPE LUGS - CU (Panduit Type LCC)
250 kcmil 2.94” (75 mm)
350 kcmil
1
3.38” (86 mm)
3
17
500 kcmil 3.78” (96 mm)
750 kcmil 4.63” (118 mm)
CRIMP TYPE LUGS - CU/AL (Burndy YA-A Series)
18
250 kcmil 2.91” (74 mm)
350 kcmil 3.69” (94 mm)
1 3
500 kcmil 4.44” (113 mm) 19
750 kcmil 4.94” (125 mm)

Hardware and Kits
2 Unit Hardware and Kits for Field Installation

297
3 Delivery
Description Catalog Number Program
4 Available for use on units Blank 2100H-N8
series letter H through 1 hole—for one (1) Bulletin 800T pilot device 2100H-N9
Control Station current series. Housings for
Housing 2 hole—for two (2) Bulletin 800T pilot devices 2100H-N10
5 series A through G are no
longer available. 3 hole—for three (3) Bulletin 800T pilot devices 2100H-N11
Blank (Bulletin 2103L and 2113 dual only) 2100H-N8D
Control Station 1 hole—for one (1) Bulletin 800T pilot device (Bulletin 2103L and 2113 dual only) 2100H-N9D
Mounting Plate 2 hole—for two (2) Bulletin 800T pilot devices (Bulletin 2103L and 2113 dual only) 2100H-N10D
3 hole—for three (3) Bulletin 800T pilot devices (Bulletin 2103L and 2113 dual only) 2100H-N11D
Includes two (2) door latch 1.0 space factor 2100H-NDH2
Door Hardware Kit assemblies and two (2) door Series H or later
hinge assemblies 0.5 space factor 2100H-NDH3
Includes two (2) hinges and Series H or later 0.5 space factor door 2100H-NHP1
Door Hinge Kit [1] two (2) hinge pins Series E or later 1.0 space factor (or larger) door 2100H-NHP2
Cardholder for Unit 1.125'' x 3.625'' plastic card holders with blank cards 6 per package 2100H-CH1
9 Doors
White background with Blank (6 per package) 2100H-N3AW
Engravable acrylic black lettering With legend 2100H-N3EAW
10 (1.125'' x 3.625'')
Black background with Blank (6 per package) 2100H-N3AB
(not available in Canada)
white lettering With legend 2100H-N3EAB
Blank (6 per package) 2100H-N3W SC
White background with
Unit Door Nameplates black lettering With legend 2100H-N3EW
11 Blank (6 per package) 2100H-N3R
Engravable phenolic Red background with
(1.125'' x 3.625'') white lettering With legend 2100H-N3ER
Black background with Blank (6 per package) 2100H-N3B
white lettering
12 With legend 2100H-N3EB
White background with 2100H-N3EMW
Engravable phenolic black lettering
Master Nameplates With legend
(2” x 6”)
13 Black background with
white lettering 2100H-N3EMB
Stainless Steel Stainless steel nameplate screws for door or master nameplates (12 per package) 2100H-SSNS1
Nameplate Screws
Style 1 for units 1.0 space factor or larger, series A NEMA Enclosure Type 1, Type 1 with
14 through D sections gasket and Type 12 2100H-UAJ1
NEMA Enclosure Type 1 2100H-UA1
Style 3 for units 1.0 space factor or larger, series E
NEMA Enclosure Type 1 with gasket and
15 Unit Support Pan through current series (replaces style 2)
Type 12 2100H-UJ1
Style 3 with interlock bushing, for 0.5 space factor units, NEMA Enclosure Type 1 2100H-USPA1
series E through current series, with horizontally-toggled NEMA Enclosure Type 1 with gasket and
unit operating handles (replaces style 2) 2100H-USPJ1
Type 12
16 [1] Use the table below for determining the quantity of hinge and hinge pin kits needed.297
297A
Space Factor Quantity of Kits Needed
17 0.5 1
1.0 1
1.5 1
2.0 1
2.5 2
3.0 2
19 3.5 2
4.0 2
4.5 2
6.0 3

Hardware and Kits
Unit Hardware and Kits for Field Installation, continued
298 2
Delivery
Description Catalog Number Program
0.5 space 2100H-R1
3
Permits installation of half (0.5) space factor and NEMA Space Saving starter plug-in units into factor
Plug-In Unit existing series E through J CENTERLINE 2100 vertical section. Includes hinges, grounding wire Greater than
Retrofit Kit and extended unit door latch(es). 0.5 space 2100H-R2 4
factor
Includes 0.5 space factor For expanding all 1.0 SF units and Series T and later 1.5 SF units[1] 2100H-NXT05B1
door and unit extension, 5
Unit Insert twenty (20) pull-apart
Extension Kit terminals and hardware to For expanding Series R and earlier 1.5 SF units and all 2.0 SF through
2100H-NXT05B2
increase usable mounting 3.5 SF units[1] 6
space of plug-in units
Unit Door Unit door is grounded by a hinge mounted ground wire. Mounts on bottom hinge of unit door. 2100H-GD1
Grounding Kit 7
Mounts externally to existing For small 0.38'' reset button screw head. Includes five (5) reset button heads. 2100H-NRB1
Extended Reset door overload reset button.
Button Kit Allows reset of overload For large 0.50'' reset button screw head. Includes five (5) reset button heads. 2100H-NRB2
relays without use of tools 8
60A, 3-pole block, accepts #4-#14 AWG wire. Not for use on 0.5 space factor
Pull-Apart Power terminal block 1492-ED103
units.
Terminal Bocks
[2] 25A, 5-pole block, accepts #12-#20 AWG wire. Not for use on 0.5 space factor 9
Control terminal block 1492-EC85
units.
Transparent polycarbonate For 30A, 60A, 100A fusible disconnect. 10 per package. 2100H-NLT26
wraparound line terminal For 200A fusible disconnect. Series A-M. 5 per package. 2100H-NLT27
10
shield permits visual
Line Terminal monitoring of conductors and For 200A fusible disconnect. Series N and later. 5 per package. 2100H-NLT28
Shield power terminations.
Replaces standard line
terminal shield. Not available
For 400A fusible disconnect. Series N and later. 5 per package. 2100H-NLT29 11
on 0.5 space factor units. SC
Units Series
For units with 30A, 60A, 100A, or 200A fusible disconnects None required
A-N
Permits mounting a
External
Auxiliary
maximum of two (2) Bulletin Unit Series
A-C 1495-N16 12
1495-N8 (normally open) or
Contact Adapter 1495-N9 (normally closed) For units with 400A fusible disconnects Unit Series
Kits auxiliary contacts on the unit D-M 595-N1 [3]
FOR FUSIBLE operating mechanism, 13
DISCONNECT: external to the disconnect. Unit Series N None required
Not for use on Unit Series C-
0.5 space factor For units with 600A or 800A fusible disconnects 1495-N13
L
or dual- Permits mounting a
mounted units. maximum of two (2) Bulletin 14
Auxiliaries are 2100H-N19 (normally open)
actuated by the or 2100H-N20 (normally For units with 30A, 60A, 100A, 200A or 400A fusible Unit Series Q
unit operating closed) auxiliary contacts on disconnects 2100H-N21
handle.
and later 15
the unit operating
mechanism, external to the
disconnect.
External One (1) Normally Open 2100H-N19
Unit Series Q
Auxiliary
One (1) Normally Closed
Must be used with external auxiliary adapter kit or later 2100H-N20
16
Contact
FOR BOLTED Mounts one (1) form C auxiliary contact on the operating mechanism, external to the bolted 2100H-N26A
PRESSURE pressure switch
SWITCHES: Unit Series Q
17
For 2192F and
Mounts two (2) form C auxiliary contacts on the operating mechanism, external to the bolted and later
2192M 600A, 2100H-N26B
800A and pressure switch
1200A units. 18
[1] 1.5 space factor Bulletin 2193F with 225 A frame breakers, use kit 2100H-NXT05B2.
[2] Plug-in units have provision for a maximum of four (4) pull-apart terminal blocks (any combination of 3-pole or 5-pole blocks). Not available on 0.5 space factor units.
[3] Kit permits mounting of two (2) Bulletin 595-A (normally open) or 595-B (normally closed) auxiliary contacts only. Not compatible with Bulletin 1495-NB or 1495-NP auxiliary
contact kits. 19

Hardware and Kits
2 299
Catalog Delivery
Description Number Program
3 Mounts one (1) form C auxiliary contact on the operating
FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS: mechanism, external to the breaker. Allen-Bradley I-Frame or 2100H-N18A
For 0.5 space factor units. JD-Frame or Cutler-Hammer 150A HMCP, FDB, FD, HFD,
4 Auxiliaries are actuated by the FDB-LFD, FDC and 225A JD, HJD and JDC. Unit Series P and
unit operating handle only and Mounts two (2) form C auxiliary contacts on the operating later
will not reflect a circuit breaker mechanism, external to the breaker. Allen-Bradley I-Frame or
External 2100H-N18B
5 Auxiliary
trip JD-Frame or Cutler-Hammer 150A HMCP, FDB, FD, HFD,
FDB-LFD, FDC and 225A JD, HJD and JDC.
Contact Kits
Mounts one (1) form C auxiliary contact on the operating
mechanism, external to the breaker. Allen-Bradley I-Frame or 2100H-N25A
FOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS: Cutler-Hammer FDB, FD, HFD, FDB-LFD and FDC. Unit Series Q and
For dual 2103, 2113 and 2193F
Mounts two (2) form C auxiliary contacts on the operating later
units
mechanism, external to the breaker. Allen-Bradley I-Frame or 2100H-N25B
Cutler-Hammer FDB, FD, HFD, FDB-LFD and FDC.
For units with dual circuit breakers only. Allen-Bradley I-Frame
or Cutler-Hammer Series C 150A HMCP, FDB, FD, HFD, FDB-LFD 2100H-N16
and FDC.
For units with single circuit breakers only. Allen-Bradley I, JD, or Unit Series K-N
External K Frame or Cutler-Hammer Series C
9 Auxiliary Permits mounting a maximum of 150A HMCP, FDB, FD, HFD, FDB-LFD, FDC
225/250A JD, HFD, JDC, HMCP
2100H-N17
SC
Contact two (2) Bulletin 1495-N8
Adapter Kits (normally open) or 1495-N9 400A HMCP, KD, HKD and KDC.
FOR (normally closed) auxiliary For units with Cutler-Hammer 225A frame (MCP 225A and JB)
10 CIRCUIT contacts on the unit operating and 400A frame (MCP 400, LBB, or HLB) circuit breakers Unit Series C-G 1495-N16
BREAKERS: mechanism, external to the For units with Cutler-Hammer 600A LC, HLC circuit breakers Unit Series C-N
Not for use on circuit breaker For units with Cutler-Hammer 800A MC, HMC, MDS, ND, HND,
0.5 space or NDC circuit breakers Unit Series C-N
factor units.
11 Auxiliaries For units with Allen-Bradley Q Frame MCP or Cutler-Hammer
Unit Series N
1495-N13
are actuated 600A L-frame (LD, HLD, or LDC) and 600A HMCP circuit breakers
by the unit For units with Cutler-Hammer 1200A NC, HNC, ND, HND, or Unit Series C-N
operating NDC circuit breakers
handle only For units with single circuit breakers only. Allen-Bradley I, JD, or
12 and will not Permits mounting a maximum of K Frame or Cutler-Hammer Series C. Units Series Q
reflect a two (2) normally open 150A HMCP, FDB, FD, HFD, FDB-LFD and FDC. 2100H-N22
circuit and later
(2100H-N19) or normally closed 250A HMCP, JD, HJD and JDC.
breaker trip.
13 (2100H-N20) auxiliary contacts
on the unit operating
400A HMCP, KD, HKD and KDC.
For units with Allen-Bradley Q Frame MCP or Cutler-Hammer
mechanism, external to the 600A HMCP, LD, HLD, or LDC. Unit Series Q and 2100H-N23
circuit breaker 800A MC, HMC, MDS, MDL, HMDL, ND, HND, or NDC. later
1200A ND, HND, or NDC circuit breakers.
14
15
16
17
19

Hardware and Kits
300 2
1-Pole 120/240V AC, 2-Pole 120/240V AC, 3-Pole 120/240V AC,
10kA rms symmetrical 10kA rms symmetrical 10kA rms symmetrical Delivery
Description interrupting capacity interrupting capacity interrupting capacity Program 3
Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number
15A 2100-B1015 2100-B2015 2100-B3015
20A 2100-B1020 2100-B2020 2100-B3020
4
30A 2100-B1030 2100-B2030 2100-B3030
Bolt-on Inverse Time 15A with ground fault 2100-B1015G — — 5
(Thermal Magnetic) Branch
Breakers for Lighting 20A with ground fault 2100-B1020G — — SC
Panels (2193LE) [1] 50A — 2100-B2050 2100-B3050
100A — 2100-B2100 2100-B3100 6
Filler plates 2100-FILLER — —
(10 per package)
1-Pole 277V AC, 14kA
7
2-Pole 480Y/277V AC, 3-Pole 480Y/277V AC,
rms 14kA rms symmetrical 14kA rms symmetrical
symmetrical interrupting capacity interrupting capacity
interrupting capacity 8
15A 2100-GHB1015 2100-GHB2015 2100-GHB3015
20A 2100-GHB1020 2100-GHB2020 2100-GHB3020
25A 2100-GHB1025 2100-GHB2025 2100-GHB3025 9
30A 2100-GHB1030 2100-GHB2030 2100-GHB3030
35A 2100-GHB1035 2100-GHB2035 2100-GHB3035 10
Inverse Time (Thermal 40A 2100-GHB1040 2100-GHB2040 2100-GHB3040
PE
Magnetic) Branch Breakers 50A 2100-GHB1050 2100-GHB2050 2100-GHB3050
for Panel Board Plug-In Unit 60A 2100-GHB1060 2100-GHB2060 2100-GHB3060
(2193PP) [2]
70A 2100-GHB1070 2100-GHB2070 2100-GHB3070 11
80A 2100-GHB1080 2100-GHB2080 2100-GHB3080
90A 2100-GHB1090 2100-GHB2090 2100-GHB3090
100A 2100-GHB1100 2100-GHB2100 2100-GHB3100
Filler plates 2100-FILLER — — SC 12
(10 per package)
[1] Bolt-on branch breaker frame type for lighting panel boards is BAB.
[2] Bolt-on branch breaker frame type for plug-in panel board unit is GHB. 13
14
15
16
17
18
19

Hardware and Kits
DeviceNet Hardware and Kits for Field Installation
2 301
Catalog Delivery
Description Number Program
3 For Bulletin 1771 I/O [1]
DeviceNet scanner module for Bulletins 2180E, 2182E and 2183E 1771-SDN
chassis
DeviceNet Scanner DeviceNet scanner module for Bulletins 2180J, 2182J and 2183J For SLC 500 chassis 1747-SDN [1]
4 Modules
For Bulletin 1756 [1]
DeviceNet scanner module for Bulletins 2180L, 2182L and 2183L 1756-DNB
chassis
5 MCC DeviceNet Includes the necessary DeviceNet connectors and resistors to terminate the DeviceNet cable system
Terminating Resistor in a motor control center. NOTE: if terminating resistors are not used, the DeviceNet cable system will 2100H-DNTR1 SC
Kit not operate correctly. This kit is shipped with each DeviceNet motor control center.
DeviceNet (2) 120 ohm, 5% terminating a DeviceNet trunk cable. NOTE: if terminating resistors are not used, the [1]
1485A-C2
Terminating Resistors DeviceNet cable system will not operate correctly.
Double DeviceNet Allows two DeviceNet cables to be independently connected to a single DeviceNet port in the MCC [1]
1485P-P1J5-UU5
Connector vertical wireway.
DeviceNet Connection For covering unused DeviceNet connectors in the vertical wireway of a DeviceNet MCC. 6 per 2100H-DNCC1
Cover Kit package.
18 in. (45.7 cm) 2100H-DNUC18
DeviceNet Unit Cable Cable used for connecting DeviceNet MCC units to the DeviceNet ports in 36 in. (91.4 cm) 2100H-DNUC36
vertical wireway. Includes cable and (1) connector on each end of the cable. SC
60 in. (152.4 cm) 2100H-DNUC60
9 Round DeviceNet 8A round DeviceNet cable with (1) connector on each end for connecting a
Cable with laptop computer to a DeviceNet port in an IntelliCENTER or DeviceNet MCC 10 ft. (305 cm) 2100H-ICPC120
Connectors
10 DeviceNet Trunk Line
8A flat DeviceNet cable used for trunk lines 246 ft. (75 m) 1485C-P1E75 [1]
Cable [2]
8A round DeviceNet cable used for drop lines 164 ft. (50 m) 2100H-DNRC1 SC
8A Round DeviceNet
Cable [2] 8A round DeviceNet cable uses for extending the trunk line beyond the MCC. [1]
246 ft. (75 m) 1485C-P1BS75
11 Class I, shielded cable
Includes an assortment of DeviceNet-related components that aid in starting up DeviceNet systems,
DeviceNet Field commissioning DeviceNet nodes, testing DeviceNet devices and training on DeviceNet. See 2100H-DFSK2
Support Kit publication MCC-TD001x-EN-P, Field Support Kit for CENTERLINE MCCs with IntelliCENTER
Technology, for complete information. SC
12 Provides an alternative source of DC power to supply power to devices such as E3 electronic overload
DeviceNet Backup relays in the event of loss of normal network power. For more information refer to publication 2100-DNBPS
Power Supply 2100-TD022x-EN-P
13 [1] Contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office for ordering information.-
[2] Refer to publication DNET-UM072x-EN-P, DeviceNet Media Design and Installation Manual, for application information.
14
15
16
17
19

Appendix
2
Approximate Dimensions 3
All 6.0 space factor units are frame mounted and do not have a vertical wireway.
4
10
11
12
13
14
15
302
15'' Deep 20'' Deep
Dimension 20” Wide 25” Wide 30” Wide 35” Wide 20” Wide 25” Wide 30” Wide 35” Wide
inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm) 16
A 9.13 (232) 9.13 (232) 9.13 (232) 9.13 (232) 14.13 (359) 14.13 (359) 14.13 (359) 14.13 (359)
B 11.56 (294) 11.56 (294) 11.56 (294) 11.56 (294) 16.56 (421) 16.56 (421) 16.56 (421) 16.56 (421)
C 15.00 (381) 15.00 (381) 15.00 (381) 15.00 (381) 20.00 (508) 20.00 (508) 20.00 (508) 20.00 (508) 17
D 20.00 (508) 25.00 (635) 30.00 (762) 35.00 (889) 20.00 (508) 25.00 (635) 30.00 (762) 35.00 (889)
E 10.00 (254) 12.50 (318) 15.00 (381) 17.50 (445) 10.00 (254) 12.50 (318) 15.00 (381) 17.50 (445)
NOTE: Optional external mounting channels add 1.5” to height. Refer to page 213 for mounting channels. 18
19
20

Appendix
2 25” Section 10” Section
4 "A"
(L1)
"A"
(L2)
"A"
5 (L3)
10
1.12
7.50 [191]
[28]
1.25
10.00 [254]
[32]
11
B
A
POWER
12 WIRES
13
25” Wide Section with 9” Wireway (90” High) 10” Incomming Line Section
14
Section 303 Section 303A
Depth Depth
Dimensions Dimensions
15 15” Deep 20” Deep 15” Deep 20” Deep
inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm)
A 9.13 (232) 14.13 (359) A 12.75 (324) 17.75 (451)
B 11.56 (294) 16.56 (421) B 14.75 (375) 19.75 (502)
16 C 15.00 (381) 20.00 (508)
NOTE: Optional external mounting channels add 1.5” to height.
Refer to page 213 for mounting channels.
17
18
19
20

Appendix
6
92.50"
(2350 m)
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Interior Section Width 304 Section Depth 305
Floor Plan
Dimensions 20” 25” 30” Dimension 15” Deep 20” Deep 17
inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm)
A 25.00 (635) 30.00 (762) 35.00 (889) A 25.13 (638) 30.13 (765)
B 13.75 (349) 16.25 (413) 18.75 (476) B 12.63 (321) 15.13 (384)
18
C 11.25 (286) 13.75 (349) 16.25 (413) C 16.81 (427) 21.81 (554)
D 8.87 (225) 11.37 (289) 13.87 (352) NOTE: Optional external mounting channels add 1.5” to height.
NOTE: Optional non-removal lifting angle add 3.63” to height. Refer to page 213 for mounting channels. 19
20

Appendix
10
11
12
13
306
14 Section Section Width

Depth
Dimension Dimension
15” Deep 20” Deep 20” 25” 30” 35” 40”
15 inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm) inch (mm)
A 9.13 (232) 14.13 (359) A[1] 17.25 (438) 22.25 (565) 27.25 (692) 32.25 (819) 37.25 (946)
B 11.00 (294) 16.56 (421) B 16.50 (419) 21.50 (546) 26.50 (673) 31.50 (800) 36.50 (927)
C 15.00 (381) 20.00 (508) C 5.25 (133) 7.75 (197) 10.25 (260) 12.75 (324) 15.25 (387)
16
[1] When horizontal bus or a disconnecting means (switch or circuit breaker) is specified, reduce dimension ‘A’ by 5.”
NOTE: Optional external mounting channels add 1.5” to height. Refer to page 213 for mounting channels.
17
18
19
20

Appendix
20" 20" 2
(508 mm) (508 mm)
2.50" 2.50"
A (64 mm) (64 mm) 3
D
5
10
C
70.48" 70.48"
(1790.19 mm) (1790.19 mm)
11
B
12
13
E
71" high section

(1803.4 mm) 14
307
Section Depth
15
Dimensions 15” Deep 20” Deep
inch (mm) inch (mm)
A 15.00 (380) 20.00 (508)
B 14.75 (374) 19.75 (500) 16
C 5.12 (130) 10.12 (256)
D 4 (101) 8 (203)
E — — 4.40 (112)
17
NOTE: Refer to page 221 for details of cabinet bottom.
18
19
20

Appendix
Motor Control Center Construction
2 308
Nominal Approximate
Major Structural Components Gauge
3 inches mm (AWG)
Side Plates 0.075 1.905 14
4 Reinforcing “C” Channel 0.105 2.667 12
Backplate 20” Wide 0.067 1.70 15
Backplate 25” Wide 0.067 1.70 15
5 Backplate 25” - 40” Wide 0.105 2.667 12
Bottom Mounting Angle 0.164 4.166 8
Right-Hand Unit Support 0.075 1.905 14
Covers and Panels
Top Plate (all widths) 0.075 1.905 14
Bottom Plate 0.075 1.905 14
External End Plate 0.075 1.905 14
Horizontal Wireway Cover 0.060 1.524 16
Wireway Baffle 0.075 1.905 14
Top Horizontal Wireway Pan 0.060 1.524 16
9 Doors
Unit Door (1.0 - 5.0 Space Factor) 0.075 1.905 14
Unit Door (6.0 Space Factor) 0.105 2.667 12
10 Vertical Wireway Door 0.060 1.524 16
Other Steel
Pull Box Parts 0.075 1.905 14
Unit Wrap Around 0.075 1.905 14
11 Unit Support Pan 0.075 1.905 14
Approximate Weights of CENTERLINE Motor Control Center Sections

309
12 NEMA 1 or 12 NEMA 3R or 4
MCC Section Dimensions Lbs. (kg) Lbs. (kg)
per section [1] per section [1]
13 15”/20” D, 20” W 750 (340) 950 (431)
15”/20” D, 25” W 750 (340) 1000 (454)
15”/20” D, 30” W 800 (363) 1050 (477)
14 15”/20” D, 35” W 800 (363) N/A
[1] Weights are based on worst case approximations.
15 MCC Finish
310
NEMA Type Finish
1, 1G, 12 ANSI 49, Medium Light Grey
16 3R High Gloss White (outside only)
17
18
19
20

Appendix
Heater Element Selection
Overload Relay Class Designations 2
Industry standard NEMA Part ICS 2-222 designates an overload relay by a class number, indicating the
maximum time in seconds at which the relay will trip when carrying a current equal to 600 percent of its 3
current rating.
A class 10 overload relay will trip in 10 seconds or less at a current equal to 600 percent of its rating.
Applications include hermetric motors, submersible pumps and motors with short locked rotor time capability. 4
A class 20 overload relay will trip in 20 seconds or less at a current equal to 600 percent of its rating. They are
often used for applications involving motors driving high inertia loads, where additional accelerating time is
needed. 5
Allen-Bradley standard overload relay protection using type W heater elements provides class 20 operation
and is recommended for general applications. For applications regarding class 10 and 30 overload relays,
consult your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office. 6
Heater Element Selection
The “Full Load Amps” listed in the table are to be used for heater element selection. The rating of the relay in 7
amperes at 40°C is 115% of the full load amps listed for the “Heater Element No.”
Refer to the motor nameplate for the full load current, the service factor and the motor classification by
application and temperature rise. 8
Use this motor nameplate information, the application rules and the full load amps listed in the tables to
determine the Heater Element No.
Motors Rated For Continuous Duty 9
Motors with marked service factor of not less than 1.15 or motors with a marked temperature rise not over 40°C.
1.) The same temperature at the controller and motor—Select the heater element number with the listed full load amps
nearest the full load value shown on the motor nameplate. This will provide integral horsepower motors with 10
protection between 110 and 120% of the nameplate full load currents.
2.) Higher temperature at the controller than at the motor—*If the full load current value shown on the motor nameplate
is between the listed full load amps, select the heater element number with the higher value. This will provide
integral horsepower motors with protection between 115 and 125% of the nameplate full load currents. 11
3.) Lower temperature at the controller than at the motor—If the full load current value shown on the motor nameplate
is between the listed full load amps, select the heater element number with the lower value. This will provide
integral horsepower motors with protection between 105 and 115% of the nameplate full load currents.
All Other Motors Rated For Continuous Duty (Includes Motors With Marked Service Factor Of 1.0) 12
Select the heater element number one rating smaller than determined by the rules in paragraphs 1, 2 and 3.
This will provide protection at current levels 10% lower than indicated above.
Motors Rated For Intermittent Duty 13
Consult your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
* Rules 2 and 3 apply when the temperature difference does not exceed 10°C (18°F). Consult your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office when the temperature difference is
greater.

Appendix
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Appendix
Heater Element Selection Tables
Index to Heater Element Selection Tables 311 Heater Element Full Load Amps 2
Device Bulletin Number Size Table Number Number Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4
NEMA 1-4 143 W23 0.64 — — —
2106/2107
NEMA 5 347 W24 0.70 — — — 3
2112/2113 W25 0.77 — — —
NEMA 1 181
(0.5 space factor) W26 0.85 — — —
NEMA 1-4 143 W27 0.93 — — — 4
2112/2113 [1] NEMA 5 347 W28 1.02 — — —
NEMA 6 195 W29 1.12 — — —
Combination Motor Vacuum contactor W30 1.23 — — — 5
Starters 2112/2113 195
starters W31 1.35 — — —
2113 [1] NEMA 3, 4 152 W32 1.48 — — —
NEMA 1 141 W33 1.62 — — — 6
2113 Dual W34 1.79 — — —
NEMA 2 146
NEMA 1-4 143 W35 1.97 — — —
2122/2123
NEMA 5 347 W36 2.18 — — — 7
2126/2127 NEMA 1-2 143 W37 2.40 — — —
W38 2.65 — — —
[1] For Bulletin 2113 NEMA size 3 in 1.5 space factor units and NEMA size 4 in 2.0
space factor units, use Table 152.
W39
W40
2.92
3.23
—
—
—
—
—
—
8
Table 141 312 W41 3.56 — — —
W42 3.93 — — —
Heater Element
Number
Full Load Amps
Size 1
Heater Element
Number
Full Load Amps
Size 1 W43 4.30 — — — 9
W10 0.18 W38 2.73 W44 4.71 — — —
W11 0.20 W39 3.00 W45 5.16 — — —
W12 0.22 W40 3.30 W46 5.66 — — — 10
W13 0.24 W41 3.63 W47 6.28 — — —
W14 0.27 W42 4.00 W48 6.94 — — —
W15 0.30 W43 4.40 W49 7.71 — — —
W16 0.33 W44 4.84 W50
W51
8.45
9.29
8.56
9.4
—
—
—
—
11
W17 0.36 W45 5.32
W52 10.3 10.4 — —
W18 0.40 W46 5.84
W53 11.4 11.5 — —
W19 0.44 W47 6.41
W54 12.5 12.6 — —
W20 0.48 W48 7.03
W21 0.53 W49 7.72
W55 13.7 13.8 — — 12
W56 15.0 15.1 — —
W22 0.59 W50 8.47
W57 16.3 16.4 — —
W23 0.65 W51 9.3
W24 0.72 W52 10.2
W58 17.7 17.9 — — 13
W59 19.3 19.5 — —
W25 0.79 W53 11.2
W60 20.9 21.2 — —
W26 0.87 W54 12.3 W61 22.7 23.0 25.4 —
W27 0.96 W55 13.3 W62 24.7 25.1 27.8 —
W28 1.05 W56 14.8 W63 26.9 27.3 30.5 — 14
W29 1.16 W57 16.1 W64 29.2 29.7 33.5 35.0
W30 1.27 W58 17.5 W65 — 31.5 37.0 38.5
W31 1.40 W59 19.0 W66 — 34.5 40.5 42.0 15
W32 1.54 W60 20.7 W67 — 37.5 44.5 46.0
W33 1.70 W61 22.5 W68 — 41.0 48.5 51.0
W34 1.87 W62 24.5 W69 — 44.0 53.0 56.0
W35 2.05 W63 26.6 W70 — 47.0 59.0 61.0
W36 2.26 W64 28.8 W71 — — 64.0 66.0 16
W37 2.48 — — W72 — — 69.0 71.0
W73 — — 73.0 76.0
Table 143 313
Heater Element Full Load Amps
W74
W75
—
—
—
—
77.0
81.0
82.0
88.0
17
Number Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 W76 — — 85.0 94.0
W10 0.19 — — — W77 — — 90.0 100.0
W11 0.21 — — —
W12 0.23 — — —
W78
W79
—
—
—
—
—
—
106.0
113.0
18
W13 0.25 — — — W80 — — — 120.0
W14 0.28 — — — W81 — — — 128.0
W15 0.30 — — — W82 — — — 135.0 19
W16 0.33 — — —
W17 0.36 — — —
W18 0.40 — — — 20
W19 0.44 — — —
W20 0.49 — — —
W21 0.53 — — —
W22 0.58 — — —
Appendix
Table 146 314 Table 181 316
2 Heater Element Full Load Amps Heater Element Full Load Amps Full Load Amps
Number Size 2 Number Size 2 2112/2113
Heater Element Number
W45 5.53 W58 17.3 Size 1
3 W46 6.04 W59 18.9
0.5 Space Factor
W23 0.67
W47 6.60 W60 20.6 W24 0.74
4 W48 7.21 W61 22.5 W25 0.84
W49 7.87 W62 24.6 W26 0.90
W50 8.60 W63 26.8 W27 1.00
W28 1.10
5 W51 9.39 W64 29.4 W29 1.22
W52 10.3 W65 32.0 W30 1.31
W53 11.2 W66 34.5 W31 1.43
W32 1.55
W54 12.2 W67 37.5 W33 1.66
W55 13.3 W68 41.0 W34 1.80
W56 14.6 W69 44.5 W35 1.97
W57 15.8 — — W36 2.12
W37 2.33
Table 152 315 W38 2.59
W39 2.84
W40 3.15
Number Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 W41 3.46
W45 — — — W42 3.84
W43 4.27
9 W46
W47
—
—
—
—
—
— W44 4.73
W48 — — — W45 5.36
W49 — — — W46 5.82
10 W50 8.56 — — W47
W48
6.33
6.97
W51 9.4 — —
W52 10.4 — — W49 7.63
W53 11.5 — — W50 8.49
W54 12.6 — — W51 9.24
W52 10.1
11 W55
W56
13.8
15.1
—
—
—
— W53 11.1
W57 16.4 — — W54 12.2
W58 17.7 — — W55 13.6
W59 19.1 — — W56 14.6
W60 21.1 — — W57 15.7
12 W61 23.2 25.1 — W58 17.2
W62 25.7 27.5 — W59 18.9
W63 28.5 30.5 33.0 W60 20.5
W64 30.5 33.5 36.0 W61 22.2
13 W65 33.0 36.5 39.5 W62 24.2
W66 35.5 40.0 43.0 W66 —
W67 38.5 44.0 47.0 W67 —
W68 41.5 48.0 51.0 W68 —
W69 45.0 53.0 56.0 W69 —
14 W70 — 58.0 61.0 W70 —
W71 — 62.0 66.0 W71 —
W72 — 67.0 72.0 W72 —
W73 — 72.0 77.0 W73 —
15 W74 — 77.0 83.0 W74 —
W75 — 82.0 89.0 W75 —
W76 — 88.0 95.0 W76 —
W77 — 94.0 102.0 W77 —
W78 — — 108.0 W78 —
16 W79 — — 116.0 W79 —
W80 — — 123.0 W80 —
W81 — — 130.0 W81 —
W82 — — 137.0 W82 —
17 W83
W84
—
—
W85 —
18
19
20

Appendix
Table 195 317
Heater Element
Full Load Amps 2
Number 2112/2113
Size 6
W26 115 3
W27 125
W28 135
W29 147
W30 165 4
W31 179
W32 196
W33 216 5
W34 232
W35 260
W36 287
W37 315 6
W38 350
W39 385
W40 420
W41 465
7
W42 515
317 A 8
Full Load Amps
Heater 400A Plug-in 400A Frame
Element
Number 200A
Unit with
300:5 CT
Mounted Unit
with 400:5 CT 600A 9
Ratio[1] Ratio[1]
W31 59[2] — — —
10
W32 65[2] — — —
W33 70 — — —
W34 75 — 150 —
W35 81 — 160 —
11
W36 89 — 175 287
W37 98 150 195 315
W38 110 160 215 350
W39 120 175 235 385
W40 132 195 260 420
12
W41 143 215 293 465
W42 155 235 320 —
W43 170 250 350 —
13
W44 193 293 380 —
[1] 400A Vacuum Contactors Starters use 300:5 CT Ratio except
125HP@208V, 125-150HP@240V, 250HP@380-415V, 250-300HP@480V, and
350-400HP@600V use 400:5 CT Ratio. 14
[2] Exceeds 20 seconds at six times rating, providing Class 30 protection.
Table 347 318

15
Number Size 5
W29 77
W30 83
W31
W32
90
98
16
W33 107
W34 116
W35 126
W36 138 17
W37 150
W38 164
W39 178
W40
W41
194
212
18
W42 232
W43 254
W44
W45
270
—
19
20

Appendix
Full Load Currents
2 The full load currents listed below are average values
for horsepower rated motors of several
manufacturers at the more common rated voltages
3 and speeds. These average values, along with the
similar values listed in the NEC/UL/cUL, should be
4 used only as a guide for selecting suitable
components for the motor branch circuit. The rated
full load current, shown on the motor nameplate,
5 may vary considerably from the listed value,
depending on the specific motor design.
IMPORTANT: The motor nameplate full load current always should be used in determining the rating of
the devices used for motor running overcurrent protection.
Full Load Current of 3 Phase, 60 Hertz AC Induction Motors 319
Full Load Current Full Load Current

HP RPM HP RPM
208V 240V 480V 600V 208V 240V 480V 600V
3600 1.20 1.04 0.52 0.42 3600 111 96.0 48.0 38.4
0.25 1800 1.39 1.20 0.60 0.48 40 1800 117 102 50.8 40.6
1200 1.62 1.40 0.70 0.56 1200 119 103 51.7 41.4
9 3600 1.48 1.28 0.64 0.51 3600 141 122 61.2 49.0
0.33 1800 1.69 1.46 0.73 0.58 50 1800 144 125 62.3 49.8
1200 1.89 1.64 0.82 0.66 1200 147 127 63.4 50.7
10 3600 2.08 1.80 0.90 0.72 3600 165 143 71.6 57.3
0.50 1800 2.54 2.20 1.10 0.88 60 1800 172 149 74.3 59.4
1200 2.89 2.50 1.25 1.00 1200 173 150 74.9 59.9
3600 2.89 2.50 1.25 1.00 3600 204 177 88.5 70.8
0.75 1800 3.47 3.00 1.50 1.20 75 1800 211 183 91.4 73.1
11 1200 3.81 3.30 1.65 1.32 1200 215 186 93.1 74.5
3600 3.51 3.04 1.52 1.22 3600 267 231 116 92.6
1 1800 4.25 3.68 1.84 1.47 100 1800 276 239 119 95.5
1200 4.60 3.98 1.99 1.59 1200 281 243 122 97.2
3600 5.04 4.36 2.18 1.74 3600 333 288 144 115
12 1.5 1800 5.80 5.02 2.51 2.01 125 1800 340 294 147 118
1200 6.49 5.62 2.81 2.25 1200 347 300 150 120
3600 6.51 5.64 2.82 2.26 3600 397 344 172 138
13 2 1800 7.18 6.22 3.11 2.49 150 1800 404 350 175 140
1200 8.20 7.10 3.55 2.84 1200 414 358 179 143
3600 9.24 8.00 4.00 3.20 3600 524 454 227 182
3 1800 10.4 9.04 4.52 3.62 200 1800 531 460 230 184
1200 11.6 10.1 5.04 4.03 1200 538 466 233 186
14
3600 15.7 13.6 6.80 5.44 3600 642 556 278 222
5 1800 15.9 13.8 6.88 5.50 250 1800 658 570 285 228
1200 18.6 16.1 8.07 6.46 1200 682 590 295 236
15 3600 22.1 19.1 9.57 7.66 3600 774 670 335 268
7.5 1800 25.0 21.7 10.8 8.66 300 1800 790 684 342 274
1200 26.6 23.1 11.5 9.22 1200 804 696 348 278
3600 29.7 25.7 12.9 10.3 3600 — 748 374 299
16 10 1800 31.5 27.3 13.7 10.9 350 1800 — 762 381 305
1200 32.9 28.4 14.2 11.4 1200 — 774 387 310
3600 43.0 37.2 18.6 14.9 3600 — 874 437 350
15 1800 46.7 40.4 20.2 16.2 400 1800 — 892 446 357
17 1200 49.1 42.5 21.3 17.0 1200 — 902 451 361
3600 59.2 51.3 25.6 20.5 3600 — 972 486 389
20 1800 59.6 51.6 25.8 20.6 450 1800 — 992 496 397
1200 61.7 53.4 26.7 21.4 1200 — 1004 502 402
18 3600 70.9 61.4 30.7 24.6 3600 — 1074 537 430
25 1800 74.7 64.7 32.3 25.9 500 1800 — 1096 548 438
1200 76.0 65.8 32.9 26.3 1200 — 1108 554 443
19 3600 85.7 74.2 37.1 29.7
30 1800 88.2 76.4 38.2 30.5
1200 91.6 79.3 39.7 31.7
20

Appendix
Full Load Currents
The full load currents listed below are average values 2
for kW rated motors of several manufacturers at the
more common rated voltages and speeds. These
average values should be used only as a guide for 3
selecting suitable components for the motor branch
circuit. The rated full load current, shown on the
motor nameplate, may vary considerably from the 4
listed value, depending on the specific motor design.
IMPORTANT: The motor nameplate full load current always should be used in determining the rating of 5
the devices used for motor running overcurrent protection.
Full Load Currents of 3 Phase, 50 Hertz AC Induction Motors 320 6

Full Load Current (Amperes)
kW Average Values for 4-Pole (1500rpm) Motors 7
220V 230V [1] 380V 400V [1] 415V
0.25 1.40 1.34 0.88 0.83 0.80
0.37 2.10 2.00 1.20 1.18 1.16 8
0.55 2.75 2.60 1.50 1.47 1.45
0.75 3.50 3.30 2.10 2.00 1.90
9
1.1 4.40 4.20 2.60 2.50 2.40
1.5 6.00 5.70 3.50 3.30 3.20
2.2 8.70 8.30 5.00 4.80 4.60 10
3.7 14 13.4 8.20 7.80 7.50
5.5 20 19.1 11.5 10.9 10.5
7.5 27 25.8 15.5 14.8 14.2
11 39 37.3 22 21.1 20.5 11
15 52 50 30 29 28
18.5 64 61 37 36 35
22 75 72 44 42 40
30 103 99 60 57 55 12
37 126 121 72.5 69 66
45 147 141 85 82 80
13
55 182 174 105 100 96
75 239 229 138 136 135
90 295 282 170 167 165
110 356 341 205 202 200 14
132 425 407 245 236 230
150 484 463 280 269 260
160 520 497 300 286 275 15
185 580 555 340 324 312
200 640 612 370 353 340
220 710 679 408 395 385
250 — — 475 461 450 16
[1] These values are calculated.
17
18
19
20

Appendix
Inverse Time Thermal Magnetic or Electronic Circuit Breaker Interrupting Capacity Ratings
2 321
Interrupting Capacity Ratings
(rms Symmetrical Amperes)
3 Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker 380V–
Breaker Trip Type 208V
Frame Suffix 415V
230V 600V
4 240V 480V
I3C (150A) CB Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) 65kA 35kA 18kA
5 I6C (150A) CM Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) 100kA 65kA 25kA
I0C (150A) CX Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) 100kA 100kA 35kA
I3C-CL (150A) CD Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) 100kA 100kA 100kA
JD3D (250A) CT Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) 65kA 35kA 18kA
JD6D (250A) CM Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) 100kA 65kA 25kA
JD0D (250A) CX Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) 100kA 100kA 35kA
K3D (400A) CT Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) 65kA 35kA 25kA
K6D (400A) CM Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) 100kA 65kA 35kA
K0D (400A) CX Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) 100kA 100kA 65kA
LD, LDG (600A) CT, CTG Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) 65kA 35kA 25kA
HLD, HLDG (600A) CM, CMG Inverse Time (Electronic) 100kA 65kA 35kA
9 LDC, LDCG (600A) CX, CXG Inverse Time (Electronic) 100kA 100kA 50kA
MDL, MDLG (800A) CT, CTG Inverse Time (Electronic) 65kA 50kA 25kA
HMDL, HMDLG (800A) CM, CMG Inverse Time (Electronic) 100kA 65kA 35kA
10
NDC, NDCG (800A) CX, CXG Inverse Time (Electronic) 100kA 100kA 65kA
ND, NDG (1200A) CT, CTG Inverse Time (Electronic) 65kA 50kA 25kA
HND, HNDG (1200A) CM, CMG Inverse Time (Electronic) 100kA 65kA 35kA
11 NDC, NDCG (1200A) CX, CXG Inverse Time (Electronic) 100kA 100kA 65kA
RD, RDG (2000A) CM, CMG Inverse Time (Electronic) 100kA 65kA 50kA
3-Pole Inverse Time Circuit Breaker Characteristics for Bulletin 2193F and 2193M Units
12 322
Circuit Electronic Trip Units (with interchangeable rating plugs) [1]

Rating Thermal Magnetic Trip Units
Breaker Digitrip RMS 310 [2] Digitrip OPTIM 550
(Amperes)
13 Frame
Inter- changeable Non-inter-changeable LS LSI LSG LSIG LSI LSIG LSIA
150 I — STD — — — — — — —
225 JD STD [3] — — — — — — —
14 400 K STD [3] [3] [3] [3] [3] [3] [3] [3]
600 [4] L [3] — STD [3] STD [3] [3] [3] [3]
[4] M,N [3] [3] STD [3] STD [3] — — —
15 800
1200 [4] N — — STD [3] STD [3] [3] [3] [3]
2000 [4] R — — STD STD — — —

[1] Definitions are as follows:
16 • LS: standard trip unit that includes adjustable short time current pickup settings that encompass an I2 t ramp function.
• LSI: optional trip unit that provides additional flat response short time delay adjustments with an instantaneous setting.
• LSG: standard LS unit with ground fault protection and adjustable pickup current.
• LSIG: optional LSI unit with ground fault protection and adjustable pickup current and time delay.
17 • LSIA: optional LSI unit with ground fault alarm and adjustable pickup current and time delay.
[2] The Digitrip RMS 310 electronic trip unit provides true RMS sensing, permitting increased accuracy. True RMS sensing is not susceptible to nuisance tripping when wave forms
containing high harmonic currents are present.
[3] Contact your local Rockwell Automation Sales Office for availability.
[4] Sealed to be suitable for reverse-fed applications. Trip units are not interchangeable. Rating plugs are interchangeable.
18 Trip units are provided with test points for functional field testing with a portable electronic test set. These trip units incorporate a powered thermal memory that recalls near trip
conditions and automatically imposes a shorter time delay, thereby preventing system damage from cumulative overheating. These units also incorporate an unpowered thermal
memory feature that remembers a trip has occurred and will protect against repeated overload conditions if the CB is re-closed before a sufficient cool down period has elapsed.
19
20

Appendix
UL/cUL/CSA Short Circuit Withstand Ratings for Combination Fusible Disconnect Units
323 2
Short Circuit Withstand Ratings

(Amperes rms Symmetrical)
3
Fuse Class Device/Bulletin Size/Rating UL/cUL/CSA
(except where noted) 4
600V or less
2102L 30A 100kA
CC 2106, 2112, 2122, 2126 #1 100kA 5
2106, 2112 Space Saving NEMA #1 100kA
2102L 30A-100A 5kA
2102L 200A-300A 10kA
6
2106, 2112, 2122, 2126 #1-3 5kA
H 2106, 2112, 2122 #4-5 10kA 7
2112 #6 10kA
2112 Vacuum Contactor Starters 200A, 400A, 600A 10kA
2196 10kA 8
2102L 30A-100A 100kA
2102L 200A- 300A 100kA
2106, 2112, 2122, 2126 #1-3 100kA
9
2106, 2112, 2122 #4-5 100kA
J, R
2106, 2112 Space Saving NEMA #1 100kA 10
2112 #6 100kA
2196 100kA
2106, 2112, 2122, 2126 #1-3 100kA [1] 11
2106, 2112, 2122 #4-5 100kA [1]
HRCII-C 2106, 2112 Space Saving NEMA #1 100kA [1]
2112 #6 100kA [1] 12
L 2112 #6 100kA
[1] NOT UL listed.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Appendix
UL/cUL/CSA Short Circuit Withstand Ratings for Combination Circuit Breaker Units
2 324
Short Circuit Withstand Ratings (Amperes rms Symmetrical)
Circuit Breaker
3 Frame Device/Bulletin Size/Rating UL/cUL/CSA (except where noted)
208V through 240V 380V through 480V 600V
2107, 2113, 2123, 2127[1] #1-3 — — 25kA
4 2107, 2113, 2123, 2127 #1-4 100kA 100kA 50kA
2107, 2113 Space Saving NEMA #1-2 — 65kA [2] 35kA
5 MCP 2107, 2113 Space Saving NEMA #3 — 65kA [2] 42kA
2113 Space Saving NEMA #4 — 50kA [2] 30kA
2107, 2113, 2123 #5 100kA 100kA 42kA
2113 #6 100kA 65kA 35kA
MCP w/ ELC 2107, 2113, 2123, 2127 #1-4 100kA 100kA 100kA
2107, 2113, 2123, 2127 #1-3 65kA 35kA 18kA
I3C 2107, 2113 Space Saving NEMA #3 — 35kA [2] 18kA
30A-100A/
2103L, 2197 65kA 35kA 18kA
15A-150A
9 2107, 2113, 2123, 2127 #1-3 100kA 100kA 100kA
I3C-CL 30A-100A/
2103L, 2197 100kA 100kA 100kA
15A-150A
10 2107, 2113, 2123, 2127 #1-3 100kA 100kA 25kA
I6C 2107, 2113 Space Saving NEMA #3 — 65kA [2] 42kA
11 2103L, 2197 30A-100A/ 100kA 65kA 25kA
15A-150A
2107, 2113, 2123 #4-5 65kA 35kA 18kA
2113 Space Saving NEMA #4 — 50kA[2] 30kA
JD3D
12 2113 Vacuum Contactor Starters 200A, 400A 65kA 35kA 18kA
2103L, 2197 200A 65kA 35kA 18kA
2107, 2113, 2123 #4, #5 100kA 100kA 42kA
13 2113 Space Saving NEMA #4 — 50kA [2] 30kA
JD6D
2113 Vacuum Contactor Starters 200A, 400A 100kA 65kA 25kA
2103L, 2197 200A 100kA 65kA 25kA
2107, 2113, 2123 #5 65kA 35kA —
14
K3D 2113 Vacuum Contactor Starters 400A 65kA 35kA —
2103L 300A 65kA 35kA 25kA
15 2107, 2113, 2123 #5 100kA 100kA —
K6D 2113 Vacuum Contactor Starters 400A 100kA 65kA —
2103L 300A 100kA 65kA 35kA
2113 #6 65kA 35kA 25kA
LD
16 2113 Vacuum Contactor Starters 400A, 600A 65kA 35kA 25kA
2113 #6 100kA 65kA 35kA
HLD
2113 Vacuum Contactor Starters 400A, 600A 100kA 65kA 35kA
17 MDL 2113 #6 65kA[3] 50kA[4] —
HMDL 2113 #6 100kA[3] 65kA[4] —
[1] Circuit breaker suffix CZ.
18 [2] 480V Only.
[3] 200HP @240V only.
[4] 400HP @480V only.
19
20

Appendix
UL/cUL/CSA Short Circuit Withstand Ratings for Combination Soft Starter Units (SMCs)
Combination Fusible Disconnect Soft Starter Units for Bulletin 2154H and 2154J 325 2
Bulletin Number SMC Device Rating Fuse Class
240V 480V 600V
3A through 85A 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA
3
2154H
108A and 135A 65kA 65kA 65kA
5A through 85A J 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA 4
108A and 135A 65kA 65kA 65kA
2154J
201A through 361A 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA 5
480A L 100 kA 100 kA 100 kA
Combination Circuit Breaker Soft Starter Units for Bulletin 2155H and 2155J 326
6
Bulletin SMC Device Rating Circuit Breaker Frame
Number 240V 480V 600V
2155H without
3A through 43A MCP, I3C, I6C 5kA 5kA 5kA 7
60A and 85A MCP, I3C, I6C, JD3D, JD6D 10kA 10kA 10kA
Option 13HIC
108A and 135A MCP, JD3D, JD6D 25kA 25kA 25kA
2155H with 3A through 135A MCP, I3C, I6C, JD3D, JD6D 100kA 100kA 100kA
8
Option 13HIC
5A through 85A MCP, I3C, I6C, JD3D, JD6D 10kA 10kA 10kA
2155J without 108A through 135A MCP, JD3D, JD6D 25kA 25kA 25kA 9
Option 13HIC MCP, JD3D, JD6D, K3D, K6D, LD,
201A through 480A 30kA 30kA 30kA
HLD, MDL, HMDL
MCP 100kA 100kA 100kA 10
JD3D 18kA 14kA 14kA
5A through 85A
I3C 65kA 25kA 18kA
2155J with
I6C, JD6D 100kA 65kA 25kA
Option 13HIC
108A through 135A MCP, JD3D, JD6D 100kA 100kA 100kA
11
MCP, JD3D, JD6D, K3D, K6D, LD,
201A through 480A 100kA 100kA 100kA
HLD, MDL, HMDL
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Appendix
UL/cUL/CSA Short Circuit Withstand Ratings for Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor Drive
2 Units
AC Drive Combination Fusible Disconnect Units for Bulletins 2162Q, 2162R, 2162T, 2164Q, and 2164R 327
3 Bulletin
Short Circuit Withstand Rating (Amperes
Fuse Class Horsepower (rms Symmetrical)
Number
480V 600V
4 CC, J 2162T All ratings 100kA 100kA
2162Q, 2162R, 2164Q,
J All ratings 100kA 100kA
2164R
5
AC Drive Combination Circuit Breaker Units for Bulletins 2163Q, 2163R, 2163T, 2165Q and 2165R 328
Circuit Breaker Drive Input Fuse (Amperes rms Symmetrical)
Bulletin Number Horsepower
Frame Class
480V 600V
MCP, I3C, I6C CC, J 2163T All ratings 100kA 100kA
MCP, I3C, I6C J 2163Q, 2165Q All ratings 100kA 100kA
MCP, I3C, I6C, JD3D, J 2163R, 2165R All ratings 100kA 100kA
JD6D, K3D, K6D
UL/cUL/CSA Short Circuit Withstand Ratings for Programmable Controllers

9 The following tables show short circuit capabilities for combination units that are UL listed and CSA certified.
329
10 Short Circuit Withstand Ratings

Bulletin (Amperes rms Symmetrical)
Fuse Class Number
240V 380-415V 480V 600V
2182E
11 CC 2182J 100kA 100kA 100kA 100kA
2182L
330
12 Circuit
Breaker Bulletin (Amperes rms Symmetrical)
Number
Frame 240V 380-480V 600V
2183E
13
I3C 2183J 65kA 35kA 18kA
2183L
2183E
14 I6C 2183J 100kA 65kA 25kA
2183L
I3C-CL 2183E 100kA 100kA 100kA
15
16
17
18
19
20

Appendix
kW to Catalog HP Code Conversion for
Bulletins 2106, 2107, 2112, 2113, 2122, 2123, 2126 and 2127 2
331
3
kW kW
Required Required Required Required
(For ratings other than Metric (For ratings other than Metric
NEMA HP Catalog HP NEMA HP Catalog HP
those listed, use the next HP Rating Code those listed, use the next HP Rating Code 4
highest rating shown.) highest rating shown.)
0.06 0.08 0.125 30 22 30 30 45
0.09 0.12 0.125 30 25 34 40 46 5
0.12 0.16 0.25 31 30 40 40 46
0.18 0.24 0.25 31 32 43 50 47
0.25 0.34 0.33 32 37 50 50 47
6
0.37 0.5 0.5 33 40 54 60 48
0.55 0.75 0.75 34 45 60 60 48 7
0.75 1 1 35 50 68 75 49
1.1 1.5 1.5 36 55 75 75 49
1.5 2 2 37 63 85 100 50 8
1.8 2.4 3 38 75 100 100 50
2.2 3 3 38 80 110 125 51
3 4 5 39 90 125 125 51
9
3.7 5 5 39 100 136 150 52
4 5.5 7.5 40 110 150 150 52 10
5.5 7.5 7.5 40 125 169 200 54
6.3 8.5 10 41 132 180 200 54
7.5 10 10 41 150 205 250 56
10 13.5 15 42 160 220 250 56 11
11 15 15 42 185 250 250 56
13 18 20 43 200 270 300 57
15 20 20 43 220 300 300 57
17 23 25 44 250 340 350 58 12
18.5 25 25 44 315 430 400 59
20 27 30 45
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Appendix
Recommended Capacitor Sizes 480V and 600V
2 This table shows suggested capacitor ratings for
T-frame NEMA Design B induction motors when the
capacitor and motor are switched as a unit. It is
3 based on normal starting current and torque.
332
4 Horsepower 3600 RPM 1800 RPM 1200 RPM 900 RPM

5 2 kVAR 2.5 kVAR 3 kVAR 4 kVAR
7.5 2.5 kVAR 3 kVAR 4 kVAR 5 kVAR
5
10 4 kVAR 4 kVAR 5 kVAR 6 kVAR
15 5 kVAR 5 kVAR 6 kVAR 7.5 kVAR
20 6 kVAR 6 kVAR 7.5 kVAR 9 kVAR
25 7.5 kVAR 7.5 kVAR 8 kVAR 10 kVAR
40 12.5 kVAR 15 kVAR 15 kVAR 17.5 kVAR
50 15 kVAR 17.5 kVAR 20 kVAR 22.5 kVAR
60 17.5 kVAR 20 kVAR 22.5 kVAR 25 kVAR
100 22.5 kVAR 30 kVAR 30 kVAR 35 kVAR
9 125 25 kVAR 35 kVAR 35 kVAR 40 kVAR
12 This table shows suggested capacitor ratings for

U-frame NEMA Design B induction motors when the
capacitor and motor are switched as a unit. It is
13 based on normal starting current and torque.
333
Horsepower 3600 RPM 1800 RPM 1200 RPM 900 RPM
14 7.5 2.5 kVAR 2.5 kVAR 3 kVAR 4 kVAR
15 20 5 kVAR 5 kVAR 6 kVAR 7.5 kVAR
25 6 kVAR 6 kVAR 7.5 kVAR 9 kVAR
16 50 12.5 kVAR 10 kVAR 12.5 kVAR 15 kVAR
75 17.5 kVAR 17.5 kVAR 17.5 kVAR 20 kVAR
17 100 22.5 kVAR 20 kVAR 25 kVAR 27.5 kVAR
125 27.5 kVAR 25 kVAR 30 kVAR 30 kVAR
18 200 40 kVAR 37.5 kVAR 40 kVAR 50 kVAR
20

Appendix
Horsepower Ratings for Bulletin 2192F, Fusible Disconnect Feeder Switch (FDS) Units
334 2
Switch Ratings (Amperes)

Horsepower at Rated Motor Voltage 3
200V 230V 380-415V 460V 575V
30 0.125-7.5 0.125-7.5 0.125-15 0.125-15 0.125-20
60 10-15 10-15 20-30 20-30 25-40 4
100 20-25 20-30 40-50 40-50 50
200 30-50 40-60 60-100 60-125 60-150 5
400 60-100 75-125 125-250 150-250 175-350
600 125-150 150-200 300-350 300-400 400
6
Conductor Size Conversion Chart—

Metric Conductor Size to American Wire Gauge Conductor Size 7
335
8
American Wire Gauge Size [1]
Metric Conductor Size
(actual size in mm2)
9
1.0 mm2 #18 (0.823)
1.5 mm2 #16 (1.31)
2.5 mm2 #14 (2.68) 10
4 mm2 #12 (3.31)
6 mm2 #10 (5.26)
10 mm2 #8 (8.37) 11
16 mm2 #6 (13.30)
25 mm2 #4 (21.13)
25 mm2 #3 [2] (26.67) 12
35 mm2 #2 (33.62)
35 mm2 #1 [2] (44.21) 13
50 mm2 #1/0 (53.49)
70 mm2 #2/0 (67.43)
95 mm2 #3/0 (85.01)
14
95 mm2 #4/0 [2] (107.20)
120 mm2 250 kcmil (127.0)
150 mm2 300 kcmil (152.0) 15
185 mm2 350 kcmil (177.0)
185 mm2 400 kcmil [2] (203.0)
240 mm2 500 kcmil (253.0) 16
300 mm2 600 kcmil (304.0)
400 mm2 750 kcmil (350.0)
17
[1] Reference IEC Standard 60947-1, table I.
[2] This American wire gauge conductor size is the closest equivalent to the metric
conductor size.
18
19
20

Appendix
Metric Conversion Table
2 336
3 English Metric English Metric

Measurement Equivalent Measurement Equivalent
(inches) (millimeter) (inches) (millimeter)
4 0.016 0.40 1 25.40
0.031 0.79 2 50.80
0.063 1.59 3 76.20
5
0.094 2.38 4 101.60
0.125 3.18 5 127.00
0.156 3.97 6 152.40
0.188 4.76 7 177.80
0.218 5.56 8 203.20
0.250 6.35 9 228.60
0.281 7.14 10 254.00
0.313 7.94 20 508.00
0.375 9.53 30 762.00
0.438 11.11 40 1016.00
9 0.500 12.70 50 1270.00
0.563 14.29 60 1524.00
0.625 15.88 70 1778.00
10 0.688 17.46 80 2032.00
0.750 19.05 90 2286.00
0.875 22.23 100 2540.00
0.938 23.81 200 5080.00
11
1 inch = 2.54 centimeters
1 foot = 12 inches
1 centimeter = 10 millimeters
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Appendix
Fan(s) and Ventilation in Bulletins 2154H, 2154J, 2155H and 2155J
337A 2
NEMA
System Door Mounted
Enclosure Rating Code Venting
Voltage Exhaust Fan(s) 3
Type
A, B, D, E, F, G
All 1, 1G No No
(3 to 37 Ampere)
H, J, K, L, M 4
Bulletins All 1, 1G Yes Yes
(43 to 135 Ampere)
2154H and
2155H All 12 A, B, D, E, F, G, H, J, K
(3 to 85 Ampere) No No 5
L, M
All 12 Yes Yes (filtered and gasketed)
(108 to 135 Ampere)
F005 to F135
6
All 1, 1G Yes Yes
(5 to 135 Ampere)
F201 to F480
Bulletins All 1, 1G (201 to 480 Ampere) No No 7
2154J and
2155J F005 to F135
All 12 Yes Yes (filtered and gasketed)
(5 to 135 Ampere)
F201 to F480
8
All 12 No No
(201 to 480 Ampere)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Appendix
Fan(s) and Ventilation in Bulletins 2162Q, 2162R, 2163Q and 2163R
2 338
NEMA
System Internal Door Mounted
Enclosure Rating Code Venting
3 Voltage Type Circulating Fan(s) Exhaust Fan(s)
1P3 - 5P0 Yes None Yes
1, 1G
4 8P7 - 072 Yes None Yes
380-415V 1P3 - 022 None Yes None
12 030 Yes (filtered and gasketed) None Yes (filtered and gasketed)
5 037 - 072 Yes (filtered and gasketed) Yes Yes (filtered and gasketed)
1P1 - 3P4 Yes None None
1, 1G 5P0 Yes None Yes [1]
Bulletins 8P0 - 065 Yes None Yes
2162Q and 480V 1P1 - 2P1 None None None
2163Q 3P4 - 022 None Yes None
12
027 Yes (filtered and gasketed) None Yes (filtered and gasketed)
034 - 065 Yes (filtered and gasketed) Yes Yes (filtered and gasketed)
1, 1G
3P9 - 052 Yes None Yes [1]
9 600V 0P9 - 1P7 None None None
12 2P7 - 017 None Yes None
022 - 052 Yes (filtered and gasketed) None Yes (filtered and gasketed)
10 1P3 - 5P0 Yes None None
8P7 - 030 Yes None Yes
1, 1G
037 - 056 Yes None Yes
380 - 415V 072 - 300 Yes None Yes
11
1P3 - 043 None Yes None
12 1, 1G
Bulletins 1P1 - 034 None Yes None
2162R and
13 2163R 480V 040 (without reactor) None Yes None
12 040 (with reactor) Yes (filtered and gasketed) Yes Yes (filtered and gasketed)
052 - 065 Yes (filtered and gasketed) Yes Yes (filtered and gasketed)
14 1P7 - 3P9 Yes None None
1, 1G
1P7 - 027 None Yes None
15 600
032 (without reactor) None Yes None
12
032 (with reactor) Yes (filtered and gasketed) Yes Yes (filtered and gasketed)
16 [1] If -14RLX or -14RXL is specified for the 3.9A @ 600V or 5.0A @ 480V unit, the unit door will be supplied with input and exhaust venting.
17
18
19
20

Appendix
Fan(s) and Ventilation in Bulletins 2164Q and 2165Q
339 2
System NEMA
Enclosure Current Rating Venting Internal Door Mounted 3
Voltage (Amperes) Circulating Fan(s) Exhaust Fan(s)
Type
1, 1G 1.1-27 Yes None Yes 4
480 1.1-22 None Yes None
Bulletins 12
27 Yes (filtered and gasketed) None Yes (filtered and gasketed)
2164Q and
1, 1G 0.9-22 Yes None Yes 5
2165Q
600 0.9-17 None Yes None
12
22 Yes (filtered and gasketed) None Yes (filtered and gasketed) 6
Fan(s) and Ventilation in Bulletins 2164R and 2165R 7

340
NEMA
System Current Rating Internal Door Mounted
Voltage Enclosure (Amperes) Venting Circulating Fan(s) Exhaust Fan(s) 8
Type
1, 1G 1.1 - 180 Yes None Yes
1.1 - 40 [1] None Yes None 9
480
Bulletins 77 - 180 Yes (filtered and gasketed) None Yes (filtered and gasketed)
2164R and 10
2165R 1, 1G 1.7 - 144A Yes None Yes
1.7 - 32 [2] None Yes None
600
62 - 144A Yes (filtered and gasketed) None Yes (filtered and gasketed) 11
[1] Door mounted exhaust fan (filtered and gasketed) added when line or load reactor is added to 40A unit.
[2] Door mounted exhaust fan (filtered and gasketed) added when line or load reactor is added to 32A unit.
Fan(s) and Ventilation in Bulletins 2162T and 2163T 12

341
NEMA
System Current Rating Internal Door Mounted
Voltage Enclosure (Amperes) Venting Circulating Fan(s) Exhaust Fan(s) 13
Type
1, 1G 1.4 - 24 Yes None Yes
380-415 1.4 - 2.3 [1] None None [1] None
12
4.0 - 24 None Yes None 14
Bulletins 1, 1G 1.4 - 24 Yes None Yes
2162T and 480 1.4 - 2.3 [1] None None [1] None
2163T 12
4.0 - 24 None Yes None
15
1, 1G 1.7 - 19 Yes None Yes
600 1.7 [2] None None [2] None
12
3.0 - 19 None Yes None 16
[1] When line or load reactors are specified in 2.3A drive unit, an internal circulating fan is added.
[2] When line or load reactors are specified in 1.7A drive unit, an internal circulating fan is added.
17
18
19
20

Appendix
Control Circuit Transformer Rating Chart for Bulletins 2182E, 2182L, 2183E and 2183L
2 343
Power Supply Type
Rack Size Space Factor
3 None, 12P4S1, 12P4S2,
12P4R2 or 12PA72 12P2 12P7 12P4R3 or 12P4R4
1.5 250 VA — — —
4 (1) 4-slot 2.0 250 VA — — —
3.0 250 VA 250 VA — —
(1) 7-slot 2.0 250 VA — — —
5
2.5 250 VA — — —
(1) 8-slot
3.0 250 VA 250 VA — —
(1) 8-slot 6.0, 25” W (1) 250 VA (1) 250VA (1) 500VA —
(2) 8-slot 6.0, 25” W (2) 250 VA (2) 250 VA (2) 500 VA —
(1) 16-slot 6.0, 35” W 250 VA 250 VA 500 VA 500 VA
(2) 16-slot 6.0, 35” W (2) 250 VA (2) 250 VA (2) 500 VA (2) 500 VA
(1) 16-slot 6.0, 40” W 250 VA — 500 VA 500 VA
(2) 16-slot 6.0, 40” W 500 VA — 1 kVA 1 kVA
Seismic Applications
9 Actual CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Center (MCC) samples have been seismically qualified by dynamic
(triaxial multi-frequency testing) seismic tests per IEEE 344 Seismic Test Standards. The results of this MCC
seismic testing demonstrated compliance with the 100% g level of Uniform Building Code 1997 (UBC) Zone 4
10 (the maximum UBC Zone) and 100% g level of the International Building Code 2006 (IBC), i.e., the MCC
structure, the MCC units, the MCC components or electrical functions were not compromised when subjected
to a UBC Zone 4 earthquake or the IBC seismic event. Per the IEEE 344 Standard, the equipment was under
power and operated before, during and after the seismic tests.
To obtain a UBC or IBC seismic withstandability, each individual CENTERLINE 2100 MCC line-up (e.g., both
11 front and back MCCs in “back-to-back” applications) must be mounted on an adequate seismic foundation
and installed per the seismic anchoring requirements as indicated in publication 2100-IN012x-EN-P,
CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers User Manual.
Note: Variable frequency drive units utilizing "rollout" drive configurations are not seismically certified.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Appendix
Power System Configuration Application Information
CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers are suitable for use on 3-phase, 3-wire or 4-wire, Wye connected 2
power systems, rated 600V or less, 50 or 60 hertz, which have a solidly grounded neutral. CENTERLINE 2100
Motor Control Centers may also be used on the following power system configurations, however, some units
and options may not be available: 3
• 3-phase, 3-wire, Wye systems rated 600Y/347V or less, with impedance grounded neutral
• 3-phase, 3-wire, ungrounded Delta systems, rated 600V or less 4
For 3-phase, 3-wire, "corner" grounded, Delta systems, 3-phase, 4-wire, center-tap-grounded, "high-leg", Delta
systems rated 240V, and any other power systems not listed above, the MCCs will be processed on the 5
Engineered delivery program to help ensure proper product configuration.
Note: for more information regarding MCC selection criteria related to power system configurations, see 6
publication 2100-AT003x-EN-P, Power System Considerations for Selection of CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control
Centers.
7
Horizontal Neutral Bus and Neutral Bus Options
Neutral bus and options are only available for 3-phase, 4-wire WYE connected power systems with the neutral
solidly grounded. Neutral bus options may not be selected for any ungrounded system or for any system that 8
is impedance grounded.
If a 4-wire system is selected, a determination needs to be made regarding neutral loads 9

No Neutral loads or neutral loads less than 280 Amp
Option 88NPC is available for 2191M rated 300A, 2192M rated 400A or less, and 2193M with 400A frame or
smaller. 10
For 2191M rated 600A or larger, 2192M rated 600A or larger, and 2193M with 600A frame or larger, horizontal
neutral bus and incoming option -88HN or -88FN must be selected.
NOTE: If complete horizontal neutral is not required, horizontal neutral bus is allowed to be specified for only
the section containing the Bulletin 2191M, 2192M, or 2193M main unit and up to three additional adjacent 11
sections. However, the sections with the neutral bus need to be in their own shipping blocks. If neutral loads
are present, then access to the horizontal neutral bus for neutral load cables is required. At least one neutral
connection plate in the horizontal wireway or one vertical neutral in a 9" vertical wireway is required.
12
Neutral Loads greater than 280 Amp
For 4 wire system with neutral loads greater than 280A, horizontal neutral bus and incoming option -88HN or
-88FN must be selected. In addition, at least one neutral connection plate in the horizontal wireway or one 13
vertical neutral in a 9" vertical wireway is required.
NOTE: If any single neutral load is greater than 280A, the MCC needs to be processed on the Engineered
delivery program to provide an appropriate neutral connection point for the neutral load cable.
14
Any units with fusible disconnect switches
No restrictions for Wye connected systems or ungrounded Delta systems.
15
Any units with circuit breaker disconnects
No restrictions for Wye connected systems or ungrounded Delta systems.
Bulletin 2190 Units and Bulletin 2191 Units with Metering 16

Analog metering units are available for:
3-phase, 3-wire solidly grounded Wye
3-phase, 3-wire ungrounded, closed-Delta 17
Digital metering units are available for:

3-phase, 3-wire solidly grounded Wye 18
3-phase, 4-wire solidly grounded Wye
Metering for other systems is available on the Engineered delivery program. 19
20

Appendix
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Index
2122E, Two Speed 2-Winding Starter Unit with Fusible Discon- 2
Numerics nect Switch (TS2W) 49
100% Rating of Main Disconnect Switch or Circuit Breaker 122 2122F, Two Speed 1-Winding Starter Unit with Fusible Discon-
71" High Section 24 nect Switch (TS1W) 50 3
8A Round DeviceNet Cable 220 2123E, Two Speed 2-Winding Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker
A (TS2W) 51 4
ABS 2 2123F, Two Speed 1-Winding Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker
(TS1W) 51
Additional Unit Space on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains
2126E, Two Speed Reversing 2-Winding Starters with Fusible
5
and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 114
American Bureau of Shipping 3 Disconnect Switch (TSR2W) 53
Analog Output Isolation on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor 2126F, Two Speed Reversing 1-Winding Starter Unit with Fusible 6
Drive Units 190 Disconnect Switch (TSR1W) 53
Appendix 221 2126J, Two Speed Reversing in Low Speed Only 2-Winding Start-
Automatic Shutters 28 er Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (TSR2W) 54 7
Auxiliary Contacts on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units 143 2126K, Two Speed Reversing in Low Speed Only 1-Winding Start-
er Unit with Fusible Disconnect Switch (TSR1W) 54
Auxiliary Contacts on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor Drive
2127E, Two Speed Reversing 2-Winding Starter Unit with Circuit
8
Units 193
Auxiliary Contacts on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and Breaker (TSR2W) 55
Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 120, 128 2127F, Two Speed Reversing 1-Winding Starter Unit with Circuit 9
Auxiliary Contacts on Marshalling Panels and Programmable Control- Breaker (TSR1W) 55
lers 203 2127J, Two Speed Reversing in Low Speed Only 2-Winding Start-
Auxiliary Contacts on SC-I and PE-I 23 er Unit with Circuit Breaker (TSR2W) 56 10
2127K, Two Speed Reversing in Low Speed Only 1-Winding Start-
B
er Unit with Circuit Breaker (TSR1W) 56
Back-to-Back Section 24
2154H, Combination Soft Starter Motor Controller with Fusible
Blank Unit Door 102 11
Disconnect Switch (SMC-3) 131
Blown Fuse Indicator Lights on Contactors and Starters, Metering,
2154J, Combination Soft Starter Motor Controller with Fusible
Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units
Disconnect Switch (SMC-Flex) 134
115 2155H, Combination Soft Starter Motor Controller with Circuit
Bolt-on Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Branch Breakers for Lighting
Breaker (SMC-3) 132
12
Panels 219
2155J, Combination Soft Starter Motor Controller with Circuit
Bottom Closing Plate 24, 213
Breaker (SMC-Flex) 135 13
Bulletin
2162Q, Combination PowerFlex 70 Variable Frequency AC Drive
2100D Empty Unit Insert with Disconnect Switch 102
(VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 380-480V 150,
2100M Empty Unit Insert with Circuit Breaker 102
151, 152, 153, 154, 155, 156, 157, 158,
2100N Empty Unit Insert without power stabs 102
159 14
2102L, Full Voltage Lighting Contactor Unit with Fusible Discon-
2162R, Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive
nect Switch (FVLC) 36
(VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 380-480VAC 161,
2103L, Full Voltage Lighting Contactor Unit with Circuit Breaker
162, 163, 164, 165, 169, 170 15
(FVLC) 37
2162T, Combination PowerFlex 40 Variable Frequency AC Drive
2106, Full Voltage Reversing Starter Unit with Fusible Disconnect
(VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 380-480VAC 172
Switch (FVR) 39
2106, Space Saving NEMA Full Voltage Reversing Starter Unit
(VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 600VAC 173
16
with Fused Disconnect Switch (FVR) 41
2163R, Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive
2107, Full Voltage Reversing Starter Unit with Circuit Breaker
(VFD) Units with Circuit Breaker, 380-480VAC 166,
(FVR) 39 17
167, 168
2107, Space Saving NEMA Full Voltage Reversing Starter Unit
with Circuit Breaker (FVR) 41
(VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 380-480VAC 174
2112, Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Units with Fusible Dis-
connect Switch (FVNR) 43
2163T, Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive 18
(VFD) Units with Fusible Disconnect, 600VAC 175
2112, Space Saving NEMA Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter
2164Q, Combination PowerFlex 70 Variable Frequency AC Drive
Unit with Fused Disconnect Switch (FVNR) 47 19
(VFD) with Fusible Disconnect and Manual, Isolated By-
2113, Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter Unit with Circuit Break-
pass, 480V 177
er (FVNR) 45
2164Q, Combination PowerFlex 70 Variable Frequency AC Drive 20
2113, Space Saving NEMA Full Voltage Non-Reversing Starter
(VFD) with Fusible Disconnect and Manual, Isolated By-
Unit with Circuit Breaker (FVNR) 47
pass, 600V 178
21
Index
2164R, Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic or Solid State) Circuit Breaker
2 (VFD) with Fusible Disconnect and Manual, Isolated By- Options for Bulletin 2103L 210
pass, 480VAC 182 Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Circuit Breaker Options for Bul-
2164R, Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive letin 2197 211
3 (VFD) with Fusible Disconnect and Manual, Isolated By- Communication Module on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units
pass, 600VAC 183, 185 140
4 2165Q, Combination PowerFlex 70 Variable Frequency AC Drive Communication Modules on Combination Variable Frequency AC Mo-
(VFD) with Circuit Breaker Disconnect and Manual, Iso- tor Drive Units 188
lated Bypass, 480V 179 Conductor Size Conversion Chart 241
5 2165Q, Combination PowerFlex 70 Variable Frequency AC Drive Contactors and Starters
(VFD) with Circuit Breaker Disconnect and Manual, Iso- Catalog Number Explanations 35, 57, 62, 69, 73, 82, 84,
6 lated Bypass, 600V 180 88, 99, 130, 133, 201
2165R, Combination PowerFlex 700 Variable Frequency AC Drive Control Circuit Fuse on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and
(VFD) with Circuit Breaker Disconnect and Manual, Iso- Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 114
7 lated Bypass, 480VAC 184 Control Circuit Lugs on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and
2180E, 2182E, and 2183E, Bulletin 1771 Programmable Controller Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 122
I/O Chassis (PLC) 198 Control Circuit Ring Lugs on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units
8 2180J, 2182J, and 2183J, Bulletin 1746 SLC 500 Programmable 144
Controller (PLC) 199 Control Circuit Spade Lugs on Combination Soft Starter Controller
9 2180L, 2182L, and 2183L, Bulletin 1756 ControlLogix Programma- Units 144
ble Controller (PLC) 200 Control Circuit Transformer on Contactors and Starters, Metering,
2181B, Marshalling Panel 202 Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units
10 2190, Metering Compartments (METER) 58, 60 110, 126
2191M and 2191F, Lug Compartments—Provisions for Basic Sec- Control Circuit Transformer Rating Chart 246
tions/Incoming Lines (MLUG) and Outgoing Feeders Control Circuit Wiring on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units
(FLUG) 63 144
11 2191M, Lug Compartments/Incoming Line—Dimensions 67, 68 Control Circuit Wiring on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor
2191M, Lug Compartments/Incoming Lines Metering Options 66 Drive Units 193
2192F, Fusible Disconnect Switch—Feeders (FDS) 70 Control Circuit Wiring on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains
2192M, Fusible Disconnect Switch—Mains (MFDS) 71 and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 122
12 2193F, 3-Pole Feeder Circuit Breaker (FCB) 74, 75, 76 Control Station Housing 216
2193LE, Frame-Mounted Lighting Panel for Bolt-on Branch Circuit Control Station Housing on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units
13 Breakers (LPAN) 83 137
2193M, 3-Pole Main Circuit Breaker (MCB) 77, 78, 79, 80 Control Station Housing on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains
2193PP, Plug-in Panel Board with Main Circuit Breaker (PPAN) 85 and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 107
2195, Control and Lighting Transformer Unit without Disconnect- Control Station Mounting Plate 216
14 ing Means (XFMR) 89, 90 Control Terminal Block on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains
2196, Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Fusible Discon- and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 121
nect Switch (XFMR) 91, 92, 93, 94 Control Voltage Type
15 2197, Control and Lighting Transformer Unit with Circuit Breaker for Bulletins 2102, 2103, 2106, 2107, 2112, 2113, 2122, 2123,
(XFMR) 95, 96, 97, 98 2126, and 2127 205
Bus Bracing 26 for Bulletins 2154 and 2155 205
Bus Stab Isolation Kit 214 for Bulletins 2162, 2163, 2164, and 2165 206
16
C Control Wire Markers on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units
Capacitor Sizes 240 144
Cardholder for Unit Doors 216 Control Wire Markers on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor
17 CE Marking 2 Drive Units 193
Circuit Breaker Characteristics for Bulletin 2193F and 2193M Units Control Wire Markers on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains
234 and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 122,
18 Circuit Breaker Interrupting Capacity Ratings 234 204
Circuit Breaker on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and Feed- ControlLogix Communication Modules on Marshalling Panels and Pro-
ers, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 122 grammable Controllers 203
19 Circuit Breaker Suffix Letter Designation 9 ControlLogix Processor on Marshalling Panels and Programmable Con-
Circuit Breaker Type trollers 203
20 for Bulletins 2107, 2113, 2123, and 2127 211 ControlLogix Programming Cable on Marshalling Panels and Program-
for Bulletins 2163, and 2165 212 mable Controllers 203
for Horsepower and kW Rated Units for Bulletins 2155 212 ControlNet to DeviceNet Linking Device 104
21
Index
ControlNet T-Tap on Marshalling Panels and Programmable Control- Export Packing Below Deck on Marshalling Panels and Programmable
lers 203 Controllers 204 2
Corner Section 24 Extended Reset Button Kit 217
CSA Marking 1 External Auxiliary Contact 217
C-UL Marking 1 External Auxiliary Contact Adapter Kits 217, 218 3
Current Sensors on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and External Auxiliary Contact Kits 218
Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 121 External DeviceNet Connector Unit 104 4
Current Transducers on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and External DeviceNet Connector with 120VAC Receptacle on Contactors
Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 121 and Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Pan-
D els, and Transformer Units 123 5
Delivery Programs 3 External Mounting Channel Kits 213
DeviceNet F 6
Cabling Options 29 Fan(s) and Ventilation
Hardware and Kits 220 in Bulletins 2154H, 2154J, 2155H, and 2155J 243
Miscellaneous Units 104 in Bulletins 2162Q, 2162R, 2163Q, and 2163R 244 7
Products 3 in Bulletins 2162T and 2163T 245
DeviceNet Communication Module on Combination Soft Starter Con- in Bulletins 2164Q and 2165Q 245
8
troller Units 140 in Bulletins 2164R and 2165R 245
DeviceNet Communication Modules on Combination Variable Frequen- Field-Mounted Equipment Units 102
cy AC Motor Drive Units 188 Filters for Door Vents on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and 9
DeviceNet Connection Cover Kit 220 Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 114
DeviceNet Field Support Kit 220 Footnotes 1
DeviceNet Scanner Module on Marshalling Panels and Programmable French Legend Plates on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units 10
Controllers 203 144
DeviceNet Scanner Modules 220 French Legend Plates on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor
DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary on Combination Soft Starter Controller Drive Units 193
Units 140 French Legend Plates on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and 11
DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 123
Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units Full Load Currents 232, 233
114 Fuse Clip Designator Selection, and Power Fuse Selection
12
DeviceNet Terminating Resistors 220 for Bulletins 2100D, 2102L, 2192F, and 2192M 208
DeviceNet Trunk Line Cable 220 for Bulletins 2106, 2112, 2122, 2126, and 2127 207
DeviceNet Unit Cable 220 G 13
Dimensions 221 Gasketing Kit 213
Documentation 3 Ground Detection Lights on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains
Door Hardware Kit 216 and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 116
Door Hinge Kit 216 Ground Fault Protection on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains 14
Door, Blank 102 and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 116
Drip Hood 24, 213 Ground Lug, Outgoing 28
15
E Grounded Unit Door on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units 142
E3 Solid-State Overload Relay on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Grounded Unit Door on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor
Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units Drive Units 193
113 Grounded Unit Door on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and 16
Elapsed Time Meter on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 116
Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 116 Grounded Unit Door on Marshalling Panels and Programmable Control-
Empty Unit Insert 102 lers 203
Empty Unit Insert with Disconnecting Means 102 Grounded Unit Door on SC-I and PE-I 23
17
End Closing Plate 213 H
Ethernet to DeviceNet Linking Device 104 Hardware and Kits
Export Packing Below Deck for Sections on SC-I and PE-I 23 8A Round DeviceNet Cable 220 18
Export Packing Below Deck on Combination Soft Starter Controller Bolt-on Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Branch Breakers for
Units 144 Lighting Panels 219 19
Export Packing Below Deck on Combination Variable Frequency AC Bottom Closing Plate 213
Motor Drive Units 193 Bus Stab Isolation Kit 214
Export Packing Below Deck on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Cardholder for Unit Doors 216 20
Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units Control Station Housing 216
123 Control Station Mounting Plate 216
21
Index
DeviceNet Connection Cover Kit 220 Human Interface Module (HIM) on Combination Variable Frequency AC
2 DeviceNet Field Support Kit 220 Motor Drive Units 189
DeviceNet Scanner Modules 220 I
DeviceNet Terminating Resistors 220 I/O Control Voltage on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor
3 DeviceNet Trunk Line Cable 220 Drive Units 190
DeviceNet Unit Cable 220 IEC 60439 2
4 Door Hardware Kit 216 Incoming Line Lug Barriers 215
Door Hinge Kit 216 Incoming Lug Compartments 63
Drip Hood 213 Incoming Neutral Bus on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and
5 End Closing Plate 213 Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 117
Extended Reset Button Kit 217 Incoming Neutral Connection Plate on Contactors and Starters, Meter-
6 External Auxiliary Contact 217 ing, Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer
External Auxiliary Contact Adapter Kits 217, 218 Units 117
External Auxiliary Contact Kits 218 IntelliCENTER Technology
7 External Mounting Channel Kits 213 Motor Control Center 29
Gasketing Kit 213 Software 30
Horizontal Ground Bus Splice Kit 214 Interposing Relay on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and
8 Horizontal Power Bus Splice Kit 214 Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 118
Horizontal Wireway Cover 213 Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Branch Breakers for Panel Board
9 Incoming Line Lug Barriers 215 Plug-In Unit 219
Inverse Time (Thermal Magnetic) Branch Breakers for Panel Board ISO 9001 Certification 1
Plug-In Unit 219 Isolation Contactor on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units 141
10 Line Terminal Shield 217 K
Lugs for Incoming Line Provisions 215 Key-interlock Mounting Provision on Contactors and Starters, Meter-
MCC DeviceNet Terminating Resistor Kit 220 ing, Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer
Neutral Connection Plate Kit 214 Units 121
11 NO-OX-ID 214 kW Ratings for Bulletins 2154, 2155, 2162, 2163, 2164, and 2165 206
Plug-In Unit Retrofit Kit 217 kW to Catalog Hp Code Conversion 239
Pull-Apart Terminal Bocks 217
L
Pullbox 213
12 Round DeviceNet Cable with Connectors 220
Light and Door Switch on Marshalling Panels and Programmable Con-
trollers 204
Space Heater Kit 213
Line or Load Reactors on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor
13 Stainless Steel Nameplate Screws 216
Drive Units 191
Top Horizontal Wireway Pan 213
Line Reactor Space Factor Adders 192, 193
Touch-Up Paint 214
Line Terminal Shield 217
Unit Door Grounding Kit 217
Lug Compartments 64, 65, 83, 90
14 Unit Door Nameplates 216
Lugs for Incoming Line Provisions 215
Unit Insert Extension Kit 217
Unit Isolating Barriers 214 M
15 Unit Operating Handle Extender 213 Manual Shutters 28
Unit Support Pan 216 Master Nameplates 216
Vertical Ground Bus Kit 214 MCC DeviceNet Terminating Resistor Kit 220
Vertical Unit Load Ground Bus Kit 214 Meter Types 59, 60
16 Vertical Wireway Tie Bar 214 Metric Conversion Table 242
Wiring Diagram Holder Kit 214 Miscellaneous DeviceNet Units 104
Heater Element Selection 227 Miscellaneous Units 99, 105
17 Heater Element Selection Tables 229, 232 Motor Applications 3
Horizontal Ground Bus 26 N
Horizontal Ground Bus Splice Kit 214 NEMA
18 Horizontal Power Bus on Marshalling Panels and Programmable Con- Class 2
trollers 204 Defined 2
Horizontal Power Bus Splice Kit 214 Enclosure Type Descriptions 2
19 Horizontal Wireway Cover 213 Type 1 2
Horsepower Ratings 241 Type 1 with gasket 2
Horsepower Ratings for All Bulletins 206 Type 12 2
20 Type 3R 2
Human Interface Module (HIM) on Combination Soft Starter Controller
Units 140 Type 4 2
21 NEMA/IEC Enclosure Comparison 2

Index
Network built into MCC Sections 29 Selector Switch 187
Neutral Bus 25 Spanish Legend Plates 193 2
Neutral Connection Plate 25 Stainless Steel Nameplate Screws 193
Neutral Connection Plate Kit 214 T-Handle 193
Neutral Connection Plate Unit 105 Unit Door Nameplates 193 3
NO-OX-ID 214 Unit Ground Stab 193
O Unit Load Connector 193 4
O/L Contact on Left Side of Circuit on Contactors and Starters, Meter- Options for Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders,
ing, Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units
100% Rating of Main Disconnect Switch or Circuit Breaker 122 5
Units 114
Options for Combination Soft Starter Controller Units 480V and 600V Power Factor Correction Capacitors 115
Add Isolation Contactor 141 Additional Unit Space 114 6
Auxiliary Contacts 143 Auxiliary Contacts 120
Communication Module 140 Blown Fuse Indicator Lights 115
Control Circuit Ring Lugs 144 Control Circuit Fuse 114 7
Control Circuit Spade Lugs 144 Control Circuit Lugs 122
Control Circuit Wiring 144 Control Circuit Transformer 110
Control Circuit Wiring 122 8
Control Station Housing 137
Control Wire Markers 144 Control Station Housing 107
DeviceNet Communication Module 140 Control Terminal Block 121 9
DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary 140 Control Wire Markers 122, 204
Export Packing Below Deck 144 Current Sensors 121
French Legend Plates 144 Current Transducers 121 10
Ground Fault Current Transformer 140 DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary 114
Grounded Unit Door 142 E3 Electronic Overload Relay 113
High Interrupting Capacity Fuses 140 Elapsed Time Meter 116
Human Interface Module (HIM) 140 Export Packing Below Deck 123 11
Omit Wiring 142 External DeviceNet Connector with 120VAC Receptacle 123
Pilot Lights 138 Filters for Door Vents 114
Protective Modules 139 French Legend Plates 123
Ground Detection Lights 116 12
Push Buttons 137
Selector Switch 137 Ground Fault Protection 116
Shunt Trip 144 Grounded Unit Door 116 13
Spanish Legend Plates 144 Incoming Neutral Bus 117
Stainless Steel Nameplate Screws 144 Incoming Neutral Connection Plate 117
Surge Suppressor 142 Interposing Relay 118
T-Handle 144 Key-interlock Mounting Provision 121 14
Unit Door Nameplates 144 O/L Contact on Left Side of Circuit 114
Unit Ground Stab 142 Omission of Circuit Breaker 122
Unit Load Connector 142 Omission of Power Terminal Blocks 121 15
Unwired Control Relay 142 Omit Wiring 114
Options for Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor Drive Units Overload Relay Auxiliary Contact (Eutectic Alloy) 114
Analog Output Isolation 190 Overload Relay Heater Elements 123
Push Buttons 107 16
Auxiliary Contacts 193
Communication Modules 188 Push Buttons and Selector Switch 107
Control Circuit Wiring 193 Selector Switch 107
Control Wire Markers 193 Shunt Trip 122 17
DeviceNet Communication Modules 188 Spanish Legend Plates 123
Export Packing Below Deck 193 Stainless Steel Nameplate Screws 123
French Legend Plates 193 Surge Suppressor 114 18
Grounded Unit Door 193 T-Handle 121
Human Interface Module (HIM) 189 Thermistor Protection Relay 116
I/O Control Voltage 190 Unit Ammeter 116 19
Line or Load Reactors 191 Unit Door Nameplates 123
Pilot Lights 187 Unit Ground Stab 116
20
Push Buttons 187 Unit Load Connector 116
Push Buttons and Selector Switch 187 Unwired Control Relay 119
Unwired Pull-Apart Terminal Blocks 123 21
Index
Unwired Timer Auxiliary 116 Overload Relay Heater Elements on Contactors and Starters, Metering,
2 Options for Marshalling Panels and Programmable Controllers Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units
Auxiliary Contacts 203 123
ControlLogix Communication Modules 203 P
3 ControlLogix Processor 203 Parts Illustrations
ControlLogix Programming Cable 203 Typical 15" Deep Section Construction 11
4 ControlNet T-Tap 203 Pilot Lights on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units 138
DeviceNet Scanner Module 203 Pilot Lights on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor Drive Units
Export Packing Below Deck 204 187
5 Grounded Unit Door 203 Pilot Lights on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders,
Light and Door Switch 204 Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 125
6 Omit Horizontal Power Bus 204 Plug-In Unit Retrofit Kit 217
Power Supply 203 Power Factor Correction Capacitors on Contactors and Starters, Meter-
Stainless Steel Nameplate Screws 204 ing, Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer
7 Terminal Blocks 204 Units 115
T-Handle 204 Power Supply on Marshalling Panels and Programmable Controllers
Unit Door Nameplates 204 203
8 Unit Ground Stab 203 Power System 247
Options for SC-I and PE-I Sections Power Terminal Blocks on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains
9 Auxiliary Contacts 23 and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 121
Export Packing Below Deck for Sections 23 Primary Voltage Code for Bulletins 2195, 2196, and 2197 205
Grounded Unit Door 23 Protective Caps 28
10 Shunt Trip 23 Protective Modules on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units 139
T-Handle 23 Publication Overview 1
Options for Space Saving NEMA Starter Units Pull-Apart Terminal Bocks 217
Additional Unit Space 127 Pullbox 213
11 Auxiliary Contacts 128 Push Buttons and Selector Switch on Contactors and Starters, Meter-
Control Circuit Fuse 127 ing, Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer
Control Circuit Transformer 126 Units 107
Control Wire Markers 128 Push Buttons on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units 137
12 DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary 126 Push Buttons on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor Drive Units
E1 Plus Electronic Overload Relay 126 187
13 E3 Electronic Overload Relay 126 Push Buttons on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and Feed-
Elapsed Time Meter 127 ers, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 107
Export Packing Below Deck 128 R
French Legend Plates 128 Round DeviceNet Cable with Connectors 220
14 Grounded Unit Door 127
S
Omit Wiring 127
Section Modification
Pilot Lights 125
15 SC and PE-I 23
Push Buttons 125
SC-II and PE-II 24, 25, 26, 27, 28
Push Buttons and Selector Switch 125
Seismic Applications 3, 246
Selector Switch 125
Selector Switch on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units 137
Spanish Legend Plates 128
16 Stainless Steel Nameplate Screws 128
Selector Switch on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor Drive
Units 187
Surge Suppressor 127
Selector Switch on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and
T-Handles 128
17 Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 107
Unit Door Nameplate 128
Serial Number Information 5
Unit Ground Stab 127
Series Letter Information 5
Unit Load Connector 127
Service and Storage Conditions, 3
18 Unwired Control Relay 127
Short Circuit Withstand Ratings for Combination Circuit Breaker Units
Outgoing Lug Compartments 63
236
Overload Relay Auxiliary Contact (Eutectic Alloy) on Contactors and
19 Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels,
Short Circuit Withstand Ratings for Combination Fusible Disconnect
Units 235
and Transformer Units 114
Short Circuit Withstand Ratings for Combination Soft Starter Controller
Overload Relay Class Designations 227
20 Units (SMCs) 237
Short Circuit Withstand Ratings for Combination Variable Frequency
AC Motor Drive Units 238
21
Index
Short Circuit Withstand Ratings for Programmable Controllers 238 Unit Door Nameplates on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units
Shunt Trip on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units 144 144 2
Shunt Trip on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders, Unit Door Nameplates on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor
Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 122 Drive Units 193
Shunt Trip on SC-I and PE-I 23 Unit Door Nameplates on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains 3
Shutters 28 and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 123
Smoke Detector Unit 105 Unit Door Nameplates on Marshalling Panels and Programmable Con- 4
Soft Starter Controller (SMC) Units 129 trollers 204
Software, IntelliCENTER 30 Unit Ground Stab on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units 142
Space Heater Factory Installed in MCC 28 Unit Ground Stab on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor Drive 5
Space Heater Kit 213 Units 193
Space Saving NEMA Bulletin 2106 and 2107, Full Voltage Reversing Unit Ground Stab on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and 6
Starters (FVR) 40 Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 116
Space Saving NEMA Bulletin 2112 and 2113, Full Voltage Non-Revers- Unit Ground Stab on Marshalling Panels and Programmable Controllers
ing Starters (FVNR) 46 203 7
Stainless Steel Nameplate Screws 216 Unit Insert Extension Kit 217
Stainless Steel Nameplate Screws on Combination Soft Starter Con- Unit Insert, Empty 102
troller Units 144 Unit Isolating Barriers 28, 214 8
Stainless Steel Nameplate Screws on Combination Variable Frequency Unit Load Connector on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units 142
AC Motor Drive Units 193 Unit Load Connector on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor 9
Stainless Steel Nameplate Screws on Contactors and Starters, Meter- Drive Units 193
ing, Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Unit Load Connector on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and
Units 123 Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 116 10
Stainless Steel Nameplate Screws on Marshalling Panels and Pro- Unit Operating Handle Extender 213
grammable Controllers 204 Unit Support Pan 216
Storage Conditions 1 Units and Sections
Suffix Letter Designation Series Lettering 8 11
Circuit Breaker 9 Unwired Control Relay on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units
Surge Protective Device Unit 105 142
Surge Suppressor on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units 142 Unwired Control Relay on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains
Surge Suppressor on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 119 12
Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 114 Unwired Pull-Apart Terminal Blocks on Contactors and Starters, Me-
T tering, Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transform- 13
Terminal Blocks on Marshalling Panels and Programmable Controllers er Units 123
204 Unwired Timer Auxiliary on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains
T-Handle 28 and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 116
T-Handle on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units 144 V 14
T-Handle on Combination Variable Frequency AC Motor Drive Units Vertical Ground Bus 26
193 Vertical Ground Bus Kit 214
T-Handle on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders, Vertical Section Catalog Numbers 15
Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 121 Configuring 23
T-Handle on Marshalling Panels and Programmable Controllers 204 Vertical Sections 11
T-Handle on SC-I and PE-I 23 Catalog Number Explanations 12
16
Thermistor Protection Relay on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Vertical Unit Load Ground Bus 26
Mains and Feeders, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units Vertical Unit Load Ground Bus Kit 214
116 Vertical Wireway Tie Bar 214
Top Horizontal Wireway Pan 213 W 17
Touch-Up Paint 214 Weights of CENTERLINE Motor Control Center Sections 226
Trip Current for Bulletin 2103L 209 Wire Markers, Control 122, 204
Type 2 Protection 3 Wiring Class 2 18
U Wiring Diagram Holder Kit 214
UL/cUL/CSA Marking 1 Wiring on Combination Soft Starter Controller Units 142
19
Unit Ammeter on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and Feed- Wiring on Contactors and Starters, Metering, Mains and Feeders,
ers, Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 116 Lighting and Power Panels, and Transformer Units 114
Unit Door Grounding Kit 217 Wiring Type 2 20
Unit Door Nameplates 216
21
Index
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
CATALOG
• CENTERLINE® 2100
Motor Control Centers
CENTERLINE®, CenterONE®, ControlLogix®, DeviceLogix™, IntelliCENTER®, PowerFlex®, Product Selection Toolbox™, Rockwell Automation®,
RSView®, SMC™, SMC™ 3, SMC™ Dialog Plus, SMC™ Flex, Powermonitor™, ArcShield™, Allen-Bradley® are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Publication 2100-CA001F-EN-P – August 2008 Copyright ©2008 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Printed in USA.
Supersedes Publication 2100-CA001E-EN-P – August 2007

2100 Ca001 - en P

Cargado por

Información del documento

Título original

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

2100 Ca001 - en P

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS

Bulletin Page Bulletin Page Bulletin Page Bulletin Page

Vertical Sections and IntelliCENTER® Technology 2

Contactor and Starter Units 4

Main and Feeder Units 6

Lighting and Power Panel Units 7

Combination Soft Starter (SMC) Units 12

Variable Frequency AC Motor Drive Units 14

Programmable Controller Units and Marshalling Panels 16

Hardware and Kits 19

2 Vertical Sections and IntelliCENTER® Technology

4 Contactor and Starter Units

6 Main and Feeder Units

7 Lighting and Power Panel Units

12 Combination Soft Starter (SMC) Units

14 Variable Frequency AC Motor Drive Units

16 Programmable Controller Units and Marshalling Panels

19 Hardware and Kits

5 B [1] All Changed terminal blocks November 1976

Each vertical section has a nameplate (see the figure below)

Unit Label Data

Series E-J [5],[8] 1.0 or larger F-L [5] 9 — — — — — — —

Series E-J [8] 1.0 or larger F-L [5] 9 — — — — — — —

Top horizontal wireway pan

Left hand top end closing plate

Right hand unit support assembly

Bus splice access cover

Horizontal power bus

Left hand center end closing plate

Vertical to horizontal bus

Vertical bus covers

Vertical wireway door

Unit support pan

Left hand side plate assembly

Vertical Wireway Sealing Strap

Discount Schedule A6 For Options, Modifications and Accessories, see pages 23 11

12 For Options, Modifications and Accessories, see pages 23 Discount Schedule A6

Discount Schedule A6 For Options, Modifications and Accessories, see pages 23 13

Section Depth 2 20” cabinet depth

14 For Options, Modifications and Accessories, see pages 23 Discount Schedule A6

ABA ACA 600A 1.0

ABG ACG 1200A 2.0

Discount Schedule A6 For Options, Modifications and Accessories, see pages 23 15

16 For Options, Modifications and Accessories, see pages 23 Discount Schedule A6

Discount Schedule A6 For Options, Modifications and Accessories, see pages 23 17

Section NEMA Type 1 NEMA Type 12

18 For Options, Modifications and Accessories, see pages 23 Discount Schedule A6

Section Disconnect NEMA Type 1 NEMA Type 12

Discount Schedule A6 For Options, Modifications and Accessories, see pages 23 19

Working Section Disconnect NEMA Type 1 NEMA Type 12

20 For Options, Modifications and Accessories, see pages 23 Discount Schedule A6

Working Section Disconnect NEMA Type 1 NEMA Type 12

Discount Schedule A6 For Options, Modifications and Accessories, see pages 23 21

22 For Options, Modifications and Accessories, see pages 23 Discount Schedule A6

Option 2100-E 2100-F Vertical 2100-G Vertical Delivery

Tables for Configuring Vertical Section Catalog Numbers

Fuse Clip Designator 22 Trip Current 23

* Refer to page 234 for circuit breaker interrupting capacity ratings.

Half-Rated Full-Rated Main Power Delivery

3 Section Features/Modifications, continued Delivery

NO-OX-ID® NO-OX-ID compound on bus

Space heater with thermostat in each section

Power and Control Short Circuit Rating Label